SW570-F0-MMO-A70
0640-LP-102-7699
Rev 00
TECHNICAL MANUAL
FOR
SURFACE MINE COUNTERMEASURES,
AN/SLQ-37(V)3 AND AN/SLQ-38;
MINESWEEPING SYSTEMS,
MCM CLASS SHIPS; SYSTEM MANUAL;
ORGANIZATIONAL LEVEL
(COAXIAL CABLE SET)
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT C: Distribution limited to U. S. Government Agencies and
their contractors; administrative/operational use; 01 July 2004. Other requests for this
document must be referred to Naval Sea Systems Command (SEA 043).
WARNING: This document contains technical data whose export is restricted by the Arms
Export Control Act (Title 22, U.S.C. Sec 2751, et seq) or the Export Administration Act of
1979, as amended (Title 50, U.S.C. App 2401 et seq). Violations of these export laws are
subject to severe criminal penalties. Disseminate in accordance with provisions of DOD
Directive 5230.25.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE: Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or
reconstruction of the document.
PUBLISHED BY DIRECTION OF COMMANDER, NAVAL SEA SYSTEMS COMMAND
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
0640-LP-102-7699
Rev 00
TECHNICAL MANUAL
FOR
SURFACE MINE COUNTERMEASURES,
AN/SLQ-37(V)3 AND AN/SLQ-38;
MINESWEEPING SYSTEMS,
MCM CLASS SHIPS; SYSTEM MANUAL;
ORGANIZATIONAL LEVEL
(COAXIAL CABLE SET)
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT C: Distribution limited to U. S. Government Agencies and
their contractors; administrative/operational use; 01 July 2004. Other requests for this
document must be referred to Naval Sea Systems Command (SEA 043).
WARNING: This document contains technical data whose export is restricted by the Arms
Export Control Act (Title 22, U.S.C. Sec 2751, et seq) or the Export Administration Act of
1979, as amended (Title 50, U.S.C. App 2401 et seq). Violations of these export laws are
subject to severe criminal penalties. Disseminate in accordance with provisions of DOD
Directive 5230.25.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE: Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or
reconstruction of the document.
PUBLISHED BY DIRECTION OF COMMANDER, NAVAL SEA SYSTEMS COMMAND
01 JULY 2004
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES.
Note: The portion of the text affected by the changes is indicated by a
vertical line in the outer margins of the page. Changes to
illustrations are indicated by miniature pointing hands. Changes
to diagrams are indicated by shaded areas.
Date of issue for original pages are:
Original
0
01 July 2004
TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES IN THIS PUBLICATION IS 984 CONSISTING OF THE
FOLLOWING:
Page No.
*Change No.
Page No.
Title/A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4D-2A - 4D-2Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
Change Record-1/(Change Record-2 blank) . 0
4D-3A - 4D-3Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
Foreword-1/(Foreword-2 blank) . . . . . . . . 0
4D-4A - 4D-4AA/(4D-4AB blank). . . . . . . . 0
i - iii/(iv blank) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4D-5A - 4D-5AF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
v - xix/(xx blank) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4E-1A - 4E-1AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
xxi - xxvi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4E-2A - 4E-2AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-1 - 1-99/(1-100 blank) . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4E-3A - 4E-3AL/(4E-3AM blank) . . . . . . . . 0
2-1 - 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4E-4A - 4E-4AL/(4E-4AM blank) . . . . . . . . 0
3-1 - 3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4E-5A - 4E-5AL/(4E-5AM blank) . . . . . . . . 0
4-1 - 4-37/(4-38 blank) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4E-6A - 4E-6AL/(4E-6AM blank) . . . . . . . . 0
4A-1A - 4A-1AB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4E-7A - 4E-7AQ/(4E-7AR blank). . . . . . . . 0
4A-2A - 4A-2L/(4A-2M blank) . . . . . . . . . 0
4E-8A - 4E-8AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4A-3A - 4A-3H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4E-9A - 4E-9AR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4A-4A - 4A-4AA/(4A-4AB blank) . . . . . . . . 0
4E-10A - 4E-10AQ/(4E-10AR blank). . . . . . 0
4A-5A - 4A-5H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4F-1A - 4F-1H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4A-6A - 4A-6T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4F-2A - 4F-2L/(4F-2M blank) . . . . . . . . . 0
4B-1A - 4B-1U/(4B-1V blank) . . . . . . . . . 0
4F-3A - 4F-3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4B-2A - 4B-2T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4F-4A - 4F-4D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4B-3A - 4B-3P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-1 - 5-25/(5-26 blank) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4B-4A - 4B-4R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
6-1 - 6-7/(6-8 blank) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4C-1A - 4C-1T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
7-1 - 7-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4C-2A - 4C-2M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
8-1/(8-2 blank) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4C-3A - 4C-3M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
9-1 - 9-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4D-1A - 4D-1T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
Glossary-1 - Glossary-9/(Glossary-10 blank) . 0
*Zero in this column indicates an original page.
A
*Change No.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
CHANGE RECORD
CHANGE NO.
CHANGE DATE
ENTERED BY
DATE
*List each advance change notice (ACN) and formal change as received. When an ACN is canceled by a
formal change, cross out the ACN.
Change Record-1/(Change Record-2 blank)
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
FOREWORD
This manual describes the AN/SLQ-37(V)3 and AN/SLQ-38 Minesweeping Systems as used aboard
Avenger Class (MCM-1) ships.
This manual supersedes SW570-F0-MMO-030 and incorporates data from the rigging, streaming, and
recovery portions of that manual.
Chapters in this manual are arranged in the following order:
Chapter 1 – General Information
Chapter 2 – Safety Precautions
Chapter 3 – Conditions of Readiness
Chapter 4 – Operation
Chapter 5 – Functional Description
Chapter 6 – Scheduled Maintenance
Chapter 7 – Fault Isolation
Chapter 8 – Alignment Procedures
Chapter 9 – Installation
Glossary
Reporting of errors, omissions, inconsistencies, and suggestions for improving this manual is encouraged,
using NAVSEA/SPAWAR Technical Manual Deficiency/ Evaluation Report (TMDER), Form 4160/1 (Rev
7-2003). Submit TMDERs online at web site http://nsdsa.phdnswc.navy.mil or mail to: Commander,
Code 310 TMDER Bldg 1388, NAVSURFWARCENDIV NSDSA, 4363 Missile Way, Port Hueneme, CA
93043-4307. All feedback comments will be thoroughly investigated and originators will be advised of
resulting action.
Distribution of this manual and subsequent changes are automatic to all authorized users. Additional
copies are available from the Defense Distribution Depot Susquehanna Pennsylvania (DDSP), Building
05, 5450 Carlisle Pike, Mechanicsburg, PA 17055-7089, by MILSTRIP. Instructions for ordering by
MILSTRIP are contained in NAVSUP Publication 2002. Ordering additional copies from DDSP will not
change the number of copies users receive on automatic distribution. Address request for change in
distribution to: Commanding Officer, Attn Code A94 Bldg 79, Naval Surface Warfare Center, Panama City,
110 Vernon Avenue, Panama City, FL 32407-7001.
Foreword-1/(Foreword-2 blank)
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chap/Job Sheet/Para
Title
Page
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-1
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2
BACKGROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-3
THREAT DESCRIPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-4
MISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-5
SYSTEM EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-6
CAPABILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-7
FUNCTIONAL RELATIONSHIPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1-8
PHYSICAL ARRANGEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1-9
SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1-10
AN/SLQ-37(V)3 MAGNETIC MINESWEEPING EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
1-11
AN/SLQ-38 MECHANICAL MINESWEEPING EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
1-12
EXPLOSIVE ORDNANCE HANDLERS CERTIFICATION RECORD . . . . . . . . . . 1-86
1-13
SUPPORT EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-88
1-14
NAVIGATIONAL AIDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-88
1-15
REFERENCE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
CHAPTER 2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-1
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-2
SYSTEM SAFETY ISSUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-3
CLEARING MINES FOULED IN GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-4
OPERATIONAL BRIEF AND SAFETY SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-5
MAINTENANCE SAFETY SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-6
HAZARDOUS COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
CHAPTER 3 CONDITIONS OF READINESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-1
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-2
CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
CHAPTER 4 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-1
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-2
PREOPERATIONAL CONDITIONS AND SET UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-3
OPERATING MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-4
NORMAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-5
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-6
STANDARD LOG FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
i
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
Chap/Job Sheet/Para
Title
Page
JOB SHEET 4A-1 RIGGING MULTIPLANE KITES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1A
JOB SHEET 4A-2 SWEEP AND DEPRESSOR WIRE PREPARATION AND MARKING . . . . . 4A-2A
JOB SHEET 4A-3 FLOAT PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-3A
JOB SHEET 4A-4 CUTTER ASSEMBLIES PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4A
JOB SHEET 4A-5 ACOUSTIC POWER CABLE PREPARATION AND RIGGING . . . . . . . . 4A-5A
JOB SHEET 4A-6 MAGNETIC CABLES PREPARATION AND RIGGING . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-6A
JOB SHEET 4B-1 O-TYPE, SINGLE OR DOUBLE SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1A
JOB SHEET 4B-2 SINGLE SHIP DEEP SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-2A
JOB SHEET 4B-3 TEAM DEEP SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-3A
JOB SHEET 4B-4 IMPROVED DEEP-MOORED SWEEP (IDMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-4A
JOB SHEET 4C-1 A MK 2(G) ACOUSTIC SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-1A
JOB SHEET 4C-2 ACOUSTIC DEVICE TB-26 SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-2A
JOB SHEET 4C-3 TB-27 ACOUSTIC SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-3A
JOB SHEET 4D-1 M MK 5(A) MAGNETIC SWEEP (STRAIGHT TAIL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-1A
JOB SHEET 4D-2 M MK 5(A) MAGNETIC SWEEP (CONFIGURATION C) . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-2A
JOB SHEET 4D-3 M MK 6(A) MAGNETIC SWEEP (DIVERTED LOOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-3A
JOB SHEET 4D-4 M MK 6(H) MAGNETIC SWEEP (DIVERTED LOOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-4A
JOB SHEET 4D-5 M MK 7(B) MAGNETIC SWEEP (DOUBLE DIVERTED LOOP). . . . . . . . 4D-5A
JOB SHEET 4E-1 M MK 5(A) TB-26 (DIVERTED) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP . . . . 4E-1A
JOB SHEET 4E-2 M MK 5(A) TB-27 (DIVERTED) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP . . . . 4E-2A
JOB SHEET 4E-3 M MK 6(A) TB-26 (ASTERN) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP . . . . . 4E-3A
JOB SHEET 4E-4 M MK 6(A) TB-27 (ASTERN) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP . . . . . 4E-4A
JOB SHEET 4E-5 M MK 6(H) TB-26 (ASTERN) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP . . . . . 4E-5A
JOB SHEET 4E-6 M MK 6(H) TB-27 (ASTERN) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP . . . . . 4E-6A
JOB SHEET 4E-7 FA2 WITH TB-26 COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-7A
JOB SHEET 4E-8 FA2 WITH TB-27 COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-8A
JOB SHEET 4E-9 FA2A WITH TB-26 COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . 4E-9A
JOB SHEET 4E-10 FA2A WITH TB-27 COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP . . . . . . . . . 4E-10A
JOB SHEET 4F-1 MK 12 MOD 0, TYPE-3, DAN BUOY (SINGLE AND DOUBLE) . . . . . . . . 4F-1A
JOB SHEET 4F-2 F MK 6 MOD 0, MASTER REFERENCE BUOY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-2A
JOB SHEET 4F-3 SONAR CONDITION SHAPE INERT MK 6 MOORED MINE CASE. . . . . . 4F-3A
JOB SHEET 4F-4 SONAR CONDITION SHAPE INERT MK 36 BOTTOM MINE . . . . . . . . . 4F-4A
CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
ii
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
Chap/Job Sheet/Para
Title
Page
5-1
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-2
SYSTEM FUNCTION DIRECTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-3
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
CHAPTER 6 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-1
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-2
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ACTION INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-3
SCHEDULED TEST PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-4
WIRE ROPE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-5
WEDGE STOP MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-6
MAINTENANCE REPORTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
CHAPTER 7 FAULT ISOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-1
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-2
OPERATION-BASED SYMPTOM FAULT DIRECTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-3
FAULT ISOLATION PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-4
SYSTEM FAULT LOGIC DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-5
FAULT LOGIC DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-6
CONTROL FUNCTION DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-7
CONTROL DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-8
DATA FUNCTION DIAGRAMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-9
SIGNAL FLOW DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
CHAPTER 8 ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8-1
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9-1
UTILITIES LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9-2
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9-3
SYSTEM CABLE INTERCONNECTION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9-4
ACTIVE SYSTEM TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
iii/(iv blank)
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure
Title
Page
1-1.
Avenger Class MCM Ship, Typical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2.
MCM Combat System, Major Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-3.
Minesweeping Techniques, Typical (Sheet 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-3.
Minesweeping Techniques, Typical (Sheet 2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-4.
Organization of Minesweeping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-5.
Organization of Influence Minesweeping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-6.
Ship’s Acoustic Noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-7.
XYZ Axis of Steel Hull Ship. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-8.
Distortion of Earth’s Magnetic Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1-9.
Magnetic Minesweeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1-10.
Organization of Mechanical Minesweeping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-11.
Operational Sequence of an Influence Mine, Typical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1-12.
Minesweeping Equipment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1-13.
Pilot House, Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1-14.
Combat Information Center, Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1-15.
Fantail of MCM Ship, Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
1-16.
Single O-Type Moored Minesweep. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1-17.
Double O-Type Moored Minesweeping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1-18.
Single Ship Deep Sweep (SSDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
1-19.
Team Deep Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
1-20.
Improved Deep-Moored Sweep (IDMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
1-21.
A Mk 2(g) Acoustic Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
1-22.
TB-26 Acoustic Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
1-23.
TB-27 Acoustic Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
1-24.
M Mk 5(a) Magnetic Sweep (Straight Tail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
1-25.
M Mk 5(a) Magnetic Sweep (Configuration C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
1-26.
M Mk 6(a) Magnetic Sweep (Diverted Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
1-27.
M Mk 6(h) Magnetic Sweep (Diverted Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
1-28.
M Mk 7(b) Magnetic Sweep (Double Diverted Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
1-29.
M Mk 5(a) TB-26 (Diverted) Combination Influence Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
1-30.
M Mk 5(a) TB-27 (Diverted) Combination Influence Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
v
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Figure
Title
Page
1-31.
M Mk 6(a) TB-26 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
1-32.
M Mk 6(a) TB-27 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
1-33.
M Mk 6(h) TB-26 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
1-34.
M Mk 6(h) TB-27 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
1-35.
FA2 with TB-26 Combination Influence Sweep. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
1-36.
FA2 with TB-27 Combination Influence Sweep. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
1-37.
FA2A with TB-26 Combination Influence Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
1-38.
FA2A with TB-27 Combination Influence Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
1-39.
Automatic Control Unit (ACU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
1-40.
Power Converter Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
1-41.
Dynamic Braking Unit (DBU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
1-42.
Acoustic Power Cable (APC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
1-43.
APC Bulkhead Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
1-44.
Acoustic Device TB-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
1-45.
Acoustic Device TB-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
1-46.
Acoustic Device, A Mk 2(g) (Rattle Bars) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
1-47.
MCM 1 – 8, Magnetic Minesweeping Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
1-48.
MCM 9 – 14, Magnetic Minesweeping Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
1-49.
Magnetic Minesweeping Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
1-50.
Magnetic Cable Terminal Box (Tailbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
1-51.
Coax Heavy Section Connected to Tailbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
1-52.
Coax Cable CA-1453 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
1-53.
Cable Assembly CA-1454 (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
1-54.
Magnetic Minesweeping Cable, K-4 Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
1-55.
Pigtail Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63
1-56.
K-4 Blank and Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63
1-57.
Tow Jumper TJ, Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
1-58.
Minesweeping Winch (MCM 1 – 8), Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
1-59.
Minesweeping Winch (MCM 9 – 14), Typical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67
1-60.
Line Tension Payout System, Main Display Unit, Typical Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
1-61.
Magnetic Cable Reel (MCM 1 – 8), Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69
1-62.
Acoustic Cable Reel (MCM 1 – 8), Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-70
vi
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Figure
Title
Page
1-63.
Magnetic Cable Reel (MCM 9 – 14), Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
1-64.
Acoustic Cable Reel (MCM 9 – 14), Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72
1-65.
Magnetic and Acoustic Reel Control Station (MCM 9 – 14) (Sheet 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . 1-73
1-65.
Magnetic and Acoustic Reel Control Station (MCM 9 – 14) (Sheet 2 of 2) . . . . . . . . 1-74
1-66.
Multiplane Kite Rigged as an Otter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
1-67.
Depressor Bridle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78
1-68.
Float (Size 0) Rigged for Acoustic Minesweeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79
1-69.
Mk 9 Cutter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81
1-70.
Mk 12 Cutter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
1-71.
Mk 14 Cutter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83
1-72.
Cutter Mk 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85
1-73.
Klein Grip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85
1-74.
Wedge Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86
1-75.
Certification Record Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87
1-76.
Master Reference Buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92
1-77.
Single Dan Buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-93
1-78.
Double Dan Buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-94
1-79.
Acoustic Test Set TS-4144/P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-95
2-1.
Minesweeping Brief (Typical) (Sheet 1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-1.
Minesweeping Brief (Typical) (Sheet 2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-1.
Minesweeping Brief (Typical) (Sheet 3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
3-1.
Communication Paths for Condition 1M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
4-1.
Pre-Operational Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-2.
Streaming Paddles/Wand Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-3.
Recovery Paddles/Wand Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-4.
Vectoring Hand Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-5.
Visual Alignment Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-6.
F Mk 11 Mod 0 Anchored and Buoyed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-7.
Magnetic Mode Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-8.
Acoustic Mode Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-9.
Dual Mode Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-10.
Minesweeping Log Turnbuckle Adjustments (Otter and Depressor Bridles) Form . . . . 4-27
vii
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Figure
Title
Page
4-11.
Minesweeping Log - Minesweeping Record Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4-12.
Minesweeping Log - Dan Buoy/Master Reference Buoys Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4-13.
Minesweeping Log - Magnetic Minesweeping Record Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4-14.
Minesweeping Log - Acoustic Devices TB-27 and TB-26 Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4-15.
Minesweeping Log - Acoustic Power Cable Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4-16.
Minesweeping Log - TS-4144/P Test Result Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4-17.
Minesweeping Order Format (Sheet 1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4-17.
Minesweeping Order Format (Sheet 2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4-17.
Minesweeping Order Format (Sheet 3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4A-1A.
Method of Measuring Depressor Bridle Chain Legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1C
4A-1B.
Positioning of Turnbuckle for Mid-Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1D
4A-1C.
Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single O, Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . 4A-1E
4A-1D.
Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single O, Starboard Configuration . . . . . . 4A-1F
4A-1E.
Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Double O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1G
4A-1F.
Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single Ship Deep Sweep (SSDS)
(Outboard Depressor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1J
4A-1G.
Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single Ship Deep Sweep (SSDS)
(Inboard Depressor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1K
4A-1H.
Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Team Deep Sweep (Outboard Depressor) . 4A-1M
4A-1J.
Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Team Deep Sweep (Inboard Depressor) . . 4A-1N
4A-1K.
Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Improved Deep Moored Sweep (IDMS)
(Outboard Depressor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1P
4A-1L.
Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Improved Deep Moored Sweep (IDMS)
(Inboard Depressor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1R
4A-1M.
Method of Measuring Otter Bridle Chain Legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1T
4A-1N.
Otter Bridle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1U
4A-1P.
Multiplane Kite Rigged as a Starboard Otter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1V
4A-1Q.
Multiplane Kite Rigged as Port Otter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1W
4A-1R.
Position of Turnbuckle for Mid-Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1X
4A-1S.
Sweep Spread for Various Effective Scopes of Sweep Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1AB
4A-2A.
Standard Sweep Wire Markings for Port and Starboard Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-2C
4A-2B.
Port Sweep Wire Marking for FA2 and FA2A Sweep Configurations (Without
Fairings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-2E
viii
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Figure
Title
Page
4A-2C.
Tool, Swaging, Nicropress Mod No. 635 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-2H
4A-2D.
Swaged Soft Eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-2H
4A-2E.
Eye Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-2K
4A-2F.
Top Die and Center Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-2L
4A-3A.
Size 0 and Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-3D
4A-3B.
Size 1 Float Rigged for Streaming TB-27 (Acoustic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-3F
4A-3C.
Size 0 Float Rigged for Streaming TB-26 (Acoustic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-3H
4A-4A.
Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly (Rigged for Starboard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4C
4A-4B.
Cutter Assembly Mk 12 Mod 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4D
4A-4C.
Cutter Mk 12 Cocking Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4F
4A-4D.
Cutter Mk 12 Breech Removing Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4M
4A-4E.
Cutter Mk 14 Punch Positioning Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4N
4A-4F.
Cutter/Elevating Assembly Mk 14 Mod 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4P
4A-4G.
Cutter Mk 14 Trip Pin Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4R
4A-4H.
Cutter Mk 14 Cocking Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4R
4A-4J.
Cutter Mk 14 Breech Removing Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4T
4A-4K.
Safety Pin and Trip Pin Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4V
4A-4L.
Cutter Assembly Mk 15 Mod 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4W
4A-4M.
Wedge Stop Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4X
4A-5A.
Acoustic Power Tow Cable Preparation and Towing Stocking Attachment . . . . . . 4A-5B
4A-5B.
Acoustic Power Tow Cable and Sweep Wire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-5D
4A-6A.
Installing Towing Stockings at Estimated Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-6D
4A-6B.
Installing Magnetic Cable on Cable Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-6F
4A-6C.
Inboard Pigtail (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-6G
4A-6D.
Insulating Boot, Straight End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-6J
4A-6E.
Cable Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-6L
4A-6F.
CA-1453 to Pigtail or CA-1454 Connection (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-6M
4A-6G.
Outboard Pigtail to CA-1454 or CA-1454 to TJ Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-6P
4A-6H.
Preventer Stocking Attachment on CL-Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-6R
4A-6J.
Marking K-4 Electrode for Float Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-6T
4B-1A.
Depressor Wire Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1D
4B-1B.
Multiplane Kite Rigged as a Depressor with Span Pendant Attached . . . . . . . . . 4B-1E
ix
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Figure
Title
Page
4B-1C.
Sweep Wire Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1G
4B-1D.
Connecting Sweep Wire and Cutter Mk 9 to Otter (Starboard Configuration) . . . . . 4B-1H
4B-1E.
Otter in Ready Release Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1J
4B-1F.
Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1K
4B-1G.
Moored Minesweeping Configuration (Single O-Type Gear Streamed to
Starboard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1M
4B-1H.
Moored Minesweeping Configuration (Double O-Type Gear Streamed to Port
and Starboard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1P
4B-1J.
Wedge Stop Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1R
4B-2A.
Connecting Sweep Wire and Cutter Mk 9 to Otter (Starboard Configuration) . . . . . 4B-2C
4B-2B.
Otter in Ready Release Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-2D
4B-2C.
Depressor Wire Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-2F
4B-2D.
Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single Ship Deep Sweep (Outboard
Depressor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-2G
4B-2E.
Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single Ship Deep Sweep (Inboard
Depressor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-2H
4B-2F.
Size 0 Float Rigged (Moored) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-2K
4B-2G.
Single Ship Deep Sweep Depressor Arrangement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-2M
4B-2H.
Wedge Stop Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-2P
4B-2J.
Single Ship Deep Sweep Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-2Q
4B-3A.
Depressor Wire Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-3C
4B-3B.
Rigging Outboard Depressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-3D
4B-3C.
Depressor Arrangement for Deep Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-3J
4B-3D.
Wedge Stop Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-3K
4B-3E.
Team Deep Sweep Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-3M
4B-4A.
IDMS Sweep Wire Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-4C
4B-4B.
Depressor Rigging for IDMS Sweep Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-4E
4B-4C.
Messenger Line with Small Stuff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-4G
4B-4D.
Improved Deep Moored Sweep (IDMS) Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-4J
4B-4E.
Depressor and Sweep Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-4L
4B-4F.
Wedge Stop Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-4N
4C-1A.
Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) Rigged with an Auxiliary Depressor . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-1C
4C-1B.
Size 5 Float Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-1D
x
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Figure
Title
Page
4C-1C.
Connecting Sweep Wire and Cutter Mk 9 to Otter (Starboard Configuration) . . . . . 4C-1F
4C-1D.
Otter in Ready Release Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-1G
4C-1E.
Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-1H
4C-1F.
Attaching Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) Gear to Sweep Wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-1K
4C-1G.
Wedge Stop Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-1M
4C-1H.
A Mk 2(g) Acoustic Sweep Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-1N
4C-2A.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-2C
4C-2B.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-2D
4C-2C.
Streaming Procedure for Acoustic Device TB-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-2F
4C-2D.
Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (Acoustic Sweep, TB-26 Astern) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-2G
4C-2E.
Acoustic Sweep Configuration TB-26 Astern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-2J
4C-3A.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-3C
4C-3B.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-3D
4C-3C.
Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-3E
4C-3D.
Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (Acoustic Sweep, TB-27 Astern) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-3G
4C-3E.
Acoustic Sweep Configuration TB-27 Astern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-3J
4D-1A.
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-1C
4D-1B.
Rigging Position Buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-1D
4D-1C.
Tying Float to K-4 Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-1F
4D-1D.
Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-1G
4D-1E.
K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-1H
4D-1F.
M Mk 5(a) Sweep Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-1N
4D-1G.
K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-1S
4D-1H.
S-Cable Booted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-1T
4D-2A.
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-2C
4D-2B.
Rigging Position Buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-2D
4D-2C.
Outboard Pigtail to CA-1454 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-2E
4D-2D.
Tying Float to K-4 Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-2G
4D-2E.
Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-2H
4D-2F.
Preventer Stocking Attachment on CL-Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-2J
4D-2G.
CL-Cable Drum Preventer Pendant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-2J
4D-2H.
K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-2L
xi
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Figure
Title
Page
4D-2J.
M Mk 5(a) Sweep (Configuration C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-2S
4D-2K.
K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-2V
4D-2L.
S- or CL-Cable Booted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-2X
4D-3A.
End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-3D
4D-3B.
Otter in Ready Release Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-3E
4D-3C.
Equalizing Towing Bridle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-3F
4D-3D.
Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Diversion Chain . . . 4D-3G
4D-3E.
Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-3H
4D-3F.
Tying Float to K-4 Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-3K
4D-3G.
Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-3L
4D-3H.
K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-3M
4D-3J.
Wedge Stop Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-3Q
4D-3K.
M Mk 6(a) Sweep Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-3T
4D-3L.
K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-3X
4D-3M.
S-Cable Booted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-3Z
4D-4A.
End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-4C
4D-4B.
Otter in Ready Release Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-4D
4D-4C.
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-4E
4D-4D.
TJ Jumper Assembly - Diversion Rigging for M Mk 6(h) Sweep Configuration. . . . . 4D-4F
4D-4E.
Rubber Insulating Sleeve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-4G
4D-4F.
Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-4J
4D-4G.
Preventer Stocking Attachment on CL-Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-4L
4D-4H.
CL-Cable Drum Preventer Pendant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-4L
4D-4J.
Wedge Stop Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-4Q
4D-4K.
M Mk 6(h) Sweep Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-4T
4D-4L.
K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-4X
4D-4M.
S- or CL-Cable Booted (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-4Y
4D-5A.
Special Y Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-5D
4D-5B.
CA-1454 to Pigtail Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-5F
4D-5C.
Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Chafing Chain . . . . 4D-5G
4D-5D.
End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Starboard Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-5J
4D-5E.
Otter in Ready Release Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-5K
xii
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Figure
Title
Page
4D-5F.
Equalizing Towing Bridle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-5L
4D-5G.
Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-5N
4D-5H.
Tying Float to K-4 Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-5Q
4D-5J.
Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-5R
4D-5K.
Preventer Stocking Attachment on CL-Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-5T
4D-5L.
CL-Cable Drum Preventer Pendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-5T
4D-5M.
Outboard Long Leg Breakout to Outboard Pigtail Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-5U
4D-5N.
Wedge Stop Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-5X
4D-5P.
M Mk 7(b) Sweep (Double Diverted Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-5AA
4D-5Q.
K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-5AD
4E-1A.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-1D
4E-1B.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-1E
4E-1C.
End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Starboard Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-1F
4E-1D.
Otter in Ready Release Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-1G
4E-1E.
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-1H
4E-1F.
Rigging Position Buoy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-1J
4E-1G.
Special Pendant Assembly and Chain for Diversion Rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-1L
4E-1H.
Streaming Procedure for Acoustic Device TB-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-1M
4E-1J.
Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-1P
4E-1K.
Tying Float to K-4 Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-1R
4E-1L.
Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-1S
4E-1M.
K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-1T
4E-1N.
Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 5 (a) with TB-26) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-1W
4E-1P.
Wedge Stop Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-1Y
4E-1Q.
Sweep Configuration M Mk 5 (a) with Acoustic Device TB-26 Diverted to
Starboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-1AC
4E-1R.
K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-1AJ
4E-1S.
S-Cable Booted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-1AL
4E-2A.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-2D
4E-2B.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-2E
4E-2C.
End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Starboard Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-2F
4E-2D.
Otter in Ready Release Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-2G
xiii
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Figure
Title
Page
4E-2E.
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-2H
4E-2F.
Rigging Position Buoy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-2J
4E-2G.
Special Pendant Assembly and Chain for Diversion Rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-2L
4E-2H.
Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-2M
4E-2J.
Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-2P
4E-2K.
Tying Float to K-4 Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-2Q
4E-2L.
Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-2S
4E-2M.
K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-2T
4E-2N.
Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 6(a) with TB-27). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-2W
4E-2P.
Wedge Stop Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-2Y
4E-2Q.
Sweep Configuration M Mk 5(a) with Acoustic Device TB-27 Diverted to
Starboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-2AC
4E-2R.
K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-2AJ
4E-2S.
S-Cable Booted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-2AL
4E-3A.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-3D
4E-3B.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-3E
4E-3C.
End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-3F
4E-3D.
Otter in Ready Release Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-3G
4E-3E.
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-3H
4E-3F.
Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Diversion Chain . . . . 4E-3K
4E-3G.
Streaming Procedure for Acoustic Device TB-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-3L
4E-3H.
Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-3N
4E-3J.
Tying Float to K-4 Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-3P
4E-3K.
Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-3Q
4E-3L.
Diversion Rigging for M Mk 6(a) Sweep Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-3R
4E-3M.
K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-3T
4E-3N.
Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 6(a) with TB-26). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-3W
4E-3P.
Wedge Stop Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-3X
4E-3Q.
Sweep Configuration M Mk 6(a) with Acoustic Device TB-26 Astern . . . . . . . . . 4E-3AB
4E-3R.
K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-3AH
4E-3S.
S-Cable Booted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-3AK
4E-4A.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-4D
xiv
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Figure
Title
Page
4E-4B.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-4E
4E-4C.
End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-4F
4E-4D.
Otter in Ready Release Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-4G
4E-4E.
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-4H
4E-4F.
Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Diversion Chain . . . . 4E-4K
4E-4G.
Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-4L
4E-4H.
Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-4M
4E-4J.
Tying Float to K-4 Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-4P
4E-4K.
Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-4Q
4E-4L.
Diversion Rigging for M Mk 6(a) Sweep Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-4R
4E-4M.
K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-4S
4E-4N.
Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 6(a) with TB-27) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-4V
4E-4P.
Wedge Stop Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-4X
4E-4Q.
Sweep Configuration M Mk 6(a) with Acoustic Device TB-27 Astern . . . . . . . . . 4E-4AB
4E-4R.
K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-4AH
4E-4S.
S-Cable Booted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-4AK
4E-5A.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-5D
4E-5B.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-5E
4E-5C.
End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-5F
4E-5D.
Otter in Ready Release Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-5G
4E-5E.
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-5H
4E-5F.
TJ Jumper Assembly - Diversion Rigging for M Mk 6(h) Sweep Configuration . . . . . 4E-5J
4E-5G.
Rubber Insulating Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-5K
4E-5H.
Streaming Procedure for Acoustic Device TB-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-5M
4E-5J.
Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-5N
4E-5K.
Preventer Stocking on CL-Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-5Q
4E-5L.
CL-Cable Drum Preventer Pendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-5R
4E-5M.
Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 6(h) with TB-26) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-5U
4E-5N.
Wedge Stop Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-5W
4E-5P.
Sweep Configuration M Mk 6(h) with Acoustic Device TB-26 Astern . . . . . . . . . 4E-5AA
4E-5Q.
K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-5AG
4E-5R.
S- or CL-Cable Booted (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-5AK
xv
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Figure
Title
Page
4E-6A.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-6D
4E-6B.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-6E
4E-6C.
End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-6F
4E-6D.
Otter in Ready Release Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-6G
4E-6E.
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-6H
4E-6F.
TJ Jumper Assembly - Diversion Rigging for M Mk 6(h) (Sweep Configuration) . . . . 4E-6J
4E-6G.
Rubber Insulating Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-6K
4E-6H.
Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-6M
4E-6J.
Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-6N
4E-6K.
Preventer Stocking on CL-Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-6Q
4E-6L.
CL-Cable Drum Preventer Pendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-6R
4E-6M.
Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 6(h) with TB-27) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-6U
4E-6N.
Wedge Stop Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-6W
4E-6P.
Sweep Configuration M Mk 6(h) with Acoustic Device TB-27 Astern . . . . . . . . . 4E-6AA
4E-6Q.
K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-6AG
4E-6R.
S- or CL-Cable Booted (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-6AK
4E-7A.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-7D
4E-7B.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-7E
4E-7C.
Attachment of Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly (Port Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-7F
4E-7D.
Otter in Ready Release Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-7G
4E-7E.
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-7H
4E-7F.
Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Diversion Chain . . . . 4E-7K
4E-7G.
Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-7L
4E-7H.
Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-7N
4E-7J.
Tying Float to K-4 Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-7P
4E-7K.
Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-7Q
4E-7L.
Wedge Stop Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-7S
4E-7M.
Acoustic Power Tow Cable and Sweep Wire Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-7T
4E-7N.
Diversion Towing and Marriage Pendant Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-7U
4E-7P.
Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (FA2 Sweep) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-7Z
4E-7Q.
FA2 with TB-26 Combination Influence Sweep Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-7AE
4E-7R.
K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-7AL
xvi
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Figure
Title
Page
4E-7S.
S-Cable Booted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-7AP
4E-8A.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-8D
4E-8B.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-8E
4E-8C.
End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-8F
4E-8D.
Otter in Ready Release Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-8G
4E-8E.
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-8H
4E-8F.
Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Diversion Chain . . . . 4E-8K
4E-8G.
Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-8L
4E-8H.
Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-8M
4E-8J.
Tying Float to K-4 Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-8P
4E-8K.
Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-8Q
4E-8L.
Wedge Stop Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-8R
4E-8M.
Acoustic Power Tow Cable and Sweep Wire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-8S
4E-8N.
Diversion Towing and Marriage Pendant Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-8T
4E-8P.
Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (FA2 Sweep) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-8Y
4E-8Q.
FA2 with TB-27 Combination Influence Sweep Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-8AD
4E-8R.
K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-8AK
4E-8S.
S-Cable Booted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-8AN
4E-9A.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-9D
4E-9B.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-9E
4E-9C.
End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-9F
4E-9D.
Otter in Ready Release Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-9G
4E-9E.
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-9H
4E-9F.
TJ Jumper Assembly - Diversion Rigging for FA2A Sweep Configuration . . . . . . . 4E-9J
4E-9G.
Rubber Insulating Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-9L
4E-9H.
Streaming Procedure for Acoustic Device TB-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-9M
4E-9J.
Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-9P
4E-9K.
Preventer Stocking on CL-Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-9R
4E-9L.
Cable Drum Preventer Pendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-9R
4E-9M.
Wedge Stop Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-9S
4E-9N.
Acoustic Power Tow Cable and Sweep Wire Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-9T
4E-9P.
Diversion Towing and Marriage Pendant Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-9U
xvii
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Figure
Title
Page
4E-9Q.
Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (FA2A Sweep) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-9X
4E-9R.
FA2A with TB-26 Combination Influence Sweep Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-9AE
4E-9S.
K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-9AL
4E-9T.
S- or CL-Cable Booted (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-9AQ
4E-10A.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-10D
4E-10B.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-10E
4E-10C.
End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-10F
4E-10D.
Otter in Ready Release Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-10G
4E-10E.
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-10H
4E-10F.
TJ Jumper Assembly - Diversion Rigging for FA2A Sweep Configuration . . . . . . 4E-10J
4E-10G.
Rubber Insulating Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-10K
4E-10H.
Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-10M
4E-10J.
Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-10P
4E-10K.
Preventer Stocking on CL-Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-10R
4E-10L.
Cable Drum Preventer Pendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-10R
4E-10M.
Wedge Stop Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-10S
4E-10N.
Acoustic Power Tow Cable and Sweep Wire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-10T
4E-10P.
Diversion Towing and Marriage Pendant Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-10U
4E-10Q.
Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (FA2A Sweep) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-10X
4E-10R.
FA2A with TB-27 Combination Influence Sweep Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-10AD
4E-10S.
K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-10AK
4E-10T.
S- or CL-Cable Booted (Typical). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-10AP
4F-1A.
Rigging Single Dan Buoy, Type 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-1C
4F-1B.
Rigging Double Dan Buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-1H
4F-2A.
Master Reference Buoy F Mk 6 Mod 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-2C
4F-2B.
Lower Tube and Counterweight Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-2D
4F-2C.
Crossarm and Radar Reflector Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-2F
4F-2D.
Upper and Lower Tube Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-2G
4F-2E.
Anchor and Lead Clump Assembly Rigging and Mooring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-2H
4F-2F.
Launching Master Reference Buoy from Starboard Quarter Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-2K
4F-3A.
Mk 6 Moored Mine Case Rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-3C
4F-4A.
Mk 36 Bottom Mine Rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-4C
xviii
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Figure
Title
Page
5-1.
AN/SLQ-37(V) Systems Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-2.
Acoustic Control Unit SG-122A/SLQ-37(V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-3.
Power Converter CV-3846 (PCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-4.
Dynamic Braking Unit MX-10746 (DBU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5-5.
APC Cable Bulkhead Connector (Shown with Cover Removed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-6.
Tow Cable CX-13260 (APC Cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5-7.
Towed Body TB-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5-8.
Acoustic Test Set TS-4144/P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5-9.
Towed Body TB-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5-10.
Gas Turbine Generator Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5-11.
Magnetic Minesweeping Gas Turbine Generator (MMGTG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-12.
MCM 1 – 8, Magnetic Minesweeping Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5-13.
MCM 9 – 14, Magnetic Minesweeping Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5-14.
Main Control Console (MCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5-15.
Magnetic Minesweeping Cable Terminal Box (Tailbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5-16.
Magnetic Minesweeping Cable, General Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5-17.
Magnetic Minesweeping Cable, S or CL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5-18.
Magnetic Minesweeping Cable, TJ Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5-19.
Magnetic Minesweeping Cable, K-4 Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5-20.
Fantail of MCM Ship, Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5-21.
Magnetic Minesweeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
7-1.
ACU Acoustic Mode Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7-2.
ACU Magnetic Mode Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7-3.
ACU Dual Mode Prompts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7-4.
Control Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7-5.
Influence Minesweeping Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7-6.
Ship’s Magnetic Minesweeping Generator Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
9-1.
Influence Minesweeping Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
xix/(xx blank)
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
LIST OF TABLES
Table
Title
Page
1-1.
Mine Countermeasures Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-2.
Mine Threat Countermeasures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-3.
MCM Countermeasures Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1-4.
Major Minesweeping Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1-5.
Types of Minesweeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1-6.
Acoustic Minesweeping Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
1-7.
Magnetic Minesweeping Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
1-8.
Mechanical Minesweeping Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
1-9.
Cartridge Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84
1-10.
Levels of Certification for Explosives Handlers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86
1-11.
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-88
1-12.
Electricians Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89
1-13.
Part of Electricians Tool Kit Stowed Separately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-90
1-14.
Minesweeping Support Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-90
1-15.
Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96
1-16.
Reference Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-97
1-17.
Safe Working Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-99
1-18.
Weight of SMCM Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-99
2-1.
Rigid Hull Inflatable Boat Equipment for SMCM Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-2.
Documents Utilized for Installation of Minesweeping Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
3-1.
Fantail Manning Requirements for Minesweeping Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-2.
CIC Manning Requirements for Minesweeping Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-3.
Pilot House Manning Requirements for Minesweeping Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
4-1.
Pre-Operational Conditions/Systems Readiness Check-Off List, Typical . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-2.
Fantail Duties and Responsibilities During Minesweeping Conditions . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-3.
CIC Duties and Responsibilities During Minesweeping Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-4.
Pilot House Duties and Responsibilities During Minesweeping Conditions . . . . . . . 4-16
4-5.
Magnetic Minesweeping Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-6.
Automatic Acoustic Control Minesweeping Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-7.
Automatic Acoustic Minesweeping - PCU Start/ACU Control Procedures . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-8.
Manual Acoustic Control Minesweeping Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
xxi
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
LIST OF TABLES (Continued)
Table
Title
Page
4-9.
Manual Acoustic Minesweeping - PCU Start/ACU Control Procedure . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-10.
Combination Influence Minesweeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-11.
Combination Influence Minesweeping - PCU Start/ACU Control Procedure . . . . . . . 4-23
4A-1A.
O-Type Float Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1Z
4A-1B.
Wire and Float Pendant Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1AA
4A-2A.
Sweep Wire Painted Band Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-2D
4A-2B.
Depressor Wire Painted Bands Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-2F
4A-2C.
Nicropress Copper Oval Sleeves and Tool Dies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-2J
4A-2D.
Nicropress Stainless Steel Oval Sleeves and Tool Dies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-2J
4A-3A.
Depressor Wire and Float Pendant Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-3C
4A-3B.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-3E
4A-3C.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-3G
4A-4A.
Cutter Spacing - 100 Fathom Sweep Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4G
4A-4B.
Cutter Spacing - 150 Fathom Sweep Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4H
4A-4C.
Cutter Spacing - 200 Fathom Sweep Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4J
4A-4D.
Cutter Spacing - 250 Fathom Sweep Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4K
4A-4E.
Cutter Spacing - 300 Fathom Sweep Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4L
4A-4F.
Cutter Mk 15 Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4Y
4B-1A.
Wire and Float Pendant Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1C
4B-1B.
Sag or Lift of Sweep Wire and Tensions of Sweep and Depressor Wires . . . . . . . 4B-1N
4B-2A.
Depressor Wire and Float Pendant Lengths for Single Ship Deep Sweep . . . . . . . 4B-2D
4B-2B.
Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 Spacing for Single Ship Deep Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-2J
4B-3A.
Team Deep Sweep Cutter Mk 12 Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-3E
4B-4A.
IDMS Modified Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-4D
4C-2A.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-2C
4C-3A.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-3C
4D-3A.
Sweep Wire Tensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-3U
4D-4A.
Sweep Wire Tensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-4S
4D-5A.
Sweep Wire Tensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-5Z
4E-1A.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-1D
4E-2A.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-2D
4E-3A.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-3D
xxii
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
LIST OF TABLES (Continued)
Table
Title
Page
4E-3B.
Sweep Wire Tensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-3AA
4E-4A.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-4D
4E-4B.
Sweep Wire Tensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-4AA
4E-5A.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-5D
4E-5B.
Sweep Wire Tensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-5Z
4E-6A.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-6D
4E-6B.
Sweep Wire Tensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-6Z
4E-7A.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-7D
4E-7B.
Sweep Wire Tensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-7AD
4E-8A.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-8D
4E-8B.
Sweep Wire Tensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-8AC
4E-9A.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-9D
4E-9B.
Sweep Wire Tensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-9AD
4E-10A.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-10D
4E-10B.
Sweep Wire Tensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-10AC
4F-1A.
Type 3 Dan Buoy - Length of Mooring and Approximate Offset for Various
Depths and Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-1D
5-1.
AN/SLQ-37(V) System Function Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
6-1.
Periodicity Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-2.
Example of Shipboard MIPs and MRCs, Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-3.
AN/SLQ-37(V)3 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-4.
Dual Use AN/SLQ-38 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-5.
Ancillary Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-6.
Groove Diameter Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
7-1.
Magnetic Minesweeping Fault Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-2.
Acoustic Minesweeping Fault Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-3.
Combination Influence Minesweeping Fault Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-4.
TB-26 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7-5.
TB-27 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7-6.
Cable Run Sheet, Cable W6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7-7.
Cable Run Sheet, Cable W5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7-8.
Cable Run Sheet, Cable W1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
xxiii
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
LIST OF TABLES (Continued)
Table
Title
Page
7-9.
Cable Run Sheet, Cable W2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
9-1.
Documents Utilized for Installation of Minesweeping Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
xxiv
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
SAFETY SUMMARY
GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
This manual describes physical and chemical processes which may cause injury or death to personnel, or
damage to equipment if not properly followed. This safety summary includes general safety precautions
and instructions that must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance to ensure
personnel safety and protection of equipment. Prior to performing any task, the WARNINGs, CAUTIONs
and NOTEs included in that task shall be reviewed and understood.
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNINGs and CAUTIONs are used in this manual to highlight operating or maintenance procedures,
practices, conditions, or statements which are considered essential to protection of personnel
(WARNING) or equipment (CAUTION). WARNINGs and CAUTIONs immediately precede the step and
procedure to which they apply. WARNINGs and CAUTIONs consist of four parts: heading (WARNING or
CAUTION), a statement of the hazard, minimum precautions, and possible result if disregarded. NOTEs
are used in this manual to highlight operating or maintenance procedures, practices, conditions, or
statements which are not essential to protection of personnel or equipment. NOTEs may precede or
follow the step or procedure, depending upon the information to be highlighted. The headings used and
their definitions are as follows:
Highlights an essential operating or maintenance procedure, practice,
condition, statement, etc., which if not strictly observed, could result in long
term health hazards, injury, or death to personnel.
Highlights an essential operating or maintenance procedure, practice,
condition, statement, etc., which if not strictly observed, could result in
damage to, or destruction of, equipment or loss of mission effectiveness.
NOTE
Highlights an essential operating or maintenance procedure, condition, or
statement.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The following safety precautions shall be observed while performing procedures in this manual.
Dangerous voltages are present at system connectors. Ensure power is OFF prior to connecting or
disconnecting cables.
Do not wear rings, watches, or other metal jewelry while working on electronic equipment.
Some cleaning materials specified herein are flammable and/or toxic. Keep away from open flame or
other ignition sources. Provide adequate ventilation and avoid skin/eye exposure.
Cleaning with compressed air can create airborne particles that may enter eyes or penetrate skin. Wear
goggles. Do not direct compressed air against skin.
xxv
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Under no circumstances should any person service or adjust electrical equipment without the presence of
another person in the immediate vicinity who is capable of securing live circuits and rendering first aid.
Procedures herein often require the handling of hazardous materials. Personnel shall become familiar
with hazards and comply with guidance listed in applicable Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
Personnel shall become familiar with Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) requirements listed in
individual job sheets and shall correctly utilize PPE during completion of those job sheets.
Corrosion of plated metal surfaces produces metallic salts that can irritate the skin and can be toxic if
inhaled or ingested. Ensure the work area is well ventilated. Dispose of contaminated cleaning materials
in accordance with local regulations.
Procedures herein require handling of pyrotechnic and explosive loaded devices. Forces ashore shall
handle these devices in accordance with NAVSEA OP 5. Forces afloat shall handle these devices in
accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.
xxvi
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-1
INTRODUCTION.
1-1.1 This chapter introduces the AN/SLQ-37(V)3 (Influence) and the AN/SLQ-38 (Mechanical)
Minesweeping Systems used aboard U.S. Navy Avenger class Mine Countermeasures (MCM) ships
(Figure 1-1). It discusses general, physical, and functional terms, defines the system and it's relationship
with other minesweeping systems, and illustrates its importance on board MCM ships. To better illustrate
the purpose and use of these Minesweeping Systems, this chapter also addresses underwater mines,
their actuation systems, and their use as a threat.
1-2
BACKGROUND.
1-2.1 MCM is a specialized warfare area designed to ensure that naval and merchant shipping is not
denied access to, or transit of, oceans and waterways throughout the world by mines. MCM comprises all
means used to prevent or reduce the threat of mines to surface ships and submarines. Mines can be
countered by a number of tactical methods including:
a.
Plotting and avoiding by mine watching and ship maneuvers
b.
Detecting and avoiding by minehunting and ship maneuvers
c.
Detecting and destroying by minehunting and neutralization
Figure 1-1. Avenger Class MCM Ship, Typical
1-1
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
d.
Removal from the Operational Area (OA) by minesweeping and neutralization
e.
Ship self-protection by reducing ships’ magnetic and acoustic signatures.
1-2.2 Mine Warfare Commanders are responsible for determining the response to a mine threat.
Commanders assess the threat, available MCM assets, and plan the MCM operation. In order to assess
the mine threat, data is gathered from all available sources. This is accomplished by exploratory
operations, minehunting and mine watching reports, intelligence estimates, and all other means available.
Exploratory operations may begin in accordance with contingency plans while the threat estimate is still in
progress. Risk to the MCM platform is considered along with tactical considerations. Once the threat is
evaluated and a response is formulated, required MCM assets are deployed in the operational
environment to counter the threat. A block diagram depicting the organization of MCM combat systems is
illustrated in Figure 1-2. Techniques employed to counter a mine threat are identified in Table 1-1.
1-2.3 One of the response options available to the MCM Commanders for clearing a minefield is to
conduct minesweeping operations using surface mine countermeasures that are designed to neutralize or
destroy underwater mines. MCM currently utilizes two methods of surface minesweeping: mechanical
and influence. Mechanical minesweeping utilizes the AN/SLQ-38(V) system and provides a mechanical
means of clearing moored mines by severing the mooring cable and allowing the mines to float to the
surface where they can be neutralized by gun fire. Influence minesweeping utilizes the AN/SLQ-37(V)
and provides a sweep system capable of clearing influence mines that are activated magnetically or
acoustically. Minesweeping techniques used by MCM ships are depicted in Figure 1-3. By varying the
towing setup, the MCM ship can operate the influence sweep systems individually or simultaneously. A
block diagram depicting the organization of minesweeping systems is illustrated in Figure 1-4.
1-3
THREAT DESCRIPTION.
1-3.1 Mines are classified in three ways; by position in the water (bottom, moored, or drifting); by
method of delivery (air, surface, or submarine), and by method of actuation (contact or influenced).
Influence actuated mines can be magnetic, acoustic, pressure, or any combination of the three. The mine
threat, primary target, and primary countermeasures are addressed in Table 1-2. In accordance with the
Geneva Convention and the Laws of the Sea, the life span of an armed underwater mine should not
exceed 365 days. At the end of it's life, the mine should either sterilize or self-destruct.
1-3.2
1-2
When classified by position, mines fall into three categories:
a.
Bottom Mines: Most effective in relatively shallow water (40 to 150 feet of sea water (FSW)).
Negative buoyancy causes the mine to sink to the bottom where it remains until actuated by a
passing ship. All bottom mines are influence actuated and are planted in waters where ships will
be damaged by the explosion.
b.
Moored Influence Mines: May be used in deeper-waters and are effective against both
surface ships and submarines. The explosive charge and the firing mechanism in the moored
mine are housed in a positive-buoyancy case. A cable (or chain) is attached to an anchor on the
ocean floor and holds the case at a predetermined depth below the surface.
c.
Drifting Mines: Float freely at or near the surface. They have no anchoring devices, and their
buoyancy is neutral. Although the Hague Convention of 1907 limits the use of drifting mines,
any mine can become a drifting mine when the mooring cable breaks.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-2. MCM Combat System, Major Subsystem
1-3
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 1-1. Mine Countermeasures Techniques
TYPE SWEEP
TYPE MINE
EQUIPMENT USED
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
Mechanical
Moored
Wire rope, towed/diverted aft of
MCM ship, with cutters attached
Mine mooring cable is severed
with cutters. Mines float to
surface where they are
neutralized by small arms fire or
by EOD divers.
Magnetic
Magnetic Influence
Towed magnetic cables
Cables pulses electromagnetic
fields, causing magnetic
influence mines to detonate.
Acoustic
Acoustic Influence
Towed acoustic device
Acoustic device produces
noises that emulate acoustic
signature of passing ship,
causing acoustic influence
mines to detonate.
Combination
Acoustic and Magnetic
Influence
Towed magnetic cables and
acoustic device
Simultaneously, acoustic device
produces noises while magnetic
cable pulses electromagnetic
fields, causing combination
acoustic-magnetic influence
mines to detonate.
Navigation
Minefield Avoidance
1. Navigation
1. Conning Officer/Tactical
Action Officer avoids suspected
minefield.
2. Markers and buoys
2. Buoys and markers are
deployed with strobe lights and
radar reflectors to aid
navigation through swept
channels or around a minefield.
1. Visual/Mine
watch
1. Ship’s personnel
1. Watch personnel are
stationed on bow of ship to
visually spot mines.
2. Minehunting sonar
2. Sonar (AN/SQQ-32)
2. Ship’s sonar used to detect
and classify mine-like objects.
3. Swimmer
3. EOD personnel and hand
held sonar
3. Swimmer used to locate
and/or triangulate (exploit)
mines.
4. Minehunting Vehicle
4. Mine Neutralization System
(AN/SLQ-48)
4. Vehicle used to locate
and/or neutralize mines.
Minehunting
1-4
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-3. Minesweeping Techniques, Typical (Sheet 1 of 2)
1-5
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-3. Minesweeping Techniques, Typical (Sheet 2 of 2)
1-6
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-4. Organization of Minesweeping System
1-7
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 1-2. Mine Threat Countermeasures
MINE CLASS
TRIGGER MECHANISMS
COUNTERMEASURES
PRIMARY TARGET
Bottom
Influence
Command
Minehunting
Minesweeping
Navigation avoidance
Surface Ships
Moored
Contact
Influence
Command
Minesweeping
Minehunting
Mine Watching
Navigation avoidance
Surface Ships
Submarines
Drifting
Contact
Navigation avoidance
Mine Watching
Surface Ships
1-3.3
1-4
When classified by methods of actuation, mines fall into three categories:
a.
Influence Mines: Detect a ship or a submarine by signatures - magnetic, acoustic, pressure, or
any combination of the three - that are used to actuate the mine's firing mechanism(s) after
receiving electrical signals from its detector(s). A detector, as used with a firing mechanism,
may be a magnetic search coil, a magnetometer, a hydrophone, or a pressure sensor. Upon
receipt of an electrical signal from the detector, the firing mechanism analyzes the signal to
determine whether or not it was generated by a valid target. If the analysis shows the target to
be within the danger zone, as present into the mine's instrumentation, the firing mechanism
initiates an actuation. This actuation may be a ship count or a detonation. The purpose of the
ship count is twofold: random target selection and counter-countermeasures.
b.
Contact Mines: The oldest and most common type mines. This type mine requires physical
contact between a ship and the mine's contact switch horn. When enough pressure is applied to
operate the switch horn, the mine will detonate. Contact mines first designed in 1908 were used
extensively during WW I and WW II and may still be found in use today. Newer generation
contact mines have also been used during conflict in recent years.
c.
Command Actuated Mines: Traditionally used in defensive minefields and receive firing
signals through hard-wired control cables from land-based control centers. Neutralization of the
control center results in loss of the ability to effectively utilize the minefield.
MISSION.
1-4.1 Mine countermeasures reduce the risk of damage from sea mines to surface ships and
submarines. Mechanical and Influence Minesweeping Systems contribute to this mission by providing
mine clearance capability.
1-4.2 AN/SLQ-37(V)3 Influence Minesweeping System. The influence minesweeping system is used
to clear influence actuated mines from an operating environment. During and after mine clearance
operations, buoys and reference markers may be deployed as navigational aids. The system has no
minehunting or classifying capability. It is specifically used to reduce the mine threat probability and for
neutralization by detonating the mines in place.
1-4.3 AN/SLQ-38 Mechanical Minesweeping System. Contact and influence actuated mines can be
moored using a chain or a cable. Mechanical minesweeping provides a means for clearing moored mines
by severing the mine's mooring cable or capturing the cable and dragging the mine to a safe area for
1-8
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
disposal. Mines that surface can be neutralized by small arms fire. The mission of the AN/SLQ-38 system
is to clear the operating area of threat from moored mines.
1-5
SYSTEM EQUIPMENT.
1-5.1 Influence Minesweeping System Equipment. Influence minesweeping systems operate on the
principle of inducing mines to fire in response to influences signals that simulate the signatures of a ship.
The AN/SLQ-37(V)3 System is used to counter mines equipped with magnetic or acoustic sensors. A
system block diagram of the organization of influence minesweep systems is illustrated in Figure 1-5.
1-5.2 Ships underway produce varying amounts of sound in various frequency ranges. A power-driven
ship normally projects large amounts of acoustic energy in the frequency range of one Hertz to several
thousand Hertz. The greatest portion of this energy output is in the low frequency band, which is produced
by propulsion machinery, hull vibrations, and propeller rotation (Figure 1-6). Acoustic mines are designed
to respond to the selected sound frequencies caused by a ship passing in the proximity of the mine. The
principle of passive acoustic minesweeping is to simulate a ship by projecting a band of noise to suitable
frequencies to actuate acoustic mines. Acoustic Minesweeping equipment is designed to simulate the
acoustic signature of a ship and detonate the mine a safe distance aft of the MCM ship.
1-5.3 Ships also possess the basic properties of a magnet and, because of the methods used during
their construction, they emit horizontal and vertical magnetic lines of force (Figure 1-7). Magnetic mines
are designed to detect steel hull ships as they cause distortions in the earth's ambient magnetic fields
(Figure 1-8) and to actuate when a ship is in close proximity. The principle of passive magnetic
minesweeping is to simulate a ship's magnetic characteristics by placing a large magnetic field in the
water that causes the firing mechanism of a magnetic mine to actuate. Magnetic minesweeping
equipment is designed to create a magnetic field by transmitting a large electrical current into cables
towed behind the vessel and initiate mine detonation a safe distance astern of the minesweeper (Figure
1-9).
1-5.4 The AN/SLQ-37(V)3 system installed aboard Avenger class MCM ships includes devices to
emulate both the acoustic and magnetic signatures of a ship. The system can be configured in several
ways to counter specific threats or for various operating conditions. The minesweeping objective, once
deployed, is to tow the system through the operational area, detonate influence mines and neutralize the
mine threat. There are three devices used to generate the acoustic signal and five cable assemblies used
to generate a magnetic field. This manual will address each of the system acoustic and magnetic
components and identify each of the sweep configurations used for minesweeping. The system also
utilizes common minesweeping and support gear from the AN/SLQ-38(V) system, such as floats,
pendants, depressors and otters to stream the gear and common field markers to designate areas that
have been swept. This manual will identify each item used during the minesweeping process, how it is
used, and a reference to the applicable technical manual.
AN/SLQ-38 mechanical
1-5.5 AN/SLQ-38 Mechanical Minesweeping System Equipment.
minesweeping equipment is specifically designed to sever moored mine cables. When the mooring cable
is severed, the mine then floats to the surface where it is neutralized by small arms fire or can be dragged
to a safe area for disposal. A block diagram of the mechanical minesweeping system is provided in Figure
1-10.
1-9
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-5. Organization of Influence Minesweeping System
1-10
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-6. Ship’s Acoustic Noises
1-11
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-7. XYZ Axis of Steel Hull Ship
1-12
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-8. Distortion of Earth’s Magnetic Field
1-13
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-9. Magnetic Minesweeping
1-14
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-10. Organization of Mechanical Minesweeping System
1-5.6 The AN/SLQ-38 system is installed aboard Avenger class MCM ships and can be streamed in
several configurations that are tactically designed to counter specific mine threat. Each of these methods
utilize sweep wire, towed aft of the ship, with minesweeping cutters attached at intervals along the sweep
cable that sever the mines mooring cable. To provide an acceptably wide sweep path, the sweep wire is
diverted from the ship's path using an otter. The standard moored sweep, Oropesa (named after the
British trawler that first used it), is referred to as O-gear and is streamed in a variety of configurations. This
manual will address each configuration of mechanical sweeps and the components used to rig and stream
each one.
1-6
CAPABILITIES.
1-6.1 Other than command and control and precise navigation hardware, the MCM ship is equipped
with four minehunting or minesweeping systems. These capabilities are depicted in Table 1-3.
1-6.2 Each of these systems provides a capability for the MCM ship to accomplish its objective. This
manual specifically addresses the mine neutralization capability provided by the AN/SLQ-37(V)3
Influence and AN/SLQ-38 Mechanical Minesweeping Systems. This equipment is designed specifically
for reducing the probability of influence and contact actuated mines in an operating area by causing the
mine to detonate. Neither of these systems offers clandestine or covert capability. Because the MCM
ship is a highly visible target particularly during sweeping operations, shallow water minesweeping
generally cannot be attempted until the after a tactical OA has been secured.
1-15
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 1-3. MCM Countermeasures Capability
MINE COUNTERMEASURES COMBAT
SYSTEM
MINESWEEPING
AN/SLQ-37(V) Influence Minesweeping System
X
AN/SLQ-38 Moored Minesweeping System
X
AN/SLQ-48(V) Mine Neutralization System
X
AN/SQQ-32(V) Minehunting Sonar
1-7
MINEHUNTING
NEUTRALIZATION
X
X
X
FUNCTIONAL RELATIONSHIPS.
1-7.1 Acoustic Minesweeping. Acoustic minesweeping (Figure 1-5) is accomplished when the
minesweeping system causes the actuation of an influence mine by emulating the acoustic signal of a
passing ship. The clearance objective is accomplished when the mine is detonated a safe distance
behind the MCM vessel thereby neutralizing the threat. The simulated acoustic signature, called a
waveform, is manually entered into an Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EPROM) chip in the
Automatic Control Unit (ACU). The ACU generates the signal and transmits it to the Power Converter Unit
(PCU). The PCU converts the signal into a control voltage that is sent to the towed acoustic device via the
Acoustic Power Cable (APC), which also serves as the towing cable. The towed body houses a motor and
causes the generation of an acoustic signal that is transmitted into the seawater surrounding the towed
body. The influence mine detects the acoustic signal and the mines firing mechanism analyzes the signal.
It the signal meets the preprogrammed requirements of the mine, it initiates a actuation sequence. The
clearance objective is met when all of the influence mines in the OA have been destroyed. The typical
operational sequence of an underwater mine is depicted as a functional block diagram in Figure 1-11.
1-7.2 Magnetic Minesweeping. Magnetic minesweeping (Figure 1-5) is accomplished when the
minesweeping system actuates an influence mine by simulating the magnetic field of a passing ship. The
clearance objective is accomplished in the same manner as acoustic minesweeping, when the mine is
detonated a safe distance behind the MCM vessel thereby neutralizing the threat. The waveforms,
described in the previous paragraph, stored in the ACU are used to generate a voltage that is transmitted
to the shipboard minesweeping generator. The minesweeping generator converts the signals into a
high-voltage electrical current that is transmitted into the Magnetic Cable Assembly. The Magnetic Cable
Assembly is towed behind the MCM vessel and uses the electrical current to generate a powerful
magnetic field. The influence mine detects the magnetic field and initiates an actuation sequence. The
clearance objective is met when all of the influence mines in the OA have been destroyed.
1-7.3 All minesweeping system operations are conducted from the fantail of the MCM ship.
Functionally, the operations may be divided into three areas: system direction, manual operation, and
machine operation.
a.
1-16
System Direction: Primarily a command function and is exercised by the Commanding Officer
(CO)/Officer of the Deck (OOD) in the Pilot House, and the Tactical Action Officer (TAO) in
Combat Information Center (CIC) interacting with the Mine Countermeasures/Safety Officer
(MCMO) and the Petty Officer In Charge (POIC) on the fantail.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-11. Operational Sequence of an Influence Mine, Typical
1-17
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
b.
Manual Operations: Performed by minesweeping personnel in breaking out the gear,
performing on-deck preparations and readying individual pieces of equipment for streaming,
and providing manual assistance for machine operations.
c.
Machine Operators: Cranes, winches, and cable reels located on the fantail of the ship and are
used to handle components such as floats and kites, winches handle sweep wires and cable
reels handle acoustic and magnetic cables.
1-7.4 Mechanical Minesweeping. Mechanical minesweeping (Figure 1-10) is accomplished with the
sweep wire streamed aft of the MCM ship where it's mechanical and/or explosive cable cutters sever mine
mooring cables. To provide a wide sweep path, the sweep wire is veered away from the track of the ship.
An otter, supported by a float, diverts the outboard end of the sweep wire. The MCM ship can stream up to
two sweep wires at the same time. The otter governs the span and depth of the outboard end of the
sweep, while a depressor governs the span and depth of the inboard end of the sweep. Sweep wire depth
is determined in accordance with NWP 3-15. The clearance objective is met when all moored mines in the
OA have been swept from their moorings and destroyed.
1-8
PHYSICAL ARRANGEMENT.
1-8.1 Table 1-4 lists the major minesweeping equipment and their location throughout the MCM ship. A
cross-section profile of a MCM ship, showing compartments where minesweeping equipment is located,
is illustrated in Figure 1-12. The ship’s Pilot House is illustrated in Figure 1-13. The ship Combat
Information Center is illustrated in Figure 1-14. Minesweeping equipment installed on the Fantail is
illustrated in Figure 1-15. Table 1-5 lists types of magnetic, acoustic, and combination minesweeps as
illustrated in Figures 1-16 through 1-38.
1-9
SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT.
1-9.1 AN/SLQ-37(V)3 Acoustic Minesweeping Equipment. Acoustic minesweeping equipment is
designed to simulate acoustic signatures of ships. These signatures are electrically generated by the
ACU, converted to pulsed, direct current by the Power Converter Unit (PCU), and transmitted via an APC
tow cable to a towed acoustic device where the signal is converted into an audible sound. The sound
energy generated by the towed body is projected into the water to simulate the passage of a vessel. The
acoustic sensor in a mine detects the sound, performs an analysis of the incoming signal, and if this signal
meets the preset requirements of the mine, it can cause the mine to detonate.
1-9.2 The waveforms used to generate the acoustic signal at the ACU are classified; however, none of
the system components or their operation is classified. Specific mine types countered with the
AN/SLQ-37(V) and the effectiveness of the system are also classified.
1-9.3 Shipboard components of the AN/SLQ-37(V) include the Power Converter Unit (PCU)
CV-3846/SLQ-37, the Automatic Control Unit (ACU) SG-1224A/SLQ-37, and the Dynamic Braking Unit
(DBU). Acoustic devices TB-26/SLQ-37 and TB-27/SLQ-37, and the Towed Device A Mk 2(g) are towed
behind the ship. All use the CX-13260/SLQ-37 Acoustic Power/Tow Cable except the A Mk 2(g), which is
attached to the ship’s sweep wire during deployment. These components are identified in Table 1-6 and
discussed further in the following paragraphs.
1-9.4 Automatic Control Unit, SG-1224A/SLQ-37(V). The ACU, SG-1224A/SLQ-37(V) (Figure 1-39), is
located in the CIC where it generates waveforms that are used for magnetic and acoustic mine
countermeasures. The ACU is completely enclosed to provide protection from EMI. A hinged front cover
lowers to allow operator access to controls and indicators on the front panel. The front panel and chassis
slide out on two locking slide-rails for easy access to the subassemblies. Controls and indicators for the
ACU are explained in SW570-F0-MMO-020.
1-18
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 1-4. Major Minesweeping Equipment
EQUIPMENT
LOCATION
Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) (Rattle Bars)
Carried only when situation requires
Acoustic Device Towed Body TB-26
Fantail
Acoustic Device Towed Body TB-27
Fantail
Acoustic Power Cable (APC)
Fantail, APC cable reel
APC Bulkhead Connector
Fantail, forward bulkhead, starboard
Automatic Control Unit (ACU)
Combat Information Center
DC Contactor Panel
Auxiliary Machinery Room
Dynamic Braking Unit (DBU)
Auxiliary Machinery Room
Floats, Kites (Depressors/Otters)
Fantail
Magnetic Cable Connector Receptacle (Tailbox)
Fantail, forward bulkhead, port
Magnetic Minesweeping Cables (CA-1453 (COAX), CA-1454 (S
and CL), K-4, and Pigtails)
Fantail/Magnetic cable reels
Magnetic Minesweeping Control Switchboard
Auxiliary Machinery Room
Magnetic Minesweeping Gas Turbine Generator (MMGTG)
Auxiliary Machinery Room
Mechanical Equipment (shackles, chains, bridles, pennants, etc.)
Sweep Gear Storeroom
Power Converter Unit (PCU)
General Workshop
Solid State Pulse Generator (SSPG)
Auxiliary Machinery Room
1-9.5 Magnetic voltage waveforms provided by the ACU are cable connected to the ship's magnetic
mine sweeping equipment. Acoustic voltage waveforms provided by the ACU are converted to direct
current by the PCU and applied to a motor in the towed acoustic device TB-26 or TB-27. The ACU
requires 115 Vac, 60 Hz, single phase input power and an input from the shipboard digital clock.
1-9.6 Of the components required for acoustic influence minesweeping, only the ACU serves a dual
function. For acoustic minesweeping, the voltage waveforms generated by the ACU are sent to the PCU
where they are converted to motor control voltage for the towed body. For magnetic minesweeping, the
voltage waveforms are converted to high-amperage currents by the minesweep generator equipment and
applied to the sweep cables.
1-9.7 Power Converter Unit, Acoustic, CV-3846/SLQ-37(V). The Power Converter Unit (PCU),
CV-3846/SLQ-37(V) (Figure 1-40), is located in the General Workshop where it provides the electrical
power to operate motors inside of the acoustic devices (TB-26 or TB-27). An operator can control the
operation of the PCU from its control panel or remotely from the ACU. The ACU provides control voltages
to the PCU to operate the acoustic devices. The PCU operates on 440 Vac, 3-phase, 60 Hz power and is
designed to operate unattended.
Controls and indicators for the PCU are explained in
SW565-AB-MMM-040.
1-19
Figure 1-12. Minesweeping Equipment Locations
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
1-20
Figure 1-13. Pilot House, Typical
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
1-21
Figure 1-14. Combat Information Center, Typical
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
1-22
Figure 1-15. Fantail of MCM Ship, Typical
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
1-23
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 1-5. Types of Minesweeps
TYPE SWEEP
FIGURE
ENVIRONMENT
Single O-Type Moored Minesweep
1-16
Salt or Fresh Water
Double O-Type Moored Minesweep
1-17
Salt or Fresh Water
Single Ship Deep Sweep (SSDS)
1-18
Salt or Fresh Water
Team Deep Sweep
1-19
Salt or Fresh Water
Improved Deep-Moored Sweep (IDMS)
1-20
Salt or Fresh Water
A Mk 2(g) Acoustic Sweep
1-21
Salt or Fresh Water
TB-26 Acoustic Sweep
1-22
Salt or Fresh Water
TB-27 Acoustic Sweep
1-23
Salt or Fresh Water
M Mk 5(a) Magnetic Sweep (Straight Tail)
1-24
Salt Water Only
M Mk 5(a) Magnetic Sweep (Configuration C)
1-25
Salt Water Only
M Mk 6(a) Magnetic Sweep (Diverted Loop)
1-26
Salt Water Only
M Mk 6(h) Magnetic Sweep (Diverted Loop)
1-27
Salt or Fresh Water
M Mk 7(b) Magnetic Sweep (Double Diverted Loop)
1-28
Salt or Fresh Water
M Mk 5(a) TB-26 (Diverted) Combination Influence Sweep
1-29
Salt Water Only
M Mk 5(a) TB-27 (Diverted) Combination Influence Sweep
1-30
Salt Water Only
M Mk 6(a) TB-26 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep
1-31
Salt Water Only
M Mk 6(a) TB-27 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep
1-32
Salt Water Only
M Mk 6(h) TB-26 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep
1-33
Salt or Fresh Water
M Mk 6(h) TB-27 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep
1-34
Salt or Fresh Water
FA2 with TB-26 Combination Influence Sweep
1-35
Salt Water Only
FA2 with TB-27 Combination Influence Sweep
1-36
Salt Water Only
FA2A with TB-26 Combination Influence Sweep
1-37
Salt or Fresh Water
FA2A with TB-27 Combination Influence Sweep
1-38
Salt or Fresh Water
1-24
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-16. Single O-Type Moored Minesweep
1-25
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-17. Double O-Type Moored Minesweeping
1-26
Figure 1-18. Single Ship Deep Sweep (SSDS)
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
1-27
Figure 1-19. Team Deep Sweep
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
1-28
Figure 1-20. Improved Deep-Moored Sweep (IDMS)
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
1-29
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-21. A Mk 2(g) Acoustic Sweep
1-30
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-22. TB-26 Acoustic Sweep
1-31
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-23. TB-27 Acoustic Sweep
1-32
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-24. M Mk 5(a) Magnetic Sweep (Straight Tail)
1-33
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-25. M Mk 5(a) Magnetic Sweep (Configuration C)
1-34
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-26. M Mk 6(a) Magnetic Sweep (Diverted Loop)
1-35
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-27. M Mk 6(h) Magnetic Sweep (Diverted Loop)
1-36
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-28. M Mk 7(b) Magnetic Sweep (Double Diverted Loop)
1-37
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-29. M Mk 5(a) TB-26 (Diverted) Combination Influence Sweep
1-38
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-30. M Mk 5(a) TB-27 (Diverted) Combination Influence Sweep
1-39
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-31. M Mk 6(a) TB-26 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep
1-40
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-32. M Mk 6(a) TB-27 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep
1-41
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-33. M Mk 6(h) TB-26 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep
1-42
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-34. M Mk 6(h) TB-27 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep
1-43
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-35. FA2 with TB-26 Combination Influence Sweep
1-44
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-36. FA2 with TB-27 Combination Influence Sweep
1-45
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-37. FA2A with TB-26 Combination Influence Sweep
1-46
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-38. FA2A with TB-27 Combination Influence Sweep
1-47
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 1-6. Acoustic Minesweeping Equipment
NOMENCLATURE
DESIGNATION
PART
NUMBER
NSN
COMMON
NAME
Acoustic Device, A Mk 2(g)
A Mk 2 (g)
10798 &
11744
1075-00-224-8945
Rattle Bars
Automatic Control Unit
SG-1224A/SLQ-37(V)
6155460
1650-01-361-1116
ACU
Cable Assembly, Acoustic Power
CX-13260/SLQ-37(V)
5781273
1075-00-782-9881
APC
Dynamic Braking Unit
MX-10746/SLQ-37(V)
61554185
6110-01-360-2720
DBU
Power Converter Unit (Acoustic)
CV-3846/SLQ-37(V)
6155300
1350-01-375-7054
PCU
Towed Body (Acoustic) TB-26
TB-26/SLQ-37(V)
6375386
1075-01-368-2482
TB-26
Towed Body (Acoustic) TB-27
TB-27/SLQ-37(V)
6375400
1075-01-368-2483
TB-27
1-9.8 Dynamic Braking Unit, MX-10746/SLQ-37(V).
The Dynamic Braking Unit (DBU),
MX-10746/SLQ-37(V) (Figure 1-41) slows the motor of the TB-26 Towed Body. The DBU is a rigidly
mounted static device, located in the Auxiliary Machine Room (AMR), and functions when the TB-26
motor slows. As the PCU motor operating voltage is being removed, the towed body motor begins to act
like a generator. Power generated by the motor is shunted by the Dynamic Braking Module in the PCU to
the DBU where it is absorbed by large wattage resistors. By absorbing motor-generated power, the DBU
effectively produces a braking effect on the motor. This braking effect enables the towed body motor to
respond quickly to commands from the PCU during operation. The DBU operates only when the motor
speed is decreasing and is used only with the TB-26.
1-9.9 Cable Assembly, Acoustic Power, CX-13260/SLQ-37(V). The Acoustic Power Cable (APC)
CX-13260/SLQ-37(V) (Figure 1-42) is designed to tow and supply power to the TB-26 and TB-27 acoustic
devices. The APC provides the means to conduct electrical power to operate the acoustic devices at an
extended distance from the ship, contributing to the ship's safety during minesweeping operations. The
APC is capable of taking all of the towing strain of the TB-26 or TB-27, in addition to carrying the electrical
current required to operate either device. The APC contains four conductors and is 1,650 feet long. The
APC has two non-buoyant sections and a buoyant section. Buoyancy is provided by Polyethylene foam
molded around the APC cable.
1-9.10 TB motor control voltages are provided by the PCU and are applied to the APC bulkhead
connector (Figure 1-43). After the TB has been properly deployed, the inboard end of the APC cable is
plugged into APC bulkhead connector. This connection then provides operating voltage from the PCU to
the TB and feedback from the TB to the PCU.
1-9.11 Towed Body, Acoustic, TB-26/SLQ-37(V) . Acoustic Device TB-26 (Figure 1-44) is an electric,
motor-driven, mechanical oscillator providing a controlled source of low frequency acoustic signals for use
in sweeping acoustic mines. TB-26 is designed to operate underwater. During minesweeping operations,
it is towed by a sweep vessel with its weight supported by a size 0 float. The device is connected and
controlled electrically through the APC by the ACU and the PCU on the MCM ship. Two opposed
diaphragms inside the TB oscillate to generate acoustic signals. The signal frequency is determined by
the speed of the motor and the eccentrics on the mechanism crankshaft. The Mk 2 Mod 2 eccentric
mechanism is installed in the device. TB-26 consists of a watertight housing that contains the electrical
components, eccentric mechanism, diaphragms, and pedestal assembly. The entire device weighs
approximately 2800 pounds and operates with a 7.5 HP 30A, 220V motor.
1-48
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-39. Automatic Control Unit (ACU)
1-49
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-40. Power Converter Unit
Figure 1-41. Dynamic Braking Unit (DBU)
1-50
Figure 1-42. Acoustic Power Cable (APC)
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
1-51
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-43. APC Bulkhead Connector
Figure 1-44. Acoustic Device TB-26
1-52
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
1-9.12 Towed Body, Acoustic, TB-27/SLQ-37(V). Acoustic Device TB-27 (Figure 1-45) is an electric,
motor-driven, mechanical device that produces a controlled sound output for sweeping acoustic mines.
The APC tows the TB-27 behind the ship through the minefield. The PCU on board the ship transmits a
DC voltage through the APC to operate the motor within the watertight acoustic device. The motor drives
a hammer into a steel diaphragm causing it to vibrate. By varying the motor speed, the operator can select
a sound intensity and frequency appropriate for sweeping mines. The functioning components of the
acoustic device are the diaphragm, the striker assembly, the eccentric shaft assembly, and the motor.
Within the striker assembly, an eccentric controls the movement of a spring-driven hammer. The striker
operates as a piston and strikes the diaphragm at a frequency governed by motor speed. The eccentric
shaft assembly is a bearing-mounted shaft connected through an eccentric and ball and socket
arrangement to the striker assembly. The eccentric shaft is rotated by a v-belt driven by the motor. The
motor is 1.5 horsepower, 240 Vdc, shunt-wound unit. It receives its controlling voltage from the PCU on
board the ship. The Acoustic Device, TB-27 consists of a tail assembly, shell assembly, sound box
assembly, and dome assembly.
Figure 1-45. Acoustic Device TB-27
1-53
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
1-9.13 Acoustic Device, A Mk 2(g), 10798 & 11744. Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) (Figure 1-46) is a
mechanical device that produces acoustic sounds used to counter acoustic influence mines. The sound is
produced by turbulent waterflow between and around bars and does not require electrical power. The
device is towed vertically through the water and is actuated by the flow of water between its parallel pipes,
creating a venturi effect. This waterflow causes the pipes or bars to hit each other with great force. The
output increases with speed. The A Mk 2(g) has a relatively short life because of the mechanical stress
placed on its parts. This stress increases in proportion to the speed of tow. The device is subject to fouling
by weeds and debris. During turns, it has a tendency to stop producing sound unless its speed through
the water is maintained. An auxiliary depressor is used to prevent excessive hogging of the sweep wire
during high speed sweeping operations.
1-9.14 The A Mk 2(g) consists of three 3/4-inch parallel pipes held in a frame at each end. Two 30-inch
parallel pipes or bars are mounted at each end on swing arms that are free to oscillate in the center of the
frame. The swing arms are also mounted on two end plates that are used to attach the towing bridle. The
device is manufactured from Corrosive Resistant Extruded Steel (CRES) and weighs approximately 135
pounds. The auxiliary depressor is manufactured of stainless steel and weighs 15 pounds.
1-10
AN/SLQ-37(V)3 MAGNETIC MINESWEEPING EQUIPMENT.
1-10.1 Magnetic minesweeping equipment is designed to simulate magnetic signatures of steel-hulled
ships. These signatures are electromagnetically produced by pulsing current through magnetic
minesweeping cables.
1-10.2 Magnetic voltage waveforms, generated by the ACU, are sent to the ships' magnetic
minesweeping generator equipment (Figures 1-47 and 1-48), where they are reduced to operating
voltages used by the ships' Magnetic Minesweeping Gas Turbine Generator (MMGTG) (Figure 1-49).
Output from the MMGTG is eventually applied to magnetic minesweeping cables via the magnetic
minesweeping cable receptacle (tailbox) (Figure 1-50).
1-10.3 Magnetic minesweeping cables are listed in Table 1-7 and are discussed in the following
paragraphs. Controls and indicators for the ships' magnetic minesweeping generator equipment are
explained in S6265-AP-MMA-010/66076 (MCM 1 – 8) and S9314-CS-MMA-010 (MCM 9 – 14).
1-10.4 During magnetic minesweeping operations, the inboard pigtail connectors of the coax cable
(Figure 1-51) are plugged into the tailbox. When the tailbox SAFE/RUN switch (Figure 1-50) is placed in
the RUN position, pulsed voltages are applied through the tailbox to the magnetic cables. As the polarity
of the applied voltage oscillates between positive and negative potential, magnetic fields build and
collapse around certain portions of the cables and emulate the magnetic signature of a passing ship
(Figure 1-9).
1-10.5 Data stored in the ACU and used to generate magnetic waveforms is classified, however, none
of the system components or their operation is classified. Specific mine types countered and the
effectiveness of this system are also classified.
1-10.6 Coaxial Magnetic Cable CA-1453 Assembly (Coax Cable). The Coax cable assembly (Figure
1-52) consists of a heavy section (air cooled) and buoyant section (water cooled) spliced together to form
a single finished 801-foot long cable assembly. This heavy-buoyant splice must be awash at all times
during towing. With a cable diameter of 6.14 inches, power winch termination diameter 9.75 inches and a
heavy-buoyant splice diameter of 9.45 inches, cable CA-1453 is coaxial construction so that there is no
magnetic field close to the ship.
1-54
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-46. Acoustic Device, A Mk 2(g) (Rattle Bars)
1-55
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-47. MCM 1 – 8, Magnetic Minesweeping Equipment
1-56
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-48. MCM 9 – 14, Magnetic Minesweeping Equipment
1-57
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-49. Magnetic Minesweeping Generator
1-58
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-50. Magnetic Cable Terminal Box (Tailbox)
Table 1-7. Magnetic Minesweeping Cables
NOMENCLATURE
DESIGNATION
PART NUMBER
Magnetic Cable Assembly,
Coax
CA-1453
7498406
Coax Cable
Magnetic Cable Assembly, S
CA-1454
7498423
S-Cable
CX-13263/SLQ-37(V)
1449611
K-4 or Electrode
CA-1454
7498423
CL-Cable
CX-13266/SLQ-37(V)
5990514
TJ or Tow Jumper
Pigtails, Inboard
———
7498419-1
7498419-2
Pigtails, Outboard
———
7498420
Magnetic Cable Assembly,
Electrode K-4
Magnetic Cable Assembly, CL
Magnetic Cable Assembly,
Tow Jumper TJ
COMMON NAME
Short Leg Inboard Electrode
Long Leg Inboard Electrode
Outboard Pigtail
1-59
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-51. Coax Heavy Section Connected to Tailbox
Figure 1-52. Coax Cable CA-1453
1-60
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
1-10.7 Magnetic Cable Assembly CA-1454. The CA-1454 cable (Figure 1-53) may be used as a
S-Cable section (S-Cable) or as a Connecting Link (CL-Cable). The CA-1454 cable assembly is 450 foot
long with a diameter 3.67 inches. It connects to the outboard long leg breakout (two lengths make up a
900-foot S section) using 11-foot 6-inch outboard pigtails. A single length of CA-1454 is used as a
connecting link for closed loop minesweeping.
1-10.8 Magnetic Cable Assembly, Electrode K-4, CX-13264/SLQ-37(V). The K-4 Electrode (Figure
1-54) is a concentric stranded copper conductor cable covered with cotton tape and seine twine braid.
The cable section is 150 feet long and is terminated with flat lugs at both ends. K-4 Electrodes are
attached to coax and S-Cables, as required for specific magnetic minesweeping configurations.
1-10.9 Pigtail Assembly. Pigtail assemblies are used to aid in making connections and interfaces
between cable configurations. Pigtails (Figure 1-55) are further identified as inboard and outboard
pigtails.
1-10.10 Four inboard pigtails are used. Two inboard pigtails are 12 feet 1-1/2 inches long, fitted with a
crimp-on lug connector on one end and a barrel terminal (2-inch diameter) on the other end. These
pigtails connect to the outer conductor (short leg) winch termination and tailbox. The coax section inboard
end is terminated with an inner conductor (long leg) and an outer conductor (short leg). These conductors
are connected to the tailbox via pigtails that are terminated with contact plugs that are plugged into the
tailbox during magnetic minesweeping operations.
1-10.11 The other two inboard pigtails are 11 feet 5-3/4 inches long, fitted with a crimp-on lug connector
on one end and a barrel terminal (1-1/2-inch diameter) on the other end. These pigtails connect to the
inner conductor (long leg) winch termination and tailbox.
1-10.12 Outboard pigtails are 11 feet 6 inches long, both ends are fitted with crimp-on lug connectors
and are used to connect Coax cable to CA-1454 cable, CA-1454 cables together, and are used as the
cable in the TJ Jumper.
1-10.13 K-4 Blank with Clamps (Figure 1-56) has holes for 5/8-inch cap screws, is 5.25 inches long by
2.28 inches wide, and is made from 3/4-inch-thick aluminum alloy shaped to interface the connection
between the K-4 breakout and K-4 electrode or pigtail, as the configuration requires.
Figure 1-53. Cable Assembly CA-1454 (Typical)
1-61
Figure 1-54. Magnetic Minesweeping Cable, K-4 Electrode
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
1-62
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-55. Pigtail Assemblies
Figure 1-56. K-4 Blank and Clamp
1-63
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
1-10.14 Cable Assembly, Magnetic Sweep, Tow Jumper (TJ). The Tow Jumper (TJ) (Figure 1-57) is
used to electrically connect the S-Cable and the CL-Cable. Once joined, an electrical loop is formed and
the jumper provides a towing point. The TJ consists of an outboard pigtail. A bronze towing tab is
attached to the section between the connectors and a neoprene sleeve cushions and protects the cable
under the towing eye.
1-10.15 Associated System Equipment. Influence minesweeping requires the use of equipment
common to both the An/SLQ-37(V)3 and the AN/SLQ-38 systems. This equipment was previously
identified in Table 1-4 and is further described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 1-57. Tow Jumper TJ, Typical
1-64
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
1-11
AN/SLQ-38 MECHANICAL MINESWEEPING EQUIPMENT.
1-11.1 Mechanical minesweeping requires the use of equipment common to both the AN/SLQ-38 and
the AN/SLQ-37 systems. Permanent type equipment (cable reels, minesweep winch, etc.) are mounted
on the fantail (Figure 1-15). Portable heavy equipment (kites, floats, etc.) are also located on the fantail.
Smaller and lighter-weight equipment are stored in the minesweeping gear storeroom, where it is readily
accessible via an access hatch located on the port side of the fantail.
1-11.2 Controls for the Minesweeping Winch (Figures 1-58 and 1-59) are located on the forward side of
the winch. During minesweeping operations tension applied to sweep wires is indicated on both the Line
Tension Monitors located above the winch controls and on the Line Tension Main Display Unit (Figure
1-60) located on the 01 level (port, aft). During minesweeping conditions, the ships' Hospital Corpsman
(HM) normally mans a position that allows him to monitor both the main display unit and the safety of
personnel working on the fantail.
1-11.3 Aboard MCM 1 – 8, the magnetic cable reel (Figure 1-61) is operated by controls located on the
port side of the reel and the acoustic cable reel (Figure 1-62) is operated by controls located on starboard
side of the reel. Aboard MCM 9 – 14 the magnetic cable reel (Figure 1-63) and acoustic cable reel (Figure
1-64) are operated by the Magnetic and Acoustic Reel Control Station (Figure 1-65) located on the 01
level (starboard, aft). In the event that one of the Hydraulic Power Units (HPU) should fail, the Mechanical
Winch Control Valve is used to effect emergency cross over of hydraulic pressure from one HPU to
another. Additional common use equipment is listed in Table 1-8 and is discussed in the following
paragraphs.
1-11.4 5/8-Inch Sweep Wire, MX-10597/SLQ-38. Two 5/8-inch sweep wires are installed as shipboard
equipment on MCM Class ships. Each consists of 4000 feet of 7 x 7 wire rope constructed of CRES and
faired 700 feet at both ends. The fairing provides a decrease in harmonics and improves handling
characteristics. Left-hand lay wire is used for a port sweep and right-hand lay wire is used for a starboard
sweep to eliminate hog and sag while minesweeping. For influence sweeps, the sweep wire is generally
used to divert the sweep or, as part of certain combination sweeps, to prevent fouling. Sweep wires shall
be end for ended after 300 hours of total towing time.
1-11.5 5/8-Inch Depressor Wire, MX-10601/SLQ-38. The depressor wire is 7 x 7, 5/8-inch right-hand
lay wire rope made of CRES 1800-feet long with a hardeye swaged on the outboard end. The depressor
wire is used to take the inboard end of the sweep wire to the proper towing depth.
1-11.6 Depressor Bridle, MX-10602/SLQ-38 (3-Legged Bridle Chain). When a multiplane kite is rigged
as a depressor, it is fitted with a 3-legged chain. The 3-legged bridle chain provides a means of attaching
the depressor wire and span pendants, while allowing the depressor to assume the proper altitude when
towed through the water. When towed, force of water on the kite vanes forces the depressor down to a
depth determined by a combination of towing speed and length of depressor wire. As the depressor is
forced down, it carries the inboard end of the sweep wire to the proper depth. The 3-legged bridle chain
weighs 130 pounds.
1-65
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-58. Minesweeping Winch (MCM 1 – 8), Typical
1-66
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-59. Minesweeping Winch (MCM 9 – 14), Typical
1-67
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-60. Line Tension Payout System, Main Display Unit, Typical Faceplate
1-68
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-61. Magnetic Cable Reel (MCM 1 – 8), Typical
1-69
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-62. Acoustic Cable Reel (MCM 1 – 8), Typical
1-70
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-63. Magnetic Cable Reel (MCM 9 – 14), Typical
1-71
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-64. Acoustic Cable Reel (MCM 9 – 14), Typical
1-72
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-65. Magnetic and Acoustic Reel Control Station (MCM 9 – 14) (Sheet 1 of 2)
1-73
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-65. Magnetic and Acoustic Reel Control Station (MCM 9 – 14) (Sheet 2 of 2)
1-74
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 1-8. Mechanical Minesweeping Equipment
NOMENCLATURE
DESIGNATION
PART
NUMBER
NSN
Cutter Mk 12
MX-10609/SLQ-38
3297847
1075-00-340-6803
Cutter Mk 12
Cutter Mk 14
MX-10610/SLQ-38
3286189
1075-00-507-1201
Cutter Mk 14
Cutter Mk 15
MX-10611/SLQ-38
3300189
1075-00-332-5834
Cutter Mk 15
Cutter Mk 9
MX-10608/SLQ-38
1207908
1075-00-265-0677
Cutter Mk 9
Cutter Mk 12 with
Elevating Fin Assembly
———
3297847
6375432
1075-00-340-6803
1075-01-339-3693
Cutter Mk 12
Elevating Fin
Assembly
Cutter Mk 14 with
Elevating Fin Assembly
———
3286189
6375431
1075-00-507-1201
1075-01-337-4662
Cutter Mk 14
Elevating Fin
Assembly
MX-10602/SLQ-38
3271874
1075-00-294-2291
3-legged Bridle
MX-10601
6375334
4010-01-296-5861
Depressor Wire
Float, Minesweeping, Size 0
MX-10614/SLQ-38
6169054
1075-01-357-9948
Size 0 Float
Float, Minesweeping, Size 1
MX-10606/SLQ-38
6169065
1075-LL-H32-5740
Size 1 Float
Grip, Cable, Klein, 1/2-inch
to 3/4-inch
MX-10612/SLQ-38
RR-G-691
5120-00-224-2661
Klein Grip
Grip, Cable, Klein, 3/16-inch
to 1/2-inch
MX-10612/SLQ-38
MIL-G-3210
5120-00-238-4436
Klein Grip
———
1464351
1075-00-391-9280
Otter or Depressor
MX-10604/SLQ-38
3271875
1075-00-294-2292
4-legged Bridle
Depressor Bridle, 3-legged
chain
Depressor Wire, 5/8-in.
Multipurpose Kite, Size 1
Otter Bridle, 4-legged chain
Sheave, Instrumented
———
COMMON NAME
Sheave
Sweep Wire, 5/8-inch, RH
MX-10597/SLQ-38
RH 6376336
4010-01-302-9008
Sweep Wire
Sweep Wire, 5/8-inch, LH
MX-10597/SLQ-38
LH 6376335
4010-01-291-1611
Sweep Wire
Swivel Assembly Mk 9
———
25480-1
4030-01-371-1927
Mk 9 Swivel
Wedge Stop
———
6375299
1075-LL-H32-5741
Wedge Stop
1-11.7 Multiplane Kite, Otter, Depressor, Size 1, 1464351. The multiplane kite, size 1 is designed for
use as either an otter or depressor. The rigging determines whether the multiplane kite is a depressor or
an otter based on the type of bridle selected. The basic purpose of the multiplane kite is to give depth to
the sweep cable and the depressor wires during minesweeping operations. The design allows the
multiplane kite to perform various functions in a minesweeping configuration. When used as an otter
(Figure 1-66), it provides span and depth to the outboard end of the attached sweep wire. Bridle chains
are used to connect the multiplane kites to the sweep/depressor wires and to govern kite function in the
minesweeping configuration. Some sweeps employ both the depressor and otter setups. The multiplane
kite is constructed of nonmagnetic CRES and weighs approximately 500 pounds.
1-75
Figure 1-66. Multiplane Kite Rigged as an Otter
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
1-76
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
1-11.8 Otter Bridle, MX-10604/SLQ-38 (4-Legged Bridle Chain) (Figure 1-66). When a multiplane kite
size 1 is rigged as an otter, it is fitted with a 4-legged bridle chain assembly called an Otter Bridle. The
bridle chain assembly provides a means of attaching the sweep wire and float pendant to the otter,
allowing the otter to assume the proper attitude when towed through the water giving span and depth to
the outboard end of the sweep wire. The Otter Bridle weighs 170 pounds.
1-11.9 Depressor Bridle (3-Legged Bridle Chain) (Figure 1-67). When a multiplane kite size 1 is rigged
as a depressor, it is fitted with a 3-legged bridle chain assembly called a Depressor Bridle. The bridle
chain assembly provides a means of attaching the sweep wire/s via the span pendant/s to the depressor,
allowing the sweep wires to assume the proper depth when towed through the water, giving depth and
span to the inboard end of the sweep. A depressor used on port "O" gear will have a starboard sheer and
a depressor used on Starboard "O" gear will have a port sheer. The Depressor Bridles weighs 130
pounds.
1-11.10 Float, Type 0 Size 1, MX-10606/SLQ-38. Minesweeping floats are to provide buoyancy for
minesweeping otters or acoustic devices during both mechanical or influence minesweeping operations.
The size 1 float, made of stainless steel, will support either an otter or the acoustic device TB-27. The float
serves as a marker for the approximate outboard end of the sweep, allowing the sweep width to be
checked by observation from the ship. Otter performance may also be visually checked by observing the
depth at which the float rides.
1-11.11 Floats are constructed of nonmagnetic CRES. The floats are issued complete with the body,
stabilizing fin, float bail, lifting bail, fair lead tube, nose connection and the flagstaff socket as one unit. The
flag with black and red horizontal stripes (black on top for starboard sweep and red on top for port sweep),
the flagstaff, and the Xenon flasher are issued separately.
1-11.12 Float, Type 0 Size 0, MX-10614/SLQ-38. The size 0 float (Figure 1-68) is similar to the size 1
float, as previously described, except that it is made of fiberglass and is used with acoustic device TB-26.
The float serves as a marker for the approximate outboard end of the sweep, allowing the sweep width to
be checked by observation from the ship.
1-11.13 Minesweeping Cutters. Various types of minesweeping cutters, both mechanical and
explosive, are commonly used. Mechanical cutters are designed to sever the mine mooring cable (wire),
when it is jammed into the jaws of the cutter. Explosive cutters sever the mooring chain by means of an
explosive-driven cutting punch. Current minesweeping cutter equipment listings contain only one
mechanical cutter (Cutter Mk 9) and several types of explosive cutters, most common of which are Cutter
Mk 12 Mod 2, Cutter Mk 14 Mod 0, and Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0. Mechanical cutters have the advantages of
being safe and simple and require a speed of 6 knots to cut mine moorings. They may, however snag the
mooring without cutting it, thereby damaging or affecting the performance of the gear and presenting a
hazard to the minesweeper on recovery. Minesweeping cutters are further designated as end cutters or
intermediate cutters. The end cutter protects the otter from a mine mooring wire. The intermediate cutters
are located inboard of the end cutter along the sweep wire. In addition, the Mk 15 cutters are secured on
sweep and depressor wires on the MCM fantail. During sweeping operations, these cutters are designed
to cut the towing bridle, sweep wire, or depressor wire in an emergency.
1-11.14 Cutters Mk 12 and Mk 14 assemblies are used as intermediate cutters. The Cutter Mk 14
assembly has a quadruple cutting capability. If chain moorings are anticipated. Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 with
stud link chain cutting capability would be required vice the Cutter Mk 14 Mod 0.
1-77
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-67. Depressor Bridle
1-78
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-68. Float (Size 0) Rigged for Acoustic Minesweeping
1-79
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
1-11.15 Safety precautions for explosive cutters are contained in Chapter 2. Cutter spacings for
various scopes of sweep wire are contained in tables in Job Sheets. Maintenance procedures for
explosive cutters are contained in SW570-F0-MMO-040.
1-11.16 Cutter Assembly Mk 9, MX-10608/SLQ-38. Cutter Mk 9 (Figure 1-69), with ball bearing swivel
attached, is a mechanical end cutter that weighs approximately 58 pounds. The cutter is made from a
nonmagnetic material, with the exception of the cutting blade which is tungsten tool steel. The Cutter Mk 9
is interchangeable for port and starboard sweep wires. The elevating fin, guide, shackle pins, and cutting
blades must be changed with the left-hand blade being inserted first.
1-11.17 The Cutter Mk 9 can be rigged as either a port or starboard cutter, by reversing the elevating fin
and cutting blades. By laying the cutter on the deck with the jaw facing forward, the elevating fin side
down, and the cutting blades on top, the large shackle will point to the side of the ship for which the cutter
is rigged.
1-11.18 The Cutter Mk 9 connects the sweep wire to the otter and provides protection to the otter. For
operation and maintenance of the Cutter Mk 9, refer to SW570-F0-MMO-040. Cutting capacity is listed in
NWP 3-15.
1-11.19 Cutter Assembly, Mk 12 Mod 2, MX-10609/SLQ-38. Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 (Figure 1-70) is an
intermediate explosive cutter. When mounted on the elevating fin, the total weight is approximately 25.5
pounds. This cutter assembly is interchangeable from starboard to port sweeps without modification. The
cutter assembly is made from non-magnetic material.
1-11.20 The expendable parts are the cutting punch, anvil, punch shear pin, anvil screws, trip pin, and
Cartridge Mk 192.
1-11.21 The safety features are the hydraulic safety mechanism, plunger safety pin, breech safety pin,
and a 100-pound pressure requirement on the trip pin.
1-11.22 The Cutter Mk 12 is used against mooring wire and mooring chain. For operation and
maintenance of the Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2, refer to SW570-F0-MMO-040. Cutting capacity is listed in NWP
3-15.
1-11.23 Cutter Assembly, Mk 14 Mod 0, MX-10610/SLQ-38. Cutter Mk 14 Mod 0 (Figure 1-71) is an
intermediate explosive cutter. With four cutter bodies mounted on the elevating fin, it becomes a
quadruple cutter assembly weighing approximately 32.5 pounds. This cutter assembly is interchangeable
from starboard to port sweeps without modification. The cutter assembly is made from non-magnetic
material.
1-11.24 The expendable parts are the anvil, anvil screw, trip pin, cutting punch, punch shear pin, and
Cartridge Mk 152.
1-11.25
Safety features include hydraulic safety mechanism and a breech safety pin.
1-11.26 The Cutter Mk 14 is used against mooring wires only. For operation and maintenance of the
Cutter Mk 14 Mod 0, refer to SW570-F0-MMO-040. Cutting capacity is listed in NWP 3-15.
1-80
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-69. Mk 9 Cutter Assembly
1-81
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-70. Mk 12 Cutter Assembly
1-82
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-71. Mk 14 Cutter Assembly
1-83
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
1-11.27 Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, MS-10611/SLQ-38. Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0 (Figure 1-72) is a
cartridge-operated device designed to cut wire rope. It can be used to cut sweep and depressor wires and
towing bridle in emergencies. The cutter weighs approximately 15 pounds and is designed with a captive
cutting punch, so there is no free-flying projectile when it is fired with arresting disc above water. Care,
however, should be taken to keep all personnel clear of the wire when it is cut, as it may whip if cut under
tension.
For underwater use, the arresting disk is removed and personnel should not
be within 25 feet of the cutter.
1-11.28 The cutter must be secured on the wire rope by tightening the barrel against the die. The barrel
retaining unit thumbscrew must be tightened to prevent the cutter assembly from loosening because of
vibration of the wire.
1-11.29 The expendable parts are the punch, punch shear pin, cartridge, and arresting disc. The safety
feature is the safety pin on the firing pin trip. Two types of cartridges are used (Table 1-9), dependent on
wire sizes and environment. For operation and maintenance of the Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, refer to
SW570-F0-MMO-040. Cutting capacity is listed in NWP 3-15.
Table 1-9. Cartridge Types
CARTRIDGE WIRE ROPE SIZE INCLUSIVE
LOAD
HEAD COLOR
SIZE
USE
Mk 154-Heavy (Type H)
Red
1/4- to 51/64-inch
Above Water Use
Mk 155-Underwater Heavy (Type U)
Blue
1/4- to 51/64-inch
Underwater Use
1-11.30 Klein Cable Grip, MX-10612/SLQ-38. The Klein grip (Figure 1-73) is used on MCM class ships
to stop-off wire ropes and comes in two sizes, 3/16 to 1/2 inch and 1/2 to 3/4 inch. The Klein grip is made
of stainless steel and weighs approximately 6 to 8 pounds. The grips are used on the fantail to stop-off or
secure wire ropes, thereby preventing them from paying out.
1-11.31 Wedge Stop, 6375299. The wedge stop assembly (Figure 1-74) is a device designed
specifically to hold cutters, shackles, and blocks in place on a sweep wire. The wedge stop comprises two
wedge shaped inserts and a sleeve that are installed on the sweep wire at the point where the gear is to be
affixed. Two wedge inserts are placed over the sweep wire and a wedge stop installation tool is used to
hammer the sleeve over the top of the insert, securing it to the sweep wire.
1-84
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-72. Cutter Mk 15
Figure 1-73. Klein Grip
1-85
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-74. Wedge Stop
1-12
EXPLOSIVE ORDNANCE HANDLERS CERTIFICATION RECORD.
1-12.1 Table 1-10 shows the Levels of Certification and the personnel who are required to be certified to
handle the explosive cutters. Figure 1-75 illustrates the Record of Certification form to be used.
1-12.2 The Record of Certification shall be maintained in accordance with applicable instructions as
listed on the form.
Table 1-10. Levels of Certification for Explosives Handlers
CERTIFICATION LEVELS
PERSONNEL REQUIRING TRAINING
In training (IT)
All Fantail personnel
Team Member (TM)
Handlers, Rig Captain, Riggers, Safety Observer
Individual (I)
Handlers, Rig Captain, Riggers, Safety Observer
Team Leader (TL)
Rig Captain, Petty Officer in Charge, Safety Observer
Quality Assurance (QA)
Petty Officer in Charge, Safety Observer
Safety Observer (SO)
Gunners Mater, 1st Lieutenant, Chief Petty Officer in Charge
1-86
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-75. Certification Record Form
1-87
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
1-13
SUPPORT EQUIPMENT.
1-13.1 Components of the Boatswains Mate Tool Kit are listed in Table 1-11. Components of the
Electricians Mate Tool Kit are listed in Table 1-12 and Table 1-13 for the connections.
1-14
NAVIGATIONAL AIDS.
1-14.1 A list of navigational equipment used during sweep operations and test equipment used for the
AN/SLQ-37(V)3 system is contained in Table 1-14.
1-14.2 Master Reference Buoy (MRB) F Mk 6 Mod 0. The Master Reference Buoy (Figure 1-76) is a
temporary reference marker. It is used as the master reference marker during minesweeping and other
countermeasures operations to guide craft making successive tracks across an area. The marker is a
spar-type buoy with a long, cylindrical buoyant section of small diameter. The assembled buoy weighs
approximately 175 pounds and is approximately 47 feet long. It is usually configured with a radar reflector,
flags, and a flashing light attached to the upper tube for purposes of location and identification.
1-14.3 Dan Buoy Type 3 Mk 12 Mod 0. The Dan Buoy is utilized to provide a temporary navigational
reference. It is used principally for minesweepers making successive laps across an area, marking swept
channels, marking boundaries of areas to be swept, and marking positions of discovered mines. Dan
Buoys can be configured as Single Dan (Figure 1-77) or Double Dan (Figure 1-78). All Dan Buoys are
composed of three main functional assembly groups: marker assembly, float assembly, and mooring
assembly. Addition of the Xenon flasher and spherical radar reflector improves reliability and
detectability.
Table 1-11. Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
QUANTITY
NSN
1
Hammer, 2 lb
5120-00-187-1034
1
Kit, Tool, Mk 12
1075-00-340-6805
1
Kit, Tool, Mk 14
1075-00-024-0220
Marline
4020-00-240-2185
2
Marlinespike, 8-inch
5120-00-221-2731
2
Marlinespike, 16-inch
5120-00-288-7769
2
Pliers, linesman with cutters
5120-00-239-8251
2
Pliers, slip joint, 8-inch
5120-00-240-6217
1
Tape, electrical, roll
5970-00-061-6715
A/R
Wire, seizing, 1/16
4010-00-641-6185
Wrench, adjustable, 12-inch
5120-00-264-3794
A/R
2
1-88
NOMENCLATURE
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 1-12. Electricians Tool Kit
QUANTITY
NOMENCLATURE
NSN/PN
SPARE QUANTITY
(STOWED
SEPARATELY)
1 CN
Antiseize *
Open Purchase
———
4 EA
Boot (P/B)
5970-01-519-3342
1 EA
3 EA
Boot (S/B)
5970-01-519-3356
1 EA
12 EA
Brush, acid swabbing
7920-00-514-2417
———
2 EA
Clamp, hose 1-9/16 to 2-1/2-inch
4730-00-204-3481
———
2 EA
Clamp, hose 2-5/16 to 3-1/4-inch
4730-01-273-3672
———
12 EA
Clamp, hose 2-1/2 to 5-1/2-inch
4730-01-143-9460
———
6 EA
Clamp, hose 3-1/16 to 4-inch
4730-00-277-7132
———
2 EA
Clamp, hose 5-5/8 to 8-1/2-inch
4730-01-444-7836
———
9150-01-080-9652
———
4940-00-561-1002
———
*
2 EA
Grease, silicone
1 EA
Heat gun
4 EA
Heat Shrink
CRLS-5-24
———
4 EA
Heat Shrink
CRLS-6-24
———
Heat Shrink 48-inch x 3-1/2-inch-1.18 inch
0099-LL-H61-6311
———
Knife
5110-00-240-5943
———
Lacing, stocking
0099-LL-H61-6314
2 EA
8010-00-515-2487
———
Open Purchase
———
Open Purchase
———
AR
1 EA
———
1 PT
Lacquer, clear, spray *
*
1 PT
Liquid, insulation, spray
1 TU
Loctite *
1 EA
Lug, Lamitex
1075-00-372-6221
1 EA
1 EA
Marlinespike, 16-inch
5120-00-288-7769
———
26 EA
Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC
0099-LL-H61-6313
———
1 TU
Petrox *
Open Purchase
———
2 EA
Rasp, hand/bastard file, 10-inch
5110-00-233-9721
———
1 PG
Sandpaper, fine
5350-00-721-8116
5 PG
4 EA
Screw, cap, hex hd, aluminum, M16-2.0 x 30mm
0099-LL-H61-6312
2 EA
2 EA
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch
5305-00-226-9204
———
2 EA
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-inch
5305-00-226-9205
———
6 EA
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch
5305-00-226-9206
6 EA
2 EA
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch
5305-00-226-9208
———
See footnote at end of table.
1-89
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 1-12. Electricians Tool Kit (Continued)
QUANTITY
NSN/PN
SPARE QUANTITY
(STOWED
SEPARATELY)
2 EA
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 7-1/2-inch
0099-LL-H61-6310
2 EA
2 EA
Screwdriver, flat tip
5120-00-293-3309
———
1 EA
Sleeve (CK/P)
5970-01-519-3184
1 EA
1 EA
Sleeve (CS/P)
5970-01-519-3170
1 EA
6 EA
Sleeve (S/P)
5970-01-519-3176
2 EA
1 SE
Socket set, 1/2-inch drive
5120-00-081-2307
———
6 RO
Tape, black plastic
5970-00-150-2009
6 RO
6 RO
Tape, self-vulcanizing
5970-00-061-7136
6 RO
6 RO
Tape, insulation
5970-00-061-6715
6 RO
Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch
5310-00-614-3505
———
1 EA
Wrench, adjustable, 8-inch
5120-00-240-5328
———
1 EA
Wrench, adjustable 15-inch
5120-00-293-0008
———
1 SE
Wrench, Allen, set (SM)
5120-00-935-4641
———
8
*
NOMENCLATURE
Hazardous Material.
Table 1-13. Part of Electricians Tool Kit Stowed Separately
QUANTITY
AR
NOMENCLATURE
Tape, bitumized (Armor Bedding)
NSN/PN
SPARE QUANTITY
STOWED SEPARATELY
BT 2
1 RO
1 EA
Tester, spark gap
Model 725
———
4 EA
Pigtail, outboard
6150-01-519-0147
1 EA
1 EA
Connector, Special Y
5935-01-286-4849
———
Table 1-14. Minesweeping Support Equipment
DESIGNATION
PART NUMBER
NSN
Mk 6 Mod 0
5781238
2050-00-951-6400
Master Reference
Buoy
MRB
Type 3 Mk 12 Mod 0
6169242
2050-01-216-9251
Dan Buoy
Dan Buoy
TS-4144/P
6224282
4926-01-291-1662
Acoustic Test Set
Tester, Spark Gap
Acoustic Test Set
1-90
NOMENCLATURE
COMMON NAME
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
1-14.4 Acoustic Test Set TS-4144/P. The Acoustic Test Set (Figure 1-79) is used during PMS to
measure the acoustic output of the Acoustic Devices TB-27 and TB-26 employed for influence
minesweeping. Periodically, the acoustic output of each device is measured to ensure proper operation.
Procedures for its maintenance and use are contained in SW570-F0-MMO-040.
1-15
REFERENCE DATA.
1-15.1 AN/SLQ-37(V) Influence Minesweeping System Capabilities.
AN/SLQ-37(V)3 and AN/SLQ-38 systems are summarized in Table 1-15.
1-15.2
The capabilities of the
Reference Publications. Reference publications are summarized in Table 1-16.
1-15.3 Tools and Test Equipment. Special tools are required to support influence minesweeping.
Three pieces of test equipment, Acoustic Test Set TS-4144/P, Special Wrench, T-Handle Wrench
5100-01-406-6940 PN 5971746 are utilized during Acoustic PMS and the Spark Gap Tester Model 725
during Magnetic PMS.
1-15.4 Safe Working Loads. Safe working loads for influence minesweeping equipment are listed in
Table 1-17.
1-15.5
Weight of SMCM Equipment. Weights of SMCM equipment are listed in Table 1-18.
1-91
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-76. Master Reference Buoy
1-92
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-77. Single Dan Buoy
1-93
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-78. Double Dan Buoy
1-94
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 1-79. Acoustic Test Set TS-4144/P
1-95
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 1-15. Capabilities
ITEM
Minesweeping
CAPABILITY
Neutralize Influence mines
Neutralize Moored mines
Minehunting
None
Clearance probability
Exploratory/Expeditionary - minimal to none
Clandestine/covert - none
Assault lane clearance - deep water clearance
AOA clearance - high probability of clearance
Post-aggression - high probability of clearance
Ordnance carried
Minesweep Cutters Mk 9, 12, 13, 14, and 15 (as required)
Minesweeping speed
Mechanical - 11.5 kt max 1
Acoustic
TB-26 - 8 kt max
TB-27 - 10 kt max
Magnetic
M Mk 5(a) - 10 kt max
M Mk 6(a) - 8 kt max
M Mk 6(h) - 7.5 kt max
M Mk 7(b) - 6.5 kt max
Combination - 8 kt max
Minesweeping Regions
Deep Water - greater than 200 ft
Shallow Water - 40 to 200 ft
1
1-96
Gear can be towed at 11.5 kt, but can be unstable around 10.5 kt.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 1-16. Reference Publications
PUBLICATION NUMBER
TITLE
SW570-F0-MMO-040
MCM Operation and Maintenance Manual
SW570-F0-MMM-020
Operation and Maintenance SG-1224A, Acoustic Control Unit (ACU)
SW565-AB-MMM-030 (C)
Waveforms, Specifications, Magnetic and Acoustic Influences
SG-1224A Acoustic Control Unit (ACU)
SW565-AB-MMM-040
Operation and Maintenance CV-3846 Power Converter Unit (PCU).
S6265-AP-MMA-010/66076
Operational and Maintenance Magnetic Minesweep DC Generator
S9086-KC-STM-010
Naval Ship's Technical Manual - Chapter 300
S9086-T4-STM-010
Naval Ship's Technical Manual - Chapter 589
S9086-UU-STM-010
Naval Ship's Technical Manual - Chapter 613
S9086-AA-STM-010
Naval Ship's Technical Manual - Chapter 001
S9314-CS-MMA-010
Non-Magnetic AC Generator (Pulse Fog Charger)
NWP 12-5
Tactical Action Officer Handbook
NWP 14
Underway Replenishment Hardware and Equipment Manual
NWP 15-3
Explosive Ordnance Disposal
NWP 3-15 (Series)
Mine Countermeasures Operations
NWP 3-15 (Series)
MCM Planning and Procedures (General Instructions)
NWP 3-15 (Series)
MCM Planning and Procedures - Data Appendices
NWP 3-15 (Series)
MCM Planning and Procedures - Data Supplement
NWP 3-15 (Series)
Mine Countermeasures Operations
NWP 3-15 (Series)
Mining Operations
NWP 3-15 (Series)
Underwater Mine Countermeasures Operations
NWP 65-10
MCM-1 Class Tactical Manual
NWP 68-1
Passive Mine Countermeasures Systems and Tactics
AHP 1
Allied Navigational Information in Time of War - Q System
AHP 1 Supp 1
NATO Supplement to Allied Q Message System
US SUPP TO AHP 7 VOL 3
Dormant Q Message Publication
APP 4
Allied Maritime Messages
AMP 14
Protection of Vessels from Electromagnetic Mines (or Electromagnetic
Silencing)
ATP 1 Vol. 1
Allied Maritime Tactical Insts and Procedures
ATP 1 Vol. 2
Allied Maritime Tactical Signal and Maneuver Book
ATP 6 Vol. 1
Allied Doctrine of Mine Warfare - Policy and Principles
1-97
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 1-16. Reference Publications (Continued)
PUBLICATION NUMBER
TITLE
ATP 6 Vol. 2
Allied Doctrine of Mine Warfare - Planning and Evaluation of Mine
Warfare Principles
ATP 6 (B) Vol II
Mine Countermeasures Operations Planning and Evaluation
ATP 24
Tactical Instructions and Procedures or Conduct of Mine
Countermeasures Operations
ATP 24 (B) Vol I
Mine Countermeasures Tactics and Execution
AXP 5 MW Supp
Mine Warfare Supplement to NATO Experimental Tactics and
Amplifying Tactical Instructions
CINCLANTFLT OPORD 2000-91
Commander In Chief, US Atlantic Fleet OPORD 2000-91
COMINEWARCOM OPORD 2000-92
Commander, Mine Warfare Command OPORD 2000-92
COMINEWARCOM TACMEMO
MZ6010-1-90 OF 31 MAY 1990
Q-Route Survey
COMUSMARDEZPAC OPLAN
5000-86
Deployed Ships Only
COMNAVSURFLANTINST 5100.4
(Series)
Electrical Safety and Tool Issue Programs for Forces Afloat
FXP 5
Amphibious Warfare (AMW), Mine Warfare (MIW), and Naval Special
Warfare (NSW), Exercises (U)
ONI 2660H-002-yr
Naval Mine Recognition Guide
OPNAVINST 8950.2
Magnetic Silencing
MCM-1
Combat Systems Doctrine
MINEWARFARE PILOTS
Q-Route Survey Data (SP1000 series)
TA #15-yr
MCM Threat Assessment
N/A
UNITED STATES COAST PILOTS
N/A
TIDE AND CURRENTS
N/A
FLEET GUIDES
N/A
NCSC notebook of Mine Countermeasures Experimental Tactics and
NCSC notebook Supplement (U) (distributed by COMINEWARCOM
ltr ser N4A/S001 of 2 Jan 1985)
N/A
MINE WARFARE PLANNING CHARTS MCMCH81000 (series)
applicable areas Q Route Survey Data
NAVSEA OP 4
Ammunition and Explosives Afloat
1-98
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 1-17. Safe Working Loads
COMPONENT
SAFE WORKING LOAD (LBS)
Stern Cranes (port and stbd) Articulated
6000
5/8 inch Sweep Wire (7 x 7)
16,000 (Breaking strength 32,000)
5/8 inch Depressor Wire (7 x 7)
16,000 (Breaking strength 32,000)
1/2 inch Wire (6 x 19)
8,400 (21,000 Breaking strength)
5/16 inch Wire (6 x 19)
4,350 (8,700 Breaking strength)
Table 1-18. Weight of SMCM Equipment
COMPONENT
IN AIR WEIGHT (LB)
IN WATER WEIGHT (LB)
TB-27 Tow Body
flooded weight
1,300
1,850
500
TB-26 Tow Body
flooded weight
2,850
4,200
900
Size 0 Float
950
Reserve buoyancy 3,300
Size 1 Float
900
Reserve buoyancy 1,500
Multiplane Kite
rigged as Otter
rigged as Depressor
500
670
630
N/A
N/A
N/A
Type 3 Dan Buoy
rigged
Danforth Anchor
counterweight
106
100
30
48
Net buoyancy 30
N/A
20
28
MRB F Mk 6 Mod 0
Anchor clump
Danforth anchor
counterweight
175
300
30
85
N/A
N/A
N/A
60 to 65
CA-1453 Coax Cable
10,800
N/A
N/A
CA-1454 S-Cable
1,940
N/A
N/A
K-4 Electrode
450
N/A
Acoustic Power Tow Cable
5,600
N/A
1-99/(1-100 blank)
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
CHAPTER 2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
2-1
INTRODUCTION.
2-1.1 Purpose. This chapter provides information relating to the safe use and operation in the
AN/SLQ-37(V)3 Influence Minesweeping System and AN/SLQ-38 Mechanical Minesweeping System. In
addition to safety issues discussed in this manual, forces afloat should comply with Navy Safety
Precautions for Forces Afloat, OPNAVINST 5100.19 (series) Navy Occupational Safety and Health
Program Manual, OPNAVINST 5100.23 (series), and Ammunition Afloat NAVSEA OP 4.
2-1.2 Scope. Mine countermeasures demand the employment of a wide variety of specialized
equipment. This variety is dictated by the various types of mines that mine countermeasures forces are
called upon to sweep. Minesweeping equipment may be subdivided into two basic types: mechanical
gear, which depends upon physical contact between the sweep and the mine or its attachments; and
influence gear, which is designed to actuate influence mines by simulating the influence signature of a
ship’s magnetic, acoustic, pressure, or a combination of influences. Familiarity with the various types and
configurations of minesweeping equipment, together with the relevant safety precautions, is essential for
the successful completion of the mine countermeasures task.
2-1.3
Basic Safety Concepts.
GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES
The following general safety notices supplement the specific warnings and cautions appearing elsewhere
in this manual. They are precautions that must be understood and applied during operation and
maintenance of the equipment covered herein. Refer to OPNAVINST 5100.19, Navy Safety Precautions
for Forces Afloat for any situations that are not covered in the general or specific safety precautions.
DO NOT REPAIR OR ADJUST ALONE
Under no circumstances should repair or adjustment of energized equipment be attempted alone. The
immediate presence of someone capable of rendering aid is required. Before making adjustments, be
sure to protect against grounding. Adjustments should be made with the other hand free and clear of
equipment. Even when power has been removed from equipment circuits, dangerous potentials may
exist due to retention of charges by capacitors. Circuits must be grounded and all capacitors discharged
before attempting repairs.
TEST EQUIPMENT
Ensure test equipment is within calibration, if applicable, and is in good condition. If a test meter must be
held, ground the case of the meter before starting measurement. Do not touch live equipment or
personnel working on live equipment when holding a test meter. Some types of measuring devices should
not be grounded and should not be held when taking measurements.
ELECTRICAL TAG-OUT INSTRUCTIONS
Maintenance and operating personnel shall be familiar with electrical tag-out procedures. Colored tags
(red for DANGER and yellow for CAUTION) shall be posted on circuit breaker power panels and
equipment to alert personnel that an electrical power shutdown or equipment related problem exists. The
red tag warns personnel that to operate the equipment could result in personnel injury or death. The
yellow tag cautions personnel that to operate the equipment could result in damage to the equipment. A
tag-out log and tagging procedures are maintained in the Engineering Control Station.
2-1
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
RESUSCITATION
Personnel working with or near high voltages should be familiar with modern methods of resuscitation.
Such information may be obtained from the Bureau of Medicine and Surgery.
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
This equipment contains circuit card assemblies sensitive to damage by Electrostatic Discharge (ESD).
Use ESD precautionary procedures contained in DOD-STD-1686 and DOD-HDBK-263 when touching,
removing, or inserting circuit card assemblies containing sensitive parts.
2-2
SYSTEM SAFETY ISSUES.
2-2.1
2-2
General Safety Precautions.
a.
Within one hour of any minesweeping operation, all personnel concerned shall be briefed on the
particular operation and given a thorough safety review.
b.
Ensure proper functioning of ship’s degaussing system during all minesweeping operations in
accordance with ship’s instruction.
c.
The following general safety precautions are pertinent to all minesweeping operations:
(1)
Station a responsible safety observer on the fantail during all streaming and recovery
operations.
(2)
Station a hospital corpsman capable of rendering first aid on the 01 level during all
streaming and recovery operations.
(3)
During all minesweeping operations, the petty officer in charge of the minesweeping
operation shall position himself to ensure he holds positive or relay communications with
all winch and crane operators.
(4)
All personnel working on the fantail while the gear is moving shall wear Mk 1 vest type life
preservers, with the exception of winch operators and personnel working on the 01 level
and above.
(5)
Personnel shall avoid the wearing of loose clothing that may catch in the gear. Long sleeve
shirts or coveralls shall be buttoned and pants shall be tucked into socks.
(6)
Personnel assigned to the sweep detail working on the fantail shall wear approved safety
shoes (ANSI Z41.1).
(7)
Remove all jewelry, wrist watches, and keys. Authorized personnel may carry an
appropriate knife and small marlinespike for routine work and for use in the event of an
emergency.
(8)
Personnel assigned to the sweep detail shall wear construction-type safety helmets with
quick-acting break away chin straps fastened and worn under the chin. Phone talkers shall
wear standard phone talker helmets. Helmets shall be color-coded as follows:
(a)
White - Officers/CPOs and supervisors.
(b)
Yellow - Rig captains.
(c)
Green - Signalmen/Phone talkers.
(d)
Brown - Winch operators.
(e)
Red - Line-throwing Gunner’s Mates (or bolo heavers).
(f)
White with red cross - Corpsmen.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
(9)
(g)
Blue - Deck riggers and line handlers.
(h)
Grey - All others (electrician, etc.).
Line-throwing Gunner’s Mates shall wear red jerseys or vests. Signalmen shall wear green
jerseys or vests. Jerseys should be worn under life jackets, and vests over life jackets.
(10) Phone talkers on the intership phone shall not fasten their neck straps.
(11) Stay inboard of all gear that is being prepared or handled for streaming or recovery.
(12) Keep out of the bights of lines and wires.
(13) Never stand on, step over, or straddle a line or wire that is, or is subject to be, under
tension.
(14) Never permit a wire or a line to run through a man’s hands. Personnel handling messenger
lines or inhaul lines shall handle the lines hand-over-hand and may wear gloves.
(15) When personnel are required to work over, through, or outboard of lifelines, they shall wear
the standard approved safety harness with an attached working line fixed to a solid object.
In addition, the dyna brake shall be attached to the safety harness and tended by a man at
all times.
(16) Keep all gear not in actual use stowed and well-secured in the proper place to avoid missile
hazard and magnetic compromise.
(17) Keep all nonessential personnel clear of the fantail. After gear is streamed and stopped
off, clear the fantail of all other personnel.
(18) Close all fantail hatches to ensure that maximum watertight integrity is maintained during
all sweeping operations.
(19) Know the capabilities and limitations of all equipment.
(20) All hands shall be instructed in man overboard procedures.
(21) Rig rigid hull inflatable boat (RHIB) ready for man overboard.
(22) All hands shall be instructed in the procedures and hazards of emergency break away.
(23) Observe all the precautions associated with the practice of good seamanship.
(24) Some procedures involve the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are
familiar with the hazards listed in the specific manufacturer’s Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed.
(25) When using grapnel hook, ensure at least two prongs of the hook engage lifting bail.
2-2.2
Minesweeping Communications.
a.
For safety and efficiency, it is essential that positive communication be maintained between the
bridge and fantail at all times during minesweeping operations.
b.
Whenever the minesweeping detail is set, the phone circuit should be manned by a talker
extremely knowledgeable in minesweeping terminology and phone procedures. At all times, the
bridge must be kept informed of the situation on the fantail.
2-2.3 Moored Minesweeping Safety Precautions. The following safety precautions are applicable to
moored minesweeping:
a.
Station two hosemen and one phone talker as mine lookouts on the bow to spot floating or
shallow moored mines. They should have a fire hose charged and ready for use. Ensure that
2-3
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
they are properly briefed on their duties to report a mine sighting immediately and to state the
relative bearing and approximate distance. If a mine is sighted, proceed as follows:
(1)
If the mine is floating, utilize the fire hose. Direct the water stream into the water next to the
mine in a manner to force the mine away from the ship. Never direct water stream at the
mine directly and attempt to wash it away.
(2)
If the mine is shallow-moored, the ship must effect evasive maneuvering.
b.
Never permit personnel to stand or work under a suspended load.
c.
Never permit personnel to stand between a suspended swinging load and the taffrail or any solid
object.
d.
Keep all gear working while streaming. Never allow way to come off gear, particularly in shallow
water. Danger of gear becoming dead in the water is most likely during turns. Close observation
of the float is the best safeguard.
(1)
Keep the float abaft the beam.
(2)
Prevent the float from crossing the ship’s wake.
(3)
Keep tension on the sweep wire above 500 pounds.
e.
Never bring cutters, otters, or depressors close aboard without examining them for mines fouled
in the gear.
f.
Never permit personnel to lean over, reach over, or handle sweep or depressor wires while
wires are under tension or are subject to tension.
g.
Leather gloves are permitted at the discretion of the supervisor.
h.
When using a grapnel hook to recover floats, otters or depressors, two or more prongs must be
engaged in the lifting bail.
2-2.4 Explosive Cutter Safety Precautions. Precautions applicable to the safe use and proper handling
of explosive cutters are as follows:
2-4
a.
Always treat cutters as a loaded gun. Always point cutters in a safe direction, away from
personnel.
b.
When stowing cutters on deck in preparation for use, face anvil outboard. Safety pins shall be in
place.
c.
Disarm cutters when it is determined that they will not be needed. Ensure all cutters are not
cocked prior to storage.
d.
Always fit a safety pin in a cocked, armed cutter and ensure that the pin cannot fall out. Do not
remove the safety pin until the cutter is positioned on the sweep wire. Upon recovery, replace
the safety pin before removing the cutter or any debris from the wire. Ensure the safety pin is
installed in the Cutter Mk 15 before removing the cutter from the sweep wire.
e.
The Cutter Mk 15 shall use an arresting disc in all above-water operations to absorb any excess
energy of the cutting punch. In underwater operations, the arresting disc must not be used; the
water absorbs the excess energy. In an underwater operation, an area within a 25-foot radius of
the activity shall be clear of personnel.
f.
If a cutter shows evidence of having fired, and the cutting punch is still intact while the cutter is
still on the sweep wire, immediately cock the firing plunger, remove the breech block, extract the
cartridge carefully, and jettison the cartridge immediately.
g.
Keep hands and body clear of the anvil.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
h.
Ensure the correct explosive cartridge is used.
i.
Handle the stock cartridges in accordance with appropriate safety precautions.
j.
When the cutter is released after placement on the sweep wire, veer the sweep wire as soon as
practical and continue placement of needed cutters (except Mk 15). Expedite recovery until
cutters are close aboard and safety pins can be inserted.
k.
Do not modify or alter a cutter in any way; this may result in casualties to personnel and damage
to the cutter.
l.
To prevent accidental firing of the Cutter Mk 15, ensure the firing (trip) lanyards do not become
entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level.
m.
Safety lanyards (tag lines) shall be used on all cutters when placed on sweep wires and
removed after cutter attachment.
n.
Cutter handlers must ensure cutters are staged and handled in a manner which provides visual
accessibility to the safety pins at all times.
o.
Cutter staging area will be roped off during arming/disarming and stowage of loaded cutters.
p.
To avoid injury to personnel, divers should not be within 25 feet of a cutter.
2-2.5 Influence Minesweeping Safety Precautions. The following safety precautions are applicable to
influence minesweeping:
a.
Obtain permission from CO/OOD prior to entering drum area.
b.
Check for loose gear in the drum area.
c.
Stay clear of the drum when it is in motion.
d.
Ensure operator does not turn the drum until he has ascertained that:
(1)
All personnel are clear.
(2)
All running parts of the drum are clear.
Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power
Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the
drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when
handling cable to prevent burns.
e.
Prior to servicing the magnetic minesweeping terminal box or APC receptacle, or connecting, or
disconnecting minesweeping cable or APC cable, the following precautions shall be observed:
(1)
After installation of Cutters Mk 15, drum area crew will enter or exit the drum area only
through QAWTD 1-90-2.
2-5
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
(2)
Secure power to the terminal box.
(3)
Wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000) type electrical rubber gloves.
(4)
Ensure another person is present who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock.
(5)
Ensure SAFE/RUN switch is in the SAFE position.
(6)
Check multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.
(7)
Check to ensure there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range).
(8)
Check multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.
(9)
Using an approved-type grounding rod, discharge any static electrical charge from
terminal box and magnetic minesweeping cable. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report.
(10) Sand the male and female contact plugs prior to terminal box connection.
f.
Keep all personnel clear of the fantail and acoustic or magnetic power cables when pulsing the
gear.
g.
Inspect all power cables upon recovery following each normal streaming, and after known or
suspected grounding or collision. Correct defects prior to further use.
h.
Wrap all cable towing stockings with two or more layers of No. 4 canvas secured with marline or
tape when stowing the cable on the drum. Remove all shackles from the bridle and position the
preventer pendants as flat as possible against the cables.
2-2.6 Cold Weather Precautions. The following safety precautions are applicable to cold weather
minesweeping:
a.
Avoid excessive handling of the cable. Cold weather tends to stiffen the cable and care must be
taken to prevent the insulation from cracking or splitting. The temperature of the cable should be
at least 5 °F before it is streamed. Use portable electric heaters to warm the cable. During
recovery, apply heat to prevent icing and assist drying. Any ice which forms during recovery
should be carefully removed, and the cable dried as much as possible as it is reeled in to prevent
it from sticking together on the drum.
b.
Cover deck machinery with canvas covers to prevent the accumulation of ice and snow.
Operate machinery periodically. Prior to use, inspect for blocks of ice which may jam moving
parts. Where practicable, hand turn or jack equipment and comply with cold weather lubrication
charts, ensuring that the lubricants are water-free.
c.
Prior to streaming and recovery, clear the stern roller chocks of ice and snow and ensure that
they turn freely.
d.
Before operating the acoustic devices at temperatures below 20 °F, apply heat to the devices
internally. Two electrically energized 500-watt strip heaters placed in the hammer boxes for at
least 20 minutes before the devices are operated will prevent freezing.
2-2.7 Man Overboard. The following procedures are applicable in the event that a man falls overboard
during minesweeping operations:
2-6
a.
Man overboard instructions will be included in the MCM Commander’s operation order.
b.
The ship losing the man and all minecraft within 4,000 yards shall de-energize all influence gear.
This action will considerably reduce the possibility of a mine explosion.
c.
Personnel shall be instructed to swim toward the sweep gear, which provides, in effect, a
ready-made life raft. They shall be warned, however, to approach gear with caution.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
d.
The following measures are to be taken immediately by the ship losing the man:
(1)
Drop a life buoy.
(2)
Sound six short blasts on the ship’s whistle.
(3)
Report as rapidly as possible to the OTC and to ships in formation.
(4)
By day, hoist flag Oscar where it can best be seen.
(5)
By night, display two pulsating red lights arranged vertically, and fire one white flare.
e.
The short length of the ship and its great inertia against a turn while sweeping, render rudder and
engine maneuvering useless for the man and dangerous for the ship. Such action should
normally not be considered.
f.
A service/utility craft, mine destruction/recovery ship, or a minesweeper without gear streamed
(if available), should proceed immediately to the man’s assistance. If none of the foregoing is
available, the best-placed minesweeper should be directed to effect the rescue and to take the
necessary sweep-handling action to render the ship manageable enough to lower a boat in the
vicinity of the man.
g.
Ships shall have a fully equipped rigid hull inflatable boat (RHIB) rigged and ready for lowering
during all minesweeping operations. The minimum inventory for RHIB equipment used during
SMCM operations is listed in Table 2-1.
2-3
CLEARING MINES FOULED IN GEAR.
2-3.1
General Information.
a.
A mine fouled in gear may occur when a moored mine cable is cut and jams in the cutter, otter, or
depressor, or when an uncut assembly is dragging in the gear.
b.
The procedures are primarily designed to protect the minesweeper involved from the danger of
the mine exploding close aboard, and to eliminate the hazard which floating mines present to
other vessels. When a fouled mine is located, the sweep wire should always be veered to a safe
scope. If the situation permits, the minesweeper should proceed to a suitable dumping area
before attempting to clear the mine. The presence of a mine in the gear can often be
ascertained by noting the irregular behavior of the float.
2-3.2
a.
Single Ship Sweep.
Perform the following actions in sequence until the mine clears the gear:
(1)
Clear the formation to safe water and increase to maximum speed.
90-degree turns away from and toward the gear.
Make several
(2)
At maximum speed, veer the sweep wire as rapidly as possible, and then apply the brake
hard. This procedure, repeated several times, often shakes a mine clear of the gear.
(3)
If the mine cannot be cleared by steps a and b, tow the fouled mine into shallow water,
heave in as much sweep wire as is safe, and cut the sweep or depressor wire as
necessary. The mine may separate from the gear, allowing recovery of mine and sweep
gear by trained mine disposal personnel.
(4)
If the mine does not float, mark the location for additional sweeping.
2-7
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 2-1. Rigid Hull Inflatable Boat Equipment for SMCM Operations
EQUIPMENT 1
QUANTITY
Operating Instructions/Safety Precautions
1 Each
Boat Hook, 8-Foot
1 Each
Oars
2 Each
Gas Can (Non-magnetic)
2 Each
Air Horn
1 Each
Pump
1 Each
Repair/Patch Kit
1 Each
Semaphore Set
1 Set
First Aid Kit
1 Kit
Battle Lanterns
2 Each
Blankets (Casualty Control)
2 Each
Swimmer Survival Tending Line
1 Each
Kapok Heaving Line
2 Each
Fire Extinguisher
1 Each
EN Tool Kit
1 Kit
Spark Plugs
2 Each
Spark Plug Wrench
1 Each
Magnetic Compass
1 Each
Flares, Signal
as required
Radio or Walkie Talkie (2-Way)
1
When possible, equipment should be non-magnetic.
2-3.3
a.
2-8
1 Each
Improved Deep-Moored Sweep (IDMS) and Team Deep Sweep.
When a mine is fouled in the gear during a twin ship sweep, the following procedures are
recommended:
(1)
Maneuver with alternate changes of course and speed by each vessel and, at the same
time, rapidly heave in and veer sweep wire.
(2)
Slip the sweep. If the mine is fouled at the shear coupling, attempt to part the sweep at the
shear coupling. All hands should stand clear of the sweep wire during this operation.
(3)
Reverse course with both vessels turning 180 degrees away from each other in as short a
space as possible.
(4)
If the above methods are not successful, recover as much of the sweep gear as
circumstances permit and cut the remainder free. If the mine case does not rise to the
surface, buoy the location for resweeping.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
2-4
OPERATIONAL BRIEF AND SAFETY SUMMARY.
2-4.1 Prior to commencement of minesweeping operations an Operational Brief and Safety Summary is
conducted in CIC. Afterward a safety brief is conducted for all personnel assigned to sweep detail.
2-4.2 Operational Brief. Figure 2-1 is a facsimile of the brief given in CIC. Actual briefings may vary
depending upon operation being conducted. This brief is not intended to replace other briefings.
2-4.3
2-5
Operational Safety Summary Emergency Procedures.
a.
Man Overboard. All shipboard influence sweeping systems shall be secured as well as those on
all surrounding ships within 4,000 yards. The bridge manual plot will plot the man and PINS will
immediately mark the ship’s position. Unless otherwise directed, the ship will recover the man
with the RHIB.
b.
Steering or Propulsion Casualty. The OOD will order the starting of any off-line propulsion
engines or steering units and will attempt to maintain ship’s course and speed. CIC will navigate
the ship into safe waters. If it is not possible to maintain adequate tension on wires and the
possibility of fouling the sweep gear in the screws exists, the Commanding Officer may consider
ordering the sweep gear scuttled.
c.
General Quarters. If General Quarters is sounded, all hands shall man their Battle Stations with
the exception of the fantail POIC, a Rig Captain, and the winch operator and Minesweep
Electrician. These personnel will stop off the gear in a safe condition, attach Cutters Mk 15 to
the gear, and man the pull cords should the Commanding Officer order the sweep gear scuttled.
d.
PINS Casualty. The TAO will immediately inform the OOD and the conn and navigation will be
shifted to the bridge. The OOD will navigate the ship clear of the mined area using bridge
manual plot.
e.
GPS Casualty. If GPS FOM is greater than or equal to 4, or if GPS fails, the ship will navigate
using PINS via programmed hierarchy. The TAO or MCM Evaluator, if applicable, may
recommend suspension of minesweeping if remaining system inputs do not allow for accurate
navigation. NOTE: If GPS FOM returns to FOM 2 after it has been removed from the PINS filter,
it shall not be reentered until the ship is clear of the Mined Area.
f.
Loss of Ship’s Power. The conn and navigation will be shifted to the bridge. All CIC equipment
will be secured. When power has been restored and CCS reports that the plant is stable, the
MCM Evaluator will begin directing which equipment is to be brought up.
g.
Fire in CIC. All personnel will evaluate the space except for two designated personnel who will
remain to fight the fire. All other personnel shall muster on the 02 level port side. The OOD will
call away the Flying Squad to respond to the casualty and may sound General Quarters.
h.
Degaussing Casualty. The degaussing electrician shall take control of degaussing from the
bridge and make manual adjustments as necessary, based on ship’s course, until the ship is
clear of the Mined Area.
MAINTENANCE SAFETY SUMMARY.
2-5.1 Maintenance safety summaries are included in technical manuals as prescribed for individual
pieces of equipment and are not repeated herein. A list of equipment/systems and their associated
operation and maintenance manual is contained in Table 2-2.
2-9
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
MINESWEEPING BRIEF
Date: ___________________
A. Overview.
1. This minesweeping evolution will be conducted in accordance with the following
references:
a. NWP 3-15 (Series)
b. SW570-F0-MMO-A70
c. FXP-1
2. All personnel involved are responsible for familiarizing themselves with theses
procedures.
3. The ship is tasked to conduct magnetic/acoustic/combination influence minesweeping
operations in Mined Area _______ in the ______________________________ OPAREA.
4. Threat:
a. Type: Moored/bottom sea mines.
b. Actuation method: Pressure acoustic magnetic __________________.
5. Objective: _____________________________.
6. Watchbill Assignments. Personnel assignments will be per the IM/IIM watchbills.
7. The sweep order for this evolution will be reviewed by the First Lieutenant later in this
brief.
B. Environment Weather.
Wind: ________ Knots from ________ Degrees True
Seas: ________ to ________ Feet
Set/Drift: ________ Degrees at ________ Knots
Visibility: ________ Miles
Water Depth: ________ Feet at ________________________ (Datum)
Figure 2-1. Minesweeping Brief (Typical) (Sheet 1 of 3)
2-10
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Bottom Type: Sand/Shell Mud Rock
Smooth Moderate Rough
NOTE: True wind, set, and drift shall be computed every 30 minutes while inside the Mined Area.
C. Preparations.
1. The following actions shall be completed prior to entering the mined area:
a. The ship will set restricted maneuvering.
b. Material Condition Zebra will be set (main deck and below, with the exception of
ventilation, which will be maintained in the normal configuration.)
c. The MCM Evaluation will assume the Conn in CIC once the ship is manned and ready
for Condition IIM, sweep gear is deployed and stopped off, the ship’s position is on the
vertical plot, and two fixes have been taken and compared between CIC and the
bridge. If fix comparisons do not correlate, the errors must be consistent.
NOTE: The OOD and MCM Evaluator must ensure that the ship remains well clear of the mined
area while the above actions are being completed.
D. Navigation.
1. Primary navigation will be by the PINS TAC DISPLAY/vertical plot. Secondary navigation
will be by the PINS vertical plot/CIC manual plot. Tertiary navigation will be by the bridge
manual plot. The PINS navigation will be by GPS through FOM 3: if the GPS FOM is
greater than or equal to 4, GPS will be removed from the filter. The ship may consider
suspension of minesweeping if remaining system inputs fail to allow for accurate
navigation.
2. Fix intervals for the bridge will be as follows:
a. Every 3 minutes while in or within 600 yards of the mined area.
b. Every 30 seconds if navigation shifts to the bridge while inside or within 600 yards of
the mined area.
3. Track data:
a. Number of tracks to be run is _______.
b. Number of runs per track is ________.
c. Track spacing is ________ yards.
d. Sweeper offset will be ________ yards.
e. Track sequence will be skip track/progressive, with first track to be determined based
on environmental effects (wind, set/drift.)
Figure 2-1. Minesweeping Brief (Typical) (Sheet 2 of 3)
2-11
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
f.
Plot scales:
Variable (TAC DISPLAYS)
________ (Vertical plot)
________ (Bridge manual plot)
4. Maneuvering Restrictions:
a. Required speeds:
(1) Stream speed: ______ knots.
(2) Sweep speed: ______ knots.
(3) Recovery speed: ______ knots.
(4) Kite/float: ______ knots.
(5) Acoustic device: ______ knots.
(6) Mag Tail: ______ knots.
NOTE: Speeds may be adjusted as necessary to provide for proper, safe riding of the sweep gear.
b. Turns are to be made with extreme care using moderate rudder angles, usually not
greater than 12 degrees, taking care to maintain proper sweep wire tension.
c. During turns, sweep gear should be continuously monitored visually to ensure that
gear rides correctly (mag cable does not chafe on sweep wire, mag cable and APC do
not become fouled, etc.)
d. Turns should be made in the direction toward the sweep gear.
F. Equipment Limitations and Errors.
Master Gyrocompass: ________ E/W by __________________.
Stbd Repeater: ________ E/W.
Port Repeater: ________ E/W.
Radar: ________ Yds. long/short.
G. Degraded/OOC Equipment:
Figure 2-1. Minesweeping Brief (Typical) (Sheet 3 of 3)
2-12
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 2-2. Documents Utilized for Installation of Minesweeping Equipment
EQUIPMENT
DOCUMENT
Power Converter Unit
SW565-AB-MMM-040
Automatic Control Unit
SW565-AB-MMM-020
DC Contactor Panel; DC Ship’s Service Switchboard; Minesweeping
Control Switchboard
S9324-B5-MMO-010
Dynamic Braking Unit
SW565-AB-MMM-040
Surface MCM Portable Fantail Equipment
SW570-F0-MMO-040
2-6
HAZARDOUS COMPONENTS.
2-6.1 The following paragraphs identify and briefly describe the hazardous components used with the
minesweeping system, and summarize the general handling precautions for such components.
2-6.2 Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g). No specific safety precautions need to be observed when handling
the device by hand. If device is to be machine hoisted, observe safety precautions for deck safety and
weight handling equipment.
2-6.3 Acoustic Device, TB-27/SLQ-37(V). This equipment employs voltages which are dangerous and
may be fatal if contacted by operating personnel. Extreme caution should be exercised when working on
the equipment. Although every practical safety precaution has been incorporated in this equipment, all
rules must be strictly observed.
2-6.3.1 Keep away from live circuits. Operating personnel must at all times observe safety regulations.
Do not make adjustments inside equipment with power supply on. To avoid casualties, always cut off
power and ground circuits prior to touching them. Verify that the system is de-energized using an
appropriate electrical instrument (Simpson 260 or equivalent).
2-6.3.2 Do not service or adjust alone. Under no circumstances should any person reach within the
enclosure for purpose of servicing or adjusting the equipment without the immediate presence of
assistance of another person capable of rendering aid.
2-6.4 Acoustic Device, TB-26/SLQ-37(V). Do not, under any circumstances, attempt to remove covers,
connector, or drain plug from the unit while internal pressure exceeds atmospheric pressure.
2-6.4.1 This equipment employs voltages which are dangerous and may be fatal if contacted by
operating personnel. Extreme caution should be exercised when working on the equipment. Although
every practical safety precaution has been incorporated in this equipment, all rules must be strictly
observed.
2-6.4.2 Keep away from live circuits. Operating personnel must at all times observe safety regulations.
Do not make adjustments inside equipment with power supply on. To avoid casualties, always cut off
power and ground circuits prior to touching them. Verify that the system is de-energized using an
appropriate electrical instrument (Simpson 260 or equivalent).
2-13
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
2-6.4.3 Do not service or adjust alone. Under no circumstances should any person reach within the
enclosure for purpose of servicing or adjusting the equipment without the immediate presence of
assistance of another person capable of rendering aid.
2-6.5 Cable, Acoustic Power (Buoyant), CX-13260/SLQ-37(V). This equipment employs voltages
which are dangerous and may be fatal if contacted by operating personnel. Extreme caution should be
exercised when working on the equipment. Although every practical safety precaution has been
incorporated in this equipment, all rules must be strictly observed.
2-6.5.1 Keep away from live circuits. Operating personnel must at all times observe safety regulations.
Do not make adjustments inside equipment with power supply on. To avoid casualties, always cut off
power and ground circuits prior to touching them. Verify that the system is de-energized using an
appropriate electrical instrument (Simpson 260 or equivalent).
2-6.5.2 Do not service or adjust alone. Under no circumstances should any person reach within the
enclosure for purpose of servicing or adjusting the equipment without the immediate presence of
assistance of another person capable of rendering aid.
2-6.5.3 Two qualified personnel should be present when connecting inboard connector to power
receptacle.
2-6.6 Kites, Multiplane (Otter/Depressor), and Bridles. The multiplane kite should be suspended from
its bridle assembly and carefully inspected (visually) to ensure shackles are not cocked, and chains are
not twisted. This visual check should be accomplished prior to use and include a dimensional and wear
check.
2-6.7 Minefield Marker Dan Buoy, Type 3 Mk 12 Mod 0. Buoy laying is an extremely hazardous
operation. Any line used in the buoy laying must be free-running. All personnel must stay clear of the
bights of line that will be pulled overboard.
2-6.7.1 No specific safety precautions need be observed when handling the Dan Buoy by hand. If the
Dan Buoy is to be machine hoisted, observe safety precautions for deck safety.
2-6.8 Minefield Marker Master Reference Buoy F Mk 6 Mod 0. The configuration of MRB makes it
difficult to handle aboard ship. Extreme caution must be observed when working with MRB to prevent
injury to personnel.
2-14
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
CHAPTER 3
CONDITIONS OF READINESS
3-1
INTRODUCTION.
3-1.1 This chapter describes personnel and communication requirements of the AN/SLQ-37(V)
Influence Minesweeping System during watch, general quarters and emergency conditions. On board
MCM type ships, the general quarter’s condition for minesweeping operations is referred to as condition
1M. Other general quarters conditions that do not involve the AN/SLQ-37(V) are not described here.
3-2
CONDITIONS.
NOTE
Illustrations and tables are offered as typical examples and do not
supercede actual requirements of individual ships.
3-2.1 Watch Condition. General fantail manning requirements for Minesweeping Conditions are
discussed in Table 3-1, CIC requirements are discussed in Table 3-2, and Pilot House requirements are
discussed in Table 3-3. Minesweeping systems are not manned during normal watch condition and are
secured except for maintenance activities. Refer to shipboard watch, quarters, and station bill for
personnel requirements.
3-2.2 General Quarters. If General Quarters is sounded, all hands shall man their Battle Stations with
the exception of the fantail POIC, Rig Captain, Winch Operator, and Minesweep Electrician. These
personnel will stop off sweep gear in a safe condition, will ensure Cutters Mk 15 are properly attached to
the sweep/depressor wires and equalizing pendant, and will man the pull cords should the Commanding
Officer give the order to scuttle the sweep gear. Communication paths for minesweeping conditions are
shown in Figure 3-1. Interior communications correspond to signal paths and are provided by sound
powered phones. Equipment control and operating procedure is contained in Chapter 4.
3-2.3 Emergency Conditions. Emergency condition is established when minesweeping equipment is
fouled by a mine, when emergency break away procedures are deemed necessary, or when emergencies
arise that require actions that could preclude the safe operation of influence minesweeping equipment.
Procedures for clearing a fouled mine or break away of minesweeping equipment are contained in
Chapter 4.
3-2.3.1 Man Overboard. CO or OOD will order all shipboard influence sweeping systems to be
secured. All surrounding ships will be notified. QMOW will plot the man and PINS will immediately mark
the ship’s position. Unless otherwise directed, the ship will recover the man with the RHIB.
3-2.3.2 Steering or Propulsion Casualty. The OOD will order the starting of any off-line propulsion
engines or steering units and will attempt to maintain ship’s course and speed. CIC will navigate the ship
into safe waters. If it is not possible to maintain adequate tension on wires and the possibility of fouling the
sweep gear in the screws exists, the Commanding Officer may consider ordering the sweep gear scuttled.
3-2.3.3 PINS Casualty. TAO or CIC Supervisor will immediately inform the OOD and the conn and
navigation will be shifted to the bridge. The OOD will navigate the ship clear of the mined area using
bridge manual plot.
3-1
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 3-1. Fantail Manning Requirements for Minesweeping Conditions
POSITION TITLE
STATION
Mine
Countermeasures/Safety
Officer (MCMO)
Fantail deck operations area advantageously, so as to be able to observe all
activity in connection with streaming, operating, and recovering minesweeping
gear.
Chief Petty Officer in
Charge (CPOIC)
Fantail deck operations area advantageously, so as to be able to observe and
supervise all activity in connection with streaming, operating, and recovering
minesweeping gear.
Recorder/Talker
In proximity to the MCMO.
Electrician/Winch Operator
(MS ELEC)
As required in the performance of his duties.
Winch Operator (WNCH
OP)
MCM 1 – 8: Immediately aft of the winch.
MCM 9 – 14: 02 level aft, starboard side, overlooking the fantail.
Crane Operator (Stbd)
Fantail, starboard side, at the crane.
Crane Operator (Port)
Fantail, port side, at the crane.
MCM Gear Petty Officers
(Rig Captains) (Port/Stbd)
Fantail, moving about as required to perform their duties.
Armorers/Riggers
Fantail, moving about as required in the performance of their duties.
Equipment Handler
Fantail, moving about as required in the performance of his duties.
Equipment Handlers
Fantail, moving about as required to perform their duties.
Hospital Corpsman
01 Level, port side, monitors/fantail personnel and the Line Tension Payout
System, Monitor Display Unit, as required.
3-2.3.4 GPS Casualty. If GPS FOM is greater than or equal to 4, or if GPS fails, the ship will navigate
using PINS via programmed hierarchy. OOD or TAO may recommend suspension of minesweeping if
remaining system inputs do not allow for accurate navigation. NOTE: If GPS FOM returns to FOM 2 after
it has been removed from the PINS filter, it shall not be reentered until the ship is clear of the Mined Area.
3-2.3.5 Loss of Ship’s Power. The conn and navigation will be shifted to the bridge. All CIC equipment
will be secured. When power has been restored and CCS reports that the plant is stable, the TAO will
begin directing which equipment is to be brought up.
3-2.3.6 Fire in CIC. All personnel will evacuate the space except for two designated personnel who will
remain to fight the fire. All other personnel shall muster on the 02 level port side. The OOD will call away
the Flying Squad to respond to the casualty and may sound General Quarters.
3-2.3.7 Degaussing Casualty. The degaussing electrician shall take control of degaussing from the
bridge and make manual adjustments as necessary, based on ship’s course, until the ship is clear of the
Mined Area.
3-2
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 3-2. CIC Manning Requirements for Minesweeping Conditions
POSITION TITLE
STATION
Tactical Action Officer (TAO)
Free to move about in CIC to monitor various operations and actions.
CIC Supervisor
In the vicinity of the TAO. Free to move about CIC to monitor various
operations and functions.
Surface Detector/Tracker
Surface search/navigation radar azimuth-range indicator in CIC.
DRT Plotter/PINS Operator
DRT and the PINS console in CIC.
Vertical Plotter/Status Board
Keeper
Surface summary plot/status boards on the starboard side of CIC.
PINS Console Operator
CIC, directly behind the DRT and SPA-25 Repeater.
Logkeeper/Radio Telephone
(RT) Monitor
Log Desk in CIC.
Table 3-3. Pilot House Manning Requirements for Minesweeping Conditions
POSITION TITLE
STATION
Commanding Officer (CO)
Port side of the Pilot House.
Officer of the Deck (OOD)
(UNDERWAY)
Conning station inboard of the CO’s chair. The OOD is free also to move
from Bridge Wing to Bridge Wing as his duties require. He may not leave
his post until properly relieved.
Assistant Navigator
Pilot House or Chart Room. The Leading Quartermaster normally performs
this function.
BM/QM of the Watch
Pilot House chart table, also maintains a watch station on the Bridge Wings
and 03 level Signal Area when required.
Ship Control Console Operator
(SCCO)
SCC in the Pilot House.
Relief Ship Control Console
Operator (SCCO) (Bow
Thruster Operator)
Bow Thruster Console in the Pilot House.
Sound-Powered (SP) Phone
Talker (1JS/JL)
As stipulated by the Ship’s Organization and Regulations Manual.
Bearing Taker (Port/Starboard)
Pelorus stand on his respective Bridge Wing.
Status Board Plotter
Pilot House, at the status board.
Signalman
Bridge Wing or at the Flag Bag, located in the 03 level.
Lookout
03 level above the Pilot House.
3-3
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 3-1. Communication Paths for Condition 1M
3-4
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
CHAPTER 4
OPERATION
4-1
INTRODUCTION.
4-1.1 This chapter describes AN/SLQ-37(V) and AN/SLQ-38(V) operating situations, modes, and
procedures. Descriptions are detailed to the level required for understanding operational interfaces of the
system equipment and associated systems. Illustrations are included when necessary for clarity. Various
operating modes are described to acquaint the operator with equipment combinations employed for
different modes of operation.
4-2
PREOPERATIONAL CONDITIONS AND SET UP.
4-2.1 Specific pre-operational conditions are presumed to be in effect prior to system operation. A
block diagram of the sequence of events that takes place during pre-operational conditions for
minesweeping is illustrated in Figure 4-1. An example of a system readiness check off list of significant
switch positions is listed in Table 4-1. MCM ships may tailor their own list, as required.
4-2.2
All required PMS checks are completed prior to and after minesweep operations.
4-2.3 Job Sheets pertaining to pre-operational conditions and set up for minesweeping equipment and
for all type sweeps are contained at the end of this chapter.
4-2.4
Hand Signals. Hand signals should be in accordance with NWP 14 series.
4-2.5 Intership Paddle/Wand Signals. Minesweeping operations involving two ship connections
require the use of fantail to fantail visual communications. Paddles/wands, red and green, are displayed
from the fantail of the two minesweepers. The fantail signalmen shall be outfitted in a green jersey or vest
and be located in a position easily seen by the other ship. The red paddle/wand shall be held in the right
hand and the green paddle/wand held in the left hand as the signalman faces outboard. The colored
wands are utilized during night operations. Current mechanical minesweeping configurations using these
signals are the Team Deep Sweep and Improved Deep-Moored Sweep. Streaming signals are shown in
Figure 4-2. Recovery signals are shown in Figure 4-3.
4-2.6
Rigid Hull Inflatable Boat (RHIB) Vectoring. Establish communications as follows:
a.
Vectoring the RHIB to the immediate vicinity of the sonar contact is performed by directions
given to the RHIB from the ship. Radio or hand signals (Figure 4-4) can be used to vector the
RHIB in conjunction with the Visual Alignment Frame (Figure 4-5). However, good radio
communications are required, and for simplicity they may be the only intended communication
link.
b.
At least one alternate system, such as the hand signals (Figure 4-4), flags or lights, should be
known by the crew in the event of a radio failure.
c.
Signals are made with rolled semaphore flags for daylight hours and wand flashlights for night
hours. The signalman is to be stationed forward of the 03 level and above the bridge
windscreen.
4-1
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4-1. Pre-Operational Conditions
4-2
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4-1. Pre-Operational Conditions/Systems Readiness Check-Off List, Typical
EQUIPMENT
CONTROL
POSITION/SETTING
ACU
POWER ON/OFF switch
OFF
ACU
ACOUSTIC MODE OUTPUT ON/OFF switch
OFF
ACU
MAGNETIC MODE OUTPUT ON/OFF switch
OFF
ACU
ACOUSTIC MODE MOTOR SPEED CONTROL
100
PCU
MAIN POWER circuit breaker
OFF
PCU
LOGIC POWER circuit breaker
OFF (Tagged Out)
PCU
PCU CONTROL/ACU CONTROL switch
PCU CONTROL
PCU
MANUAL CONTROL MANUAL SPEED CONTROL
rheostat
Rotated CCW to minimum
(0%)
PCU
STATUS DVM switch
LINE VOLTAGE
(Phase) AB
PCU
A2A1TB1 strap
TB-27:
TB-26 Mk 2:
TB-26 VLF:
Minesweep SWBD
EXCITER REGULATOR CONTROL switch
SHUT DOWN
Minesweep SWBD
SWITCHBOARD CONTROL switch
LOCAL
Minesweep SWBD
STBD SLOW SPEED PROPULSION MOTOR
BREAKER switch
TRIP
Minesweep SWBD
BOW THRUSTOR BREAKER switch
TRIP
Minesweep SWBD
DC M/S CONTACTOR CONTROL switch
OPEN
Minesweep SWBD
PORT SLOW SPEED PROPULSION MOTOR
BREAKER switch
TRIP
Minesweep SWBD
GENERATOR BREAKER switch
TRIP (Tagged Out)
Minesweep SWBD
GENERATOR HEATER CONTROL switch
ON
Minesweep SWBD
EXCITER REGULATOR PWR circuit breaker
OFF
Minesweep SWBD
MINESWEEPING CONTROL potentiometer
DECR 0.0V
DC Contactor Panel
CONTACTOR SAFETY INTERLOCK switch
CLOSED
DC Contactor Panel
SAFE/RUN switch
CLOSED
DC Contactor Panel
UNDER SPEED SHUTDOWN switch
CLOSED
Towed Body TB-26
Select correct float pendant length
Per SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Towed Body TB-26
TB pressure test and pressure set for op-depth
Per SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Towed Body TB-27
Select correct float pendant length
Per SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Minesweeping gear
Identified and staged
Per SW570-F0-MMO-A70
1 to 1
1 to 3
1 to 4
4-3
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4-2. Streaming Paddles/Wand Signals
4-4
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4-3. Recovery Paddles/Wand Signals
4-5
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4-4. Vectoring Hand Signals
4-6
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4-5. Visual Alignment Frame
4-7
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4-2.7
F Mark 11 Sonar Reflector Preparation.
NOTE
All material must be nonmagnetic.
a.
Attach a 3/8-inch shackle to thimble on each end of a 1-1/2-inch x 18-inch nylon line. Refer to
Figure 4-6 for mooring details.
b.
Attach shackle on one end of nylon line to anchor and shackle on other end to a 3/8-inch shackle
on one of the pad eyes of sonar reflector.
c.
Using another 3/8-inch shackle, attach remaining pad eye on sonar reflector to a 3/8-inch
shackle on end of a 1-1/2-inch x 100-foot nylon line (or as required). The line should be
sufficient length to allow the attachment to float and subsequent recovery of the sonar reflector
and anchor.
4-3
OPERATING MODES.
4-3.1 Because mechanical minesweeping doesn't require operating modes, the following information
applies to influence minesweeping only. After initial turn-on procedures for the influence minesweeping
equipment is completed, the next step is to select the mode of operation on the ACU. There are three
modes of operation; magnetic, acoustic (manual or automatic) and dual (both magnetic and acoustic).
4-3.2 Magnetic Mode. Selection of the magnetic mode of operation will direct the operator through a
sequence of actions that will provide a preprogrammed automatic waveform to the MMGTG. The operator
selects the waveform, the current, the waveform amplitude, and the choice of manual or timed start of the
pulse. A flow diagram of the sequence of actions and displays is illustrated in Figure 4-7. It should be
noted that the ACU does not provide a manual mode of control in the magnetic mode.
4-3.3
Acoustic Mode.
4-3.3.1 Automatic Acoustic Control. The Central Processor Unit (CPU) in the ACU automatically
controls the speed (RPM) of the motors in the towed bodies (TB-26 or TB-27). In this mode, the PCU must
be powered ON and PCU/ACU control switch must be set to ACU control. After the ACOUSTIC MODE
STATUS PCU READY lamp on the front panel of the ACU illuminates, the operator then selects acoustic
waveform build-up time, on time, decay time, and off-time inputs through the system keyboard. A flow
diagram of the sequence of actions and displays is illustrated in Figure 4-8.
4-3.3.2 TB-26/TB-27 Operation. The ACU provides the PCU with an acoustic waveform. The PCU
provides the power and control functions necessary to regulate the speed of the motor in the TB in
accordance with the requirements of the acoustic waveform selected.
4-3.3.3 TB-27 Pulsed Operation. The acoustic waveform output is automatically varied between an
inaudible minimum and an operator selected maximum RPM.
4-3.3.4 TB-27 Modulated Operation. The acoustic waveform output is automatically varied between an
audible minimum and an operator selected maximum RPM.
4-3.3.5 Manual Acoustic Control. The RPM of the motor in the towed body is controlled by operator
inputs to the MOTOR CONTROL, SPEED CONTROL on the ACU. In this mode, the PCU must be
powered ON and PCU/ACU control switch must be set to ACU control. This will be indicated on the front
panel of the ACU by the ACOUSTIC MODE STATUS PCU READY lamp being illuminated.
4-8
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4-6. F Mk 11 Mod 0 Anchored and Buoyed
4-9
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4-7. Magnetic Mode Prompts
4-10
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4-8. Acoustic Mode Prompts
4-11
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4-3.4 Dual (Automatic Acoustic and Magnetic) Mode. The ACU provides simultaneous waveforms to
the ships' magnetic minesweeping generator and the PCU. The operator may select timed or manual,
synchronous or asynchronous operation. A flow diagram of the sequence of actions and displays is
illustrated in Figure 4-9.
4-3.4.1 Timed Start. When the operator inputs a two-digit character in response to <T>ime, this
establishes the minutes after the hour the waveform generation will begin.
4-3.4.2 Manual Start. When the operator inputs a <M>anual input, the waveform generations starts
when any key is pressed.
4-3.4.3 Synchronization. The acoustic waveform will be synchronized with the magnetic waveform
during dual operation by selecting <M>agnetic when the ACOUSTIC SYNCH prompt is given.
4-3.4.4 Asynchronization. The acoustic waveform will be unsynchronized with the magnetic waveform
during dual operation by selecting <A>sync when the ACOUSTIC SYNCH prompt is given.
4-4
NORMAL OPERATION.
4-4.1 The duties and responsibilities of system operators are described in general terms of
responsibility in Tables 4-2 through 4-4. General procedures for influence minesweeping are contained in
Tables 4-5 through 4-11. Specific step by step procedures for the operation of the AN/SLQ-37(V) system
in all primary modes is contained in individual equipment manuals as referenced in Chapter 1 of this
manual.
4-5
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES.
4-5.1
4-5.1.1
Clearing Mines Fouled in Gear.
General Information.
a.
A mine fouled in gear may occur when a moored mine cable jams in the cutter, otter, or
depressor, or when a mine is dragging in the gear.
b.
The procedures are primarily designed to protect the minesweeper involved from the danger of
the mine exploding close aboard, and to eliminate the hazard which floating mines present to
other vessels. When a fouled mine is located, the sweep wire should always be veered to a safe
scope. If the situation permits, the minesweeper should proceed to a suitable dumping area
before attempting to clear the mine. The presence of a mine in the gear can often be
ascertained by noting the irregular behavior of the float.
4-5.1.2
a.
4-12
Single Ship Sweep.
Perform the following actions in sequence until the mine clears the gear:
(1)
Clear the formation to safe water and increase to maximum speed.
90-degree turns away from and toward the gear.
Make several
(2)
At maximum speed, veer the sweep wire as rapidly as possible, and then apply the brake
hard. This procedure, repeated several times, often shakes a mine clear of the gear.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4-9. Dual Mode Prompts
4-13
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4-2. Fantail Duties and Responsibilities During Minesweeping Conditions
POSITION TITLE
DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
Mine
Countermeasures/Safety
Officer (MCMO)
a. Responsible to the CO for the safe operation of the minesweeping system.
Chief Petty Officer in
Charge (CPOIC)
a. Responsible to the MCMO for the safe, efficient and expeditious handling of
the minesweeping system components.
b. Supervises the fantail, as required, to ensure safe, efficient, and expeditious
handling of the minesweeping system.
b. Supervises the fantail deck operations personnel in all phases of rigging,
streaming, operating, and recovering minesweeping system components.
Recorder/Talker
Record significant events in the operation of the minesweeping gear.
Electrician (MS ELEC)
a. Responsible to the CPOIC for the safe, reliable operation of electrical
components of the minesweeping system.
b. Performs as a WINCH OPERATOR when so assigned, and as his MS ELEC
duties permit.
Winch Operator (WNCH
OP)
Responsible to the CPOIC for safe winch operation.
Crane Operator (STBD)
Responsible to the CPOIC for safe, efficient and expeditious operation of the
starboard crane in handling minesweeping system components.
Crane Operator (Port)
Responsible to the CPOIC for safe, efficient, and expeditious operation of the
port crane in handling minesweeping system components.
MCM Gear Petty Officers
(Rig Captains) (Port/Stbd)
Responsible to the CPOIC for close supervision and direction of the Equipment
Handlers in handling the minesweeping system gear.
Armorers/Riggers
a. Responsible to the CPOIC for the safe, efficient, and expeditious handling,
installation and removal of the minesweeping system explosive devices.
b. Obtains the minesweeping system explosive devices; coordinates his actions
with Equipment Handlers for installation, arming, disarming and removal; and
returns the devices to proper stowage.
Equipment Handlers
Responsible to the CPOIC for the proper performance of their duties.
Hospital Corpsmen (HM)
Responsible to the CO for the safety of minesweeping personnel.
4-14
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4-3. CIC Duties and Responsibilities During Minesweeping Conditions
POSITION TITLE
Tactical Action Officer
(TAO)
DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
a. Principal command decision-maker in CIC. He makes use of the visual
displays that provide tactical information as a basis for deciding courses of
actions in the use of the ship’s combat systems.
b. Responsible for the interaction of men with sensors, communications, and
minehunting and neutralization systems. The TAO has the final authority for
priority of contact detection, classification and neutralization, and for direction
of tactical operations.
CIC Supervisor
Primary assistant to the TAO.
Surface Detector/Tracker
a. Ensures optimum performance of the radar equipment.
b. Responsible for the detection and tracking of surface targets within the
operational limits of the radar systems. Reports to the CIC Supervisor.
DRT Plotter/PINS Operator
a. Responsible for the accurate plotting of surface contacts and the operation
of PINS.
b. Responsible for providing navigational assistance utilizing charts; plotting
own- and other ship’s position, speed and distance traveled; operating the
plotter for special evolutions such as mine warfare and man overboard; and
providing course, speed, and Closest Point of Approach (CPA) for designated
targets.
Vertical Plotter/Status Board
Keeper
a. Maintains a display of the positions of surface targets, geographic points
on the vertical plot and amplifying data required for understanding the surface
picture on the status board.
b. Coordinates with the Surface Detector/Tracker and DRT Plotter to update
information, and with the Lookouts to visually acquire and identify contacts.
PINS Console Operator
b. Responsible to the CIC Supervisor in the performance of his duties.
Perform the following, as required:
(1) Ensure proper function of the PINS processor and
all output media
(2) Ensure that X-Y plotter and line printer have
adequate paper
(3) Ensure magnetic tape unit is loaded when required
(4) Ensure proper data format is displayed in CIC
(5) Initiate and enable proper navigation functions
(6) Perform diagnostic checkout of system
(7) Be prepared to shift operating modes, or enter new
data parameters as the TAO directs.
Logkeeper/Radio Telephone
(RT) Monitor
Monitors the RT circuit(s) assigned and report and record verbatim all traffic
addressed this ship.
4-15
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4-4. Pilot House Duties and Responsibilities During Minesweeping Conditions
POSITION TITLE
Commanding Officer (CO)
DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
a. Primary duties and responsibilities of the CO are enumerated in Navy
Regulations. Responsible at all times for the readiness, safety, and
performance of his ship.
b. Gives permission to conduct evaluations and operations after considering
alternatives and/or incident to discussion with the OOD or TAO. Continuously
monitors all MCM operations.
Officer of the Deck (OOD)
(UNDERWAY)
a. Primary duties and responsibilities of the OOD are contained in the Watch
Officer’s Guide, Standard Organization and Regulations, Ship’s Organization
Manual, and the Captain’s Standing Orders.
b. Directly responsible to the CO for the safe and effective operation of the
ship. He is therefore responsible for maneuvering the ship clear of all
obstacles, hazards and threatening situations unless ordered to do otherwise
by the CO.
c. Is normally the Conning Officer. This function may be assumed by the CO,
or it may be delegated to an officer under instruction or to a pilot. As Conning
Officer his duties are:
(1) Control ship’s heading and speed by orders to the
SCCO.
(2) Monitor performance of the SCCO.
(3) Order emergency steering and speed control
procedures.
(4) Order steering and speed control casualty recovery
procedures.
(5) Keep the CO informed of changes to the ship’s
heading and speed.
Assistant Navigator
a. Maintains and uses selected publications relating to his duties.
b. Assist the Navigator and OOD, as required, in implementing the required
casualty operational modes.
BM/QM of the Watch/
Signalman (BMOW/QMOW)
a. Directly responsible to the OOD for the efficient functioning of the Bridge
watch. Maintains the Quartermaster’s Notebook, ensuring that all orders to
the helm and all orders to the engines are logged as they occur, and making
additional log entries as he deems appropriate and/or as ordered by the
OOD. Monitors the performance of the SCCO.
b. Maintains a dead-reckoning track by using the latest navigational fix as a
point of departure and applying set and drift when so ordered.
BM/QM of the Watch/
Signalman (BMOW/QMOW)
c. Ensures that morning calls, as entered in the Call Book, are made on time,
and makes general announcements over the IMC as directed.
d. Makes meteorological observations and enters them into the appropriate
section of the Ship’s Deck Log.
4-16
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4-4. Pilot House Duties and Responsibilities During Minesweeping Conditions
(Continued)
POSITION TITLE
Ship Control Console
Operator (SCCO)
DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
a. Responsible for receipt, acknowledgment, and execution of steering and
speed (RPM) orders for the ship, uses the throttle lever to control ship speed
directly, or alternatively to transmit the ordered ship speed (RPM) to the
Enclosed Operating Station (EOS). Must be alert for failure of rudder control
and of the gyrocompass, and notifies the OOD/CO of any unusual indications
registered by the SCC. Initiates general and collision alarms as directed by
the OOD or CO.
b. Responsible for observing and reporting to the OOD or CO the activation
of any alarm signals as indicated on the SCC:
Relief Ship Control Console
Operator (SCCO) (Bow
Thruster Operator)
a. Perform duties as an SP Phone Talker on the 1JV circuit.
b. Relieves and assists the SCCO as directed.
c. Operates Bow Thruster Console as directed by OOD.
Sound-Powered (SP) Phone
Talker (1JS/JL)
a. Monitors the SP circuit assigned, and report all information addressed to
the station.
b. Repeats transmitted/received messages, clearly and word-for-word, to or
from the controlling personnel or addressee.
c. Maintains and uses the circuit in a businesslike manner by not permitting
personal conversations, or extraneous or frivolous comments. As the control
station Talker (if so assigned), enforce discipline and give circuit control
orders and instructions as necessary.
Bearing Taker
(Port/Starboard)
Receives instruction from the Pilot House (via the SP Phone Talker)
concerning objects from which visual bearings will be taken. Takes bearings,
as directed, and reports them to the Pilot House, via the SP Phone Talker.
Status Board Plotter
a. Enters information as received on the status board.
b. Makes corrections to status board when necessary.
c. Reports information to CO/OOD as appropriate.
d. Updates status board when information changes.
Status Board Plotter
a. Enters information as received on the status board.
b. Makes corrections to status board when necessary.
c. Reports information to CO/OOD as appropriate.
d. Updates status board when information changes.
4-17
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4-4. Pilot House Duties and Responsibilities During Minesweeping Conditions
(Continued)
POSITION TITLE
Signalman
DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
a. Alerts to respond to a flashing light or semaphore call.
b. Responds to flag hoists.
c. Keeps Signal Halyards adjusted. Ensures that bunting is kept dry and
covered during foul weather.
d. Receives and transmits visual messages, and should be alert to signal
evolutions.
Lookout
a. Except for man overboard:
(1) Report all visual and aural observations to the OOD
with amplifying information as it occurs.
(2) Report all targets and events to CIC via the 1JS/JL
SP phone circuit.
(3) Provide contact update information to CIC as
directed by the CIC Supervisor.
b. Man overboard is a special category of visual sighting and must be
reported to the Pilot House and Plotters in CIC. The Lookout will keep the
man overboard in sight continuously and, using relative bearing, make
frequent reports on the man’s position until he is recovered. The Lookout is
frequently the first to observe a man overboard, and should be prepared to
throw him a life ring and a smoke float to mark his position.
Mine Lookout
4-18
Sole responsibility is to detect mines in the ship's path by being positioned to
have the best available view forward of the ship and provided with the
following equipment:
(1) Polarized lens sunglasses to reduce the glare and improve the ability
to detect mines that may be just below the surface.
(2) Binoculars, preferably stabilized 10 by 40 mm.
(3) A night observation device (NOD), preferably the Mk 37 Mod 3 for night
time watch.
(4) Battle gear: helmet, flak jacket, gas mask, etc., as appropriate for a
topside watchstation.
(5) Sound-powered phone communications with the bridge.
(6) Appropriate clothing for the weather: in environments such as the
Persian Gulf, a canopy for protection from the sun may be appropriate.
(7) Sun screen: the ship should provide protective sun screen lotion,
particularly if there is no canopy.
(8) Water bottle or canteen: in hot, dry climates, dehydration will reduce
the watchstander's effectiveness, so a ready water source should be
maintained.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4-5. Magnetic Minesweeping Procedures
STEP
PROCEDURE
TM REFERENCE
NORMAL INDICATION
1
Rig and stream magnetic
minesweeping gear
SW570-F0-MMO-A70,
Chapter 4
Magnetic minesweeping gear
streaming correctly behind ship
2
Switch generator power to DC
Minesweeping Mode control
S9324-B5-MMO-010,
Chapter 2.
Minesweeping Mode Status
Indicator illuminated,
Minesweeping Input Signal
Voltmeter indicates 0 - ±7.5V,
and Generator Voltmeter
indicates £250V
3
Energize ACU and start
waveform
SW565-AB-MMO-020,
Chapter 2
ACU Panel Power - ON,
Magnetic Mode Status - Run,
Acoustic Mode Status - ACU
Ready, Magnetic Mode Output
indicators illuminated
4
Conduct minesweeping
NWP 3-15 (Series)
5
Secure ACU
SW565-AB-MMO-020,
Chapter 2
ACU Panel Power - OFF,
Acoustic Mode Output - OFF,
Magnetic Mode Output - OFF,
Acoustic Mode Motor Speed
Control - 90
6
Return generator power to DC
Ships Service Mode
S9324-B5-MMO-010,
Chapter 2
DC Ships Service Mode Indicator
illuminated, Meters indicate
proper voltages/amperages, Red
flags displayed on breakers
7
Recover magnetic minesweeping
gear
SW570-F0-MMO-A70,
Chapter 4
All magnetic minesweeping gear
cleaned and properly stowed
Table 4-6. Automatic Acoustic Control Minesweeping Procedures
STEP
PROCEDURE
TM REFERENCE
NORMAL INDICATION
1
Check Towed Body for proper
operation
SW570-F0-MMO-A70,
Chapter 7
Towed Body generates
appropriate acoustic signal
2
Stream Acoustic minesweeping
gear
SW570-F0-MMO-A70,
Chapter 4
Acoustic minesweeping gear
streaming correctly behind ship
3
Energize PCU
SW565-AB-MMO-040,
Chapter 2
Remote Ready For ACU Control
Indicator illuminated
4
Energize ACU and start Towed
Body
SW565-AB-MMO-020,
Chapter 2
Power - ON,
Acoustic Mode Status - PCU,
Ready/ACU Ready (TB-26 or
TB-27),
Acoustic Unit (TB-26 or TB-27)
illuminated,
Magnetic Mode Status - Ready,
Acoustic Mode Output indicators
illuminated,
ACU and PCU Motor Control
RPM 100X meters correspond
4-19
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4-6. Automatic Acoustic Control Minesweeping Procedures (Continued)
STEP
PROCEDURE
TM REFERENCE
NORMAL INDICATION
5
Conduct minesweeping.
NWP 3-15 (Series)
6
Secure PCU.
SW565-AB-MMO-040,
Chapter 2
Main Power - OFF,
Logic Power - OFF,
PCU/ACU Control - PCU,
Manual Speed Control - CCW
7
Secure ACU.
SW565-AB-MMO-020,
Chapter 2
ACU Panel Power - OFF,
Acoustic Mode Output - OFF,
Magnetic Mode Output - OFF,
Acoustic Mode Motor Speed
Control - 90
8
Recover acoustic minesweeping
gear.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70,
Chapter 4
All acoustic minesweeping gear
cleaned and properly stowed
Table 4-7. Automatic Acoustic Minesweeping - PCU Start/ACU Control Procedures
STEP
4-20
PROCEDURE
TM REFERENCE
NORMAL INDICATION
1
Check Towed Body for proper
operation
SW570-F0-MMO-040,
Chapter 4
Towed Body creates appropriate
acoustic signal.
2
Stream Acoustic minesweeping
gear
SW570-F0-MMO-A70,
Chapter 4
Acoustic minesweeping gear
streaming correctly behind ship.
3
Energize PCU, start Towed Body,
and transfer control of Towed
Body to ACU
SW565-AB-MMO-040,
Chapter 2
Remote Ready For ACU Control
Indicator illuminated.
4
Energize ACU and take control of
Towed Body
SW565-AB-MMO-020,
Chapter 2
Power - ON,
Acoustic Mode Status - PCU
Ready,
Acoustic Mode Status - ACU
Ready (TB-26 or TB-27),
Acoustic Unit - TB-26 or TB-27,
Magnetic Mode Status - Ready,
Acoustic Mode Output indicators
illuminated,
ACU and PCU RPM 100X meters
correspond.
5
Conduct minesweeping
NWP 3-15 (Series)
6
Secure PCU
SW565-AB-MMO-040,
Chapter 2
Main Power - OFF,
Logic Power - OFF,
PCU/ACU Control - PCU,
Manual Speed Control - CCW
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4-7. Automatic Acoustic Minesweeping - PCU start/ACU Control Procedures (Continued)
STEP
PROCEDURE
TM REFERENCE
NORMAL INDICATION
7
Secure ACU
SW565-AB-MMO-020,
Chapter 2
ACU Panel Power - OFF,
Acoustic Mode Output - OFF,
Magnetic Mode Output - OFF,
Acoustic Mode Motor Speed
Control - 90
8
Recover acoustic minesweeping
gear
SW570-F0-MMO-A70,
Chapter 4
All acoustic minesweeping gear
cleaned and properly stowed.
Table 4-8. Manual Acoustic Control Minesweeping Procedures
STEP
PROCEDURE
TM REFERENCE
NORMAL INDICATION
1
Check Towed Body for proper
operation
SW570-F0-MMO-040,
Chapter 4
Towed Body creates appropriate
acoustic signal
2
Stream Acoustic minesweeping
gear
SW570-F0-MMO-A70,
Chapter 4
Acoustic minesweeping gear
streaming correctly behind ship
3
Energize PCU
SW565-AB-MMO-040,
Chapter 2
Remote Ready For ACU Control
Indicator illuminated
4
Energize ACU and start Towed
Body
SW565-AB-MMO-020,
Chapter 2
Power - ON,
Acoustic Mode Status - PCU
Ready,
Acoustic Mode Status - ACU
Ready (TB-26 or TB-27),
Acoustic Unit (TB-26 or TB-27),
Magnetic Mode Status - Ready,
Acoustic Mode Output indicators
illuminated,
ACU and PCU RPM 100X
meters correspond
5
Conduct minesweeping
NWP 3-15 (Series)
6
Secure PCU
SW565-AB-MMO-040,
Chapter 2
Main Power - OFF,
Logic Power - OFF,
PCU/ACU Control - PCU,
Manual Speed Control - CCW
7
Secure ACU
SW565-AB-MMO-020,
Chapter 2
ACU Panel Power - OFF,
Acoustic Mode Output - OFF,
Magnetic Mode Output - OFF,
Acoustic Mode Motor Speed
Control - 90
8
Recover acoustic minesweeping
gear
SW570-F0-MMO-A70,
Chapter 4
All acoustic minesweeping gear
cleaned and properly stowed
4-21
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4-9. Manual Acoustic Minesweeping - PCU Start/ACU Control Procedure
STEP
PROCEDURE
TM REFERENCE
NORMAL INDICATION
1
Check Towed Body for proper
operation
SW570-F0-MMO-040,
Chapter 4
Towed Body creates appropriate
acoustic signal
2
Stream Acoustic minesweeping
gear
SW570-F0-MMO-A70,
Chapter 4
Acoustic minesweeping gear
streaming correctly behind ship
3
Energize PCU, start Towed Body,
and transfer control of Towed
Body to ACU
SW565-AB-MMO-040,
Chapter 2
Remote Ready For ACU Control
Indicator illuminated
4
Energize ACU and take control of
Towed Body
SW565-AB-MMO-020,
Chapter 2
Power - ON,
Acoustic Mode Status - PCU
Ready,
Acoustic Mode Status - ACU
Ready (TB-26 or TB-27),
Acoustic Unit (TB-26 or TB-27),
Magnetic Mode Status - Ready,
Acoustic Mode Output indicators
illuminated,
ACU and PCU RPM 100X
meters correspond
5
Conduct minesweeping.
NWP 3-15 (Series)
6
Secure PCU
SW565-AB-MMO-040,
Chapter 2
Main Power - OFF,
Logic Power - OFF,
PCU/ACU Control - PCU,
Manual Speed Control - CCW
7
Secure ACU
SW565-AB-MMO-020,
Chapter 2
ACU Panel Power - OFF,
Acoustic Mode Output - OFF,
Magnetic Mode Output - OFF,
Acoustic Mode Motor Speed
Control - 90
8
Recover acoustic minesweeping
gear.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70,
Chapter 4
All acoustic minesweeping gear
cleaned and properly stowed
Table 4-10. Combination Influence Minesweeping
STEP
4-22
PROCEDURE
TM REFERENCE
NORMAL INDICATION
1
Check Towed Body for proper
operation
SW570-F0-MMO-040,
Chapter 4
Towed Body creates appropriate
acoustic signal
2
Stream acoustic and magnetic
minesweeping gear
SW570-F0-MMO-A70,
Chapter 4
Acoustic and magnetic
minesweeping gear streaming
correctly behind ship
3
Switch generator power to DC
Minesweeping Mode control
S9324-B5-MMO-010,
Chapter 2
Minesweeping Mode Status
Indicator illuminated,
Minesweeping Input Signal
Voltmeter indicates 0 - ±7.5V,
and Generator Voltmeter
indicates £250V
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4-10. Combination Influence Minesweeping (Continued)
STEP
PROCEDURE
TM REFERENCE
NORMAL INDICATION
4
Energize PCU
SW565-AB-MMO-040,
Chapter 2
Remote Ready For ACU Control
Indicator illuminated
5
Energize ACU and start
waveform and Towed Body
SW565-AB-MMO-020,
Chapter 2
Power - ON,
Acoustic Mode Status - PCU
Ready,
Acoustic Mode Status - ACU
Ready (TB-26 or TB-27),
Acoustic Unit (TB-26 or TB-27),
Magnetic Mode Status - Run,
Magnetic Mode Output and
Acoustic Mode Output indicators
illuminated
6
Conduct minesweeping
NWP 3-15 (Series)
7
Secure PCU
SW565-AB-MMO-040,
Chapter 2
Main Power - OFF,
Logic Power - OFF,
PCU/ACU Control - PCU,
Manual Speed Control - CCW
8
Secure ACU
SW565-AB-MMO-020,
Chapter 2
ACU Panel Power - OFF,
Acoustic Mode Output - OFF,
Magnetic Mode Output - OFF,
Acoustic Mode Motor Speed
Control - 90
9
Return generator power to DC
Ships Service Mode control
S9324-B5-MMO-010,
Chapter 2
DC Ships Service Mode Indicator
illuminated, meters indicate
proper voltages/ amperages, and
red flags displayed on breakers
10
Recover acoustic and magnetic
minesweeping gear
SW570-F0-MMO-A70,
Chapter 4
All magnetic minesweeping gear
cleaned and properly stowed
Table 4-11. Combination Influence Minesweeping - PCU Start/ACU Control Procedure
STEP
PROCEDURE
TM REFERENCE
NORMAL INDICATION
1
Check Towed Body for proper
operation
SW570-F0-MMO-040,
Chapter 2
Towed Body creates appropriate
acoustic signal
2
Stream Acoustic and Magnetic
minesweeping gear
SW570-F0-MMO-A70,
Chapter 4
Acoustic and magnetic
minesweeping gear streaming
correctly behind ship
3
Switch generator power to DC
Minesweeping Mode control
S9324-B5-MMO-010,
Chapter 2
Minesweeping Mode Status
Indicator illuminated,
Minesweeping Input Signal
Voltmeter indicates 0 - ±7.5V,
and Generator Voltmeter
indicates £250V
4-23
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4-11. Combination Influence Minesweeping - PCU Start/ACU Control Procedure
(Continued)
STEP
PROCEDURE
4
Energize PCU, start Towed Body,
and transfer control of Towed
Body to ACU
SW565-AB-MMO-040,
Chapter 2
Remote Ready For ACU Control
Indicator illuminated
5
Energize ACU, take control of
Towed Body, and start waveform
SW565-AB-MMO-020,
Chapter 2
Power - ON,
Acoustic Mode Status - PCU
Ready,
Acoustic Mode Status - ACU
Ready (TB-26 or TB-27),
Acoustic Unit (TB-26 or TB-27),
Magnetic Mode Status - Run,
Magnetic Mode Output and
Acoustic Mode Output indicators
illuminated
6
Conduct minesweeping
NWP 3-15 (Series)
7
Secure PCU
SW565-AB-MMO-040,
Chapter 2
Main Power - OFF,
Logic Power - OFF,
PCU/ACU Control - PCU,
Manual Speed Control - CCW
8
Secure ACU
SW565-AB-MMO-020,
Chapter 2
ACU Panel Power - OFF,
Acoustic Mode Output - OFF,
Magnetic Mode Output - OFF,
Acoustic Mode Motor Speed
Control - 90
9
Return generator power to DC
Ships Service Mode control
S9324-B5-MMO-010,
Chapter 2
DC Ships Service Mode Indicator
illuminated, Meters indicate
proper voltages/ amperages, Red
flags displayed on breakers
10
Recover acoustic and magnetic
minesweeping gear
SW570-F0-MMO-A70,
Chapter 4
All magnetic minesweeping gear
cleaned and properly stowed
4-5.2
TM REFERENCE
NORMAL INDICATION
(3)
If the mine cannot be cleared by steps 1 and 2, tow the fouled mine into shallow water,
heave in as much sweep wire as is safe, and cut the sweep or depressor wire as
necessary. The mine may separate from the gear, allowing recovery of mine and sweep
gear by trained mine disposal personnel.
(4)
If the mine does not float, mark the location for additional sweeping. If the mine floats,
destroy it in accordance with Mine Destruction Procedures.
Mine Destruction Procedures. The following instructions apply to the disposal of floating mines.
a.
Station mine lookouts on the bow. Report floating mines to the ships following astern and to the
mine destruction ship with the formation.
b.
In order of effectiveness, the armament suitable for the destruction of floating mines is as
follows:
4-24
(1)
50-caliber machine gun.
(2)
M-60 machine gun.
(3)
M-14 rifle.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
NOTE
The choice of armament will be dependent on availability, and will be
specified in the MCM Commander’s operation order.
c.
The following procedures, in order of effectiveness, are recommended while closing to not less
than 200 yards:
(1)
Fire short bursts with a 50-caliber machine gun using AP ammunition. Several hits may be
required.
(2)
Fire short bursts with an M-60 machine gun.
(3)
Fire on the mine with several M-14 rifles.
d.
A minimum range of 200 yards is desired; however, the maximum range affording a high
percentage of hits should be used to reduce the danger from fragments. During mine
destruction, only the necessary personnel should be exposed. Other men must position
themselves on the opposite side of the upper deck. All hands must wear helmets and Kapok life
jackets.
e.
Riflemen assigned to Minesweeping Detail will wear life jackets, battle helmets, flack jacket,
flash gear, goggles, and hearing protection.
4-5.3 Emergency Break Away Procedures. There are two types of break away procedures: General
and Emergency. All means should be tried to safely recover equipment before the break away is
executed. The following information is for mines fouled in the gear. If the break away is to assist the ship
in maneuvering or clearing the decks for other reasons, such as damage control considerations
(emergency break away), the following procedures are offered as a guide line. If fouling of gear is the
result of anything other than live ordnance, the ship should attempt recovery/salvage or unfouling of the rig
(general break away). Each ship has the responsibility to tailor their break away procedures and orders to
execute them to their minesweeping order or bills.
4-5.4
4-5.4.1
O-Type Sweeps.
Single or Double (General).
a.
Depressor fouled: Use Cutters Mk 15 on depressor and sweep wires. Cut the sweep wires first
to ensure mine is not detonated if depressor runs into sweep wire.
b.
Sweep wire fouled: Recover all unaffected gear that can be safely recovered. Use Cutter(s)
Mk 15 on remaining wire(s).
4-5.4.2 Single or Double (Emergency). Break away for maneuvering or damage control considerations:
Use Cutter(s) Mk 15 on depressor and sweep wire(s). No order of sequence is preferred, all cutters
should be tripped as rapidly as possible.
4-5.5
Magnetic Sweeps.
4-5.5.1 Straight Tail Sweep Fouled (General). Secure pulsing. Recover unaffected sections if possible
(i.e., if outboard K-4 is fouled, cut K-4 using a fireman’s ax; if S section is fouled, recover the inboard K-4 (if
possible) and continue recovery of S section to pigtail connecting the two CA-1454s; then cut the
remaining S section using a fireman’s ax.) If no recovery is possible, cut magnetic cable between the
inboard preventer and the 8-inch snatch block used in the equalizing towing assembly. Ensure fantail is
clear of all personnel. Use Cutter Mk 15 on equalizing towing pendant.
4-25
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4-5.5.2 Straight Tail Sweep Fouled (Emergency). Break away for maneuvering or damage control
considerations: Secure pulsing. Using fireman’s ax cut magnetic cable between the inboard preventer
and the 8-inch snatch block used in the equalizing towing assembly. Ensure fantail is clear of all
personnel. Use Cutter Mk 15 on equalizing towing pendant.
4-5.5.3 M Mk 6(a), M Mk 6(h), and M Mk 7(b) Sweeps Fouled (General). Secure pulsing. Recover
unaffected sections of magnetic and/or moored sweep gear if possible. If no recovery of sections is
possible, using fireman’s ax, cut magnetic cable between the inboard preventer and the 8-inch snatch
block used in the equalizing towing assembly. Ensure fantail is clear of all personnel. Sever the sweep
wire and equalizing towing pendant using Cutter Mk 15.
4-5.5.4 Acoustic Sweeps. Secured pulsing: Cut acoustic cable inboard of the 125-ft towing stocking
and close to the stocking. This prevents excess cable from whipping around. Using a boat hook, stand off
to the side and trip out the pelican hook.
4-5.6
a.
Combinations Sweeps.
Break away of fouled gear will be dependent upon the configuration used. The FA sweeps
which share a common tow point (sweep wire) will most likely be unable to salvage any parts of
the sweep. In a combination sweep such as the M Mk 6(a) with a TB 26, recover the parts of the
sweep which are not fouled.
Example: If the acoustic side is fouled, recover the magnetic side. If the moored side of the
magnetic sweep is fouled with an object in the otter or float pendant, attempt to recover the
magnetic and the acoustic gear and salvage as much sweep wire as possible.
b.
4-6
For maneuvering or damage control considerations, secure pulsing to the magnetic and
acoustic gear. Cut the magnetic and acoustic cables leaving the acoustic cable attached to its
tow point and the magnetic cable riding on the equalizing towing pendant. Clear all unnecessary
personnel from the fantail. Standing clear of the cable, trip out the acoustic cable using a boat
hook. Clear the fantail. Use Cutter Mk 15 on equalizing towing pendant first, followed by cutting
the sweep wire with a Cutter Mk 15.
STANDARD LOG FORMS.
4-6.1 Minesweeping Log. To standardize the preparation and maintenance of minesweeping records,
a compact minesweeping log shall be established as follows:
a.
Procure a green record book (7530-00-222-3524), and divide it into seven sections using index
tabs. This book will be designated as the minesweeping log.
b.
The formats for the seven sections illustrated in Figures 4-10 through 4-16 have been used in
the past and are now being evaluated and reviewed for compatibility with Planned Maintenance
System (PMS) maintenance requirement cards (MRCs). Each format record sheet was
assigned to one section of the log in corresponding numerical sequence; i.e., Figure 4-10 was
assigned to Section 1 of the log; Figure 4-11 was assigned to Section 2 of the log. A format of
the appropriately assigned record sheet was on the first page (right-hand side) of each section.
c.
Entries made in the minesweeping log shall be classified Confidential and handled accordingly.
d.
The Commanding Officer shall designate, in writing, the ship’s minesweeping Boatswain’s Mate
and Electrician’s Mate to maintain the appropriate sections of the log under the custody of the
MCM Officer.
4-26
PORT
STARBOARD
Page _______
USED FOR STARBOARD
O-TYPE
USED FOR BOTH SIDES
O-TYPE
USED FOR DEEP
SWEEPS
Figure 4-10. Minesweeping Log Turnbuckle Adjustments (Otter and Depressor Bridles) Form
CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In)
Adjustment of depressor turnbuckle is for span. The depressor will always veer toward the side which has the shortest forward leg in the bridle
chain. If the port depressor is used, enter turnbuckle thread settings as done for starboard.
Threads inside turnbuckle
sleeve
Length of float pendant
Length of sweep wire to
depressor
Length of depressor wire
USED FOR PORT O-TYPE
Otter turnbuckle settings may be different for sweeps at various depths to ensure proper float positions. Record all turnbuckle settings (thread
inside sleeve) as adjustments are made for various float pendant lengths.
Length of sweep wire in fathoms
Threads inside turnbuckle sleeve
Length of float pendant
OTTER
CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In)
MINESWEEPING LOG TURNBUCKLE ADJUSTMENTS (OTTER AND DEPRESSOR BRIDLES)
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4-27
4-28
Page _______
Figure 4-11. Minesweeping Log - Minesweeping Record Form
(CONFIDENTIAL - When Filled in)
DATE TYPE OF SCOPE OF
SCOPE
LENGTH
CUTTERS
STREAMING
RECOVERY
TOTAL TOWING
REMARKS:
SWEEP SWEEP WIRE DEPRESSOR FLOAT NO. & MARK
TIME ON WIRE
CASUALTIES,
WIRE
PENDANT PER SIDE
COMMENTS,
PORT STBD.
START FINISH START FINISH PORT DEP- STBD. LOST GEAR,
ETC.
RESS.
CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In)
MINESWEEPING LOG - MINESWEEPING RECORD
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
DATE
CASUALTIES &
REMARKS
Page _______
(CONFIDENTIAL - When Filled in)
DEPTH LENGTH
PLANTING
RECOVERY
FLASHING
RADAR
OF
OF
BEACON REFLECTORS
WATER MOORING START FINISH START FINISH
Figure 4-12. Minesweeping Log - Dan Buoy/Master Reference Buoys Form
TYPE AND NUMBER
OF PLANTS
CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In)
MINESWEEPING LOG - DAN BUOY/MASTER REFERENCE BUOYS FORM
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4-29
4-30
DATE
SWEEP
CONFIGURATION
INSPECTION/REPAIR
S OF MAGNETIC
CABLE
MAN.
AUTO.
MODE OF
PULSE AND
TIME
INSULATION REMARKS RECORD
RESISTANCE DAMAGE, CAUSES
OF CABLE
AND CORRECTIVE
(CLOSED
ACTIONS TO
SWEEPS)
MAGNETIC
CABLE/CL-CABLE
AND TOWING
JUMPER
Page _______
(CONFIDENTIAL - When Filled in)
MAX
VOLTAGE
AND
CURRENT
CABLE WAS
PULSED
Figure 4-13. Minesweeping Log - Magnetic Minesweeping Record Form
TODAY TOTAL
TIME CABLE
WAS
STREAMED
CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In)
MINESWEEPING LOG - MAGNETIC MINESWEEPING RECORD
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
DATE
PULSE INFORMATION
(CONFIDENTIAL - When Filled in)
Figure 4-14. Minesweeping Log - Acoustic Devices TB-27 and TB-26 Form
CHECK FOR
PROPER
OPERATION
Page _______
ENSURE ALL
REMARKS
PMS CHECKS
ARE
ACCOMPLISHED
TODAY TOTAL MAN. AUTO BUILD HIGH DECAY LOW/ CYCLE AMPS CYCLE TOTAL TOTAL HI/LO ON TB-27 - TB-26
ACOUSTIC
UP TIME TIME OFF TIME
SW. HOURS HOURS RPM
DEVICES
TIME
TIME
POSIT. MOD 1 MOD 2
BEFORE,
ECC
ECC
DURING AND
AFTER
OPERATING
NOTE
EXCEPTIONS
TIME
OPERATED
CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In)
MINESWEEPING LOG - ACOUSTIC DEVICES TB-27 AND TB-26
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4-31
4-32
DATE
REMARKS RECORD
DAMAGE, LOW
INSULATION READING,
CAUSES AND
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
Page _______
Figure 4-15. Minesweeping Log - Acoustic Power Cable Form
(CONFIDENTIAL - When Filled in)
SWEEP
INSULATION INSPECTION/REPAIRS INSPECTION/REPAIRS CABLE LENGTH
CONFIGURATION RESISTANCE OF CHAFING GEAR ON OF ELECTRICAL PLUG
WHEN
OF CABLE
PREVENTERS,
CONNECTORS
RECEIVED AND
W/DEVICE
TOWING GRIPS AND
CHANGES TO
HARDEYES
LENGTH
CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In)
MINESWEEPING LOG - ACOUSTIC POWER CABLE
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
1
ACOUSTIC
DEVICE
ECCENTRIC
INSTALLED
TS-4144/P1
SAT/UNSAT
FILTER
SETTING
ATTEN.
SETTING
DEVICE
SAT/UNSAT
TB-26 RPM
HI/LO
Page _______
(CONFIDENTIAL - When Filled in)
METER
READING
Figure 4-16. Minesweeping Log - TS-4144/P Test Result Form
Record results of TS-4144/P equipment check conducted prior to test of an acoustic device.
TEST
DATE
CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In)
Record all routine and operational TS-4144/P test results in the Minesweeping
log in the format shown below. Test in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.
NOTE
MINESWEEPING LOG - TS-4144/P TEST RESULT
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4-33
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4-6.2 Minesweeping Order Format. Figure 4-17 illustrates a Minesweeping Order Format. The use of
this minesweeping order is required. It is a serviceable tool to improve cooperation and understanding.
Suggested internal distribution of the format is as follows:
Original:
Copy 1:
Copy 2:
Copy 3:
Copy 4:
4-34
MCM Officer/file
Commanding Officer/bridge
Engineering Officer
CPOIC/POIC of the Fantail
Minesweep Electrician.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In)
MINESWEEPING ORDER FORMAT NO.
Subj: Minesweeping Exercise
Ref: (a)
OPORD
1.
TIME:
2.
TYPE GEAR:
3.
O-TYPE GEAR:
4.
5.
6.
a.
Length of Sweep Wire
b.
Length of Float Pendant
c.
Type of Cutters
d.
Number of Cutters
e.
Cutter Pattern
f.
Depth of Sweep
g.
Length of Depressor Wire
h.
Sweep Speed
MAGNETIC SWEEP:
a.
Configuration
b.
Pulse Schedule
c.
Times: Off Time
d.
Current
e.
Waveform
M MK
On Time
ACOUSTIC SWEEP:
a.
TB-26
TB-27
b.
Other
c.
Depth of Device
d.
Cycle
e.
Times: Build Up
Decay
ECCENTRIC: MK 2 MOD 2
PULSED
MODULATED
High
Low/Off
Ensure degaussing system is lined-up and operating IAW ship instructions.
CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In)
Figure 4-17. Minesweeping Order Format (Sheet 1 of 3)
4-35
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In)
7.
BRIEFING: Prior to streaming gear, minesweeping personnel will be mustered for
a briefing which will include a description of the exercise and particular emphasis
on the safety precautions to be observed.
8.
SAFETY OBSERVER: Safety observer for the exercise will be
.
The observer will:
9.
a.
Station himself on the fantail in such a position as to most effectively
observe all personnel involved in the streaming of the gear as well as the
gear itself.
b.
Ensure all safety precautions are specifically observed by personnel in
the detail.
c.
Take immediate and positive action during the early stages of a
dangerous condition to prevent its culmination and casualties to
personnel and material.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS: Safety precautions will be observed as follows:
a.
All personnel on the fantail in the minesweeping detail shall wear Mk 1
vest-type life preservers, construction-type safety helmets with
quick-acting break away chin straps (fastened and worn under the chin),
and approved safety shoes (ANSI Z41.1).
b.
Personnel not in the minesweeping detail shall stay clear of the fantail.
c.
During all minesweeping operations, the Rig Captain(s) in Charge of the
minesweeping operation shall position himself/themselves to ensure positive
or relay communications with all winch and crane operators.
d.
All personnel shall stay inboard of all gear when it is being handled.
e.
All personnel shall stay out of the bights of lines and wires.
f.
All hands shall stay clear of the fantail after the gear is stopped off.
g.
All applicable safety measures which are normally associated with good
seamanship shall be observed.
h.
Personnel shall not enter the drum area if the drum is in motion.
i.
Obtain permission from CO/OOD prior to entering drum area.
j.
Ensure that the operator does not turn the drum until he has ascertained
that:
(1)
(2)
All personnel are clear.
All running parts of the drum are clear.
CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In)
Figure 4-17. Minesweeping Order Format (Sheet 2 of 3)
4-36
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In)
k.
Prior to servicing the magnetic minesweeping terminal box, connecting, or
disconnecting minesweeping cable, the following precautions shall be
observed:
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
(1)
Secure power to the terminal box.
(2)
Wear electrical Class-O (Red Label - 1000) type rubber gloves per PMS
instruction.
(3)
Ensure another person is present who is capable of rendering first
aid for electric shock.
(4)
Ensure the SAFE/RUN switch is in the SAFE position and
minesweeping DC contactor or solid state pulse generator circuit
breakers and PCU is DANGER tagged OPEN before entering
drum area.
(5)
Check analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc) to a known DC source to
ensure proper operation.
(6)
Check to ensure there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter
(0 to 250 Vdc range).
(7)
Check multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation
prior to making NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report.
(8)
Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static
electrical charge from terminal box and magnetic minesweeping
cable.
(9)
Sand terminals with fine sandpaper.
SUBMITTED
APPROVED
MINE COUNTERMEASURES OFFICER
COMMANDING OFFICER
CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In)
Figure 4-17. Minesweeping Order Format (Sheet 3 of 3)
4-37/(4-38 blank)
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4A-1
RIGGING MULTIPLANE KITES
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could
result in injury or death to personnel.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Bridle, chain, M/S depressor, 3-legs, size 1 (includes:
3/4-inch x 6-foot depressor span pendants (3),
1-inch eye and jaw swivels (2),
7/8-inch shackles (8), 4-way connector, and
7/8- x 12-inch turnbuckle (2)) (1075-00-294-2291)
Bridle, chain, M/S otter, 4-legs, size 1 (includes: tow
beam. 3/4-inch shackle (5), 7/8-inch and 1-inch
shackles, and 7/8- x 6-inch turnbuckle (2))
(1075-00-294-2292)
Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (as required)
(1075-00-391-9280)
Shackle, long, clevis-type, NM (5340-01-270-8709)
(2)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Block, type L, NM (3940-00-809-7167) (2)
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Chain, safety, NM (4010-00-599-6737) (3)
Cutter, End, Mechanical, Mk 9, NM (per Job Sheet
4A-4) (1075-00-265-0677) (2)
Depressor Wire, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 1800-foot, NM,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye
outboard end, inboard end whipped)
(4010-01-296-5861)
Float, type O, size 1 (per Job Sheet 4A-3)
(1075-01-371-0568) (2)
Pendant, depressor, 5/8-inch x 50-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1
1
Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 60-foot, single leg, NM,
wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pliers, wide, flat nose (5120-00-222-2232)
Screwdriver, 3/16 x 3L (5120-00-236-2127)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard
end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye outboard
end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-302-9008)
Swivel, ball bearing, Mk 9 Assembly
(4030-01-371-1927) (2)
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4A-1-1
MULTIPLANE KITE RIGGED AS A DEPRESSOR.
NOTE
Otters and depressors may be secured at the stern rail, in ready release
position, if restreaming of the sweep is anticipated; otherwise, they will be
secured in their stowage racks on the fantail.
4A-1A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4A-1-1.1
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Preparation.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
NOTE
Refer to SW570-F0-MMO-040 for sheer, depth and emergency
adjustments. Ensure all turnbuckle adjustments (settings) are entered in
the minesweeping log book.
Turnbuckle is always in the shortest of the long leg closest to the sweep
(Single O).
a.
b.
To maintain stability and keep depressor towing directly astern at maximum depth for a given
scope of depressor wire, lengths of bridle legs must be correct (Figure 4A-1A).
(1)
The After (short) leg should measure between 45-7/8 inches to 46-3/8 inches.
Measurement is taken from the inside of the 7/8-inch shackle pin to the inside of pear link
as shown in Figure 4A-1A.
(2)
The Forward (long) legs should measure between 66-1/2 inches and 67-inches.
Measurement is taken on the leg without the turnbuckle from the inside of long link to inside
of 7/8-inch shackle pin. The leg with the turnbuckle is measured from inside long link to
inside eye of turnbuckle as shown in Figure 4A-1A (TURNBUCKLE TO BE AS CLOSE TO
MID SETTING AS POSSIBLE WITH NO KINKS OR TWIST IN CHAIN) (Figure 4A-1B).
If differences in length of bridle legs are necessary for proper stability, shackles are used to
compensate for differences. All legs are secured to multiplane kite using 7/8-inch shackles of
same configuration.
4A-1-1.2
Rigging.
NOTE
The purpose of depressor is to give depth and control span to the inboard
end of the sweep. For single side O-type sweeping the depressor must
veer away from the sweep. Therefore it is strongly recommended to have
two rigged depressors, one to give a port sheer when used with starboard
side O gear, and one to give a starboard sheer when used with port side O
gear. For double O gear, the span pendant limits the sheer making it travel
astern of the ship. Paragraph 4A-1-2 contains details of Depressor Sheer
Adjustments.
a.
4A-1B
Multiplane kite rigged as a depressor for Single O, Port configuration (Figure 4A-1C).
(1)
Secure forward legs of depressor bridle to towing plate links at forward vane, using
7/8-inch shackles furnished with bridle. Ensure that the leg with turnbuckle is nearest to
the sweep.
(2)
Secure after leg to back (center) bar on after vane using 7/8-inch shackle.
(3)
Using the jaw end of a 1-inch swivel (eye to jaw), attach it to the towing ring of bridle chain.
(4)
Attach the eye end of swivel to the 4-way connector using a 1-inch shackle.
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4A-1A. Method of Measuring Depressor Bridle Chain Legs
4A-1C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-1B. Positioning of Turnbuckle for Mid-Setting
b.
c.
4A-1D
(5)
Using a 1-inch shackle, attach the eye end of another 1-inch swivel (eye to jaw) to the other
end of 4-way connector. The jaw end of this swivel is for the depressor wire connection.
(6)
Connect the 6-foot span pendant to the side of the 4-way connector using a 7/8-inch
shackle.
(7)
Adjust the turnbuckle as required.
(8)
Proceed to paragraph 4A-1-2.
Multiplane kite rigged as a depressor for Single O, Starboard configuration (Figure 4A-1D).
(1)
Secure forward legs of depressor bridle to towing plate links at forward vane, using
7/8-inch shackles furnished with bridle. Ensure that the leg with turnbuckle is nearest to
the sweep.
(2)
Secure after leg to back (center) bar on after vane using 7/8-inch shackle.
(3)
Using the jaw end of a 1-inch swivel (eye to jaw), attach it to the towing ring of bridle chain.
(4)
Attach the eye end of swivel to the 4-way connector using a 1-inch shackle.
(5)
Using a 1-inch shackle, attach the eye end of another 1-inch swivel (eye to jaw) to the other
end of 4-way connector. The jaw end of this swivel is for the depressor wire connection.
(6)
Connect the 6-foot span pendant to the side of the 4-way connector using a 7/8-inch
shackle.
(7)
Adjust turnbuckle as required.
(8)
Proceed to paragraph 4A-1-2.
Multiplane kite rigged as a depressor for Double O configuration (Figure 4A-1E).
(1)
Secure forward legs of depressor bridle to towing plate links at forward vane, using
7/8-inch shackles furnished with bridle. The turnbuckle can be in either leg.
(2)
Secure after leg to back (center) bar on after vane using 7/8-inch shackle.
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4A-1C. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single O, Port Configuration
4A-1E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-1D. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single O, Starboard Configuration
4A-1F
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4A-1E. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Double O Configuration
4A-1G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
d.
PRE-OPERATIONAL
(3)
Using the jaw end of a 1-inch swivel (eye to jaw), attach it to the towing ring of bridle chain.
(4)
Attach the eye end of swivel to the 4-way connector using a 1-inch shackle.
(5)
Using a 1-inch shackle, attach the eye end of another 1-inch swivel (eye to jaw) to the other
end of 4-way connector. The jaw end of this swivel is for the depressor wire connection.
(6)
Connect the 6-foot span pendants to the sides of the 4-way connector using 7/8-inch
shackles.
(7)
Adjust the turnbuckle to mid setting (Figure 4A-1B) for the depressor to tow dead astern.
(8)
Proceed to paragraph 4A-1-2.
Multiplane kite rigged as a depressor for Single Ship Deep Sweep.
NOTE
Depressors must be adjusted to have the same amount of sheer away from
the sweep.
(1)
(2)
e.
4A-1H
Outboard depressor (Figure 4A-1F).
(a)
Secure forward legs of depressor bridle to towing plate links at forward vane, using
7/8-inch shackles furnished with bridle (turnbuckle can be in either leg).
(b)
Secure after leg to back (center) bar on after vane using 7/8-inch shackle.
(c)
Using a 7/8-inch shackle, attach a depressor span pendant (part of bridle chain
assembly) to the towing ring of bridle chain. On the other end of the depressor span
pendant, attach an 11-inch type L block using a 7/8-inch shackle.
(d)
Attach a 1-inch swivel (link-to-link) to the towing ring using a 7/8-inch shackle. This
is for the outboard end of the 50-foot depressor pendant.
(e)
Adjust the turnbuckle for the depressor to tow dead astern. Ensure that there are no
kinks or twisting of chains.
Inboard depressor (Figure 4A-1G).
(a)
Secure forward legs of depressor bridle to towing plate links at forward vane, using
7/8-inch shackles furnishes with bridle (turnbuckle can be in either leg).
(b)
Secure after leg to back (center) bar on after vane using 7/8-inch shackle.
(c)
Using a 7/8-inch shackle, attach a depressor span pendant (part of bridle chain
assembly) to the towing ring of bridle chain. On the other end of the depressor span
pendant, attach a 3-inch ring using a 7/8-inch shackle.
(d)
Attach a 1-inch swivel (link-to-link) to the 3-inch ring using a 7/8-inch shackle on
both sides of span pendant connection. This is for the inboard end of the 50-foot
depressor pendant and for the depressor wire connection.
(e)
Opposite the span pendant, use a 7/8-inch shackle to connect another span
pendant to the 3-inch ring. On the free end of span pendant, attach an 11-inch type
L block using a 7/8-inch shackle.
(f)
Adjust the turnbuckle for the depressor to tow dead astern. Ensure that there are no
kinks or twisting of chains.
(g)
Proceed to paragraph 4A-1-2.
Multiplane Kite rigged as a depressor for Team Deep Sweep.
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4A-1F. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single Ship Deep Sweep (SSDS)
(Outboard Depressor)
4A-1J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-1G. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single Ship Deep Sweep (SSDS)
(Inboard Depressor)
4A-1K
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
NOTE
Depressors must be adjusted to have the same amount of sheer away from
the sweep.
(1)
(2)
f.
Outboard depressor (Figure 4A-1H)
(a)
Secure forward legs of depressor bridle to towing plate links at forward vane, using
7/8-inch shackles furnished with bridle (turnbuckle can be in either leg).
(b)
Secure after leg to back (center) bar on after vane using 7/8-inch shackle.
(c)
Using a 7/8-inch shackle, attach a depressor span pendant (part of bridle chain
assembly) to the towing ring of bridle chain. On the other end of the depressor span
pendant, attach a 11-inch type L block using a 7/8-inch shackle.
(d)
Attach a 1-inch swivel (link-to-link) to the towing ring using a 7/8-inch shackle. This
is for the outboard end of the 50-foot depressor pendant.
(e)
Adjust the turnbuckle for the depressor to tow dead astern. Ensure that there are no
kinks or twisting of chains.
Inboard Depressor (Figure 4A-1J)
(a)
Secure forward legs of depressor bridle to towing plate links at forward vane, using
7/8-inch shackles furnished with bridle (turnbuckle can be in either leg).
(b)
Secure after leg to back (center) bar on after vane using 7/8-inch shackle.
(c)
Using a 7/8-inch shackle, attach a depressor span pendant (part of bridle chain
assembly) to the towing ring of bridle chain. On the other end of the depressor span
pendant attach a 3-inch ring using a 7/8-inch shackle.
(d)
Attach a 1-inch swivel (link-to-link) to the 3-inch ring using a 7/8-inch shackle on
both sides of span pendant connection. This is for the inboard end of the 50-foot
depressor pendant and for the depressor wire connection.
(e)
Opposite the span pendant, use a 7/8-inch shackle to connect another span
pendant to the 3-inch ring. On the free end of span pendant, attach a 11-inch type L
block using a 7/8-inch shackle.
(f)
Adjust the turnbuckle for the depressor to tow dead astern. Ensure that there are no
kinks or twisting of chains.
(g)
Proceed to paragraph 4A-1-2.
Multiplane Kite rigged as a depressor for Improved Deep Moored Sweep.
NOTE
Depressors must be adjusted to have the same amount of sheer away from
the sweep.
(1)
Outboard Depressor (Figure 4A-1K)
(a)
Secure forward legs of depressor bridle to towing plate links at forward vane, using
7/8-inch shackles furnished with bridle. The turnbuckle can be in either leg.
(b)
Secure after leg to back (center) bar on after vane using a 7/8-inch shackle.
(c)
Connect a depressor span pendant to the bridle tow ring using a 7/8-inch shackle.
4A-1L
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-1H. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Team Deep Sweep
(Outboard Depressor)
4A-1M
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4A-1J. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Team Deep Sweep (Inboard Depressor)
4A-1N
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-1K. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Improved Deep Moored Sweep (IDMS)
(Outboard Depressor)
4A-1P
PRE-OPERATIONAL
(2)
4A-1-2
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
(d)
On the other end of the depressor span pendant connect the jaw end of a 1-inch
swivel (eye to jaw). Using a 7/8-inch shackle, connect the eye end of swivel to the
outboard 3-inch ID ring.
(e)
Adjust the turnbuckle for the depressor to tow dead astern. Ensure that there are no
kinks or twisting of chains.
Inboard Depressor (Figure 4A-1L)
(a)
Secure forward legs of depressor bridle to towing plate links at forward vane, using
7/8-inch shackles furnished with bridle. The turnbuckle can be in either leg.
(b)
Secure after leg to back (center) bar on after vane using a 7/8-inch shackle.
(c)
Connect a depressor span pendant to the bridle tow ring using a 7/8-inch shackle.
(d)
On the other end of the depressor span pendant connect the jaw end of a 1-inch
swivel (eye to jaw). Using a 7/8-inch shackle connect the eye end of swivel to the
inboard 3-inch ID ring.
(e)
Adjust the turnbuckle for the depressor to tow dead astern. Ensure that there are no
kinks or twisting of chains.
DEPRESSOR SHEER ADJUSTMENT.
NOTE
The depressor will always travel in the direction of shortest forward leg. A
depressor that is adjusted to tow directly astern with port gear may sheer
when used with starboard gear. Correct riding position is directly astern of
its tow point.
Sheer and depth adjustments requires test streaming of the depressor.
a.
Shackle depressor wire to the 1-inch swivel (eye to jaw). Veer about 9-fathoms of depressor
wire, and gradually increase speed to 8-knots.
b.
If depressor tows nearly astern, increase headway to maximum speed.
c.
Adjustments for sheer:
(1)
If depressor sheers away from the sweep, shorten turnbuckle in the forward leg a minimum
of four (4) turns per adjustment. Ensure lock nuts are tightened and secured with 1/16-inch
seizing wire.
(2)
If depressor sheers toward the sweep, lengthen the turnbuckle in the forward leg a
minimum of four (4) turns per adjustment. Ensure lock nuts are tightened and secured with
1/16-inch seizing wire.
d.
If the depressor does not have proper depth, check the difference in the length between the long
legs and the short leg. It should measure in the range of 20-1/8 and 21-1/8 inch.
e.
Depressor depth emergency adjustments:
(1)
Do not perform unless absolutely necessary.
(2)
Add shackles to short leg first. If depth does not increase, remove the shackles from the
short leg and add to the forward legs.
4A-1Q
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-1L. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Improved Deep Moored Sweep (IDMS)
(Inboard Depressor)
4A-1R
PRE-OPERATIONAL
(3)
f.
4A-1-3
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Proper adjustment is achieved when depressor has an angle between 37 and 40 degrees
from horizontal at a ship speed of eight (8) knots.
After proper adjustment, count the number of threads inside the turnbuckle and log it in the
Minesweep Log.
MULTIPLANE KITE RIGGED AS AN OTTER.
4A-1-3.1
Preparation.
a.
To maintain proper attitude for sweeping, lengths of bridle legs must be correct (Figure 4A-1M).
b.
Difference in length between forward and after bridle legs should be approximately 18 inches.
All legs are secured to multiplane kite using 3/4-inch shackles of the same configuration (Figure
4A-1N).
c.
Ensure turnbuckle is secured with 1/16-inch seizing wire.
4A-1-3.2
a.
Rigging a Multiplane Kite As An Otter (Starboard Configuration).
Using 3/4-inch shackles, secure forward and after legs of otter bridle to towing plate links at
forward and after vanes, respectively (Figure 4A-1P). Ensure all shackle pins are inserted from
otter out (inboard to outboard).
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
NOTE
Multiplane kite rigged as an otter (Port configuration, Figure 4A-1Q) is
adjusted the same as a starboard otter.
b.
Assemble bridle for starboard operation. Ensure turnbuckle leg is on the bottom (Figure 4A-1P)
and that the turnbuckle is adjusted for the mid setting (Figure 4A-1R). A bridle adjusted for a
starboard operating otter should remain with kite for which it is adjusted.
4A-1-3.3
Otter Adjustments.
NOTE
The otter is correctly adjusted when the float and about one-half of the
flagstaff are submerged at a maximum sweeping speed. This results in a
maximum otter depth for a given float pendant length. Lengthening or
shortening turnbuckle leg decreases or increases, respectively, the
downward pull of otter. Turnbuckle adjustments will normally bring float to
its proper depth.
a.
There are three types of adjustments for the otter:
(1)
Initial Adjustment is performed when the gear is first received or when prior adjustments
are unknown.
(a)
Place turnbuckle in mid position.
(b)
Test stream the gear by launching the otter and using a 60-foot float pendant and a
size 1 float.
4A-1S
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-1M. Method of Measuring Otter Bridle Chain Legs
4A-1T
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4A-1N. Otter Bridle Assembly
4A-1U
Figure 4A-1P. Multiplane Kite Rigged as a Starboard Otter
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4A-1V
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-1Q. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Port Otter
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4A-1W
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-1R. Position of Turnbuckle for Mid-Setting
(2)
(3)
(4)
(c)
Payout the sweep wire to 200-fathoms.
(d)
Increase ship’s speed to 7-8 knots.
(e)
The angle of the float flagstaff off the ship's head should be between 22 and 32
degrees.
Operational Adjustment are performed when:
(a)
Mine explodes near the gear.
(b)
Gear striking the bottom.
(c)
Normal wear on the chain legs.
(d)
A change in float pendant length of more than 30 feet from initial adjustment.
For Operational Adjustment:
(a)
To increase depth of float, shorten turnbuckle leg four turns at a time. This
increases the downward pull by laying otter over more. Secure turnbuckle with
1/8-inch seizing wire.
(b)
To make float ride at a more shallow depth, lengthen turnbuckle leg 2 to 4 turns at a
time. This decreases downward pull by laying otter over less. Secure turnbuckle
with 1/16-inch seizing wire.
Emergency Adjustments provide sheer.
NOTE
When otter is adjusted to tow deeper, the float angle may decrease as
sweep depth increases. This is due to the progressive increase in sweep
wire scope required to maintain a given number of fathoms outboard, and to
longer float pendants required for deeper sweeping. This cannot be
completely compensated for by sheer adjustment.
(a)
4A-1X
The four legs connected to the corners of otter are proportioned for proper sheer;
however, if otter will not sheer sufficiently, proceed to step (b).
PRE-OPERATIONAL
4A-1-3.4
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
(b)
To adjust otter sheer, add a 3/4-inch shackle to each of the forward long legs leading
to forward corners of otter. If the float angle does not increase, remove them and
add them to the short legs. If the angle still does not increase, refer to
SW570-F0-MMO-040.
(c)
Float angle with 200-fathoms of sweep wire outboard of a depressor snatch block, a
sweep depth of 5 fathoms, and a speed of 8-knots is shown in Table 4A-1A.
(d)
Depressor wire and float pendant lengths for speeds of 6, 8, and 10 knots are listed
in Table 4A-1B.
(e)
Sweep spread for various scopes of sweep wires are illustrated in Figure 4A-1S.
Final Checks - Depressor and Otter.
a.
After depressor and otter have been adjusted independently, stream 200-fathoms of sweep wire
using a 60-foot float pendant and 16-fathoms scope of depressor wire.
b.
Gradually increase to maximum speed for sweeping. Check performance of gear, make
adjustments as required and log all adjustments in the minesweeping log book.
c.
At maximum sweep speed the float flagstaff should be half awash and at an angle of 22 to 32
degrees.
NOTE
A depressor subjected to correct initial adjustment will generally maintain
depth satisfactorily.
d.
On a single-rigged, O-type sweep being towed at 6-knots, the 16-fathom depressor wire should
stream astern at an angle between 37 and 40 degrees from horizontal when used with a sweep
wire attached to an otter suspended from a 60-foot float pendant.
e.
If the angle of depressor wire is less than 30 degrees from horizontal, add a shackle to each of
the forward legs of bridle, as necessary, to obtain proper angle. If the angle of depressor wire is
greater than 40 degrees from horizontal, add a shackle to after leg of depressor bridle, as
necessary, to obtain proper angle.
4A-1-4
a.
DEPRESSOR WIRE AND FLOAT PENDANT.
Table 4A-1B lists required scope of depressor wire and length of float pendant for a given depth
of sweep at speeds of 6, 8, and 10 knots for 100 to 300 fathoms of sweep wire veered and half
the flagstaff submerged. Since values given are critical with respect to speed and adjustment of
gear, accurate speed curves should be obtained with appropriate gear streamed. Depressor
and otter should be adjusted as described in this chapter.
EXAMPLE: A sweep is to be conducted at a depth of 14 fathoms and a speed of 8 knots.
b.
4A-1-5
a.
Look in the column headed DEPTH OF SWEEP. Opposite 14 fathoms depth of sweep and
under column headed 8 KNOTS, it will be found the required LENGTH OF FLOAT PENDANT is
100 feet, and the required scope of depressor wire is 29 fathoms for one side streamed. When
both sides are streamed, required scope of depressor wire is 42 fathoms.
LOG MEASUREMENT.
Measure and record all measurements in the ship's minesweeping log.
4A-1Y
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Table 4A-1A. O-Type Float Angles
SPEED - 8 KNOTS
DEPTH OF SWEEP
IN FATHOMS
SINGLE SIDE ANGLE FROM
BRIDGE PELORUS (DEGREES)
BOTH SIDES SEXTANT ANGLE
AT STERN (DEGREES)
5
25
57
6
25
56
7
24-1/2
54-1/2
8
24-1/2
53
9
24
53
10
24
52
12
23
50-1/2
14
22-1/2
48-1/2
16
22
47
18
21
45
20
21
43-1/2
25
20
40
30
19
37
35
18
34
40
17
31
4A-1Z
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4A-1B. Wire and Float Pendant Length
SPEED THROUGH WATER
DEPTH
OF
SWEEP
6 KNOTS
SCOPE OF
DEPRESSOR
WIRE
8 KNOTS
LENGTH OF
FLOAT
PENDANT
FATHOMS
Single Double
Fathoms Sweep Sweep
SCOPE OF
DEPRESSOR
WIRE
10 KNOTS
LENGTH OF
FLOAT
PENDANT
FATHOMS
Feet
Otter
Depth
Single Double
Sweep Sweep
SCOPE OF
DEPRESSOR
WIRE
LENGTH OF
FLOAT
PENDANT
FATHOMS
Feet
Otter
Depth
Single Double
Sweep Sweep
Feet
Otter
Depth
5
7
13
20
27
7
15
20
28
8
16
20
28
6
8
16
30
33
9
18
30
35
10
19
30
35
7
10
19
40
39
11
21
40
43
12
22
40
43
8
12
21
45
45
14
24
50
51
15
26
50
51
9
14
24
50
51
16
27
60
58
17
29
60
58
10
16
27
60
58
19
30
65
66
20
33
65
66
12
20
33
70
72
24
36
80
83
25
39
80
85
14
25
38
85
86
29
42
100
100
31
46
105
105
16
30
44
100
100
33
49
120
119
36
53
130
127
18
35
50
115
115
38
55
140
138
41
60
150
149
20
39
56
130
130
43
62
150
158
47
68
170
172
25
51
72
165
168
55
80
210
210
60
87
230
232
30
62
89
205
208
68
98
265
265
74
106
300
300
35
74
105
250
248
80
116
330
328
87
126
370
372
40
85
122
290
290
93
134
400
400
101
146
465
486
45
97
—
340
338
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
50
109
—
390
390
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
4A-1AA
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-1S. Sweep Spread for Various Effective Scopes of Sweep Wire
4A-1AB
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4A-2
SWEEP AND DEPRESSOR WIRE PREPARATION AND MARKING
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could
result in injury or death to personnel.
The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure
all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data
Sheet (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is
followed.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM
(with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906)
Depressor Wire, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 1800-foot, NM,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye
outboard end, inboard end whipped)
(4010-01-296-5861)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 5/8-inch
(4030-00-270-5483)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard
end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye outboard
end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-302-9008)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Paint, enamel, blue (TT-E-516) *
Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) *
Paint, enamel, white (TT-E-516) *
*
Paint, enamel, yellow (TT-E-516) *
Swaging Tool Kit (3446-00-196-3905)
Tape, steel measuring, 100-foot (5210-00-554-7092)
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Hazardous Material.
4A-2A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4A-2-1
4A-2-1.1
PRE-OPERATIONAL
RIGGING THE SWEEP WIRE.
Sweep Wire Preparation.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
NOTE
Use right-hand lay wire on starboard side and left-hand lay wire on port side
to overcome wire sag during towing operations. Safe working load is
one-half the breaking strength.
Non-magnetic 5/8-inch (7 x 7), 4,000-foot faired wire rope with a breaking
strength of 32,000 pounds is used as a sweep wire for general
minesweeping operations.
Non-magnetic 5/8-inch (7 x 7), 1,800-foot (RHL) wire rope with a breaking
strength of 32,000 pounds is used as a depressor wire for general
minesweeping operations.
a.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach, 5/8-inch x 6-foot diversion chain to outboard end of port sweep
wire.
Maintain a minimum of 500 lbs of tension on the wire.
NOTE
All sweep wire measurements are from the hardeye end of sweep wire
(except for diverted magnetic sweeps). Sweep wire markings may be
applied before or during initial wire installation on winch drum. Space
multiple bands 1 inch apart. Use a steel tape to accurately measure
location of bands. The full scope of sweep wire is measured from sweep
wire roller chock to otter.
b.
Pay out sweep wire from sweep wire drum to 300-foot (50 FMS) scope as measured from
hardeye end of sweep wire.
c.
Using PPE per MSDS, paint one 2-inch wide red band on sweep wire at 300-foot (50 FMS)
location (Figure 4A-2A).
d.
Pay out sweep wire to 600-foot (100 FMS) scope.
e.
Using PPE per MSDS, paint one 2-inch wide white band on sweep wire at 600-foot (100 FMS)
location.
f.
Using PPE per MSDS, continue paying out and painting bands on sweep wire in the locations,
quantities, and colors indicated in Table 4A-2A. Continue as required.
g.
Reel sweep wire back on sweep wire drum and secure to drum. Using PPE per MSDS, mark
both sweep wires with 2-inch bands, one red, one white and one blue at 1,110 feet for the M
Mk 7(b) (temporary mark).
4A-2B
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4A-2A. Standard Sweep Wire Markings for Port and Starboard Wire
4A-2C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Table 4A-2A. Sweep Wire Painted Band Locations
DISTANCE FROM OUTBOARD ENDS (FMS)
NUMBER OF 2-INCH BANDS
COLOR OF PAINT
50
1
Red
100
1
White
150
2
Red
200
2
White
250
3
Red
300
3
White
4A-2-1.2
FA2 and FA2A Port Sweep Wire Preparation.
NOTE
Use a steel tape to accurately measure location of marking bands.
All diverted magnetic sweeps are measured from the center of long link in
the 6-foot chain. All other sweep wire measurements are from the hardeye
end of sweep wire.
a.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach 6-foot chain to outboard end of sweep wire.
b.
Pay out sweep wire to first red or blue mark (360 feet) as measured from long link in center of
chain.
c.
Using PPE per MSDS, paint one red and one blue 2-inch wide band 1 inch apart on sweep wire
(Figure 4A-2B).
d.
Pay out sweep wire to second blue and red mark (390 feet).
e.
Using PPE per MSDS, paint two red and two blue 2-inch wide bands 1 inch apart on sweep wire.
f.
Continue paying out and using PPE per MSDS, paint bands on sweep wire in locations,
quantities, and colors as indicated in Figure 4A-2B.
g.
Reel port sweep wire onto port sweep wire drum. Unshackle 6-foot chain from sweep wire.
h.
Secure sweep wire to sweep wire drum.
4A-2D
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4A-2B. Port Sweep Wire Marking for FA2 and FA2A Sweep Configurations
(Without Fairings)
4A-2E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4A-2-2
4A-2-2.1
PRE-OPERATIONAL
DEPRESSOR WIRE RIGGING.
Depressor Wire Preparation.
NOTE
5/8-inch (7 x 7), 1,800-foot wire rope is used for size 1 depressor streaming
operations.
Depressor wire markings may be applied before or during initial wire
installation on the winch drum. Space multiple bands 1 inch apart. Use a
steel tape to accurately measure locations of bands. The scope of
depressor wire is measured from water’s edge to the depressor.
a.
Pay out depressor wire. Using PPE per MSDS, paint a single 2-inch wide red intermediate band
every fathom from 1 to 60 fathoms, except at distances listed in Table 4A-2B.
b.
In addition to above fathom markings, using PPE per MSDS, paint 2-inch wide bands in
locations, quantities, and colors indicated in Table 4A-2B. Space all multiple bands 1 inch apart.
c.
Continue painting bands on wire, repeating color and number coding as required (Table 4A-2B).
Continue to 150 FMS (or longer as required).
d.
Reel depressor wire on depressor wire drum. Secure depressor wire to drum.
Table 4A-2B. Depressor Wire Painted Bands Locations
DISTANCE FROM OUTBOARD ENDS (FMS)
NUMBER OF 2-INCH BANDS
COLOR OF PAINT
5
1
White
10
2
White
15
3
White
20
4
White
25
1
Yellow
30
2
Yellow
35
3
Yellow
40
4
Yellow
45
1
White
50
2
White
55
3
White
60
4
White
65
1
Yellow
4A-2F
PRE-OPERATIONAL
4A-2-3
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
NICROPRESS MODEL NO. 635, HYDRAULIC SWAGING TOOL.
High pressure hydraulic equipment can be dangerous if not properly used.
It is important that only persons fully familiar with the proper use and care of
the No. 635 tool should operate the equipment. During use persons should
wear eye goggles, safety shoes, and safety helmet.
Never operate the tool without the thrust pin all the way in. The thrust pin
handle is designed to prevent operation of the pump of the No. 635 tool
except when the thrust pin is all the way in.
All pendants made in port will be tested in accordance with NAVSEA
S9086-UU-STM-010 (NSTM - Chapter 613). Emergency pendants made
without the required testing shall require authorization from the
Commanding Officer and supporting entry made in deck log before use.
(Upon return to port, pendant shall be correctly tested or discarded.)
Before operating this tool or making a splice, ensure the correct die for the
particular size of sleeve to be pressed has been correctly installed in the
tool.
NOTE
These instructions are intended for use with Nicropress oval sleeves and
cable manufactured to military specifications. If required, manufacturers
instructions for the Nicropress No. 635 can be obtained from National
Telephone Supply Company, 5100 Superior Avenue, Cleveland, OH,
44103.
4A-2-3.1
Purpose and Functional Description.
a.
The swaging tool is a hand operated, high pressure hydraulic tool capable of providing 35 tons
of swaging pressure (Figure 4A-2C). It is designed for making eye splices by shipboard
personnel using the process of swaging a metal sleeve around wire rope with a hydraulic press
approved as an alternate to manual splicing. Only use swages on wire ropes with steel core.
The use of swages on wire ropes whose construction consists of fiber cores is unauthorized due
to the inherent weakness and extreme flexibility of this type of rope.
b.
Whenever the hand pump supplied with the swaging tool is torn down for maintenance, the
output pressure must be checked and reset as required. A 10,000 psi hydraulic pressure gauge
should be connected to the pump output port. Operate the pump until pressure builds up and
the overload valve unloads. Proper setting for the pump is 8,800 psi to 9,200 psi. Adjust the
overload valve as required to reach this setting.
4A-2-3.2
a.
Swaging Flexible Steel Cable, and Wire Rope with Nicropress Oval Sleeves.
Figure 4A-2D illustrates a swaged softeye and the method of measuring the eye, all wire rope
softeyes used on MCM-Class ships are 12 inches. Tables 4A-2C and 4A-2D provide sleeve and
die sizes as required.
4A-2G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-2C. Tool, Swaging, Nicropress Mod No. 635
Figure 4A-2D. Swaged Soft Eye
4A-2H
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4A-2C. Nicropress Copper Oval Sleeves and Tool Dies
NICROPRESS COPPER OVAL SLEEVES
NICROPRESS NO. 635 HYDRAULIC
TOOL DIES
NICROPRESS OVAL SLEEVES
CABLE
SIZE
PLAIN
COPPER
SLEEVE
ZINC
PLATED
COPPER
SLEEVE NO.
TIN PLATED
COPPER
SLEEVE NO.
3/64-inch
18-11-B4
28-11-B4
428-1.5-VB4
OVAL B4
1
635-OVAL-B4-VB4
1/16-inch
18-1-C
28-1-C
428-2-VC
OVAL C
1
635-OVAL-C-VC
3/32-inch
18-2-G
28-2-G
428-3-VG
OVAL G
1
635-OVAL-G-VG
1/8-inch
18-3-M
28-3-M
428-4-VM
OVAL M
1
635-OVAL-M-VM
5/32-inch
18-4-P
28-4-P
428-5-VP
OVAL P
1
635-OVAL-P-VP
3/16-inch
18-6-X
28-6-X
428-6-VX
OVAL X
1
635-OVAL-X-VX
7/32-inch
18-8-F2
28-8-F2
428-7-VF2
OVAL F2
1
635-OVAL-F2-VF2
1/4-inch
18-10-F6
28-10-F6
428-8-VF6
OVAL F6
1
635-OVAL-F6-VF6
5/16-inch
18-13-G9
28-13-G9
428-10-VG9
OVAL G9
1
635-OVAL-G9-VG9
3/8-inch
18-23-H5
28-23-H5
428-12-VH5
OVAL H5
1
635-OVAL-H5-VH5
7/16-inch
18-24-J8
28-24-J8
428-14-VJ8
OVAL J8
2
635-OVAL-J8-VJ8
1/2-inch
18-25-K8
28-25-K8
428-16-VK8
OVAL K8
2
635-OVAL-K8-VK8
9/16-inch
18-27-M1
28-27-M1
428-18-VM1
OVAL M1
3
635-OVAL-M1-VM1
5/8-inch
18-28-N5
28-28-N5
428-20-VN5
OVAL N5
3
635-OVAL-N5-VN5
NUMBER
DIE
OF
STOCK NO. PRESSES
GAUGE
DESIGNATION
Table 4A-2D. Nicropress Stainless Steel Oval Sleeves and Tool Dies
NICROPRESS STAINLESS STEEL
OVAL SLEEVES
CABLE SIZE
NICROPRESS STAINLESS
STEEL OVAL SLEEVE
STOCK NUMBER
NICROPRESS NO. 635 HYDRAULIC
TOOL DIES
DIE
STOCK NO.
NUMBER OF
PRESSES
GAUGE
DESIGNATION
3/64-inch
168-1.5-VB4
OVAL B4
1
635-OVAL-B4-VB4
1/16-inch
168-2-VB4
OVAL B4
1
635-OVAL-B4-VB4
3/32-inch
168-3-VC
OVAL C
1
635-OVAL-C-VC
1/8-inch
168-4-VG
OVAL G
1
635-OVAL-G-VG
5/32-inch
168-5-VM
OVAL M
1
635-OVAL-M-VM
7/32-inch
168-7-VX
OVAL X
1
635-OVAL-X-VX
1/4-inch
168-8-VF2
OVAL F2
1
635-OVAL-F2-VF2
4A-2J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
b.
When making an eye or loop splice, first insert the cable into the sleeve (Figure 4A-2E).
c.
Bend cable back on itself, making a large loop, and push cable-end back into sleeve (Figure
4A-2E).
d.
Add hardeye thimble, if making a hardeye splice.
NOTE
Always have cable-end projected approximately 1/2-inch beyond the
sleeve to ensure cable in sleeve is round and undistorted and also to care
for the elongation of the sleeve which occurs when pressing it. This also
permits cable to project beyond sleeve approximately 1/8-inch to 1/4-inch
maximum after it is compressed.
e.
Place sleeve in groove of bottom die. Insert top die and center sleeve in die grooves as shown in
Figure 4A-2F.
f.
Push thrust-pin all the way in. If it does not go all the way in; open control valve and allow
ram-plunger to retract sufficiently so thrust-pin will go all the way in. Close control valve tightly
(handtight) but do not hammer it shut. Operate pump to close dies and make compression.
g.
When complete, check compression of the sleeve using the correct gauge listed in Tables
4A-2C and 4A-2D.
Figure 4A-2E. Eye Splice
4A-2K
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4A-2F. Top Die and Center Sleeve
4A-2L/(4A-2M blank)
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4A-3
FLOAT PREPARATION
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could
result in injury or death to personnel.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Flag, O-type, red and black, 33- x 33-inch
(8345-00-233-4112)
Flagstaff, 2-inch x 9-foot stainless steel
(8345-00-558-0073)
Flasher, Xenon (9905-01-216-9250)
Float, type O, size 0, NM (1075-01-357-9948)
Float, type O, size 1, NM (1075-01-371-0568)
Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x
3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638)
Line, nose, float, 2-1/2-inch x 30-foot, single leg,
nylon (hardeye splice one end, other end
whipped) 1
Line, nose, float (acoustic), 2-1/2-inch x 60-foot,
single leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1
Line, tail, float, 2-1/2-inch x 30-foot, single leg, nylon
(hardeye splice one end, other end whipped) 1
Pendant, bail (size-0 float) 2-1/2-inch x 9-foot, single
leg, nylon (hardeye splice one end, other end
with 4-inch softeye splice) 1
Pendant, bail (size-1 float) 2-1/2-inch x 7-foot, single
leg, nylon (hardeye spliced one end, other end
with 4-inch softeye splice) 1
Pendant, emergency recovery, 1/2-inch x 10-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye one
end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1
Pendant, emergency recovery, 5/16-inch x 10-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye one
end, other end 12-inch soft swage) 1
Pendant, float (acoustic) 1/2-inch x length as required,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each
end) 1
Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 5-foot, single leg, NM, wire
rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM,
wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 20-foot, single leg, NM,
wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 30-foot, single leg, NM,
wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 60-foot, single leg, NM,
wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 100-foot, single leg, NM,
wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot,
NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one end,
other end 12-inch softeye) 1
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 3/4-inch (size 0 float)
(4030-00-270-5484) (3)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 5/8-inch
(4030-00-270-5483)
Moored size 1 float (6)
Acoustic size 1 float (7)
Acoustic size 0 float (4)
Swivel, link-to-link, NM, 3/4-inch (4030-00-269-9769)
Swivel, link-to-link, NM, 5/8-inch (4030-00-269-9768)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Battery, D, Carbon (6130-01-120-1020)
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Marline (4020-00-240-2185)
1
Tape, electrical (5970-00-061-6715)
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Wire, trip, 10-inch with cotter pin
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4A-3A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4A-3-1
PRE-OPERATIONAL
RIGGING.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
4A-3-1.1
Size 0 (Single Ship Deep Sweep) and Size 1 (Moored) Float Preparation.
a.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, connect appropriate float pendant (Table 4A-3A) to a 5/8-inch
link-to-link swivel (Figure 4A-3A).
b.
Attach a 5/8-inch shackle to other end of 5/8-inch link-to-link swivel.
c.
Run long arm of a 5/8-inch pelican hook through 5/8-inch shackle and close pelican hook.
d.
Secure pelican hook with a 3/16-inch x 3-inch stainless steel cotter pin on a 10-inch trip wire.
Attach pelican hook to bail of float using a 5/8-inch shackle.
e.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach 2-1/2-inch x 30-foot nylon nose line to eye on nose of float.
f.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach thimble end of 5/16-inch x 10-foot emergency recovery pendant
to 5/8-inch shackle between link-to-link swivel and pelican hook.
g.
Attach other end of emergency recovery pendant (softeye splice) to float flagstaff socket with
electrical tape (two turns).
h.
Secure minesweeping flag to float flagstaff in either port or starboard orientation (Figure 4A-3A);
top stripe red for port sweep, top stripe black for starboard sweep.
i.
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, install batteries and verify that the photo cell is
working.
j.
Attach Xenon flasher to side of float flagstaff above the flag (Figure 4A-3A).
k.
Insert flagstaff, with flag attached, in flagstaff socket.
l.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach 2-1/2-inch x 30-foot nylon hardeye of tail line to tail of float.
4A-3-1.2
Depressor Wire and Float Pendant Length.
a.
The depressor and otter should be adjusted in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1.
b.
Table 4A-3A gives the necessary scope of depressor wire and length of float pendant for a given
depth of sweep at speeds of 6, 8, and 10 knots for 100 to 300 fathoms of sweep wire veered and
half the flagstaff of the float submerged. Since the values given are critical with respect to speed
and adjustment of gear, accurate speed curves should be obtained with appropriate gear
streamed.
4A-3-1.3
Size 1 Float Preparation for Acoustic Sweep.
a.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, connect 1/2-inch float pendant (Table 4A-3B) to 5/8-inch link-to-link
swivel (Figure 4A-3B).
b.
Attach a 5/8-inch shackle to other end of 5/8-inch link-to-link swivel.
c.
Run long arm of a 5/8-inch pelican hook through 5/8-inch shackle and close pelican hook.
4A-3B
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4A-3A. Depressor Wire and Float Pendant Length
SPEED THROUGH WATER
DEPTH
OF
SWEEP
6 KNOTS
SCOPE OF
DEPRESSOR
WIRE
8 KNOTS
LENGTH OF
FLOAT
PENDANT
FATHOMS
Fathoms
Single Double
Sweep Sweep
SCOPE OF
DEPRESSOR
WIRE
10 KNOTS
LENGTH OF
FLOAT
PENDANT
FATHOMS
Feet
Otter
Depth
Single Double
Sweep Sweep
SCOPE OF
DEPRESSOR
WIRE
LENGTH OF
FLOAT
PENDANT
FATHOMS
Feet
Otter
Depth
Single Double
Sweep Sweep
Feet
Otter
Depth
5
7
13
20
27
7
15
20
28
8
16
20
28
6
8
16
30
33
9
18
30
35
10
19
30
35
7
10
19
40
39
11
21
40
43
12
22
40
43
8
12
21
45
45
14
24
50
51
15
26
50
51
9
14
24
50
51
16
27
60
58
17
29
60
58
10
16
27
60
58
19
30
65
66
20
33
65
66
12
20
33
70
72
24
36
80
83
25
39
80
85
14
25
38
85
86
29
42
100
100
31
46
105
105
16
30
44
100
100
33
49
120
119
36
53
130
127
18
35
50
115
115
38
55
140
138
41
60
150
149
20
39
56
130
130
43
62
160
158
47
68
170
172
25
51
72
165
168
55
80
210
210
60
87
230
232
30
62
89
205
208
68
98
265
265
74
106
300
300
35
74
105
250
248
80
116
330
328
87
126
370
372
40
85
122
290
290
93
134
400
400
101
146
465
486
45
97
340
338
50
109
390
390
4A-3C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-3A. Size 0 and Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)
4A-3D
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4A-3B. Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation
DEPTH TO CENTER OF DIAPHRAGM
(FEET)
FLOAT PENDANT LENGTH
(FEET)
20
13
22
15
24
17
25
18
26
19
27
20
28
21
29
22
30
23
d.
Secure pelican hook with cotter pin on 10-inch trip wire. Attach pelican hook to bail of float using
a 5/8-inch shackle.
e.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach the hardeye of 2-1/2-inch x 7-foot bail pendant to 5/8-inch
shackle connecting the pelican hook to the bail.
f.
Pass the softeye of 7-foot bail pendant through eye on nose of float.
g.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach 2-1/2-inch x 60-foot nose line to softeye of 7-foot bail pendant.
h.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach thimble end of 1/2-inch x 10-foot emergency recovery pendant
to 5/8-inch shackle between link-to-link swivel and pelican hook.
i.
Attach other end of emergency recovery pendant (softeye) to float flagstaff socket with electrical
tape (two turns) (Figure 4A-3B).
j.
Secure minesweeping flag to float flagstaff in either port or starboard orientation (Figure 4A-3B);
e.g., top stripe red for port sweep, top stripe black for starboard sweep.
k.
Attach Xenon flasher to float flagstaff above the flag (Figure 4A-3B).
l.
Insert flagstaff in flagstaff socket.
m.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach hardeye of 2-1/2-inch x 30-foot tail line to tail of float.
4A-3-1.4
Size 0 Float Preparation for Acoustic Sweep.
a.
Using a 3/4-inch shackle, connect appropriate float pendant (Table 4A-3C) to a 3/4-inch
link-to-link swivel (Figure 4A-3C).
b.
Attach a 3/4-inch shackle to other end of 3/4-inch link-to-link swivel.
c.
Run long arm of a 5/8-inch pelican hook through 3/4-inch shackle and close pelican hook.
d.
Secure pelican hook with cotter pin on 10-inch trip wire. Attach pelican hook to bail of float using
a 5/8-inch shackle.
4A-3E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-3B. Size 1 Float Rigged for Streaming TB-27 (Acoustic)
4A-3F
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4A-3C. Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure
DEPTH TO CENTER OF
DIAPHRAGM (FEET)
PENDANT LENGTH SIZE 0
FLOAT (FEET)
AIR
PRESSURES (PSI)
20
13
8.0
22
15
8.5
24
17
9.3
25
18
10.1
26
19
10.5
27
20
10.8
28
21
11.2
29
22
11.5
30
23
11.8
e.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach the hardeye of bail pendant to the 5/8-inch shackle connecting
the pelican hook to the bail.
f.
Pass the softeye of the 9-foot bail pendant through eye on the nose of float.
g.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach a 2-1/2-inch x 60-foot nose line to softeye of 9-foot bail pendant.
h.
Using a 3/4-inch shackle, attach thimble end of 2-1/2-inch x 10-foot emergency recovery
pendant to 3/4-inch shackle between link-to-link swivel and pelican hook.
i.
Attach other end of emergency recovery pendant (softeye) to float flagstaff socket with electrical
tape (two turns) (Figure 4A-3C).
j.
Secure minesweeping flag to float flagstaff in either port or starboard orientation (Figure 4A-3C)
(top stripe red for port sweep, top stripe black for starboard sweep).
k.
Attach Xenon flasher to flagstaff above the flag (Figure 4A-3C).
l.
Insert flagstaff in flagstaff socket.
m.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach hardeye of 2-1/2-inch x 30-foot tail line to tail of float.
4A-3G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-3C. Size 0 Float Rigged for Streaming TB-26 (Acoustic)
4A-3H
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4A-4
CUTTER ASSEMBLIES PREPARATION
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could
result in injury or death to personnel.
The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure
all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data
Sheet (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is
followed.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded
component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.
All personnel handling explosives/explosive devices shall be qualified and
certified in accordance with Explosive Handling Personnel Qualification
and Certification (QUAL/CERT) Program.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Cartridge, Mk 152 Mod 0 (1377-00-302-8489)
Cartridge, Mk 154 Mod 0 (Red) (1377-00-302-8494)
Cartridge, Mk 155 Mod 0 (Blue) (1377-00-302-8504)
Cartridge, Mk 192 Mod 0 (1377-01-012-2961)
Cutter, End, Mechanical, Mk 9 (1075-00-265-0677)
Cutter Mk 12, Elevating Fin Assembly
(1075-01-339-3693)
Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2, Body, NM (1075-00-340-6803)
Cutter Mk 14, Elevating Fin Assembly
(1075-01-337-4662)
Cutter Mk 14 Mod 0, Body, NM (1075-00-507-1201)
Cutter Mk 15 (1075-00-332-5834)
Swivel Assembly Mk 9 (4030-01-371-1927)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Brush, bristle (7920-00-238-1907) (2)
Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2, NM:
Kit, expendable, parts (1075-00-691-8341)
Kit, maintenance, parts (1075-00-340-6804)
Kit, special tools, Mk 12 (1075-00-340-6805)
Tool, cocking, Mk 12 (1075-00-347-0757)
Cutter Mk 14 Mod 0, NM:
Kit, expendable, parts (1075-00-507-1210)
Kit, maintenance, parts (1075-00-507-1211)
Kit, special tools, Mk 14 (1075-00-024-0220)
Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM:
Kit, expendable, parts (1075-00-332-5835)
Kit, maintenance, parts (1075-00-332-5836)
Kit, special tools, Mk 15 (1075-01-245-8516)
File, hand, half round, 6-inch (5110-00-241-9153) (2)
Grease (MIL-G-24139) *
Hammer, copper, 1-lb (5120-00-224-4121) (2)
Line, tag, 21-thread x 3-foot (4) 1
Loctite 222 (7050-00-451-4442) *
Pliers, 5-inch with cutter (5120-00-222-2232) (2)
Screwdriver, 3/8-inch x 10 L (5120-00-293-3309) (2)
Screwdriver, 3/16-inch x 3 L (5120-00-905-6728) (2)
Silicon Compound (MIL-S-8660) *
Tape, antiseize (MIL-T-27730, size 1)
Tool Punch (5140-00-329-4306) (2)
Wrench, adjustable, 8-inch (5120-00-264-3794) (2)
Wrench, allen, 1/2-inch hex (5120-00-198-5391)
Wrench, allen, 5/16-inch hex (5120-00-240-5274) (2)
See footnotes at end of table.
4A-4A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SUPPORT ITEMS (Continued)
Wrench, combo, 5/8- x 1-1/16-inch offset
(5120-00-224-3141) (2)
*
1
Hazardous Material.
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4A-4-1
CUTTER MK 9, END ASSEMBLY.
Cutter blades are very sharp and can cause injury to personnel. Do not
place hand or finger on cutting blades or in cable cutting jaws.
4A-4-1.1
Elevating Fin Attachment.
a.
Hold cutter by the large shackle with the jaw of the frame pointing forward (Figure 4A-4A).
b.
For a starboard cutter, the elevating fin will go on the right side of the frame; on the left side for a
port cutter.
c.
Fasten cutter body frame to elevating fin with three fin assembly screws. The screws are
attached through the blade and into the frame.
4A-4-1.2
Port or Starboard Cutter Check.
a.
Lay cutter on deck with jaw facing forward, elevating fin side down, and cutting blades on top.
b.
The large shackle will point to the side of the ship for which the cutter is rigged.
4A-4-1.3
a.
4A-4-1.4
Blade Attachment.
With cutter laying on deck and jaw facing forward, attach left-hand, L-shaped sawtooth blade
with blade retaining bolts; then attach right-hand blade.
Attachment of Swivel Assembly Mk 9 to the Cutter Mk 9.
a.
Remove cotter pin, guide pin, and guide for stowage.
b.
On the nonrotating end of the swivel, remove two cap head screws; then remove the pin.
c.
Position the swivel on Cutter Mk 9 and align holes of Cutter Mk 9 and swivel.
d.
Using PPE per MSDS, apply antiseize (Loctite) on cap head screw threads, then reinsert the pin
into the swivel and screw cap head screws into swivel.
4A-4-1.5
Sweep Wire Attachment.
a.
Remove hex head cap head screws from rotating end of the swivel, then remove the pin.
b.
Position the swivel on the end of the sweep wire and align the hole of the hardeye and swivel.
c.
Using PPE per MSDS, apply antiseize (Loctite) on cap head screw threads, then reinsert the pin
into the swivel and screw cap head screws into swivel.
d.
The large shackle on the cutter attaches to otter bridle.
4A-4B
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4A-4A. Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly (Rigged for Starboard)
4A-4-2
CUTTER/ELEVATING FIN ASSEMBLY MK 12 MOD 0.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
Never stow cutter assemblies with the breech block mounted to the cutter
bodies or with the firing pin assembly in the cocked position.
4A-4-2.1
a.
4A-4-2.2
a.
Cutter Punch Installation.
Insert cutting punch and position it to line up with holes in the main frame for insertion of punch
shear pin (Figure 4A-4B). This shear pin has a preformed shank and must be driven home with
a drift pin and hammer until the head bottoms on the frame, so that the punch will be firmly held
in place.
Elevating Fin Assembly.
Using the alignment pins, position the cutter body assembly on the elevating fin assembly.
Fasten cutter body assembly to elevating fin using three fin assembly screws. Ensure screws
are tightened after the body is correctly positioned (Figure 4A-4B).
4A-4C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-4B. Cutter Assembly Mk 12 Mod 2
4A-4D
PRE-OPERATIONAL
b.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Cock firing plunger with cocking tool (Figure 4A-4C). Thread a trip pin through the hole in the top
of anvil and through the hole in the firing plunger (Figure 4A-4B). Insert firing safety pin. Uncock
firing plunger and remove cocking tool. Visually inspect the cutters as follows:
(1)
Ensure cutting punch is in position and shear pin is properly peaned.
(2)
Ensure trip pin is properly seated in anvil and firing plunger.
(3)
Ensure anvil is in proper position and anvil screw is tight.
(4)
Ensure the assembly screws securing the body to the elevating fin are tight.
Keep hands and body well clear of the anvil. Ensure that the correct
explosive cartridge is fitted.
Always fit a safety pin in a cocked, armed cutter, and ensure there is
enough tension so the pin cannot fall out. Do not remove the safety pin until
the cutter is positioned on the sweep wire, and replace it, upon recovery,
before removing the cutter or any debris from the wire.
Always point explosive cutters in a safe direction; stow on deck facing
outboard. Always treat a loaded cutter with the same respect as a loaded
gun.
NOTE
The 1st LT is required to ensure proper cartridges are used and that all
pertinent data concerning the cartridges is documented such as lot, date,
Mk and Mod, quantity, etc.
c.
Insert explosive cartridge. Place breech safety pin in breech assembly.
d.
Assemble breech in cutter body. Insert breech assembly screw and tighten with a wrench.
e.
Attach a 3-foot tagline to the elevating fin assembly. The elevating fin assembly is now ready for
positioning in the sweep wire.
4A-4-2.3
Sweep Wire Attachment.
NOTE
Cut off fairings at designated wedge stop and elevating fin assembly
placement.
a.
Assemble a wedge stop on sweep wire at desired location.
b.
Pay out the faired section of sweep wire until wedge stop is just aft of stern roller chock. On the
non-faired section, return to the standard procedure.
c.
Hold the elevating fin assembly so that the anvil opening of the cutter faces the ship.
d.
Ensure cutter tender holds the tagline securely to prevent loss of cutter during installation.
Attach the elevating fin assembly to the sweep wire just outboard of stern roller chock by placing
elevating fin insert over the wire. Depressing the handle opens the spring loaded arms, allowing
wire to fit into the inserts. Releasing the handle closes the arms, securing the wire in the insert.
e.
Remove the tagline, remove the safety pin assembly, release elevating fin assembly and pay
out sweep wire.
f.
Cutter spacing for various scopes of sweep wire is contained in Tables 4A-4A through 4A-4E.
4A-4E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-4C. Cutter Mk 12 Cocking Tool
g.
Remove the tagline, remove the safety pin assembly, release elevating fin assembly and pay
out sweep wire.
h.
Cutter spacing for various scopes of sweep wire is contained in Tables 4A-4A through 4A-4E.
4A-4-2.4
Cutter Recovery.
a.
As soon as the elevating fin assembly is within reach, perform the following:
b.
Install safety pin assembly in the breech and cutter body.
c.
Connect tagline.
d.
Remove elevating fins from sweep wire and place in pre-designated safe area.
e.
Disarm each cutter by performing the following:
(1)
Remove breech assembly screw.
(2)
Lift out breech assembly using a breech removal tool (Figure 4A-4D), if necessary, and
place in fresh water.
(3)
Using a cartridge extractor tool (screwdriver), carefully remove, clean, and stow cartridges.
(4)
Using cocking tool, cock firing plunger and remove trip pin. Uncock firing plunger and
remove cocking tool.
f.
Remove cutter body from elevating fin.
g.
Remove expendable parts (anvil, cutting punch, trip pin, and shear pin).
4A-4F
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4A-4A. Cutter Spacing - 100 Fathom Sweep Wire
INTERMEDIATE
CUTTER NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
NUMBER OF INTERMEDIATE CUTTERS ON SWEEP WIRE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
38
24
17
13
11
9
8
7
6
6
5
5
5
4
4
57
39
30
24
20
17
15
13
12
11
10
9
9
8
66
49
39
32
27
24
21
19
17
17
16
14
13
72
56
46
39
34
30
26
24
22
20
19
17
76
62
52
44
39
35
32
28
26
24
22
79
66
56
49
43
40
35
32
30
28
82
69
60
53
48
43
39
36
33
84
72
63
57
51
46
42
39
85
75
67
59
53
49
45
87
77
68
61
57
52
88
78
70
64
59
89
79
73
66
89
81
74
91
82
91
Instructions
1.
From the numbers at the top of the table, select the number of intermediate cutters to be used.
2.
Location of each cutter in FATHOMS, measured from the OUTBOARD end of the sweep wire, is
found in the vertical column directly below this number.
Example - In an 8-cutter sweep, intermediate cutter No. 1 is located 7 fathoms from the outboard end of
the sweep wire, cutter No. 2, 15 fathoms, and so on.
4A-4G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Table 4A-4B. Cutter Spacing - 150 Fathom Sweep Wire
INTERMEDIATE
CUTTER NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
NUMBER OF INTERMEDIATE CUTTERS ON SWEEP WIRE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
54
32
23
18
15
12
11
9
8
7
7
6
6
6
5
80
52
41
33
27
23
20
18
15
15
13
12
11
11
93
69
54
44
37
32
29
24
23
21
19
18
17
105
80
64
54
46
41
35
32
29
27
25
23
112
88
73
62
54
47
42
38
35
32
30
117
95
80
69
60
54
48
44
40
37
121
101
86
74
66
59
54
49
45
124
105
90
80
71
64
59
54
127
108
95
84
76
69
63
128
112
98
88
80
72
130
114
102
92
83
131
116
105
94
132
119
106
134
120
134
Instructions
1.
From the numbers at the top of the table, select the number of intermediate cutters to be used.
2.
Location of each cutter in FATHOMS, measured from the OUTBOARD end of the sweep wire, is
found in the vertical column directly below this number.
Example - In an 8-cutter sweep, intermediate cutter No. 1 is located 9 fathoms from the outboard end of
the sweep wire, cutter No. 2, 20 fathoms, and so on.
4A-4H
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4A-4C. Cutter Spacing - 200 Fathom Sweep Wire
INTERMEDIATE
CUTTER NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
NUMBER OF INTERMEDIATE CUTTERS ON SWEEP WIRE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
67
40
28
21
18
15
13
11
10
9
8
7
7
7
6
102
67
49
40
33
28
24
22
19
17
15
15
14
12
122
86
68
55
46
39
35
31
27
24
23
21
19
135
103
81
67
57
50
44
39
35
33
30
27
147
113
92
78
67
59
52
47
43
39
35
153
132
102
87
76
66
60
54
49
44
158
130
110
95
82
74
67
60
54
163
136
117
100
90
81
72
65
166
141
120
108
96
86
76
169
144
128
113
100
89
170
150
132
116
103
175
152
134
118
175
153
136
175
155
176
Instructions
1.
From the numbers at the top of the table, select the number of intermediate cutters to be used.
2.
Location of each cutter in FATHOMS, measured from the OUTBOARD end of the sweep wire, is
found in the vertical column directly below this number.
Example - In an 8-cutter sweep, intermediate cutter No. 1 is located 11 fathoms from the outboard end of
the sweep wire, cutter No. 2, 24 fathoms, and so on.
4A-4J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Table 4A-4D. Cutter Spacing - 250 Fathom Sweep Wire
INTERMEDIATE
CUTTER NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
NUMBER OF INTERMEDIATE CUTTERS ON SWEEP WIRE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
79
45
32
25
20
17
14
13
11
10
9
9
8
7
7
121
79
58
46
38
31
28
24
22
20
19
17
15
15
148
103
79
64
52
46
39
35
32
30
27
24
23
165
122
96
78
67
57
50
46
42
38
34
32
178
137
109
92
78
68
61
56
50
46
42
188
147
122
103
89
79
72
64
58
53
193
158
132
113
99
90
79
71
65
200
165
140
122
110
96
87
78
204
171
148
132
115
103
93
208
178
157
136
122
109
212
185
160
143
127
217
187
165
147
217
191
169
219
193
220
Instructions
1.
From the numbers at the top of the table, select the number of intermediate cutters to be used.
2.
Location of each cutter in FATHOMS, measured from the OUTBOARD end of the sweep wire, is
found in the vertical column directly below this number.
Example - In an 8-cutter sweep, intermediate cutter No. 1 is located 13 fathoms from the outboard end of
the sweep wire, cutter No. 2, 28 fathoms, and so on.
4A-4K
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4A-4E. Cutter Spacing - 300 Fathom Sweep Wire
INTERMEDIATE
CUTTER NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
NUMBER OF INTERMEDIATE CUTTERS ON SWEEP WIRE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
90
51
35
27
22
19
16
14
12
11
10
9
9
8
8
141
89
65
51
42
36
31
27
24
22
20
19
17
16
172
119
90
72
60
51
44
39
36
32
30
27
25
194
141
110
90
76
65
57
52
46
42
38
35
210
159
127
106
90
78
70
62
56
51
46
221
173
142
119
102
91
80
72
65
59
230
185
153
130
115
101
90
81
73
237
194
163
143
124
110
99
89
242
203
175
151
133
119
107
248
212
182
159
141
127
254
217
188
166
149
257
221
194
173
259
225
200
261
230
263
Instructions
1.
From the numbers at the top of the table, select the number of intermediate cutters to be used.
2.
Location of each cutter in FATHOMS, measured from the OUTBOARD end of the sweep wire, is
found in the vertical column directly below this number.
Example - In an 8-cutter sweep, intermediate cutter No. 1 is located 14 fathoms from the outboard end of
the sweep wire, cutter No. 2, 31 fathoms, and so on.
4A-4L
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-4D. Cutter Mk 12 Breech Removing Tool
h.
Wash expendable parts, cutter bodies and breech assemblies in accordance with MRC card.
i.
Stow in appropriate containers.
4A-4-2.5
Dud Cutter.
A DUD cutter is subject to unpredictable self-initiation of the cartridge and
presents a possible hazard to personnel during recovery.
a.
Disposition of a DUD. The possibility exists of recovering a DUD cutter. A DUD is a cutter which
the cartridge failed to fire after being struck by the firing pin. Such a cutter, if left in an operable
condition, is subject to unpredictable self-initiation of the cartridge, and presents a possible
hazard to personnel during recovery. It MUST be dealt with immediately while the cutter is still
on the wire.
b.
If during recovery of elevating fin assembly, a cutter is found operated and the cutting punch is
still intact, keep it on the sweep wire and immediately proceed as follows:
4A-4M
(1)
Install safety pin assemblies in the breech assembly of all cutters.
(2)
Connect tagline.
(3)
Cock firing plunger with cocking tool (Figure 4A-4C), insert safety pin in cutter body and
remove cocking tool.
(4)
Remove breech assembly screw.
(5)
Lift out breech assembly using a breech removal tool, if necessary (Figure 4A-4D).
(6)
Using a cartridge extractor tool (screwdriver), carefully remove the DUD cartridge and
immediately jettison.
(7)
Remove elevating fin from sweep wire and place in pre-designated safe area.
PRE-OPERATIONAL
4A-4-3
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
CUTTER/ELEVATING FIN ASSEMBLY MK 14 MOD 0.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
Never stow cutter assemblies with the breech block mounted to the cutter
bodies or with the firing pin assembly in the cocked position.
4A-4-3.1
a.
4A-4-3.2
a.
Cutter Punch Installation.
Insert cutting punch. Use the punch positioning tool to line up holes for insertion of punch shear
pin. Drive shear pin home until head bottoms (Figure 4A-4E).
Cutter Elevating Fin Assembly.
Fasten each cutter body assembly to the elevating fin with two assembly screws. Ensure
screws are tightened after all bodies are correctly positioned (Figure 4A-4F).
Figure 4A-4E. Cutter Mk 14 Punch Positioning Tool
4A-4N
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-4F. Cutter/Elevating Assembly Mk 14 Mod 0
4A-4P
PRE-OPERATIONAL
4A-4-3.3
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Breech Assembly.
Keep hands and body well clear of the anvil. Ensure that the correct
explosive cartridge is fitted.
Always fit a safety pin in a cocked, armed cutter, and ensure there is
enough tension so the pin cannot fall out. Do not remove the safety pin until
the cutter is positioned on the sweep wire, and replace it, upon recovery,
before removing the cutter or any debris from the wire.
Always point explosive cutters in a safe direction; stow on deck facing
outboard. Always treat a loaded cutter with the same respect as a loaded
gun.
NOTE
The 1st LT is required to ensure proper cartridges are used and that all
pertinent data concerning the cartridges is documented such as lot, Mk and
Mod, quantity, etc.
a.
Place anvil in slot in cutter body. Guide end of trip pin into its positioning hole in anvil. Assemble
anvil screw and tighten with a screwdriver (Figure 4A-4G).
b.
Cock firing plunger with cocking tool (Figure 4A-4H). Insert trip pin in guide slot in cutter body
through the hole in firing plunger as far as it will go. Uncock firing plunger and remove cocking
tool. Visually inspect the cutters as follows:
(1)
Ensure cutting punch is in position and shear pin head is properly bottomed.
(2)
Ensure trip pin is properly seated in anvil and firing plunger shaft.
(3)
Ensure anvil is in proper position and shear screw is tight.
(4)
Ensure the assembly screws securing the cutter bodies to the elevating fin are tight.
c.
Insert explosive cartridge.
d.
Place a safety pin in the breech assembly. Assemble the breech assembly in the cutter body.
Insert breech assembly screw and tighten with a wrench.
e.
Attach a 3-foot tagline to the elevating fin assembly. The elevating fin assembly is now ready for
positioning on sweep wire.
4A-4-3.4
Sweep Wire Attachment.
NOTE
Cut off fairings at designated wedge stop and elevating fin assembly
placement.
a.
Assemble a wedge stop on sweep wire at desired location.
b.
Pay out the faired section of sweep wire until wedge stop is just aft of stern roller chock. On the
non-faired section, return to the standard procedure.
c.
Hold the elevating fin assembly so that the anvil openings of the cutters face the ship.
4A-4Q
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-4G. Cutter Mk 14 Trip Pin Positioning
Figure 4A-4H. Cutter Mk 14 Cocking Tool
4A-4R
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
d.
Ensure cutter handler holds the tagline securely to prevent loss of cutters during installation.
Attach the elevating fin assembly to the sweep wire just outboard of stern roller chock by placing
elevating fin inserts over the wire. Pulling up on the handle, opens the spring loaded arms
allowing wire to fit into the inserts. Close the arms by releasing the handle.
e.
Remove the tagline, remove the safety pins, release elevating fin assembly and pay out sweep
wire.
f.
Cutter spacing for various scopes of sweep wire is contained in Tables 4A-4A through 4A-4E.
4A-4-3.5
a.
Cutter Recovery.
As soon as the elevating fin assembly is within reach, perform the following:
(1)
Install safety pin assemblies in the breech assembly of all cutters.
(2)
Connect tagline.
(3)
Remove elevating fins from sweep wire and place in pre-designated safe area.
(4)
Disarm each cutter by performing the following:
(a)
Remove breech assembly screw.
(b)
Lift out breech assembly using a breech removal tool (Figure 4A-4J), if necessary
and place in fresh water.
(c)
Using a cartridge extractor tool (screwdriver), carefully remove, clean, and stow
cartridges.
(d)
Using cocking tool, cock firing plunger and remove trip pin. Uncock firing plunger
and remove cocking tool.
(5)
Remove cutter bodies from elevating fins.
(6)
Remove expendable parts (anvil, cutting punch, trip pin, and shear pin).
(7)
Wash expendable parts, cutter bodies and breech assemblies in accordance with MRC
card.
(8)
Stow in appropriate containers.
4A-4-3.6
Dud Cutter.
A DUD cutter is subject to unpredictable self-initiation of the cartridge and
presents a possible hazard to personnel during recovery.
a.
Disposition of a DUD. The possibility exists of recovering a DUD cutter. A DUD is a cutter which
the cartridge failed to fire after being struck by the firing pin. Such a cutter, if left in an operable
condition, is subject to unpredictable self-initiation of the cartridge, and presents a possible
hazard to personnel during recovery. It MUST be dealt with immediately while the cutter is still
on the wire.
b.
If during recovery of elevating fin assembly, a cutter is found operated and the cutting punch is
still intact, keep it on the sweep wire and immediately proceed as follows:
(1)
Install safety pin assemblies in the breech assembly of all cutters.
(2)
Connect tagline.
4A-4S
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-4J. Cutter Mk 14 Breech Removing Tool
4A-4T
(3)
Cock firing plunger with cocking tool (Figure 4A-4H).
(4)
Remove breech assembly screw.
(5)
Lift out breech assembly using a breech removal tool, if necessary (Figure 4A-4J).
(6)
Using a cartridge extractor tool (screwdriver), carefully remove the DUD cartridge and
immediately jettison.
(7)
Uncock firing plunger and remove cocking tool.
(8)
Remove elevating fin from sweep wire and place in pre-designated safe area.
PRE-OPERATIONAL
4A-4-4
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
CUTTER ASSEMBLY MK 15 MOD 0.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
Never stow cutter assemblies with the breech block mounted to the cutter
bodies or with the firing pin assembly in the cocked position.
4A-4-4.1
Firing Unit Body Preparation.
a.
Retract firing pin by pulling on cocking ring, and slip firing trip pin (cocking collar) into place
(Figure 4A-4K).
b.
Place safety pin in position through holes provided in cocking collar.
4A-4-4.2
Main Frame and Barrel Body Preparation.
a.
Unscrew barrel retaining unit thumbscrew and remove. Ensure lockwasher, retaining pin barrel
spring, and barrel retaining pin are in place. Replace thumbscrew tightening fully; then back off
at least four full turns. Ensure friction catch screw, die retaining unit spring, and friction catch
spring are in the main frame.
b.
Insert cutting punch and shear pin in barrel body, then drive shear pin down until head bottoms.
Arresting disc must be inserted for above water use only.
c.
Insert arresting disc, as shown in Figure 4A-4L, and position die retainer unit.
d.
Secure die retainer unit in frame by tightening die retaining unit screw.
e.
Ensure a 1/4-inch nylon line (approximately 6-feet long) is attached to the main frame (Figure
4A-4L).
4A-4-4.3
a.
Sweep and Depressor Wire Attachment.
Set towing pawl and secure drums on both depressor wire and sweep wire drums.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
b.
Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.
c.
Cutters Mk 15 will be mounted on sweep wire and depressor wire aft of the instrumented fairlead
sheaves.
d.
Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4A-4M) back-to-back on sweep wire to allow for attachment of
Cutter Mk 15.
4A-4U
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-4K. Safety Pin and Trip Pin Installation
4A-4-4.4
Installation on Sweep/Depressor Wires.
Do not arm Cutter Mk 15 until it has been placed on wire.
Always insert a safety pin in a cocked, armed cutter, and ensure there is
enough tension so the pin cannot fall out. Do not remove safety pin except
to fire Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0.
Do not modify or alter cutter for firing as it may result in casualty to
personnel or damage to the cutter.
During underwater operation, all personnel must be removed from area
within 25 feet of operation to prevent injury to personnel.
To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do
not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station
on the 01 level.
NOTE
The 1st LT is required to ensure proper cartridges are used and that all
pertinent data concerning the cartridges is documented such as lot, Mk and
Mod, quantity, etc.
a.
Verify arresting disc is installed for above water use, or removed for underwater use.
b.
Place cutter on wire rope for possible emergency break away. Tighten barrel body until contact
is made; then back off one-quarter turn.
c.
Tighten barrel retaining unit thumbscrew.
4A-4V
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4A-4L. Cutter Assembly Mk 15 Mod 0
4A-4W
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-4M. Wedge Stop Placement
4A-4X
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
d.
Tie off cutter securing line to a securing point.
e.
Route a firing trip lanyard from the 01 level to Cutter Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line
pull to cutter.
4A-4-4.5
Arm Cutter Mk 15.
a.
Select proper explosive cartridge for designated application (Table 4A-4F).
b.
Insert cartridge into opening in barrel body.
c.
Install precocked firing unit, with safety pin and firing trip pin (cocking collar) installed, on barrel
body. Ensure it is firmly seated against preformed packing (O-ring) on face of barrel body.
d.
Attach firing trip lanyard to precocked firing unit assembly. Ensure a straight line pull to the
cutter. Ensure safety pin pulls free prior to firing trip pin (cocking collar).
Table 4A-4F. Cutter Mk 15 Cartridge
CARTRIDGE
HEAD COLOR
ROPE SIZE
USE
Mk 154-Heavy (Type H)
Red
1/4- to 51/64-inch
Above Water
Mk 155-Underwater
Heavy (Type U)
Blue
1/4- to 51/64-inch
Underwater
4A-4-4.6
a.
b.
Removal from Sweep/Depressor Wires.
If cutter was not operated:
(1)
Remove firing trip lanyard from firing unit assembly.
(2)
Remove firing unit body from barrel body.
(3)
Remove cartridge from barrel body using cartridge extracting tool.
(4)
Loosen barrel retaining unit thumbscrew at least four full turns.
(5)
Remove barrel from main frame.
(6)
Remove cutter from wire.
(7)
If cutter is to be stored, disassemble as required for stowage in the cutter assembly
stowage box. If cutter is to be reused immediately, place it in a safe location until needed.
If cutter was operated:
(1)
Remove firing unit body from barrel body.
(2)
Remove spent cartridge by inserting cartridge drift pin through cutting punch end of barrel
and driving out with a hammer.
(3)
Loosen barrel retaining unit thumbscrew at least four full turns.
(4)
Remove barrel from main frame so cut parts of shear pin can be removed.
(5)
Remove die retaining unit, punch, spent arresting disc, and sheared parts of wire rope.
(6)
If cutter is to be stored, disassemble as required for stowage in the cutter assembly
stowage box.
4A-4Y
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
(7)
PRE-OPERATIONAL
If cutter is to be reused immediately, follow steps outlined in paragraphs 4A-4-4.1 and
4A-4-4.2, then place Cutter Mk 15 in a safe location until needed.
A DUD cutter is subject to unpredictable self-initiation of the cartridge and
presents a possible hazard to personnel during recovery.
c.
4A-4-4.7
Disposition of a DUD. The possibility exists of recovering a DUD cutter. A DUD is a cutter which
the cartridge failed to fire after being struck by the firing pin. Such a cutter, if left in an operable
condition, is subject to unpredictable self-initiation of the cartridge, and presents a possible
hazard to personnel during recovery. It MUST be dealt with immediately while the cutter is still
on the wire.
(1)
Remove firing unit body from barrel body.
(2)
Carefully remove DUD cartridge from barrel body using cartridge extracting tool, and
immediately dispose of cartridge by jettisoning.
(3)
Cock firing pin assembly, using cocking ring, pull up and away from firing unit body and
install cocking collar and safety pin.
(4)
Reload cutter with proper cartridge and reassemble precocked firing unit.
Installation on Equalizing Towing Bridle.
a.
Clear unnecessary personnel from fantail.
b.
Install Cutter Mk 15 on towing pendant of equalizing bridle midway between 8-inch, type E
snatch block and roller chock assembly.
c.
Verify arresting disc is installed for above water use, or removed for underwater use.
d.
Place cutter on wire rope for possible emergency break away. Tighten barrel body until contact
is made; then back off one-quarter turn.
e.
Tighten barrel retaining unit thumbscrew.
f.
Tie off cutter securing line to a securing point.
To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do
not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station
on the 01 level.
g.
4A-4-4.8
Route a firing trip lanyard from 01 level to Cutter Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull
to cutters.
Arm Cutter Mk 15.
a.
Select proper explosive cartridge for designated application (Table 4A-4F).
b.
Insert cartridge into opening in barrel body.
4A-4Z
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
c.
Install precocked firing unit, with safety pin and firing trip pin (cocking collar) installed, on barrel
body. Ensure it is firmly seated against preformed packing (O-ring) on face of barrel body.
d.
Attach firing trip lanyard to precocked firing unit assembly. Ensure a straight line pull to the
cutter. Ensure safety pin pulls free prior to firing trip pin (cocking collar).
4A-4-4.9
a.
b.
Removal from Equalizing Towing Bridle.
If cutter was not operated:
(1)
Remove firing trip lanyard from firing unit assembly.
(2)
Remove firing unit body from barrel body.
(3)
Remove cartridge from barrel body using cartridge extracting tool.
(4)
Loosen barrel retaining unit thumbscrew at least four full turns.
(5)
Remove barrel from main frame.
(6)
Remove cutter from wire.
(7)
If cutter is to be stored, disassemble as required for stowage in the cutter assembly
stowage box. If cutter is to be reused immediately, place it in a safe location until needed.
If cutter was operated:
(1)
Remove firing unit body from barrel body.
(2)
Remove spent cartridge by inserting cartridge drift pin through cutting punch end of barrel
and driving out with a hammer.
(3)
Loosen barrel retaining unit thumbscrew at least four full turns.
(4)
Remove barrel from main frame so cut parts of shear pin can be removed.
(5)
Remove die retaining unit, punch, spent arresting disc, and sheared parts of wire rope.
(6)
If cutter is to be reused immediately, follow steps outlined in paragraphs 4A-4-4.1 and
4A-4-4.2 to reassemble cutter. Place cutter in a safe location until needed.
A DUD cutter is subject to unpredictable self-initiation of the cartridge and
presents a possible hazard to personnel during recovery.
c.
Disposition of a DUD. The possibility exists of recovering a DUD cutter. A DUD is a cutter which
the cartridge failed to fire after being struck by the firing pin. Such a cutter, if left in an operable
condition, is subject to unpredictable self-initiation of the cartridge, and presents a possible
hazard to personnel during recovery. It MUST be dealt with immediately while the cutter is still
on the wire.
(1)
Remove firing unit body from barrel body.
(2)
Carefully remove DUD cartridge from barrel body using cartridge extracting tool, and
immediately dispose of cartridge by jettisoning.
(3)
Cock firing pin assembly, using cocking ring, pull up and away from firing unit body and
install cocking collar and safety pin.
(4)
Reload cutter with proper cartridge and reassemble precocked firing unit.
4A-4AA/(4A-4AB blank)
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4A-5
ACOUSTIC POWER CABLE PREPARATION AND RIGGING
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could
result in injury or death to personnel.
The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure
all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is
followed.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Cable, acoustic power (APC) 1,650-foot
(1075-00-782-9881)
Stocking, towing, lace-on double eye (1-1/2- to 2-inch
diameter cable) (5120-00-233-6276) (8)
Stocking, towing, lace-on double eye (2-3/4- to 3-1/2inch diameter cable) (5120-00-541-7250) (4)
Stocking, towing, lace-on single eye, 60- to 65-inch
(1-1/2- to 2-inch diameter cable)
(5120-00-228-2247) (2)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385)
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652)
Electrician Mate Tool Kit
Kit, cable repair (1075-00-176-1182)
Marline (4020-00-240-2185)
Paint, enamel, blue (TT-E-516) *
*
Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) *
Paint, enamel, white (TT-E-516) *
Tape, insulation, electrical (friction), 1-1/2-inch
(5970-00-644-3167)
Tape, steel, measuring (100-foot) (5120-00-554-7092)
Webbing, cotton, 3-inch W (8305-00-268-2436)
Hazardous Material.
4A-5-1
4A-5-1.1
RIGGING.
APC Preparation (Outboard 125-foot Nonbuoyant Section).
a.
Measure a distance of 5-feet from the locational point of each stocking hardeye and mark.
b.
Measure and mark a space 6-inches past each end of the 5-foot section. Between these marks,
parcel the 6-foot length of cable with cotton webbing, single wrap, and overlap 2 inches (Figure
4A-5A).
c.
Tape both ends of the parceled section with friction tape, 1-1/2 inches of each end of the
parceling and extending 1-1/2 inches beyond ends of cotton webbing; serve marline over both
sections of friction tape (Figure 4A-5A).
4A-5A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-5A. Acoustic Power Tow Cable Preparation and Towing Stocking Attachment
4A-5B
PRE-OPERATIONAL
4A-5-1.2
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
APC Preparation (Inboard 250-foot, Nonbuoyant Section).
a.
Measure inboard a distance of 5 feet from the locational point of each hardeye and mark.
b.
Measure and mark a space 6 inches past each end of the 5-foot section. Between these marks,
parcel the 6-foot length of cable with cotton webbing, single wrap, and overlap 2 inches (Figure
4A-5A).
c.
Tape both ends of the parceled section with friction tape. 1-1/2 inches of each end of the
parceling and extending 1-1/2 inches beyond ends of cotton webbing; serve marline over both
sections of friction tape (Figure 4A-5A).
4A-5-1.3
APC Preparation (Foam-Covered Section) (Buoyant).
a.
For all stocking locations on the buoyant section, except the 425-foot position for the diversion
stocking, measure outboard a distance of 5-feet from the locational point of each hardeye and
mark.
b.
Measure and mark a space 6 inches past each end of the 5-foot section. Between these marks,
parcel the 6-foot length of cable with No. 4 canvas, single wrap, and overlap 2 inches (Figure
4A-5A).
c.
Tape both ends of the parceled section with friction tape, 1-1/2 inches of each end of the
parceling and extending 1-1/2 inches beyond ends of the canvas; serve marline over both
sections of friction tape (Figure 4A-5A).
d.
Use a steel tape measure to ensure accuracy of marks.
4A-5-2
4A-5-2.1
TOWING STOCKING INSTALLATION.
Acoustic Device Towing Stocking Installation.
a.
Measure 6 feet from outboard end connector and mark (Figure 4A-5B).
b.
Prepare and wrap cable in accordance with paragraph 4A-5-1.1.
c.
Attach a single hardeye towing stocking to cable with hardeye toward outboard end (Figure
4A-5B).
d.
Secure towing stocking and verify lacing is tight and extends full length of stocking.
e.
Tape end of stocking opposite hardeye with friction tape, 1-1/2 inches of stocking end and
extending 1-1/2 inches beyond end onto APC; serve marline over friction tape.
f.
Install canvas chafing over towing stocking and over hardeye, to prevent chafing and damage to
APC while it is stowed on drum.
g.
Split 1-1/2-inch x 5-foot section of fire hose (lengthways) and wrap around outboard end of APC
cable, starting at device tow pendant stocking. Ensure approximately 1 foot of APC, closest to
gland nut, is NOT covered.
NOTE
Split fire hose can be hand attached back together, if required.
h.
Wrap fire hose with two layers half-lapped electrical (black) tape and two layers half-lapped
friction tape. Extend tapes 2 inches beyond each end of the fire hose.
4A-5C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-5B. Acoustic Power Tow Cable and Sweep Wire Markings
4A-5D
PRE-OPERATIONAL
4A-5-2.2
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Float Towing Stocking Installation.
NOTE
The float towing stockings are the attachment points for inhaul pendant and
the nose line.
Two single hardeye towing stockings may be substituted for a double
hardeye stocking.
a.
Measure 50 feet from outboard end connector and mark (Figure 4A-5B).
b.
Prepare and wrap cable according to paragraph 4A-5-1.1.
c.
Attach a double hardeye towing stocking to APC with hardeyes toward outboard end.
d.
When attaching two single hardeye towing stockings, proceed as follows:
(1)
Attach one towing stocking to APC with hardeye facing toward outboard end of cable.
Secure stocking, verify lacing, and bind with friction tape and marline as in steps d and e of
paragraph 4A-5-2.1.
(2)
Superimpose a second, outer stocking over first stocking with hardeyes diametrically
opposite and facing cable’s outboard end.
e.
Secure stocking and verify lacing is tight and extends stocking’s full length.
f.
Tape end of stocking opposite hardeye with friction tape, 1-1/2 inches of stocking end and
extending 1-1/2 inches beyond end onto APC; serve marline over friction tape.
g.
Install canvas chafing over stockings and over hardeyes to prevent chafing and damage to APC
while it is stowed on drum.
4A-5-2.3
Preventer Stocking.
a.
Measure 25 feet from inboard end connector and mark (Figure 4A-5B).
b.
Prepare and wrap cable in accordance with paragraph 4A-5-1.2.
c.
Attach a single hardeye towing stocking to cable with hardeye toward inboard end (Figure
4A-5B).
d.
Secure towing stocking and verify lacing is tight and extends full length of stocking.
e.
Tape end of stocking opposite hardeye with friction tape, 1-1/2 inches of stocking end and
extending 1-1/2 inches beyond end onto APC; serve marline over friction tape.
4A-5-2.4
Inboard Towing Stocking Installation.
a.
Measure 125 feet from the inboard end connector and mark (Figure 4A-5B).
b.
Prepare and wrap cable in accordance with paragraph 4A-5-1.2.
c.
Attach a double eye towing stocking with the hardeye toward the inboard end connector.
Position the hardeye at the 125-foot mark.
d.
Secure stocking and verify lacing is tight and extends stocking’s full length.
4A-5E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
e.
Tape end of stocking opposite hardeye with friction tape, 1-1/2 inches of stocking end and
extending 1-1/2 inches beyond end onto APC; serve marline over friction tape.
f.
Install canvas chafing over stockings and over hardeyes to prevent chafing and damage to APC
while it is stowed on drum.
4A-5-2.5
Diversion Stockings Installation.
NOTE
Ensure the midpoint between the two towing stockings at 425-foot mark is
exactly 300 feet from inboard towing stocking mark at 125 feet.
a.
Measure 425 feet from inboard end connector and mark.
NOTE
The diversion towing stocking’s hardeyes are positioned 3 feet apart and
facing each other.
b.
For hardeye location marks, measure and mark a distance 1-1/2 feet to both sides of the
425-foot mark.
c.
Measure outboard and inboard a distance of 5 feet from the locational point of each hardeye.
d.
Prepare and wrap both cable sections according to paragraph 4A-5-1.3 steps b and c.
e.
Attach two double hardeye towing stockings to APC with hardeyes toward each other.
f.
Secure stockings and verify lacing is tight and extends stocking’s full length.
g.
Tape ends of stockings opposite hardeyes with friction tape, 1-1/2 inches of stocking ends and
extending 1-1/2 inches beyond end onto APC; serve marline over friction tape.
h.
Install canvas chafing over stockings to prevent chafing and damage to APC while it is stowed
on drum.
4A-5-3
TOWING STOCKING INSTALLATION FOR FA2 AND FA2A SWEEPS.
NOTE
All installation measurements for the FA2 and FA2A sweeps are shown in
Figure 4A-5B. All FA2 marks are painted red and all FA2A marks are
painted blue after installation of the stockings. The outboard towing
stocking marks are the first red and the first blue mark, respectively, from
cable’s outboard end.
4A-5-3.1
FA2 or FA2A Outboard Towing Stocking Marks.
a.
Measure 645 and 690 feet from outboard end connector for FA2 and FA2A marks, respectively.
b.
Prepare and wrap cable in accordance with paragraph 4A-5-1.3.
NOTE
Two single eye hardeye towing stockings may be used if double hardeye
towing stocking is not available.
c.
Attach two single eye or one double hardeye towing stocking to cable at both locations with
hardeye(s) facing inboard.
d.
Secure stocking and verify lacing is tight and extends stocking’s full length.
4A-5F
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
e.
Tape end of stocking opposite hardeye(s) with friction tape, 1-1/2 inches of stocking end and
extending 1-1/2 inches beyond end onto APC; serve marline over friction tape.
f.
After installing stocking at its proper location, using PPE per MSDS, paint the mark and stocking
in appropriate color; red for FA2 and blue for FA2A.
g.
Install canvas chafing over stocking and over hardeye(s) to prevent chafing and damage to APC
while it is stowed on drum. Using PPE per MSDS, paint a matching color 6-inch indicator band
on outside of canvas.
4A-5-3.2
FA2 or FA2A Outboard Marriage Stocking Installation.
NOTE
All installation measurements for the FA2 and FA2A sweeps are shown in
Figure 4A-5B. The second red and blue marks, located inboard of the
hardeyes for the outboard towing stockings, are used to identify placement
of outboard marriage stockings.
a.
Measure 680 and 725 feet from outboard end connector for FA2 or FA2A marks respectively.
b.
Prepare and wrap cable in accordance with paragraph 4A-5-1.3.
NOTE
Two single eye hardeye towing stockings may be used if double hardeye
towing stocking is not available.
c.
Attach two single or one double hardeye towing stocking to cable with hardeye(s) facing inboard
at these marks.
d.
Secure stocking and verify lacing is tight and extends stocking’s full length.
e.
Tape end of stocking opposite hardeye(s) with friction tape, 1-1/2 inches of stocking end and
extending 1-1/2 inches beyond end onto APC; serve marline over friction tape.
f.
After installing stocking at its proper location, using PPE per MSDS, paint the mark and stocking
in appropriate color; red for FA2 and blue for FA2A.
g.
Install canvas chafing over stocking and over hardeye(s) to prevent chafing and damage to APC
while it is stowed on drum. Using PPE per MSDS, paint a matching color 6-inch indicator band
on outside of canvas.
4A-5-3.3
FA2 or FA2A Inboard Marriage Stocking Installation.
NOTE
For the FA2 and FA2A configurations, marks for inboard marriage
stockings are inboard of the hardeyes used for outboard marriage stocking
locations, as viewed from the APC’s outboard end.
a.
Measure 1,110 and 1,065 feet from outboard end connector for FA2 or FA2A marks
respectively.
b.
Prepare and wrap cable in accordance with paragraph 4A-5-1.3.
NOTE
Two single eye hardeye towing stockings may be used if double hardeye
towing stocking is not available.
c.
Attach two single eye or one double hardeye towing stocking to cable with hardeye(s) facing
inboard at appropriate marks.
4A-5G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
d.
Secure stocking and verify lacing is tight and extends stocking’s full length.
e.
Tape end of stocking opposite hardeye(s) with friction tape, 1-1/2 inches of stocking end and
extending 1-1/2 inches beyond end onto APC; serve marline over friction tape.
f.
After installing stocking at its proper location, using PPE per MSDS, paint mark and stocking in
appropriate color; red for FA2 and blue for FA2A.
g.
Install canvas chafing over stocking and over hardeye(s) to prevent chafing and damage to APC
while it is stowed on drum. Using PPE per MSDS, paint a matching color 6-inch indicator band
on outside of canvas.
4A-5-3.4
FA2 or FA2A Inboard Towing Installation Marks.
NOTE
The FA2 inboard towing connection at the red mark may be close to the
towing mark at 125-foot mark. When these two points are within 10 feet of
each other, the towing point at the 125-foot mark may be used as the FA2
inboard towing connection.
a.
Measure 1,510 and 1,410 feet from outboard end connector for FA2 and FA2A marks,
respectively.
b.
Prepare and wrap cable in accordance with paragraph 4A-5-1.2.
NOTE
Two single eye hardeye towing stockings may be used if double hardeye
towing stocking is not available.
c.
Attach two single eye or one double hardeye towing stocking to cable with hardeye(s) facing
inboard at appropriate marks.
d.
Secure stocking and verify lacing is tight and extends stocking’s full length.
e.
Tape end of stocking opposite hardeye(s) with friction tape, 1-1/2 inches of stocking end and
extending 1-1/2 inches beyond end onto APC; serve marline over friction tape.
f.
After installing stocking at its proper location, using PPE per MSDS, paint mark and stocking in
appropriate color; red for FA2 and blue for FA2A.
g.
Install canvas chafing over stocking and over hardeye(s) to prevent chafing and damage to APC
while it is stowed on drum. Using PPE per MSDS, paint a matching color 6-inch indicator band
on outside of canvas.
4A-5H
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4A-6
MAGNETIC CABLES PREPARATION AND RIGGING
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could
result in injury or death to personnel.
The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure
all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is
followed.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342)
Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356)
Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping,
coax (5995-01-517-9337)
Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping
(6150-01-517-9327) (3) (two for S-Cable, one for
CL-Cable)
Cable Assembly, electrode, K-4 (1075-00-262-1980)
(2)
Cable Assembly, inboard pigtail (long leg)
(6150-01-519-0191) (2)
Cable Assembly, inboard pigtail (short leg)
(6150-01-519-0204) (2)
Cable Assembly, outboard pigtail (6150-01-519-0147)
(3)
Clamp, hose, 2-5/16- to 3-1/4-inch
(4730-01-273-3672) (2)
Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460)
(12)
Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132)
(20)
Clamp, hose, 5-5/8- to 8-1/2-inch (4730-01-444-7836)
Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) (2)
Pendant, preventer, 1/2-inch x 5-foot, single leg, NM
(hardeye swaged each end), wire rope (3) 1
Pendant, preventer, 2-1/2-inch x 86-foot, single leg,
nylon (hardeye spliced each end) 1
Screw, cap, hex hd, aluminum, M16-2.0 x 30mm
(0099-LL-H61-6312) (4)
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch
(5305-00-226-9204) (2)
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-inch
(5305-00-226-9205) (2)
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch
(5305-00-226-9206) (6)
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 7-1/2-inch
(0099-LL-H61-6310) (2)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 5/8-inch
(4030-00-270-5483) (7)
Sleeve (CS/P) (5970-01-519-3170)
Sleeve (S/P) (5970-01-519-3176) (3)
Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505)
(70)
See footnotes at end of table.
4A-6A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SUPPORT ITEMS
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385)
Coating, plastic preservative spray
(8010-00-515-2487) *
Electrician Mate Tool Kit
Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) *
Heat Shrink CFM 3500-48
Marline (4020-00-240-2185)
Multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range)
Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176)
*
1
Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021)
Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572)
Stocking, towing, NM, lace-on (coax), double eye
(5335-LL-H61-2590) (3)
Stocking, towing, NM, slip-on (CL), 2-3/4- to 3-1/2inch, double eye (5120-00-541-7250)
Tape, bitumized, BT 2 (0099-LL-H61-2591) (3)
Tape, steel, measuring, 100-foot (5210-00-554-7092)
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb
Hazardous Material.
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4A-6-1
RIGGING THE MAGNETIC CABLE.
4A-6-1.1
Installing Coax Cable Into Ship.
a.
If possible, position shipping drum (cable reel) containing coax cable on pier aft of ship’s stern,
otherwise use a barge or tender.
b.
Fairlead cable to ship’s stern with cable horizontal and not bending cable to a radius less than 72
inches.
c.
Install chafing gear or rollers at all locations where the cable will be subject to abrasions during
transfer to ship’s drum.
NOTE
Steps in paragraph 4A-6-1.2 are performed when cables are first
assembled, installed or replacing of an inboard pigtail.
4A-6-1.2
a.
b.
Attaching Inboard Pigtails.
Connect inner conductor pigtails to inner conductor terminal as follows:
(1)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(2)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a thin coat of Petrox to mating surfaces.
(3)
Secure both short leg inboard pigtails to inner conductor terminal with two 5/8-11UNC-2A x
7-1/2-inch cap screws and two 5/8-inch flat washers.
(4)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a thin coat of antiseize to cap screw threads.
(5)
Install cap screws with two 5/8-inch flat washers and two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts.
Torque to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(6)
Using PPE per MSDS, coat connection with electrical insulation.
(7)
Cover connection with two layers of self-vulcanizing tape and two layers of black plastic
tape.
Connect outer conductor pigtails to outer conductor terminal as follows:
NOTE
Steps (1) through (8) are used for each leg of inboard pigtail.
4A-6B
(1)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper and clean rag.
(2)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a thin coat of Petrox to mating surfaces.
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
To prevent damage to connectors, use only M16-2.0 x 30mm cap screws
with anti-vibration washer.
(3)
Secure long leg inboard pigtail with two M16-2.0 x 30mm cap screws with anti-vibration
washer.
(4)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a thin coat of antiseize to cap screw threads. Torque to 35 ± 2
ft-lb.
(5)
Using PPE per MSDS, coat connection with electrical insulation.
(6)
Cover connection with two layers of self-vulcanizing tape and two layers of black plastic
tape.
(7)
Using 1/4-inch rubber insulating sheet, cut to fit around connections. Insulating sheet
should extend a few inches past connections to help provide an electrical insulation
barrier.
(8)
Secure insulating sheeting with marline seizing. Cover marline seizing with plastic tape.
(9)
Twist inboard pigtails one and a half to two twists to reduce stray fields.
NOTE
To prevent difficulties during plugging in, do not place 6-thread lashing
closer than 24 inches from inboard plug connectors.
(10) Secure and seize twisted pigtails with four to six turns of 6-thread line spaced two to three
feet apart so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2 inch.
4A-6-1.3
Attaching Cable Towing Stockings.
NOTE
Preventer and towing stockings are positioned and installed prior to
installing the magnetic cable on the drum and may be installed pierside or
shipboard.
The preventer stocking is located approximately 9 feet from the shoulder of
the winch termination.
Towing stockings are located starting approximately 69 feet aft of the
inboard end connector of magnetic cable.
Measurements are adjusted for each ship.
All hardeyes face toward the inboard end of magnetic cable.
a.
Estimate locations of the preventer and towing stockings from measurements made onboard
ship.
b.
Unreel approximately 110-feet of cable (Figure 4A-6A) from the shipping drum then, mark
estimated locations on cable.
4A-6C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-6A. Installing Towing Stockings at Estimated Locations
4A-6-1.4
Leading the Coax Cable to the Ship’s Drum.
NOTE
This operation may be facilitated by securing a 2-1/2-inch-circumference
nylon line to inboard end of cable near the forward terminal and placing 3 to
4 turns of line on the magnetic cable drum.
a.
With minimal sag in the coax cable, bring its inboard end to the ship’s stern, through the roller
chock assembly, and to the top of magnetic cable drum.
b.
Ensure inboard ends do not jam against fairlead rollers.
c.
Use stern crane to assist in fair leading of cable over or through fairleads.
4A-6-2
4A-6-2.1
TOWING STOCKING INSTALLATION.
Magnetic Cable Preparation Procedure.
a.
Mark magnetic cable 6 inches beyond forward hardeyes and after the end of towing stockings.
b.
Apply two half-lapped layers of 2-inch-wide bitumized tape over the marked areas on cable
(Figure 4A-6A).
4A-6D
PRE-OPERATIONAL
4A-6-2.2
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Inboard Preventer Stocking Installation.
Ensure the deck SAFE/RUN switch is in the SAFE position and power is not
applied to the terminal box. Electrical power from the terminal box and/or
PCU is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use
extreme caution when working on electrical connections or while cable is
being pulsed.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic
minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep
electrician.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
NOTE
The preventer pendants should be the same length between pulls. If not,
modify one pendant to obtain identical length.
a.
Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area.
b.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, secure two preventer pendants (1/2-inch x 5-foot), one to each of the
port bitter-end attachment points at the drum (Figure 4A-6B).
c.
Minesweep electricians enter the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN
switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer.
d.
Drum area crew enters the drum area.
e.
Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box.
f.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
g.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to
terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive to negative) in the terminal box.
h.
Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.
i.
Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and
magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT
VOLTAGE.
4A-6E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-6B. Installing Magnetic Cable on Cable Drum
j.
Bring magnetic cable over the drum. Cable winch termination should be pointing down and
approximately eight feet off the deck.
NOTE
Ensure that the longer of the two pigtails connect to the short leg connector.
k.
Lead pigtails to terminal box (Figure 4A-6C).
l.
Drum area crew will connect the pigtails to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush
and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
m.
Pigtails shall be bound tight, starting at a point 2 feet from the terminal box.
n.
Remove lashing from aft end of preventer stocking.
o.
Lead preventer pendants to hardeyes on respective inboard/outboard side of stocking. Using
5/8-inch shackles, attach pendants to their respective hardeyes.
NOTE
Position inboard preventer stocking as far aft as possible. Allow 18 inches
of slack in inboard pigtails in addition to cable length required for terminal
box connection.
p.
Lay preventer stocking on magnetic cable. Pull hardeyes forward using 5/8-inch shackles.
Shackle preventer pendants to hardeyes of preventer stockings.
q.
Place a mark on cable at their forward end. Place a second mark on cable 6 inches aft of
stocking’s after end.
4A-6F
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4A-6C. Inboard Pigtail (Typical)
r.
Remove inboard pigtail plugs from terminal box. Lash inboard pigtails together and fasten
magnetic cable securing line near plugs.
s.
Hold magnetic cable with securing line and disconnect preventer pendants from preventer
stocking.
t.
Remove stocking from marked area on magnetic cable.
u.
Prepare cable according to paragraph 4A-6-2.1.
v.
Locate stocking in position over bitumized tape, with aft end of stocking at mark. Adjust stocking
on cable.
w.
Lacing strands must be the same material as the stocking. Double weave grips will be laced
with a double strand (a single strand may be doubled).
x.
Start the lacing at the tow end of the stocking (eye end towards ship). Thread the lacings
through the first two loops of the split and pull through until lacings are centered at this point.
y.
Lace as you would a pair of shoes, crossing the lacings before lacing the next two loops.
z.
Do not pull lacing too tight. Leave a space between adjoining loops approximately equal to the
width of one diamond of the mesh. Continue along the length of stocking.
aa.
Twist the lacing strands tightly together at the aft end of the stocking.
ab.
Wrap the ends of the lacing once or twice tightly around the tail of the grip, twisting the ends
together securely. Excess lace can be cut off.
ac.
Anchor aft end of stocking to magnetic cable with two 4-inch wraps of marline placed six inches
apart. Cover marline with friction tape and extend tape 2 inches over each end of marline.
4A-6G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Ensure preventer grip pendants and shackles are wrapped to prevent
chafing and do not lay between the cable and the drum or foul with the
inboard preventer stocking.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
NOTE
Preventer pendants should remain secured to the preventer stocking and
magnetic cable drum at all times.
ad.
4A-6-2.3
Reshackle preventer pendants to stocking hardeyes. Heavily chafe all shackles to prevent
damage to cable and preventer stocking.
Towing Bridle Stocking Installation.
NOTE
Towing bridle stockings should be aligned with the outboard stocking
hardeye butted against outboard end of the inboard stocking.
a.
Prepare and wrap cable according to paragraph 4A-6-2.1.
b.
Locate stockings in their positions over bitumized tape, with aft end of stockings at appropriate
marks.
c.
Lacing strands must be the same material as the stocking. Double weave grips will be laced
with a double strand (a single strand may be doubled).
d.
Start the lacing at the tow end of the stocking (eye end towards ship). Thread the lacings
through the first two loops of the split and pull through until lacings are centered at this point.
e.
Lace as you would a pair of shoes, crossing the lacings before lacing the next two loops.
f.
Do not pull lacing too tight. Leave a space between adjoining loops approximately equal to the
width of one diamond of the mesh. Continue along the length of stocking.
g.
Twist the lacing strands tightly together at the aft end of the stocking.
h.
Wrap the ends of the lacing once or twice tightly around the tail of the grip, twisting the ends
together securely. Excess lace can be cut off.
i.
Adjust and tighten towing stockings on magnetic cable, and pull hardeyes forward.
j.
Anchor aft ends of stockings to magnetic cable with two 4-inch wraps of marline placed six
inches apart. Cover marline with friction tape and extend tape 2 inches over each end of
marline.
4A-6-3
4A-6-3.1
MAGNETIC CABLE INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLY.
Installing Coax Cable on the Ship’s Drum (Reel).
a.
Cover contact plugs with insulating rubber boots (Figure 4A-6D).
b.
Bring cable securing line and a portion of magnetic cable forward of preventer stocking and
around drum. Secure line.
4A-6H
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4A-6D. Insulating Boot, Straight End
c.
Wrap canvas around magnetic cable, over and under stocking’s hardeyes, and over outside of
stockings.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship. When paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket.
Report suspected cable damage to minesweep
electrician for appropriate action.
d.
Wind magnetic cable on the drum in regular, even layers.
NOTE
Steps e through g are performed when when cables are first assembled,
installed, or replacing of K-4 blank and pigtail.
e.
Attach K-4 blank as follows:
(1)
Butt K-4 blank to K-4 breakout.
(2)
Using K-4 blank clamp secure K-4 blank and clamp to K-4 breakout.
(3)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply three drops of loctite to threads.
(4)
Tighten clamp until an approximate uniform gap of 1/8-inch is between the two clamp
halves.
4A-6J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
f.
g.
h.
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Attach an outboard pigtail to the K-4 blank as follows (Figure 4A-6E):
(1)
Modify a CK/P insulating sleeve by cutting the length of the sleeve so it just covers the
metal to metal connection.
(2)
Skive or taper the ends.
(3)
Slip the modified CK/P insulating sleeve over the K-4 blank and slide back out of the way.
(4)
Clean contact surfaces of terminal with fine sandpaper.
(5)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a thin coat of Petrox to mating surfaces.
(6)
Use two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch cap screws to secure outboard pigtails to K-4 blank.
(7)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a thin coat of antiseize to cap screw threads.
(8)
Secure cap screws with four 5/8-inch flat washers and two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts.
Torque to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
Waterproof K-4 blank and pigtail as follows:
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank making certain that thickness around wrapping does not
exceed inside diameter of CK/P insulating sleeve.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide the modified sleeve over the connection.
(4)
Position a 24-inch length of CFM 3500-48 heat shrink over the sleeve and butt it up against
K-4 breakout mold.
(5)
Shrink the heat shrink to follow the profile of the connection.
Ground isolate (short leg pigtail) as follows:
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around pigtail end making certain that thickness around wrapping does not
exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide P/B insulating boot over pigtail end (Figure 4A-6D).
(4)
Slide two 2-5/16- to 3-1/4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at each end
about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate
clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
4A-6K
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4A-6E. Cable Assembly
4A-6L
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4A-6-3.2
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Installing Outboard Pigtail to Outboard Long Leg Breakout.
NOTE
Two outboard pigtails and two CA-1454 S-Cables are used in one cable
assembly.
a.
Connect the fitting at the long leg end of the coax cable to the lug on the outboard pigtail as
follows:
(1)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(2)
Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over the pigtail and two 5-5/8- to 8-1/2-inch hose
clamps over the coax cable and slide out of the way.
(3)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the CS/P
insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity.
(4)
Slip CS/P insulating sleeve small end first, over the outboard pigtail cable and slide back
out of the way.
(5)
Connect end terminals and secure with two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-inch cap screws, two
5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers (Figure 4A-6F). Torque nuts to
35 ± 2 ft-lb. Make certain end terminals are properly oriented so the contact area of each
terminal is at a longitudinal centerline of both cables.
(6)
Wrap a couple of layers of dry rags over the cap screw and nuts after connecting the end
terminals together and secure with electrical tape. Do not exceed the inside diameter of
the sleeve.
Figure 4A-6F. CA-1453 to Pigtail or CA-1454 Connection (Typical)
4A-6M
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
(7)
Slide the sleeve over the connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
(8)
Slide clamps over ends of sleeves and position clamps as shown in Figure 4A-6F and
tighten clamps evenly and firmly.
Excessive tightening of sleeve or boot clamps will press a permanent
groove around the lug barrels or damage the insulating sleeve and should
be avoided.
(9)
Apply two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing rubber insulating tape starting
approximately 2 inches before and ending 2 inches after the insulated sleeve.
(10) Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape; then apply two layers of
half-lapped friction tape.
4A-6-3.3
a.
Installing S-Cable (Number One) to Outboard Pigtail.
Connect the free end of the outboard pigtail lug on the S-Cable as follows:
(1)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(2)
Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over the pigtail and two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose
clamps over the S-Cable and slide out of the way.
(3)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P
insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity.
(4)
Slip S/P insulating sleeve small end first, over the pigtail and slide back out of the way.
(5)
Connect end terminals and secure with two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two
5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers (Figure 4A-6G). Torque nuts
to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. Make certain end terminals are properly oriented so the contact area of each
terminal is at a longitudinal centerline of both cables.
(6)
Wrap a couple of layers of dry rags over the cap screw and nuts after connecting the end
terminals together and secure with electrical tape. Do not exceed the inside diameter of
the sleeve.
(7)
Slide the sleeve over the connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
(8)
Slide clamps over ends of sleeves and position clamps as shown in Figure 4A-6G and
tighten clamps evenly and firmly.
Excessive tightening of sleeve or boot clamps will press a permanent
groove around the lug barrels or damage the insulating sleeve and should
be avoided.
(9)
Apply two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing rubber insulating tape starting
approximately 2 inches before and ending 2 inches after the insulated sleeve.
(10) Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape; then apply two layers of
half-lapped friction tape.
4A-6N
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-6G. Outboard Pigtail to CA-1454 or CA-1454 to TJ Jumper
b.
Heave in on the coax and S-Cable (number one) until one turn remains on the shipping drum.
c.
Ease the shipping drum end of the S-Cable to the ground.
d.
Remove empty shipping drum and position another CA-1454 S-Cable (number two) drum.
4A-6-3.4
a.
4A-6P
Connecting Outboard Pigtail to S-Cable (Number One).
Connect the outboard pigtail lug on the S-Cable as follows:
(1)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(2)
Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over the pigtail and two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose
clamps over the S-Cable and slide out of the way.
(3)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P
insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity.
(4)
Slip S/P insulating sleeve small end first, over the pigtail and slide back out of the way.
(5)
Connect end terminals and secure with two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two
5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers (Figure 4A-6G). Torque nuts
to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. Make certain end terminals are properly oriented so the contact area of each
terminal is at a longitudinal centerline of both cables.
(6)
Wrap a couple of layers of dry rags over the cap screw and nuts after connecting the end
terminals together and secure with electrical tape. Do not exceed the inside diameter of
the sleeve.
(7)
Slide the sleeve over the connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
PRE-OPERATIONAL
(8)
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Slide clamps over ends of sleeves and position clamps as shown in Figure 4A-6G and
tighten clamps evenly and firmly.
Excessive tightening of sleeve or boot clamps will press a permanent
groove around the lug barrels or damage the insulating sleeve and should
be avoided.
(9)
Apply two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing rubber insulating tape starting
approximately 2 inches before and ending 2 inches after the insulated sleeve.
(10) Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape; then apply two layers of
half-lapped friction tape.
4A-6-3.5
a.
Connecting S-Cable (Number Two) to Outboard Pigtail.
Connect the free end of the outboard pigtail lug on the S-Cable as follows:
(1)
Lead S-Cable (number two) to free end of outboard pigtail on S-Cable (number one).
(2)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(3)
Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over the pigtail and two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose
clamps over the larger cable and slide out of the way.
(4)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P
insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity.
(5)
Slip S/P insulating sleeve small end first, over the pigtail and slide back out of the way.
(6)
Connect end terminals and secure with two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two
5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers (Figure 4A-6G). Torque nuts
to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. Make certain end terminals are properly oriented so the contact area of each
terminal is at a longitudinal centerline of both cables.
(7)
Wrap a couple of layers of dry rags over the cap screw and nuts after connecting the end
terminals together and secure with electrical tape. Do not exceed the inside diameter of
the sleeve.
(8)
Slide the sleeve over the connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
(9)
Slide clamps over ends of sleeves and position clamps as shown in Figure 4A-6G and
tighten clamps evenly and firmly.
Excessive tightening of sleeve or boot clamps will press a permanent
groove around the lug barrels or damage the insulating sleeve and should
be avoided.
(10) Apply two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing rubber insulating tape starting
approximately 2 inches before and ending 2 inches after the insulated sleeve.
(11) Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape; then apply two layers of
half-lapped friction tape.
4A-6Q
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
b.
Heave in on S-Cable until one wrap remains on shipping reel.
c.
Attach 2-1/2-inch easing out line. Slip S-Cable to ship.
d.
Remove easing out line. Boot free end of S-Cable.
e.
Secure S-Cable to cable drum.
4A-6-4
4A-6-4.1
PRE-OPERATIONAL
CL-CABLE PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION.
Position CL-Cable Shipping Drum for Installation on Ship’s Drum.
a.
Position shipping drum containing CA-1454, which will be used as a CL-Cable on pier aft of
ship’s stern, if possible. Otherwise, use a barge or tender.
b.
Fairlead cable to ship’s stern with cable horizontal and not bending the cable to a radius less
than 48 inches.
c.
Install chafing gear or rollers at all locations where cable will be subject to abrasions during
transfer to ship’s drum.
4A-6-4.2
CL Preventer Stocking Installation.
a.
Measure and mark a 7-foot, 4-inch section starting 6 feet from the CL inboard end terminal lug
and extending outboard along the cable (Figure 4A-6H).
b.
Mark the CL-Cable at 6 feet and 13 feet, 4 inches from inboard end terminal to locate the
stocking’s hardeye and aft end, respectively.
c.
Apply two half-lapped layers of 2-inch bitumized tape over the marked section on the CL-Cable.
Figure 4A-6H. Preventer Stocking Attachment on CL-Cable
4A-6R
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
d.
On the bitumized tape, 6 inches forward of its after end, mark location point for the towing
stocking’s after end.
e.
Position stocking over the wrapped section with the hardeye(s) 6 feet from the CL-Cable inboard
end.
f.
Anchor the aft end of stocking to the CL-Cable with two 4-inch wraps of marline placed six
inches apart. Cover marline with friction tape and extend the tape 2 inches over each end of the
marline.
4A-6-4.3
Drum Preventer Pendant Attachment.
a.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach 2-1/2-inch x 86-foot nylon preventer pendant to the stocking
eye of the CL-Cable.
b.
Pad lug with rag(s), secure rag(s) with friction tape, install boot on terminal.
c.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach one end of 1/2-inch x 5-foot wire rope drum pendant to free end
of 2-1/2-inch x 86-foot preventer pendant and other end to CL-Cable drum (Figure 4A-6F).
Tighten shackle to drum with a marline spike and seize with a minimum of two turns of 1/16-inch
seizing wire.
d.
Reel preventer pendant(s) and CL-Cable on ship’s drum and secure to drum.
4A-6-5
K-4 ELECTRODES PREPARATION.
To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewed in a canvas
chafing sleeve.
a.
The canvas chafing sleeve is fabricated onboard ship from No. 6 grade, 28-inch duck cotton
cloth. Sleeve is formed by cutting 8-inch-wide strips to extend the full length of the K-4
electrodes.
b.
Wrap canvas around K-4 electrodes with 1 inch folded under on both long sides to create a
double thick stitching edge.
c.
Stitch the double thick edges of canvas chafing sleeve together using a herringbone stitch,
securing the sleeve to the electrode.
d.
Using PPE per MSDS, mark the K-4 electrode with painted bands or marline seizings to
indicated positions for centering electrode floats (Figure 4A-6J).
e.
Stow K-4 electrodes on magnetic cable reel.
4A-6-6
a.
MAGNETIC CABLE TEST AND REPAIR.
Refer to SW570-F0-MMO-040 for testing and repair of magnetic cables. Major repairs are
completed at SIMA-IMA using Depot Level Technical Repair Procedures.
4A-6S
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Figure 4A-6J. Marking K-4 Electrode for Float Positioning
4A-6T
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4B-1
O-TYPE, SINGLE OR DOUBLE SWEEP
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of
this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and
injury or death to personnel.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded
component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Block, 11-inch (type L), NM (3940-00-809-7167) (2)
Cutter Mk 12, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-340-6803) (as required)
Cutter Mk 14 Mod 0, NM (per Job
Sheet 4A-4) (1075-00-507-1201) (as required)
Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-265-0677) (as required)
Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-332-5834) (as required)
Float, type O, size 1, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-3)
(1075-01-371-0568) (as required)
Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye
(4030-00-290-6420) (as required)
Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986)
(2)
Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (depressor) (per Job
Sheet 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280)
Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet
4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) (port or starboard) (as
required)
Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon,
hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1
Pendant, 3/4-inch x 6-foot chain, single leg (depressor
span pendant) (as required)
Pendant float, size 1, NM, 5/16-inch, single leg, NM,
wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (length as
required) (per Table 4B-1A) (4030-00-269-9772)
Shackle, long, clevis-type, NM (5340-01-270-8709)
(2)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 5/8-inch (1 per side
for float pendant connection) (4030-00-270-5483)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch x 4,000-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope (RHL) (per Job Sheet 4A-2)
(4010-01-302-9008)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch x 4,000-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope (LHL) (per Job Sheet 4A-2)
(4010-01-291-1611)
Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as
required)
Wire rope, depressor, single leg, NM, 5/8-inch x
1800-foot RHL (per Job Sheet 4A-2)
(4010-01-296-5861)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737) (as required)
Grip, Klein, 1/2- to 3/4-inch (5120-00-224-2661)
Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251)
1
Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252)
Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643) (as required)
Line, tag, 21-thread x 3-foot (4) 1
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4B-1A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4B-1-1
OPERATION
RIGGING.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
If both port and starboard sides are to be streamed, the windward side
should be streamed first. When the side is operating correctly at 25-fathom
scope or first cutter position, streaming of the leeward side may commence.
No attempt should be made to commence streaming both sides
simultaneously, as there is a high degree of risk that the two wires will foul.
4B-1-1.1
Preparation.
a.
Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
personnel for minesweeping operations.
b.
Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational
order.
c.
Assemble type and quantity of cutters required and include one extra intermediate cutter for
each wire.
d.
Rig depressor and otter for O-type sweep in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1.
e.
Prepare sweep and depressor wires in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.
4B-1-1.2
Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential
Float Preparation.
If connecting float pendant (for moored configuration) is less than 30-feet
long, use a combination of two pendants, not to exceed specified length.
NOTE
Table 4B-1A, identifies correct float pendant lengths for the intended sweep
operation.
a.
4B-1-1.3
Prepare size 1 float (moored configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3.
Connecting Depressor Wire to Depressor.
a.
Engage depressor drum.
b.
Lead depressor wire through depressor wire instrumented fairlead sheave, through horizontal
roller assembly (Figure 4B-1A), and around stern to depressor.
c.
Connect one 1-inch eye-and-jaw swivel to each end of 4-way connector with 1-inch shackles
(Figure 4B-1B).
d.
Connect jaw end of eye-and-jaw swivel on 4-way connector to 4-inch ID towing ring of depressor
bridle.
4B-1B
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4B-1A. Wire and Float Pendant Length
SPEED THROUGH WATER
DEPTH
OF
SWEEP
6 KNOTS
SCOPE OF
DEPRESSOR
WIRE
8 KNOTS
LENGTH OF
FLOAT
PENDANT
FATHOMS
Single Double
Fathoms Sweep Sweep
SCOPE OF
DEPRESSOR
WIRE
10 KNOTS
LENGTH OF
FLOAT
PENDANT
FATHOMS
Feet
Otter
Depth
Single Double
Sweep Sweep
SCOPE OF
DEPRESSOR
WIRE
LENGTH OF
FLOAT
PENDANT
FATHOMS
Feet
Otter
Depth
Single Double
Sweep Sweep
Feet
Otter
Depth
5
7
13
20
27
7
15
20
28
8
16
20
28
6
8
16
30
33
9
18
30
35
10
19
30
35
7
10
19
40
39
11
21
40
43
12
22
40
43
8
12
21
45
45
14
24
50
51
15
26
50
51
9
14
24
50
51
16
27
60
58
17
29
60
58
10
16
27
60
58
19
30
65
66
20
33
65
66
12
20
33
70
72
24
36
80
83
25
39
80
85
14
25
38
85
86
29
42
100
100
31
46
105
105
16
30
44
100
100
33
49
120
119
36
53
130
127
18
35
50
115
115
38
55
140
138
41
60
150
149
20
39
56
130
130
43
62
150
158
47
68
170
172
25
51
72
165
168
55
80
210
210
60
87
230
232
30
62
89
205
208
68
98
265
265
74
106
300
300
35
74
105
250
248
80
116
330
328
87
126
370
372
40
85
122
290
290
93
134
400
400
101
146
465
486
45
97
—
340
338
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
50
109
—
390
390
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
4B-1C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4B-1A. Depressor Wire Preparation
4B-1D
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4B-1B. Multiplane Kite Rigged as a Depressor with Span Pendant Attached
4B-1E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
e.
Secure depressor wire to 1-inch eye-and-jaw swivel at forward end of 4-way connector (Figure
4B-1B).
f.
Attach span pendant to 4-way connector using a 7/8-inch shackle for single O sweep. Attach
two span pendants to 4-way connector for double O sweep.
4B-1-1.4
Depressor Positioning.
NOTE
Otters and depressors may be secured at the stern rail, in ready release
position, if streaming of the sweep is anticipated; otherwise, they will be
secured in their stowage racks on the fantail.
a.
Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift depressor, train aft of roller chock assembly, and
lower depressor to deck level.
b.
Heave in on depressor wire until 4-way connector is on deck with arms in UP position.
c.
Secure depressor with a safety chain around roller, slack off crane whip and disengage
depressor drum.
d.
Disconnect crane wire whip from depressor and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane
whip. Rotate crane forward.
e.
Attach a type L block to free end of depressor 6-foot span pendant with 7/8-inch shackle
provided.
4B-1-1.5
Connecting Sweep Wire and End Cutter to Otter.
a.
Engage sweep wire drum(s).
b.
Lead sweep wire through instrumented fairlead sheave, through sweep wire roller chock,
outboard of taffrail, and clear of all obstructions to otter stowage position (Figure 4B-1C).
c.
Connect float pendant to 3/4-inch shackle/towing beam.
d.
Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly to sweep wire and to middle leg swivel of towing beam (Figure
4B-1D).
4B-1-1.6
Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position.
a.
Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on the otter.
b.
Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle is just
aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4B-1E).
c.
Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and
secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion.
d.
Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane whip.
e.
Rotate crane forward.
f.
Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.
Disengage sweep wire drum(s).
4B-1-2
4B-1-2.1
a.
4B-1F
STREAMING (PORT OR STARBOARD).
Streaming Preparation.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4B-1C. Sweep Wire Preparation
b.
Slow to launching speed (4 knots), adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable to reduce rolling.
4B-1-2.2
Launching the Float.
a.
Request permission to put gear to the rail.
b.
Ensure that nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4B-1F).
c.
Lead float nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock.
d.
Tend line to bitt.
e.
Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, and train outboard to position
float at rail.
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, install batteries and verify that
the photo cell is working.
f.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.
g.
Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and float pendant and nose line are clear of
ship and obstructions.
h.
Connect float pendant(s) if required using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the
outboard corner of otter.
i.
Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE.
4B-1G
Figure 4B-1D. Connecting Sweep Wire and Cutter Mk 9 to Otter (Starboard Configuration)
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4B-1H
OPERATION
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4B-1E. Otter in Ready Release Position
NOTE
When streaming Double-O gear, launch windward side first.
j.
4B-1-2.3
Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook
securing otter (Figure 4B-1E). Launch float and slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.
Tripping the Otter.
a.
Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes a strain.
b.
Pay out sweep wire under power to first cutter position or short stay (25-fathom scope), and
check for proper diversion.
c.
Disengage sweep wire drum. Veer sweep wire using hydraulic brake, maintaining slight tension
of at least 500 lbs. Check for proper diversion.
d.
Streaming of second side may be started at this time, following the above procedures.
4B-1J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4B-1F. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)
4B-1K
OPERATION
4B-1-2.4
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Intermediate Cutter Attachment.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
NOTE
Refer to Job Sheet 4A-4 for cutter spacing.
a.
When desired location for first intermediate cutter is just inboard of sweep wire roller chock, stop
veering and attach a wedge stop on sweep wire (remove fairings as needed).
b.
On the faired section of wire, veer sweep wire until wedge stop is just outboard of the sweep wire
roller chock.
c.
Mount first cutter on sweep wire, remove cutter tagline.
d.
Remove safety pins, and release cutter.
e.
Adjust speed to keep gear working.
f.
Continue above procedures until all cutters are mounted and sweep wire is veered to effective
scope (Figure 4B-1G).
g.
Return and restow articulated stern crane.
4B-1-2.5
Launching the Depressor.
NOTE
Refer to Table 4B-1B for tensions at various scopes and speeds.
a.
Slow to launch speed (4 knots).
b.
Engage sweep wire and depressor drum and remove depressor safety chain.
c.
Mount type L block on the end of depressor span pendant over sweep wire.
d.
Secure pin with seizing wire.
e.
Launch the depressor.
4B-1-2.6
a.
Streaming to Full Scope.
Pay out sweep wire and depressor wire simultaneously until required scope of depressor wire is
at water’s edge (Table 4B-1A).
Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged.
b.
Stop paying out, disengage drums, and engage pawls on wire drums.
4B-1L
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4B-1G. Moored Minesweeping Configuration
(Single O-Type Gear Streamed to Starboard)
4B-1M
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4B-1B. Sag or Lift of Sweep Wire and Tensions of Sweep and Depressor Wires
SCOPE OF SWEEP
WIRE LESS SCOPE OF
DEPRESSOR WIRE
5 KNOTS
6 KNOTS
7 KNOTS
8 KNOTS
FATHOMS
FEET
FEET
FEET
FEET
FEET
FEET
FEET
100
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
150
10
6
2
1/2, -1/3
—
—
—
200
21
12
6
2 1/2
1/2, -1
-3 1/2
—
250
35
23
14
8 1/2
4
2, -2
—
300
52
35
24
16
10
5, -1
2, -4
LBS
LBS
LBS
LBS
LBS
LBS
LBS
Sweep Wire
3,800
5,300
7,500
9,600
11,800
13,900
15,900
Depressor Wire
2,800
4,000
5,200
6,700
8,600
10,500
12,800
TENSIONS
9 KNOTS 10 KNOTS 11 KNOTS
The scope of the sweep wire as specified by this table, is measured between the otter and depressor. The
speed is the actual speed through the water with the gear streamed. The specified sag is the maximum sag of
the sweep wire below a straight line running between the otter and depressor. A number preceded by a minus
sign (-) indicates a rise above this line caused by water pressure against the lay of the wire.
EXAMPLES:
With 250 fathoms of sweep wire between the otter and depressor, and sweeping at a speed of 8 knots, the
sweep wire sags 8 1/2 feet below the depth of the sweep wire at the otter and depressor when they are set to
give the same depth.
With 300 fathoms of sweep wire between the otter and depressor, and sweeping at a speed of 11 knots, the
sweep wire will vary from a maximum sag of 2 feet to a maximum left of 4 feet.
4B-1-2.7
Streaming Double O-Type Sweep.
a.
At short stay, proceed as described in paragraphs 4B-1-2.2 through 4B-1-2.4. Attach two span
pendants to 4-way connector.
b.
Engage port and starboard sweep wire drums and depressor wire drum.
c.
Mount type L blocks on outboard end of depressor span pendants over port and starboard
sweep wires.
d.
Secure pin with seizing wire.
4B-1-2.8
a.
Streaming to Full Scope.
Pay out sweep wire and depressor wire simultaneously until required scope of depressor wire is
at water’s edge (Figure 4B-1H).
Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged.
b.
Stop paying out, disengage drums, and engage the pawls on wire drums.
4B-1N
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4B-1H. Moored Minesweeping Configuration
(Double O-Type Gear Streamed to Port and Starboard)
4B-1P
OPERATION
4B-1-2.9
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Securing Sweep Wire and Depressor Wire.
a.
Secure sweep wire drums.
b.
Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
c.
Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4B-1J) back-to-back on sweep and depressor wires to allow for
attachment of Cutters Mk 15.
d.
Attach Cutter Mk 15 to sweep wire between wedge stops attached in previous step. Attach
Cutter Mk 15 to the depressor wire forward of the stern roller chock.
To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do
not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station
on the 01 level.
e.
Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to
cutters.
f.
Arm sweep wire and depressor wire cutters.
g.
Notify bridge that gear is fully streamed and stopped off on deck.
h.
Increase headway to sweep speed.
i.
Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheave.
operation of sweep gear (Figure 4B-1H).
4B-1-3
Verify correct
O-TYPE GEAR RECOVERY.
NOTE
Recovery is the reverse of streaming.
4B-1-3.1
Preparation.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow ship to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea if practicable, to reduce rolling.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
d.
Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove sweep wire and depressor wire cutters and wedge
stops.
4B-1Q
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4B-1J. Wedge Stop Placement
4B-1R
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
e.
Reman fantail.
f.
Request permission to recover gear.
g.
Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane.
h.
Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to the whip with 5/8-inch shackle.
4B-1-3.2
Depressor Recovery.
a.
Engage all drums and remove pawls (one at a time).
b.
Heave in on sweep and depressor wires until type L blocks are in reach.
c.
Remove type L blocks from sweep wires. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail.
Recover depressor and attach safety chain. Disengage depressor wire drum.
4B-1-3.3
Cutter Recovery.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
In case of a DUD cutter, proceed to DUD cutter instructions in Job Sheet
4A-4 immediately.
a.
Heave in on sweep wire until first intermediate cutter (last cutter mounted) comes into reach.
Replace safety pins. Attach tagline to cutter. Remove cutter assembly from sweep wire and put
in a safe place on deck.
b.
Heave in on sweep wire until wedge stop is between roller chock assembly and instrumented
fairlead sheave; remove wedge stop. Continue until all cutters and wedge stops are recovered.
c.
If both sides are streamed, simultaneous recovery may proceed until sweep wires are at short
stay and all cutters are removed. Stop heaving. Disengage windward drum, and continue
recovery of leeward side until otter is up close to sweep wire roller chock. The leeward side must
be recovered first to prevent the ship from drifting on the sweep gear.
d.
Continue heaving in until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock.
e.
Disengage sweep wire drum.
4B-1-3.4
Float Recovery.
NOTE
Float recovery and otter recovery order may be reversed at the discretion of
the fantail, when using float pendants over 60 feet in length.
a.
Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard.
b.
Recover float pendant with a boat hook.
c.
Heave in on float pendant until nose line is within reach.
d.
Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane, and heave in until float is in lifting position
under crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail
on float.
4B-1S
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
e.
Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook.
f.
Remove emergency recovery pendant.
g.
Stow float.
4B-1-3.5
Otter Recovery.
a.
Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard.
b.
Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter.
c.
Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4B-1E) or on the stowage rack on fantail.
d.
Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead.
e.
Return and restow articulated stern crane.
4B-1-3.6
Recovery of Gear from Windward Side.
a.
Leeward gear recovery may begin when the windward O Float is recovered and the otter is
controlled.
b.
Repeat procedures in paragraphs 4B-1-3.2 through 4B-1-3.5.
c.
Notify bridge all gear is clear.
4B-1-3.7
Securing Gear.
a.
Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage..
b.
Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.
c.
When all cutters are recovered, they should be disarmed and disassembled. All components
should be thoroughly washed in fresh water, dried, and lubricated in accordance with Planned
Maintenance System (PMS). All gear should be stowed or secured.
4B-1-4
RECOVERY OF DAMAGED (CUT OR PARTED) GEAR.
A mine could be fouled in the gear; proceed with caution.
4B-1-4.1
Preparation.
a.
Lead a recovery wire from a free winch drum or the gypsy head on sweep wire winch, through
sweep wire roller chock, and outboard of taffrail to recovery position on fantail.
b.
Approach float upwind or upcurrent, whichever has greatest effect.
NOTE
Wind will generally have more effect than current.
c.
Stop the screw on recovery side.
d.
Hook float with a grapnel or boat hook and haul float alongside.
e.
Hook softeye quick recovery pendant and pull pendant free from flagstaff socket. Shackle
recovery pendant to recovery wire.
f.
Hook crane whip into float lifting pad and take a strain on recovery wire with winch.
4B-1T
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
g.
Heave in on recovery wire and crane whip simultaneously, keeping strain on recovery wire so
weight of sweep gear is not taken by crane.
h.
Hoist float and trip pelican hook to release float pendant. Stow float.
i.
Continue heaving in on recovery wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is up close to sweep wire
roller chock.
j.
Utilizing articulated stern crane, stow otter in the quick recovery hook in ready release position
or on stowage rack on fantail. Attach safety chain.
k.
If severed end of the sweep wire is in sight, recover by hand.
l.
If severed end of the sweep wire is not in sight, secure a cable grip on severed sweep wire.
m.
Remove End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly and recover sweep wire.
4B-1-5
RECOVERY OF PARTED GEAR USING RIGID HULL INFLATABLE BOAT (RHIB).
a.
Approach float from downwind.
b.
Retrieve the float nose line and attach messenger line (if required). If possible, recovery should
be done without RHIB.
c.
Haul in messenger line (if used) with the winch/gypsy head until the float is in lifting position. In
either method of recovery, when float is in a lifting position, haul it aboard and stow.
4B-1U/(4B-1V blank)
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4B-2
SINGLE SHIP DEEP SWEEP
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of
this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and
injury or death to personnel.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded
component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Block, 11-inch (type L), NM (3940-00-809-7167) (2)
Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-265-0677)
Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-340-6803) (9)
Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-332-5834) (2)
Depressor Wire, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 1800-foot, NM,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye
outboard end, inboard end whipped)
(4010-01-296-5861)
Float, type O, size 0, NM, (1075-01-357-9948) (per
Job Sheet 4A-3)
Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye
(4030-00-290-6420)
Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986)
Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1, (depressor) (per Job
Sheet 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) (2)
Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet
4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280)
Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon,
hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1
Pendant, 3/4-inch x 6-foot chain, single leg
(depressor span pendants) (3)
Pendant, depressor, 5/8-inch x 50-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x (length as required), single
leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Ring, 3-inch ID, NM (5365-01-346-8057) (2)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 5/8-inch
(4030-00-270-5483)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 7/8-inch
(4030-00-270-5485) (12)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye outboard
end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-302-9008)
Swivel, link-to-link, NM, 3/4-inch (4030-00-269-9769)
(4)
Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as
required)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737) (as required)
Grip, Klein, 1/2- to 3/4-inch (5120-00-224-2661)
Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251)
Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252)
1
Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643)
Line, messenger, 2-1/2-inch x 60-foot, hardeye one
end other end whipped 1
Line, tag, 21-thread x 3-foot 1
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4B-2A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4B-2-1
OPERATION
RIGGING.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
NOTE
The single ship deep sweep has been designed to provide a deep-moored
sweep for use by an MCM-type craft. This sweep uses a maximum number
of standard MCM components and a minimum number of nonstandard
components as necessary to complete the streaming arrangement. Sweep
wire and miscellaneous connecting gear will be installed on the winch. All
other standard and special items should be stowed in appropriate areas on
deck.
4B-2-1.1
Preparation.
a.
Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
personnel for minesweeping operations.
b.
Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational
order.
c.
Assemble type and quantity of cutters required and include one extra intermediate cutter for
each wire.
d.
Rig depressor for single ship deep sweep in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1.
e.
Prepare sweep and depressor wires in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.
4B-2-1.2
Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential
Sweep Wire Preparation.
a.
Prepare sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.
b.
Lead sweep wire on sweep side of ship from the drum through instrumented fairlead sheave,
over sweep wire roller chock, back aboard, over taffrail outboard of all obstructions, and lay it on
deck.
4B-2-1.3
Otter Preparation.
a.
Prepare otter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1 and Figure 4B-2A.
b.
Attach an End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly to sweep wire and to middle leg swivel of towing beam.
c.
Using a 3/4-inch shackle, connect 5/16-inch x 5-foot float pendant to upper end of otter beam.
Attach free end of 5-foot float pendant to appropriate length float pendant (Table 4B-2A) with a
5/8-inch shackle.
d.
Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter.
e.
Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle is just
aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4B-2B).
f.
Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and
secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion.
4B-2B
Figure 4B-2A. Connecting Sweep Wire and Cutter Mk 9 to Otter (Starboard Configuration)
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4B-2C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Table 4B-2A. Depressor Wire and Float Pendant Lengths for Single Ship Deep Sweep
1
SWEEP DEPTH
(FMS)
DEPRESSOR WIRE LENGTH
(FMS)1
FLOAT PENDANT LENGTH
(FT) 1
50
80
420
60
107
520
70
132
630
80
160
740
90
187
840
100
213
950
Depressor wire and float pendant lengths are approximate and will change with the ship speed and sea
conditions.
Figure 4B-2B. Otter in Ready Release Position
4B-2D
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
g.
Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane whip.
h.
Rotate the crane forward.
i.
Take slack out of the sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.
4B-2-1.4
Depressor Wire Preparation.
a.
Prepare depressor wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.
b.
Using a 7/8-inch shackle, attach 3/4-inch swivel to end of depressor wire (Figure 4B-2C).
c.
Using a 7/8-inch shackle, connect a 3-inch ID ring to free end of swivel.
d.
Using a 7/8-inch shackle, connect a 3/4-inch swivel to each end of a 50-foot, 5/8-inch depressor
pendant.
e.
Using a 7/8-inch shackle, connect one swivel of 50-foot pendant to 3-inch ID ring.
4B-2-1.5
a.
Depressor Preparation.
Prepare depressor in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1 and Figures 4B-2D and 4B-2E.
NOTE
Both depressors must have the same sheer away from the gear and should
be adjusted accordingly.
b.
Lead 50-foot pendant over depressor wire roller chock, and using a 1-inch shackle, connect free
swivel on 50-foot pendant to 4-inch ID ring on bridle of the outboard depressor. Reel slack in
depressor wire and 50-foot pendant onto depressor drum.
c.
Lift outboard depressor with articulated stern crane and reel in on the depressor drum until the
depressor is pulled up tight to stern roller chock.
d.
Using 1-inch shackle, connect one end of 3/4-inch x 6-foot chain pendant to 4-inch ID ring on
depressor bridle, and other end of a type L block.
e.
Lift inboard depressor from stowage rack using articulated crane and stow in empty otter quick
release position.
4B-2-1.6
Size 0 Float Preparation for Single Ship Deep Sweep (SSDS).
a.
Prepare size 0 float (moored configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3.
b.
For float pendant and depressor wire lengths, refer to Table 4B-2A.
4B-2-1.7
Cutter Preparation for Single Ship Deep Sweep (SSDS).
a.
Lay out ten 5/8-inch wedge stops and required hand tools.
b.
Lay out nine Elevating Fins Mk 12 and assemble nine Cutters Mk 12 in accordance with Job
Sheet 4A-4.
4B-2E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4B-2C. Depressor Wire Preparation
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
c.
Inspect and arm nine Cutters Mk 12 Mod 2 with Mk 192 Mod 0 Cartridge.
d.
Attach a 5/8-inch wedge stop at the first and second cutter locations on sweep wire (Table
4B-2B).
e.
Mount first cutter on sweep wire after first wedge stop.
4B-2-2
STREAMING.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea if practicable to reduce rolling.
4B-2F
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4B-2D. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single Ship Deep Sweep
(Outboard Depressor)
4B-2G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4B-2E. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single Ship Deep Sweep
(Inboard Depressor)
4B-2H
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4B-2B. Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 Spacing for Single Ship Deep Sweep
4B-2-2.1
CUTTER
NUMBER
DISTANCE FROM OUTBOARD END
OF SWEEP WIRE (FEET)
1
1
2
3
3
6
4
16
5
31
6
63
7
106
8
142
Launching the Size O Float.
a.
Request permission to put gear to the rail.
b.
Ensure that nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4B-2F).
c.
Lead float nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock.
d.
Tend line to bitt.
e.
Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, train outboard to position float
at rail.
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, install batteries and verify that
the photo cell is working.
f.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.
g.
Connect float pendant, if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle.
h.
Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and float pendant and nose line are clear of
ship and obstructions.
i.
Verify float pendant is over the outboard corner of otter.
j.
Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE.
NOTE
Due to length of float pendant, float will act erratically until pendant takes a
strain.
k.
Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook
securing otter (Figure 4B-2B). Launch float. Cast nose line clear of ship.
4B-2J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4B-2F. Size 0 Float Rigged (Moored)
4B-2K
OPERATION
4B-2-2.2
a.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Tripping the Otter.
Ensure sweep wire drum is engaged on streaming side.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
b.
When float pendant takes a strain, trip quick release (MacCluney) hook. Pay out sweep wire to
the first cutter position. Install Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2.
NOTE
Proper diversion cannot be checked until all gear is streamed and stopped
off and ship is at sweeping speed.
c.
4B-2-2.3
Disengage sweep wire drum.
Sweep Arming.
a.
Veer sweep wire until second wedge stop is just outboard of sweep wire roller chock.
b.
Install a Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2.
c.
Continue to veer sweep wire. Place wedge stops and mount cutters according to Table 4B-2B
until all cutters are mounted and sweep wire is veered to effective scope as specified in tactical
instructions.
4B-2-2.4
Launching the Depressor.
Use caution when veering the sweep wire to ensure sufficient tension is
retained on the sweep wire and depressor wire, preventing slack in the
depressor bridles and possible stalling and entanglement of the depressor.
a.
Slow to launch speed (4 knots). Adjust as required.
b.
Engage depressor wire drum and remove depressor safety chain.
c.
Mount type L block on end of depressor span pendant over sweep wire.
d.
Secure pin with seizing wire.
e.
Launch outboard depressor and veer 50-foot pendant until inboard 3-inch ID ring is just
outboard of depressor wire roller chock.
f.
Using 7/8-inch shackles, connect two span pendants opposite each on 3-inch ID ring between
the 3/4-inch swivels of depressor wire and 50-foot pendant (Figure 4B-2G).
g.
Using a 7/8-inch shackle, attach a type L block to free end of upper 6-foot span pendant. Attach
type L block to sweep wire.
4B-2L
Figure 4B-2G. Single Ship Deep Sweep Depressor Arrangement
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4B-2M
OPERATION
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
h.
Using a 7/8-inch shackle, shackle free end of lower 6-foot span pendant to 4-inch ID ring of
inboard depressor bridle and launch inboard depressor.
i.
Return and restow articulated stern crane.
4B-2-2.5
a.
Veering to Full Scope.
Continue to veer depressor and sweep wire until instrumented fairlead sheave display indicates
scope for sweep depth indicated in tactical instructions.
Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged.
b.
4B-2-2.6
Stop paying out, disengage drums, and engage pawls on wire drums.
Securing Sweep Wire and Depressor Wire.
a.
Secure sweep wire and depressor wire drums.
b.
Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
c.
Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4B-2H) back-to-back to sweep wire and to depressor wire
forward of stern roller chock. Attach Cutter Mk 15 to sweep and depressor wires.
To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do
not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station
on the 01 level.
d.
Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to
cutters.
e.
Arm sweep wire and depressor wire Cutters Mk 15.
f.
Notify bridge that gear is fully streamed and secured on deck.
g.
Increase headway to sweep speed.
h.
Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheave.
operation of sweep gear (Figure 4B-2J).
4B-2-3
Verify correct
RECOVERY.
NOTE
Recovery is the reverse of streaming.
4B-2N
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4B-2H. Wedge Stop Placement
4B-2P
Figure 4B-2J. Single Ship Deep Sweep Configuration
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4B-2Q
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4B-2-3.1
OPERATION
Preparation.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
d.
Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutters from wires.
e.
Reman fantail.
f.
Request permission to recover gear.
g.
Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane.
h.
Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to the whip with 5/8-inch shackle.
4B-2-3.2
Depressor Recovery.
a.
Engage sweep and depressor wire drums and disengage pawls one at a time. Take a strain on
both sweep and depressor wires.
b.
Simultaneously heave in on the sweep wire and depressor wire until inboard depressor is just aft
of stern roller chock.
c.
Heave in on depressor wire until the type L block is within reach. Remove type L block from
sweep wire. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel hook to lifting bail on depressor. Lift
depressor and detach both depressor span pendants and remove from depressor wire.
Recover the depressor and place in stowage rack using the articulated stern crane.
d.
Heave in on depressor and sweep wires until the type L block attached to the outboard
depressor is at the stern roller chock.
e.
Remove the type L block from the sweep wire. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel hook to
lifting bail on depressor. Recover the depressor and attach safety chain. Disengage the
depressor wire drum.
4B-2-3.3
Cutter Recovery.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
In case of a DUD cutter, proceed to DUD cutter instructions in Job Sheet
4A-4 immediately.
a.
4B-2R
Heave in on sweep wire until first intermediate cutter (last mounted) comes into reach. Replace
safety pins. Attach tagline to cutter; then depress the handle, opening the spring loaded arms.
Remove cutter assembly from sweep wire and put in a safe place on deck.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
b.
Heave in on sweep wire until wedge stop is between roller chock assembly and instrumented
fairlead sheave; remove wedge stop. Continue until all cutters and wedge stops are recovered.
c.
Continue heaving in until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock.
d.
Disengage sweep wire drum.
4B-2-3.4
Otter Recovery.
NOTE
Due to length of float pendant, float will act erratically until close aboard.
a.
Reduce speed to bare steerage way.
b.
Train appropriate articulated stern crane outboard over otter.
c.
Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter.
d.
Lift otter and place it in ready release position (Figure 4B-2B).
e.
Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead.
f.
Disengage sweep wire drum.
g.
Attach hardeye of 2-1/2-inch nylon line to eye of float pendant where it shackles to 5/16-inch x
5-foot pendant.
h.
Lead other end of 2-1/2-inch line to gypsy head.
unshackled.
i.
Heave in on 2-1/2-inch line and remaining float pendant until float is in reach.
4B-2-3.5
Heave in until 5-foot pendant can be
Float Recovery.
a.
Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard.
b.
Heave in on float pendant until nose line is within reach.
c.
Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane, and heave in until float is in lifting position
under crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail
on float.
d.
Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook.
e.
Remove emergency recovery pendant.
f.
Stow float.
g.
Notify bridge all gear is clear.
h.
Return and restow articulated stern crane.
4B-2-3.6
Securing Gear.
a.
Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage.
b.
Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.
c.
When all cutters are recovered, they should be disarmed and disassembled. All components
should be thoroughly washed in fresh water, dried, and lubricated in accordance with Planned
Maintenance System (PMS). All gear should be stowed or secured.
4B-2S
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4B-2-4
OPERATION
RECOVERY OF DAMAGED (CUT OR PARTED) GEAR.
A mine could be fouled in the gear; proceed with caution.
4B-2-4.1
Preparation.
a.
Lead a recovery wire from a free winch drum or the gypsy head on sweep wire winch, through
sweep wire roller chock, and outboard of taffrail to recovery position on fantail.
b.
Approach float upwind or upcurrent, whichever has greatest effect.
NOTE
Wind will generally have more effect than current.
c.
Stop the screw on recovery side.
d.
Hook float with a grapnel or boat hook and haul float alongside.
e.
Hook softeye quick recovery pendant and pull pendant free from flagstaff socket. Shackle
recovery pendant to recovery wire.
f.
Hook crane whip into float lifting pad and take a strain on recovery wire with winch.
g.
Heave in on recovery wire and crane whip simultaneously, keeping strain on recovery wire so
weight of sweep gear is not taken by crane.
h.
Hoist float and trip pelican hook to release float pendant. Stow float.
i.
Continue heaving in on recovery wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is up close to sweep wire
roller chock.
j.
Utilizing articulated stern crane, stow otter in ready release position or on stowage rack on
fantail. Attach safety chain.
k.
If severed end of the sweep wire is in sight, recover by hand.
l.
If severed end of the sweep wire is not in sight, secure a chain stopper grip on severed sweep
wire.
m.
Remove End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly and recover sweep wire.
4B-2-5
RECOVERY OF PARTED GEAR USING RIGID HULL INFLATABLE BOAT (RHIB).
a.
Approach float from downwind.
b.
Retrieve the float nose line and attach messenger line (if required). If possible, recovery should
be done without RHIB.
c.
Haul in messenger line (if used) with the crane winch/gypsy head until the float is in lifting
position. In either method of recovery, when float is in a lifting position, haul it aboard and stow.
4B-2T
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4B-3
TEAM DEEP SWEEP
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of
this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and
injury or death to personnel.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded
component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS1
Block, 11-inch (type L), NM (3940-00-809-7167) (2)
Coupling, shear, NM, 16,000-lb (Consort)
(1075-00-376-4451)
Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2, NM (Consort-10, Guide-6) (per
Job Sheet 4A-4) (1075-00-340-6803)
Cutter Mk 15, NM (per Job Sheet 4B-1)
(1075-00-332-5834) (2)
Depressor Wire, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 1800-foot, NM,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye
outboard end, inboard end whipped)
(4010-01-296-5861)
Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986)
Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (depressor) (per Job
Sheet 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) (2)
Line, messenger, 300-foot, graduated (Guide) 1
Pendant, depressor, 5/8-inch x 50-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 2
Pendant, 3/4-inch x 6-foot chain (depressor span
pendants) (3)
Ring, 3-inch ID, NM (5365-01-346-8057) (2)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 5/8-inch (Guide)
(4030-00-270-5483)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 7/8-inch (Consort-15,
Guide-14) (4030-00-270-5485)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard
end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye outboard
end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-302-9008)
Swivel, link-to-link, NM, 3/4-inch (4030-00-269-9769)
(4)
Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as
required)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737) (as required)
Grip, Klein, 1/2- to 3/4-inch (5120-00-224-2661)
Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251)
Hook, boat 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252)
1
2
Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643)
Line, tag, 21-thread x 3-foot (2) 2
Signal Paddles (red/green) (6350-01-036-1989) (2)
Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572)
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Items are common for both GUIDE and CONSORT ships, unless otherwise specified.
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4B-3A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4B-3-1
OPERATION
RIGGING.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
NOTE
The Team Deep Sweep is designed to provide a deep-moored sweep. This
sweep uses a maximum number of standard MCM components and a
minimum number of nonstandard components, as necessary, to complete
the streaming arrangement.
Only sweep wire and miscellaneous
connecting gear will be installed on the wire drum. All other standard and
special items should be stowed in appropriate areas below deck.
4B-3-1.1
Preparation.
a.
Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
personnel for minesweeping operations.
b.
Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational
order.
c.
Assemble type and quantity of cutters required and include one extra intermediate cutter for
each wire.
d.
Rig depressor for team deep sweep in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1.
e.
Prepare sweep and depressor wires in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.
4B-3-1.2
Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential
Sweep Wire Preparation.
a.
Prepare sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.
b.
During normal operations, the sweep wire will be streamed from the inboard sweep wire drum of
both the GUIDE and CONSORT ships.
c.
Lead sweep wire from appropriate drum through instrumented fairlead sheave, over sweep wire
roller chock, back aboard, over taffrail outboard of all obstructions, and lay it on deck.
d.
On the GUIDE, use a 7/8-inch shackle to attach a 3/4-inch swivel to end of sweep wire. Using a
5/8-inch shackle, attach one end of 300-foot graduated messenger line to free end of 3/4-inch
swivel that is shackled to the GUIDE’s sweep wire.
e.
On the CONSORT, use a 7/8-inch shackle to attach a 3/4-inch swivel to end of the sweep wire;
then use a 7/8-inch shackle to attach a shear coupling to the free end of the swivel.
4B-3-1.3
Depressor Wire Preparation.
a.
Prepare depressor wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.
b.
Using a 7/8-inch shackle, attach 3/4-inch swivel to end of depressor wire (Figure 4B-3A).
c.
Using a 7/8-inch shackle, connect a 3-inch ID ring to free end of swivel.
4B-3B
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4B-3A. Depressor Wire Preparation
d.
Using a 7/8-inch shackle, connect a 3/4-inch swivel to each end of a 50-foot, 5/8-inch depressor
pendant.
e.
Using a 7/8-inch shackle, connect swivel on end of 50-foot pendant to 3-inch ID ring on end of
depressor wire.
4B-3-1.4
Depressor Preparation.
a.
Prepare depressor in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1.
b.
Lead the 50-foot pendant through the depressor wire roller chock; and using a 7/8-inch shackle,
connect free swivel on 50-foot pendant to 4-inch ring on bridle of the outboard depressor (Figure
4B-3B). Reel slack in depressor wire and 50-foot pendant onto depressor drum.
c.
Lift outboard depressor with articulated stern crane and reel in on depressor drum until
depressor is pulled up tight to stern roller chock.
d.
Using 7/8-inch shackle, connect one end of span pendant to 4-inch ID ring on depressor bridle,
and other end to a type L block.
e.
Lift inboard depressor from stowage rack using articulated crane and secure to taffrail
MacCluney hook.
4B-3C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4B-3B. Rigging Outboard Depressor
4B-3D
OPERATION
4B-3-1.5
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Cutter Preparation Team Deep Sweep.
a.
Lay out 5/8-inch wedge stops and required hand tools.
b.
Lay out Cutters Mk 12 Mod 2 and the Mk 12 elevating fins, and assemble in accordance with Job
Sheet 4A-4.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
c.
Inspect and arm Cutters Mk 12 Mod 2 with Mk 192 Mod 0 Cartridge.
d.
Attach a 5/8-inch wedge stop at the first and second cutter locations on sweep wire (Table
4B-3A).
Table 4B-3A. Team Deep Sweep Cutter Mk 12 Spacing
4B-3-2
4B-3-2.1
CUTTER
NUMBER
DISTANCE FROM OUTBOARD END
OF SWEEP WIRE (FEET)
1
1
2
3
3
6
4
16
5
36
6
66
7
108
8
142
STREAMING.
Streaming Preparation.
NOTE
Each depressor should be hung alongside of the roller chock assembly that
is to be used, clear of all obstructions; when it is connected to the sweep
gear, the small stuff can be cut, and the depressors launched.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish communications; bridge-to-bridge, bridge-to-fantail, and
fantail-to-fantail.
4B-3E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4B-3-2.2
OPERATION
Streaming Maneuvers.
NOTE
When both ships are ready to stream gear, the GUIDE will set a base
course and speed to provide sufficient steerageway. The CONSORT will
close on the GUIDE until they are streaming at the same course and speed,
and are abeam at the nearest safe spacing for existing sea conditions.
Gear will be streamed at minimal speed to maintain steerageway.
a.
When permission to pass a heaving line is granted by the GUIDE, a line should be passed from
the CONSORT to the GUIDE by the appropriate means.
b.
When the heaving line is received, the GUIDE should secure it to the outboard end of the
300-foot graduated messenger line and inform the CONSORT to heave around.
c.
Before a strain is taken on the sweep wire, it should be free from the rail. The GUIDE’s winch
should be engaged and payed out to ensure adequate slack for the CONSORT to heave sweep
wire aboard and to facilitate handling after it is aboard.
d.
The CONSORT should bring the messenger line in through inboard roller chock and lead it to
the gypsy head on sweep wire winch.
4B-3-2.3
Wire Connection and Arming.
NOTE
When the GUIDE’s sweep wire is brought aboard the CONSORT, ensure
the CONSORT’s sweep wire is led out from the winch so the sweep wire
can be connected easily at a clear work space on deck.
a.
Using a 7/8-inch shackle, connect swivel on the GUIDE’s sweep wire into shear coupling on
CONSORT’s sweep wire. Unshackle 300-foot graduated messenger line and cut small stuff
lashing swivel to line.
When the sweep wires of the two ships are connected together, the tension
of the sweep wire between the two ships will create an extremely
dangerous situation for all hands on both fantails. The GUIDE should
monitor sweep wire tension continuously and keep a large catenary in the
wire for safety purposes. Wire rope cutters should be readily available on
both craft for cutting the sweep wire if such action appears necessary.
NOTE
The CONSORT will notify the GUIDE before starting the next step.
b.
4B-3F
The CONSORT shall heave in on GUIDE’s sweep wire until the wedge stop located 3 fathoms
OUTBOARD of shear coupling is just outboard of the sweep wire roller chock. Ensure wedge
stop is attached.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
c.
CONSORT installs the Guides Number 2 Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 in reverse position just
OUTBOARD of wedge stop.
d.
The CONSORT engages winch and begins to pay out the GUIDE’s sweep wire until the wedge
stop 1 fathom OUTBOARD of the shear coupling is just outboard of sweep wire roller chock.
Ensure wedge stop is attached.
e.
CONSORT installs the Guides Number 1 Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 (in reverse position) just
OUTBOARD of wedge stop.
f.
The CONSORT continues to pay out its sweep wire until the wedge stop 1 fathom INBOARD of
the shear coupling is just outboard of sweep wire roller chock.
g.
CONSORT installs Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 (Cutter Number 1) just INBOARD of wedge stop.
h.
When the attachment point for the CONSORT’s third intermediate cutter is outboard of the
sweep wire roller chock, stop veering and attach a wedge stop on the sweep wire.
Simultaneously, install CONSORT’s Number 2 Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 on the sweep wire
OUTBOARD of sweep wire stern roller chock.
i.
Pay out until the attachment point for the CONSORT’s fourth intermediate cutter is between
instrumented fairlead sheave and sweep wire roller chock. Attach a wedge stop on the sweep
wire. Simultaneously, install CONSORT’s Number 3 Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 on the sweep wire
OUTBOARD of sweep wire roller chock.
j.
The above procedure of installing cutters, listed in steps 3 through 9, should be continued until
sweep wire has been armed with cutters at the spacing indicated in Table 4B-3A.
k.
After the CONSORT has streamed several hundred feet of sweep wire and given signal to the
GUIDE, the GUIDE should recover its sweep wire to the attachment point of GUIDE’s Number 3
intermediate cutter, maintain a reasonable catenary, and attach and arm its remaining cutters in
the same manner as described above.
4B-3-2.4
Launching the Depressors.
Use caution when paying out the depressor wire to ensure sufficient tension
is retained in the sweep wire, preventing slack in depressor bridles and
possible stalling and entanglement of the depressor. The sweep wire
should be coordinated between the GUIDE and CONSORT to ensure that
undue stresses are not placed on the sweep. No reference to actual
scopes should be made over nonsecure circuits, but percent of the
intended scope may be discussed to permit coordination between ships.
a.
On signal from the GUIDE, both ships should disengage sweep wire winches and veer the
sweep wire to desired full scope in unison, using the sweep wire winch brake.
b.
While veering, the CONSORT ship gradually increases ship spacing to 400 yards.
4B-3G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged.
c.
Veer to desired scope.
d.
Attach type L block of outboard depressor span pendant to sweep wire (Figure 4B-3C).
e.
On signal from the GUIDE, both ships should launch the outboard depressor and pay out the
50-foot pendant until the inboard 3-inch ID ring is just outboard of roller chock.
f.
Using 7/8-inch shackles, connect two span pendants opposite each other on 3-inch ID ring
between 3/4-inch swivels of depressor wire and 50-foot pendant (Figure 4B-3C).
g.
Using a 7/8-inch shackle, attach a type L block to free end of upper 6-foot span pendant. Attach
Type L block to the sweep wire.
h.
Using a 7/8-inch shackle, connect free end of the lower 6-foot span pendant to 4-inch ID ring of
the inboard depressor bridle.
i.
Launch inboard depressor, and pay out on depressor wire winch until 50-fathom mark is just aft
of roller chock and ensure depressor is clear and riding properly.
j.
Return and restow articulated stern crane.
4B-3-2.5
a.
Streaming to Full Scope.
Station a monitor at the instrumented fairlead sheave readings.
Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged.
b.
4B-3-2.6
Continue to pay out sweep wire and depressor wire in 100-fathom increments until instrumented
fairlead sheave readings indicate scope for sweep depth specified in tactical instructions. Stop
paying out, disengage drums, and engage towing pawls on wire drums.
Securing Sweep Wire and Depressor Wire.
a.
Secure sweep wire and depressor wire drums.
b.
Clear all unnecessary personnel from the fantail.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
c.
Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4B-3D) back-to-back on sweep wire and two wedge stops on
depressor wire allowing for attachment of Cutters Mk 15.
d.
Attach Cutter Mk 15 to sweep wire between instrumented fairlead sheave and stern roller chock.
Attach Cutter Mk 15 to depressor wire forward of stern roller chock.
4B-3H
Figure 4B-3C. Depressor Arrangement for Deep Sweep
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4B-3J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4B-3D. Wedge Stop Placement
4B-3K
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do
not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station
on the 01 level.
e.
Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to
cutters.
f.
Arm sweep wire and depressor wire Cutters Mk 15.
g.
Notify bridge that the gear is fully streamed and secured on deck.
h.
The GUIDE will notify the CONSORT and both ships will increase headway simultaneously to
desired sweep speed and ship spacing.
i.
Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves.
operation of sweep gear (Figure 4B-3E).
4B-3-3
Verify correct
TEAM DEEP SWEEP OPERATION.
NOTE
The sweep will normally be operated with the ships on a steady course and
speed, as determined by the operational situation. Performance of the gear
will be monitored in accordance with NWP 35 (Series).
4B-3-3.1
Turning Procedures.
a.
The GUIDE’s responsibility will be shifted to the inboard MCM during the turn.
b.
Each turn will be carried out in steps of 20 degrees, or lesser amount remaining at the end of the
turn.
c.
Ship spacing in turns should be 300 yards.
d.
Where sufficient depth will prevent bottoming of the gear, GUIDE should slow to approximately 3
knots and CONSORT should maintain a speed of 5 to 6 knots.
e.
Where bottoming of the gear is possible, GUIDE should maintain a speed of at least 4 knots and
CONSORT should perform turns at 6 knots, provided its sweep wire tensions do not exceed
14,000 pounds.
f.
The start of each turn increment will be signaled by the GUIDE with the execution of flag Romeo.
g.
When the GUIDE is steady on course after a turn segment, it will close up flag Romeo.
h.
When the CONSORT has completed its turn segment and is again in the appropriate station
abeam of the GUIDE, it will close up flag Romeo; then, the GUIDE will signal the next 20 degrees
turn segment by executing flag Romeo.
NOTE
To reverse course with the deep sweep and to travel over a path very near
that already traveled, a pseudo-Williamson turn may be carried out by
turning approximately 60 degrees in one direction and then reversing
direction by a 240 degrees turn the opposite way. This turn will usually
allow return to a datum point within 10 degrees of a reciprocal heading.
i.
During night operations, turns are performed in a similar fashion utilizing flashing light signals.
4B-3L
Figure 4B-3E. Team Deep Sweep Configuration
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4B-3M
OPERATION
OPERATION
4B-3-4
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
RECOVERY.
NOTE
Recovery is the reverse of streaming.
4B-3-4.1
Preparation.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-bridge, bridge-to-fantail, and fantail-to- fantail
communications.
b.
The GUIDE will notify the CONSORT, and both ships will slow to recovery speed (3 to 4 knots)
and decrease ship’s spacing to approximately 300 yards for recovery.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
4B-3-4.2
Depressor Recovery.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
a.
Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutters from wires.
b.
Reman fantail.
c.
Both ships should engage sweep wire and depressor drums and simultaneously heave in on
sweep wire and depressor wire until inboard depressor is just aft of stern roller chock.
d.
The GUIDE will notify the CONSORT, and the ships shall heave around on the sweep winch
while closely monitoring the sweep wire counter and sweep and depressor wires coming
aboard. Recover depressors in 100-fathom increments of the depressor wire; simultaneously,
recover 300 fathoms of the sweep wire.
e.
Heave in on depressor wire until the type L block is within reach. Remove type L block from
sweep wire. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail of depressor. Lift depressor
and detach both depressor span pendants and remove them from depressor wire. Recover the
depressor and place in stowage rack using the articulated crane.
f.
Heave in on depressor and sweep wires until the type L block attached to the outboard
depressor is at stern roller chock.
g.
Secure the quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail of depressor, remove the type L block
from the sweep wire, recover depressor and attach safety chain. Disengage the depressor wire
drum.
NOTE
Otters and depressors may be secured at the stern rail, in ready release
position, if restreaming of the sweep is anticipated; otherwise, they will be
secured in their stowage racks on the fantail.
h.
The CONSORT should gradually close to approximately 200 feet to recover gear.
i.
Return and restow articulated stern crane.
4B-3N
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4B-3-4.3
OPERATION
Cutter Recovery.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
In case of a DUD cutter, proceed to DUD cutter instructions in Job Sheet
4A-4 immediately.
a.
Both ships should heave in on the sweep wire until number 8 cutter is just in the water.
b.
The CONSORT should close to 100 feet and, as its cutters come into reach, replace the safety
pins; attach tagline to cutter, then depress the handles opening the spring loaded arms.
Remove the Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 assembly from the sweep wire and put in a safe place on deck.
c.
Heave in on sweep wire until wedge stop is onboard, and remove wedge stop.
d.
Continue heaving in on sweep wire, removing Cutters Mk 12 Mod 2 and wedge stops until all the
CONSORT’s and the first two GUIDE’s cutters and wedge stops have been removed.
e.
Attach a messenger line to the GUIDE’s sweep wire, separate the GUIDE’s swivel from the
CONSORT’s shear coupling, and release the GUIDE’s sweep wire.
f.
Inform GUIDE it may commence recovery. Release GUIDE’s sweep wire by paying out
messenger line.
g.
The GUIDE should recover its own sweep wire, remove six remaining cutters and all wedge
stops, and recover the messenger line.
h.
Notify the bridge all gear is clear.
4B-3-4.4
Securing Gear.
a.
Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage.
b.
Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.
c.
When all cutters are recovered, they should be disarmed and disassembled. All components
should be thoroughly washed in fresh water, dried, and lubricated in accordance with Planned
Maintenance System (PMS). All gear should be stowed or secured.
4B-3P
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4B-4
IMPROVED DEEP-MOORED SWEEP (IDMS)
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of
this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and
injury or death to personnel.
The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure
all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is
followed.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded
component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS 1
Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2, NM (1075-00-340-6803) (per
Job Sheet 4A-4) (Consort-10, Guide-6)
Cutter Mk 15, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-332-5834)
Coupling, shear, NM, 16,000-lb (1075-00-376-4451)
Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986)
Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1, depressor (per Job
Sheet 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) (2)
Line, messenger, graduated, 300-foot (Guide) 2
Pendant, depressor, 5/8-inch x 50-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 2
Ring, 3-inch ID, NM (5365-01-346-8057) (2)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM,
5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (6)
1-inch (4030-00-270-5486) (10)
Shackle, 7/8-inch (4030-00-270-5485)
Sweep Wire, catenary (IDMS), 5/8-inch x 1000-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each
end) (4010-01-296-5861)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard
end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye outboard
end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-302-9008)
Swivel, ball bearing, NM (0000-LC-CJ7-0669)
Swivel, link-to-link, NM,
5/8-inch (4030-00-269-9768) (2)
1-inch (4030-00-269-9770) (5)
Transmitter, IDMS (5895-LL-H41-4554)
Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as
required)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737) (2)
Grip, Klein, 1/2- to 3/4-inch (5120-00-224-2661)
Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251)
Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252)
Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643)
*
1
2
Line, tag, 21-thread x 3-foot 2
Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) *
Signal paddles (red/green) (6350-01-036-1989) (2)
Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572)
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Hazardous Material.
Items are common for both GUIDE and CONSORT ships unless otherwise specified.
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4B-4A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4B-4-1
OPERATION
RIGGING.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
NOTE
The IDMS has been designed to provide an easily streamed, deep-moored
sweep for use by MCM-type craft. When familiar with this sweep, an MCM
crew can stream or recover the fully armed IDMS in less than 1 hour. This
sweep uses a maximum number of standard MCM components and a
minimum number of nonstandard components, as necessary, to complete
the streaming arrangement.
Only sweep wire and miscellaneous
connecting gear will be installed on the winch. All other standard and
special items should be stowed in appropriate areas below deck.
a.
4B-4-1.1
During normal operations with this sweep, the sweep wire will be streamed from outboard
sweep wire drums of both the GUIDE and CONSORT ships. This uses the lay of the wire to
assist in diverting inboard end of the sweep catenary, since port wires will be streamed to
starboard, and starboard wires streamed to port.
Preparation.
a.
Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
personnel for minesweeping operations.
b.
Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational
order.
c.
Assemble type and quantity of cutters required and include one extra intermediate cutter for
each wire.
d.
Rig depressor for team deep sweep in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1.
e.
Prepare sweep and depressor wires in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.
4B-4-1.2
Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential
5/8-Inch x 1,000-Foot IDMS Sweep Wire Preparation (For Guide and Consort).
a.
Prepare sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.
b.
Determine which sweep wire drum will be outboard in the two-ship sweep.
c.
Using 1-inch shackles, attach two 1-inch swivels diametrically opposite to the inboard 3-inch ID
ring (Figure 4B-4A).
d.
Using 1-inch shackles, attach free end of first swivel attached to ring in previous step to hardeye
of sweep wire; then attach free end of second swivel attached to ring in previous step to hardeye
of 5/8-inch x 50-foot wire rope pendant.
e.
Reel sweep wire with pendant and connecting gear back on to sweep wire drum.
f.
Using 1-inch shackle, connect remaining hardeye of 50-foot pendant to a third 1-inch swivel;
connect other end of this swivel to second (outboard) 3-inch ID ring.
g.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect a ball bearing swivel to second 3-inch ID ring and to hardeye
of 5/8-inch x 1,000-foot IDMS sweep wire.
4B-4B
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4B-4A. IDMS Sweep Wire Preparation
4B-4C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
h.
OPERATION
Reel connecting gear and IDMS sweep wire on to sweep wire winch, stopping at each
red-painted mark and attaching a 5/8-inch wedge stop. (Red-painted bands mark the cutter
attachment point, Table 4B-4A.) Continue reeling until IDMS sweep wire is on sweep wire drum.
NOTE
Do not pass IDMS wire through instrumented sheaves.
i.
Using 7/8-inch shackle, attach diversion chain and cable grip to towing pad at base of
instrumented sheave.
Table 4B-4A. IDMS Modified Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 Spacing
1
4B-4-1.3
CUTTER
NUMBER
DISTANCE FROM OUTBOARD END
OF SWEEP WIRE (FEET)
0
2
1
10
2
35
3
100
4
220
5
400
6
650
00
1001
Distance measured from inboard depressor on 5/8-inch sweep wire.
Depressor Preparation.
NOTE
Both depressors must be adjusted to the same shear.
a.
Prepare depressor in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1.
b.
Remove the two depressor span pendants from 4-way connector and 4-way connector from
depressor bridle towing ring. Using a 1-inch shackle, attach one span pendant to the 4-inch ID
ring on each depressor bridle (Figure 4B-4B).
c.
Attach jaw end of 1-inch eye-and-jaw swivel to bitter end of depressor span pendant.
d.
Secure depressor to stern rail with MacCluney hooks and mouse. The other depressor will be
stowed in a convenient location and placed in the MacCluney hook when it becomes free.
4B-4-2
4B-4-2.1
a.
4B-4D
STREAMING.
Preparation for Streaming.
Lay out the Cutters Mk 12 Mod 2 and the Elevating Fins Mk 12, and assemble in accordance
with Job Sheet 4A-4.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4B-4B. Depressor Rigging for IDMS Sweep Wire
4B-4E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
b.
Check and arm Cutters Mk 12 Mod 2 with Mk 192 Mod 0 Cartridge.
c.
Ensure sufficient heaving lines, bolos, and a line-throwing gun are available for line passing
when required. Each ship will flake down a suitable 300-foot graduated messenger line on deck,
free for running.
d.
Unreel 100 feet of the 5/8-inch IDMS sweep wire on GUIDE ship, lead wire out through outboard
roller chock, and secure sweep wire eye outboard of rail toward CONSORT ship.
e.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach a 5/8-inch swivel to eye of GUIDE’s IDMS sweep wire.
f.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach 300-foot graduated messenger line to GUIDE ship’s IDMS
sweep wire (at the hardeye of IDMS sweep wire). Secure swivel to messenger line with small
stuff (Figure 4B-4C).
g.
Ensure IDMS sweep wire and messenger line are clear of all obstructions.
h.
On board CONSORT ship, using 5/8-inch shackles, connect a 5/8-inch link-to-link swivel to
outboard end of CONSORT’s IDMS sweep wire, and connect 16,000-pound shear coupling to
free end of 5/8-inch link-to-link swivel. Position this connection between the instrumented
sheave and sweep wire roller chock to facilitate hookup to GUIDE’s IDMS sweep wire (Figure
4B-4A).
i.
Ships employing SQQ-30 sonar are equipped with IDMS locator set. CONSORT ship can
attach IDMS transmitter at the 5/8-inch shackle adjacent to the shear coupling. Using 1/2-inch
shackle, attach a 5/16-inch x 5-foot float pendant to 5/8-inch shackle. Using 1/2-inch shackle,
attach other end of 5/16-inch pendant to transmitter tow bail.
j.
Lay out Cutters Mk 15 on both ships for emergency release of sweep gear.
k.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish communications: bridge-to-bridge, bridge-to-fantail, and
fantail-to-fantail.
4B-4-2.2
Streaming Maneuvers.
NOTE
When both ships are ready to stream gear, the GUIDE ship will set a base
course and speed to provide a sufficient steerageway. The CONSORT ship
will close on the GUIDE ship until they are at the same course and speed,
and are abeam at the nearest safe spacing for existing sea conditions.
Gear will be streamed at bare steerage way.
a.
When permission to pass a heaving line is granted by the GUIDE ship, a line should be passed
from CONSORT ship to GUIDE ship by appropriate means.
b.
When the line is received, the GUIDE ship should secure this line to outboard end of 300-foot
graduated messenger line and inform CONSORT ship to heave around.
4B-4F
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4B-4C. Messenger Line with Small Stuff
4B-4G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
c.
Before a strain is taken on the IDMS sweep wire, it should be free from the rail. GUIDE ship’s
winch should be tended to ensure sufficient slack for CONSORT ship to haul GUIDE ship’s
IDMS sweep wire on deck, and to ensure sufficient slack to facilitate handling.
d.
CONSORT ship should bring messenger line in through appropriate sweep wire roller chock
and lead it to the gypsy head.
4B-4-2.3
Wire Connection and Arming.
NOTE
When the GUIDE ship’s IDMS sweep wire is brought aboard the
CONSORT ship, ensure the CONSORT ship’s IDMS sweep wire is led out
from the winch so it can be connected easily at a clear work space on deck.
a.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, connect swivel on GUIDE ship’s IDMS sweep wire into shear coupling
(Figure 4B-4D). Unshackle 300-foot graduated messenger line and cut small stuff lashing
swivel to line.
When the sweep wires of the two ships are connected together, the tension
of the sweep wire between the two ships will create an extremely
dangerous situation for all hands on both fantails. The GUIDE should
monitor sweep wire tension continuously and keep a large catenary in the
wire for safety purposes. Wire rope cutters should be readily available on
both craft for cutting the sweep wire if such action appears necessary.
b.
CONSORT ship should heave in until wedge stop at 10-foot mark of GUIDE ship’s IDMS sweep
wire is just outboard of sweep wire roller chock.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
c.
Install a Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 (in reverse position) just OUTBOARD of sweep wire roller chock.
d.
CONSORT ship begins to pay out the GUIDE ship’s IDMS sweep wire until wedge stop at the
GUIDE ship’s 2-foot mark is just inboard of sweep wire roller chock.
e.
Install 0 Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 (in reverse position) just OUTBOARD of sweep wire roller chock.
NOTE
The CONSORT ship will notify the GUIDE ship before starting the next step.
f.
CONSORT ship begins to pay out its own IDMS sweep wire until the 2-foot mark is just inboard
of sweep wire roller chock. Install wedge stops if not previously accomplished.
g.
CONSORT ship pays out on its IDMS sweep wire until the 2-foot mark is just outboard the
sweep wire roller chock. Install 0 cutter.
h.
Continue to pay out IDMS sweep wire slowly until the (second wedge stop) 10-foot mark is
outboard of the sweep wire roller chock. Install number 1 cutter.
4B-4H
Figure 4B-4D. Improved Deep Moored Sweep (IDMS) Configuration
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4B-4J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
i.
The above procedure for installing cutters should be continued until IDMS sweep wire has been
armed with cutters at the spacing indicated in Table 4B-4A and by the red-painted bands on the
IDMS sweep wire.
j.
After CONSORT ship has installed its fifth cutter, notify the GUIDE ship. GUIDE ship shall
recover its IDMS sweep wire to the third cutter position. While maintaining a reasonable
catenary, attach and arm its remaining cutters in the same manner as described above.
4B-4-2.4
Launching the Depressors.
Use caution when paying out the depressor wire to ensure sufficient tension
is retained in the sweep wire, preventing slack in depressor bridles and
possible stalling and entanglement of the depressor. The sweep wire
should be coordinated between the GUIDE and CONSORT to ensure that
undue stresses are not placed on the sweep. No reference to actual
scopes should be made over nonsecure circuits, but percent of the
intended scope may be discussed to permit coordination between ships.
NOTE
Both ships should launch depressors together to keep sweep tension
uniform.
a.
On signal from GUIDE ship, the CONSORT ship increases ship’s spacing to 200 yards when
streaming the IDMS sweep wire.
b.
Ease out on sweep wire winch until outboard 3-inch ID ring is outboard of the sweep wire roller
chock (Figure 4B-4E).
c.
Using a 1-inch shackle, connect outboard depressor span pendant into outboard 3-inch ID ring
of the special 50-foot pendant and launch the OUTBOARD depressor.
d.
On signal from the GUIDE ship, ease out on sweep wire winch until the inboard 3-inch ID ring is
outboard of sweep wire roller chock. Ensure outboard depressor is clear and riding properly.
e.
Place cable grip and diversion chain on ship’s sweep wire.
f.
Pay out sweep wire until cable grip takes a strain.
g.
Pass sweep wire into instrumented sheave. Ensure payout reading is zero.
h.
Using a 1-inch shackle, connect inboard depressor span pendant into the inboard 3-inch ID ring
of the special pendant and launch inboard depressor.
i.
Heave in on sweep wire and remove cable grip.
j.
On signal from the GUIDE ship, ease out on sweep wire winch and ensure the inboard
depressor is clear and riding properly.
k.
Pay out the sweep wire until the 00 wedge stop is outboard of sweep wire roller chock (100 feet
from inboard depressor). Install 00 cutter.
l.
Disengage winch drum and prepare to veer sweep wire from the brake.
m.
Return and restow articulated stern crane.
4B-4K
Figure 4B-4E. Depressor and Sweep Arrangement
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4B-4L
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4B-4-2.5
OPERATION
Completing the Sweep Streaming.
Use caution when veering the 5/8-inch x 50-foot depressor pendant to
ensure sufficient tension is retained in the sweep wire, preventing slack in
the depressor bridles and possible stalling and entanglement of the
depressor. Sweep wire veering should be coordinated between GUIDE
and CONSORT to ensure undue stresses are not placed on the sweep. No
reference to actual scopes should be made over nonsecure circuits, but
percent of the intended scope may be discussed to permit coordination
between ships.
a.
Continue to veer sweep wire until sweep wire instrumented fairlead sheave display indicates
proper scope for desired sweep depth, as indicated in tactical instructions NWP 35 (Series).
Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged.
b.
4B-4-2.6
Engage pawls.
Securing Sweep Wire.
a.
Secure sweep wire drum.
b.
Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
c.
Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4B-4F) back-to-back on sweep wire. Install Cutter Mk 15 on
sweep wire.
To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do
not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station
on the 01 level.
d.
Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to
cutters.
e.
Arm sweep wire cutter.
f.
Notify bridge that gear is fully streamed and secured on deck.
4B-4M
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4B-4F. Wedge Stop Placement
4B-4N
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
g.
GUIDE ship will notify CONSORT ship, and both ships will increase headway simultaneously to
desired sweep speed and ship spacing.
h.
Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves.
operation of sweep gear (Figure 4B-4D).
4B-4-3
Verify correct
IDMS OPERATION.
NOTE
The IDMS will normally be operated with the ships on a steady course and
speed, as determined by the operational situation. Performance of the gear
will be monitored in accordance with NWP 35 (Series).
4B-4-3.1
Turning Procedures.
a.
GUIDE ship will be shifted to the inboard MCM in the turn.
b.
Each turn will be carried out in steps of 20 degrees or less.
c.
Ship spacing in turns should be 300 yards.
d.
Where sufficient depth will prevent bottoming of the gear, GUIDE ship should slow to
approximately 3 knots and CONSORT ship should maintain a speed of 5 to 6 knots.
e.
Where bottoming of the gear is possible, the GUIDE ship should maintain a speed of at least 4
knots and CONSORT ship should perform turns at 6 knots, provided her sweep wire tensions do
not exceed 14,000 pounds.
NOTE
To reverse course with the deep sweep and to travel over a path very near
that already traveled, a pseudo-Williamson turn may be carried out by
turning approximately 60 degrees in one direction and then reversing
direction by a 240 degrees turn the opposite way. This turn will usually
return to a datum point within 10 degrees of a reciprocal heading.
f.
The start of each turn increment will be signaled by GUIDE ship, with execution of flag Romeo.
g.
When GUIDE ship is steady on course after a turn segment, it should close up flag Romeo.
h.
When CONSORT has completed its turn segment and is again in the appropriate station abeam
of the GUIDE, it will close up flag Romeo. The GUIDE ship will then signal next 20 degrees turn
segment by executing flag Romeo.
i.
During night operations, turns are performed in a similar fashion utilizing flashing light signals.
4B-4-4
RECOVERY.
NOTE
Recovery is the reverse of streaming.
4B-4-4.1
Preparation.
a.
Set minesweeping detail and re-establish bridge-to-bridge, bridge-to-fantail, and fantail-tofantail communications.
b.
GUIDE ship will notify the CONSORT ship, and both ships will slow to recovery speed (3 to 4
knots) and decrease ship spacing to approximately 300 yards for recovery.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
4B-4P
OPERATION
4B-4-4.2
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Depressor Recovery.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
a.
Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutters.
b.
Reman fantail.
c.
Upon word to commence recovery of the sweep, both ships should engage their sweep wire
drums and release their towing pawls.
d.
Heave around on sweep drum while closely monitoring instrumented fairlead sheave readings
and sweep wire coming on board.
NOTE
Maintain a close watch over the stern to prevent bringing fouled gear,
depressor, or other rigging into sweep wire roller chock. GUIDE and
CONSORT ships should recover gear at approximately the same rate.
e.
When inboard 00 cutter is nearing the surface and at the direction of GUIDE ship, CONSORT
ship should close the range to GUIDE ship to approximately 100 yards.
f.
Both ships should continue to recover gear, removing the 00 cutter. Replace safety pin in 00
cutters, then remove cutters and place on deck.
g.
Place cable grip and diversion chain on ship's sweep wire.
h.
Pay out sweep wire until cable grip takes a strain.
i.
Remove sweep wire from instrumented sheave.
j.
Heave in on sweep wire and remove cable grip.
k.
Heave in on sweep wire until wedge stop is on board and remove wedge stop.
l.
Heave in on sweep wire until the inboard 3-inch ID ring is within reach. Secure quick recovery
hook or grapnel to lifting bail of depressor. Detach inboard depressor span pendant from sweep
wire. Recover the depressor and place in stowage rack using the articulated crane.
m.
Heave in on sweep wire until the outboard 3-inch ID ring is within reach. Secure quick recovery
hook or grapnel to lifting bail of depressor and detach outboard depressor span pendant from
the sweep wire. Recover the depressor using the articulated crane.
NOTE
Depressors may be secured at the stern rail, in the ready release position, if
restreaming of the sweep is anticipated; otherwise, they will be secured in
their stowage racks on the fantail.
n.
When GUIDE ship has taken in its outboard depressor, it should set sweep wire drum brake and
await CONSORT ship’s IDMS sweep wire recovery. CONSORT ship should continue to recover
its IDMS sweep wire until number 6 cutter is just outboard of the sweep wire roller chock.
4B-4Q
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4B-4-4.3
OPERATION
Cutter Recovery.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
In case of a DUD cutter, proceed to DUD cutter instructions in Job Sheet
4A-4 immediately.
a.
As soon as cutters come into reach, replace the safety pins; then depress the handle opening
the spring loaded arms. Remove Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 assembly from IDMS sweep wire and put
in a safe place on deck.
b.
Heave in on IDMS sweep wire until wedge stop is on board and remove wedge stop.
c.
Continue heaving in on IDMS sweep wire, removing Cutters Mk 12 Mod 2 and wedge stops, until
all are recovered and shear coupling is brought aboard. The CONSORT ship will then remove
the first two cutters on GUIDE ship’s IDMS sweep wire.
d.
The GUIDE ship should be informed when shear coupling is brought on board and removed, the
300-foot graduated messenger line attached, and GUIDE ship’s IDMS sweep wire veered clear
of all obstructions.
e.
Both ships should then open to desired spacing while the GUIDE ship continues to recover the
IDMS sweep wire, removing cutters and wedge stops until all gear is on board.
f.
Recover remaining gear.
g.
Notify bridge all gear is clear.
4B-4-4.4
Securing Gear.
a.
Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage.
b.
Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.
c.
When all cutters are recovered, they should be disarmed and disassembled. All components
should be thoroughly washed in fresh water, dried, and lubricated in accordance with Preventive
Maintenance System (PMS). All gear should be stowed or secured.
4B-4R
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4C-1
A MK 2(G) ACOUSTIC SWEEP
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of
this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and
injury or death to personnel.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet
4A-4) (1075-00-265-0677)
Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-332-5834)
Depressor, 5(g) auxiliary, NM (1075-00-360-1147) (as
required)
Device, acoustic, A Mk 2(g) (1075-00-224-8945) (as
required)
Flag, red and black, 33- x 33-inch
(8345-00-233-4112) (as required)
Flagstaff, 5-foot, ash wood (8345-00-179-0114) (as
required)
Float, type O, size 1, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-3)
(1075-01-371-0568)
Float, type O, size 5, NM (as required)
(1075-00-254-9010)
Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye
(4030-00-290-6420)
Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986)
Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet
4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280)
Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon,
hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1
Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 20-foot, single leg, NM,
wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 3/8-inch
(4030-00-270-5480) (8)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 1/2-inch
(4030-00-270-5482) (3)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard
end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye outboard
end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-302-9008)
Swivel, link-to-link, NM, 3/8-inch (4030-00-269-9767)
Swivel, link-to-link, NM, 5/8-inch (4030-00-269-9768)
(2) 2
Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as
required)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737)
Hook, boat 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251)
Hook, boat 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252)
Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643)
Pendant, depressor, 1/4-inch x 1-foot, single leg, NM,
wire rope, hardeye each end 1
Pendant, float, 1/4-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM,
wire rope, hardeye each end 1
1
2
Pendant, lower bridle leg, 1/4-inch x 3-1/2-foot, single
leg, NM, wire rope, hardeye each end 1
Pendant, towing, lower, 1/4-inch x 12-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope, hardeye each end 1;
Pendant, towing, upper, 1/4-inch x 10-foot, single leg,
wire rope, hardeye each end 1
Pendant, upper bridle leg, 1/4-inch x 2-1/2-foot, single
leg, NM, wire rope, hardeye each end 1
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
Two additional units are required when the depressor is used.
4C-1A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4C-1-1
OPERATION
RIGGING.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
NOTE
Materials are for one set of Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g). Refer to the sweep
order for number of sets required. Additional Cutters Mk 9, Cutter Mk 15,
size 1 float, and kite will not be required.
4C-1-1.1
Preparation.
a.
Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
personnel for minesweeping operations.
b.
Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational
order.
4C-1-1.2
Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential
Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) Preparation.
a.
Using a 3/8-inch shackle, attach upper bridle leg to upper towing eye on Acoustic Device A
Mk 2(g) (Figure 4C-1A).
b.
Attach a 1/2-inch shackle to lower towing eye of device.
c.
Using a 3/8-inch shackle, attach lower bridle leg to 1/2-inch shackle at lower towing eye.
d.
Using a 3/8-inch shackle, connect free ends of upper and lower bridle legs of Acoustic Device A
Mk 2(g) to one end of lower towing pendant.
4C-1-1.3
Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) Depressor Preparation (Optional).
a.
The use of Size 5(g) auxiliary depressor for Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) is optional.
b.
Using a 3/8-inch shackle, attach a depressor pendant to 1/2-inch shackle at lower towing eye of
device.
c.
Using a 3/8-inch shackle, attach free end of depressor pendant to 3/8-inch swivel of auxiliary
depressor.
d.
Using a 3/8-inch shackle, attach the 3/8-inch swivel on depressor pendant to auxiliary
depressor.
4C-1-1.4
Size 5 Float Preparation.
a.
Using a 1/2-inch shackle, attach a 5/8-inch link-to-link swivel to bail of a size 5 float (Figure
4C-1B).
b.
Using a 3/8-inch shackle, attach float pendant to lower link of the 5/8-inch link-to-link swivel.
c.
Using a 3/8-inch shackle, attach upper towing pendant to upper link of 5/8-inch link-to-link swivel
on float bail.
4C-1B
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4C-1A. Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) Rigged with an Auxiliary Depressor
4C-1C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4C-1B. Size 5 Float Preparation
4C-1D
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
d.
Using a 3/8-inch shackle, connect a 5/8-inch link-to-link swivel to free end of upper towing
pendant.
e.
Rig and install float flag and flagstaff.
4C-1-1.5
Size 1 Float and Kite Preparation.
a.
Prepare size 1 float (moored configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3.
b.
Prepare size 1 kite as an otter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1.
4C-1-1.6
Preparation of O-Type Components.
a.
Prepare sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.
b.
Lead sweep wire from drum, through instrumented fairlead sheave and over sweep wire roller
chock to otter.
c.
Attach an End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between otter bridle and sweep wire (Figure 4C-1C).
d.
Using a 3/4-inch shackle, connect float pendant to upper end of otter beam.
NOTE
Float pendant length is dependent on water depth, but cannot exceed 20
feet.
4C-1-1.7
Transfer Otter To Ready Release Position.
a.
Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on the otter.
b.
Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle is just
aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4C-1D).
c.
Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and
secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion.
d.
Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane whip.
e.
Rotate crane forward.
f.
Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.
Disengage sweep wire drum(s).
4C-1-2
STREAMING.
NOTE
Although Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) sweep may be streamed to either side,
it is normally streamed to starboard.
4C-1-2.1
Streaming Preparation.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communication.
b.
Slow to streaming speed (4 knots). Increase speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable to reduce rolling.
4C-1-2.2
Launching the Float.
a.
Request permission to put gear to the rail.
b.
Ensure that nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4C-1E).
4C-1E
Figure 4C-1C. Connecting Sweep Wire and Cutter Mk 9 to Otter (Starboard Configuration)
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4C-1F
OPERATION
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4C-1D. Otter in Ready Release Position
c.
Lead float nose line outboard to side that float is to be used, then lead line in through chock.
d.
Tend line to bitt.
e.
Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, and train outboard to position
float at rail.
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, install batteries and verify that
the photo cell is working.
f.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.
g.
Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and float pendant and nose line are clear of
ship and obstructions.
h.
Connect float pendant(s), if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the
outboard corner of otter.
4C-1G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4C-1E. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)
4C-1H
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
i.
Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE.
j.
Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook
securing otter (Figure 4C-1D). Launch float and slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.
4C-1-2.3
Tripping the Otter.
a.
Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes a strain.
b.
Pay out sweep wire under power to position for attaching first acoustic device, and check for
proper diversion.
4C-1-2.4
Attachment of Acoustic Device and Size 5 Float to Sweep Wire.
NOTE
Positions on the sweep wire for attachment of Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g)
and float are directed by sweep order.
a.
Attach two wedge stops, nose-to-nose, about 1-foot apart on sweep wire at acoustic device
attachment point (Figure 4C-1F).
b.
Disengage sweep wire drum. Veer sweep wire using hydraulic brake, maintain slight tension of
at least 500 lb.
c.
Continue to veer sweep wire until wedge stops are just outside sweep wire roller chock.
d.
Place Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) and its size 5 float forward of roller chock assembly.
e.
Using both articulated stern cranes, simultaneously lift and train acoustic device and size 5 float
outboard of all obstructions.
Ensure all connections in the following steps are outboard and clear of all
obstructions.
f.
Using a 3/8-inch shackle, connect free end of float pendant to lifting pad on top of acoustic
device (Figure 4C-1F).
g.
Using a 3/8-inch shackle, connect free end of lower towing pendant to link of 5/8-inch swivel to
which free end of upper towing pendant is connected (Figure 4C-1D).
h.
Using a 1/2-inch shackle with pin side toward swivel, attach free end of 5/8-inch swivel,
connected to upper and lower towing pendants, to sweep wire between two wedge stops.
4C-1-2.5
Launching the Acoustic Device and Size 5 Float.
a.
Lower acoustic device and size 5 float into water and release.
b.
Veer sweep wire to next device attachment position as directed by sweep order. Repeat
paragraphs 4C-1-2.4 and 4C-1-2.5 for each Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) and float used.
c.
After all launches are complete, return and restow articulated stern crane.
4C-1J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4C-1F. Attaching Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) Gear to Sweep Wire
4C-1K
OPERATION
4C-1-2.6
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Securing the Sweep Wire.
Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged.
a.
Veer sweep wire to full scope. Secure sweep wire winch and set pawl.
b.
Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
c.
Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4C-1G) back-to-back on sweep wire to allow attachment of
Cutter Mk 15.
d.
Attach Cutter Mk 15 to sweep wire between instrumented fairlead sheave and stern roller chock.
To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do
not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station
on the 01 level.
e.
Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutter Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to
cutter.
f.
Arm sweep wire cutter.
g.
Notify bridge that gear is fully streamed and secured on deck.
h.
Increase headway to sweep speed.
i.
Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheave.
operation of sweep gear (Figure 4C-1H).
4C-1-3
4C-1-3.1
Verify correct
RECOVERY.
Preparation.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communication.
b.
Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
4C-1L
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4C-1G. Wedge Stop Placement
4C-1M
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4C-1H. A Mk 2(g) Acoustic Sweep Configuration
4C-1N
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
d.
Cutter Mk 15 personnel disarm and remove Cutter Mk 15.
e.
Reman fantail.
f.
Request permission to recover gear.
g.
Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane.
h.
Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to the whip.
4C-1-3.2
Acoustic Device and Size 5 Float Recovery.
a.
Engage sweep wire drum, remove towing pawl.
b.
Heave in on sweep wire. Continue heaving in on sweep wire until acoustic device is directly
astern and device attachment point and wedge stops are at sweep wire roller chock.
c.
Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on float. Recover float and acoustic device.
d.
Disconnect float pendant from lifting pad of acoustic device.
e.
Disconnect upper and lower towing pendants from sweep wire. Remove wedge stops.
f.
Repeat until all acoustic devices and floats are recovered.
4C-1-3.3
O-Type Gear Recovery.
a.
Continue heaving in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep roller chock.
b.
Disengage sweep wire drum.
4C-1-3.4
Size 1 Float Recovery.
a.
Train appropriate articulated stern crane outboard.
b.
Recover float pendant with a boat hook.
c.
Heave in on float pendant until nose line is within reach.
d.
Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane and heave in until float is in lifting position
under crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail
on float.
e.
Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook.
f.
Remove emergency recovery pendant.
g.
Stow float.
4C-1-3.5
Otter Recovery.
a.
Train appropriate articulated stern crane outboard over otter.
b.
Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter.
c.
Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4C-1D) or on stowage rack on fantail.
d.
Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead.
4C-1P
OPERATION
e.
Secure sweep wire winch.
f.
Return and restow articulated stern crane.
g.
Notify bridge all gear is clear.
4C-1-3.6
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Securing Gear.
a.
Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage and conduct PMS.
b.
Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.
4C-1Q/(4C-1R blank)
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4C-2
ACOUSTIC DEVICE TB-26 SWEEP
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of
this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and
injury or death to personnel.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Cable, acoustic power (APC) (per Job Sheet 4A-5)
(1075-00-782-9881)
Device, acoustic, TB-26, NM (1075-01-368-2482)
Float, type O, size 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-3)
(1075-01-357-9948)
Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x
3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638)
Line, nose, float (acoustic), 2-1/2-inch x 60-foot,
single leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1
Line, tail, float, 2-1/2-inch x 30-foot, single leg, nylon,
(hardeye splice one end, other end whipped) 1
Pendant, device, towing/stopper (acoustic), 1/2-inch
x 3-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye
each end) (2) 1
Pendant, float (acoustic) 1/2-inch x length as required,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each
end) 1
Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot,
NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one
end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1
Ring, 3-inch ID (5365-01-346-8057)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 3/4-inch
(4030-00-270-5484) (5)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 5/8-inch
(4030-00-270-5483) (12)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949)
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385)
Electrician Mate Tool Kit
Gauge, pressure (0 to 30 psi)
Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251)
1
Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252)
Megohmmeter 500 Vdc
Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range)
Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572)
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Wrench, T-handle (5120-00-972-0490)
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4C-2-1
RIGGING.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
4C-2A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4C-2-1.1
OPERATION
Preparation.
a.
Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
personnel for minesweeping operations.
b.
Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational
order.
4C-2-1.2
a.
4C-2-1.3
a.
4C-2-1.4
Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential
Size 0 Float Preparation.
Ensure size 0 float (acoustic configuration) is prepared in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3.
APC Preparation.
Prepare APC in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Preparation.
a.
Deck test acoustic device 24 hours prior to streaming in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.
Upon completion of test, pressurize device to 10 psi for 24 hours to ensure device is air tight. If
more than a 1 psi loss of pressure is observed (indicated by soapy-water bubbles), release all air
pressure and take corrective action. A 20 °F drop in temperature will have a 1 psi drop in
pressure. If no loss of pressure is observed and device is to be launched soon thereafter, retain
air pressure in housing until final pressurizing is accomplished; otherwise, release all pressure.
b.
Prepare towing stocking in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.
c.
Using a 3/4-inch shackle, shackle 3-inch ID ring to aft hole in acoustic device towing and hoisting
plate using Table 4C-2A for depth and float pendant correlation. Connect float pendant to ring
(Figure 4C-2A).
d.
Lead outboard end of APC aft through cable roller chock assembly; then, pull cable outboard,
clear of all obstructions, and forward to acoustic device. Connect cable to Acoustic Device
TB-26. If required, apply a light coat of silicone grease.
e.
Using 3/4-inch shackle, connect one end of device towing pendant to hardeye of towing stocking
at 6-foot mark on APC. Connect pendant’s free end to device towing pad (Figure 4C-2A). Wrap
3-foot towing pendant and shackles with chafing gear.
Ensure inhaul pendant is connected aft of float pendant. Failure to do so
could cause damage to float pendant and inhaul pendant.
f.
Pass hardeye of inhaul pendant down through float fairlead tube to 3-inch ID ring and attach with
a 3/4-inch shackle with screw pin end on 3-inch ID ring behind float pendant connection (Figure
4C-2A).
g.
Shackle softeye of inhaul pendant to crane whip, using a 1/2-inch shackle. Figure 4C-2B shows
acoustic device in a cradled position.
h.
Take in on crane whip until inhaul pendant is wound on cable drum.
i.
Using 5/8-inch shackle, attach tail line to tail of size 0 float.
j.
Upon successful completion of air leak test, pressurize device to operating depth (Table 4C-2A).
4C-2B
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4C-2A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure
1
DEPTH TO CENTER OF
DIAPHRAGM (FEET)
PENDANT LENGTH SIZE 0
FLOAT (FEET)
AIR
PRESSURES (PSI)1
20
13
8.0
22
15
8.5
24
17
9.3
25
18
10.1
26
19
10.5
27
20
10.8
28
21
11.2
29
22
11.5
30
23
11.8
These air pressures for the TB-26 rising when streamed through the water.
Figure 4C-2A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing
4C-2C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4C-2B. Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled
4C-2-2
4C-2-2.1
LAUNCHING/STREAMING.
Streaming Preparations.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Check air pressure in device for appropriate depth (Table 4C-2A).
c.
Slow to streaming speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
d.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
e.
Request permission to stream gear.
4C-2D
OPERATION
4C-2-2.2
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Launching/Streaming Float and Acoustic Device TB-26.
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify
that the photo cell is working.
a.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.
b.
Pass nose line through chock and tend around mooring bitts. Heave in to remove slack from
nose line.
c.
Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 simultaneously, training gear outboard to position
gear for launch. Ensure nose line and APC are clear of all deck obstructions (Figure 4C-2C,
View A).
d.
Lower cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 into water. Slack nose line enough to permit
float to ride astern.
e.
Continue to lower Acoustic Device TB-26 until it is supported by float. Move crane head until
inboard and continue to pay out inhaul pendant until it can be disconnected from crane whip.
Disconnect inhaul pendant.
f.
Bring inhaul pendant aboard through roller chock assembly. Attach inhaul pendant to towing
stocking at 50-foot mark on APC, using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through one eye of towing
stocking.
g.
Slack off on nose line until gear is being towed by APC (Figure 4C-2C, View B).
h.
Bring nose line through roller chock assembly. Attach nose line to towing stocking at 50-foot
mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through the free eye of the towing stocking.
i.
Return and restow articulated stern crane.
4C-2-2.3
Stopping Off the Sweep.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
a.
Pay out the APC so that the inboard towing stocking on the APC is just forward of roller chock
assembly.
b.
Remove canvas chafing gear from towing stocking.
c.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach towing pendant to the starboard instrumented sheave padeye.
Attach pelican hook to the free end of towing pendant with a 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4C-2D).
4C-2E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4C-2C. Streaming Procedure for Acoustic Device TB-26
4C-2F
OPERATION
Figure 4C-2D. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (Acoustic Sweep, TB-26 Astern)
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4C-2G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
d.
Secure both eyes of towing stocking into the bail of pelican hook. Install a cotter pin with a
tripping lanyard.
e.
Pay out the APC until the towing pendant takes the strain.
4C-2-2.4
Entering Drum Area.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
When the APC is connected, drum area crew shall enter or exit the drum
area only through QAWTD 1-86-1.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before
entering drum area.
a.
Minesweep electrician request permission to enter the drum area with drum area crew.
b.
Clear all unnecessary personnel from the fantail.
c.
Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.
d.
Sweep configuration is shown in Figure 4C-2E.
4C-2-2.5
Connecting the Acoustic Power Cable.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
Measure insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable prior to making
connections to power outlet in accordance with PMS.
The PCU operator shall exit drum area through QAWTD 1-86-1.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
a.
4C-2H
Verify measurement of insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable with an approved 500
Vdc megohmmeter.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4C-2E. Acoustic Sweep Configuration TB-26 Astern
4C-2J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
b.
Verify power is secured prior to connecting the APC. This is accomplished by checking the plug
receptacle with a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) that has been checked against a known DC
source to ensure proper operation. The source should be the same type and voltage range as
the circuit to be tested.
c.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range),
checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor in the acoustic power receptacle.
d.
Recheck the multimeter to the known DC source to ensure the multimeter is still working
properly.
e.
Remove inboard end of APC cable from interior of APC cable reel.
f.
Remove protective boot from inboard end of APC cable
g.
After the magnetic and APC cable connections have been made, secure the drum area on the
port and starboard sides with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, creating any entry barrier.
Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.
h.
Remove cover from acoustic cable receptacle.
i.
In a straight line, connect APC cable to receptacle and tighten gland nut using T-handle wrench.
4C-2-2.6
Departing the Drum Area.
a.
Clear danger tags from PCU
b.
Energize PCU, start acoustic device and transfer control to ACU.
c.
Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer that DRUM AREA IS SECURE, PCU IS
ENERGIZED AND CONTROL TRANSFERRED TO THE ACU, then departs drum area.
4C-2-2.7
Towing the Sweep.
a.
Increase headway to sweep speed.
b.
Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4C-2E).
c.
Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck.
4C-2-2.8
a.
4C-2-3
Maneuvering Instructions.
There are no inherent problems in maneuvering with straight acoustic sweeps (Figure 4C-2E).
RECOVERY.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
4C-2-3.1
Preparation.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
4C-2K
OPERATION
4C-2-3.2
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Reentering the Drum Area.
Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before
entering drum area.
a.
Ensure HPU has been secured.
b.
Transfer control from ACU to PCU, ensure that the ACU is secured and the PCU tagged out.
c.
Minesweep electrician reports to Safety Observer PCU IS SECURED.
d.
Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-86-1.
e.
Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-86-1.
f.
Reman fantail.
4C-2-3.3
Disconnecting the Acoustic Power Cable.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
a.
Using the T-Handle wrench, electrician loosens the APC gland nut at the APC receptacle, and
slides it back off from the bitter end of the cable.
b.
In a straight line pull, remove cable from the receptacle.
c.
Reinstall the APC receptacle non-conducting plug.
d.
Reinstall the APC inboard end protective boot and secure inboard cable end to the interior of the
APC cable reel.
e.
Minesweep electrician reports to Safety Observer, APC IS DISCONNECTED, CABLE IS
SECURED, DRUM AREA CLEAR and departs the drum area.
4C-2-3.4
Recovery of TB-26 and Float.
a.
Request permission to recover gear.
b.
Energize the hydraulic power unit.
4C-2L
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
c.
Heave in on APC to remove strain from towing pendant. Trip pelican hook. Chafe towing
stocking.
d.
Heave in on APC until towing stocking at 50-foot mark is just aft of cable roller chock assembly.
Ensure nose line is clear of APC and inhaul pendant.
e.
Detach nose line from APC and pass through stern chock. Tend around mooring bitts. Take
slack out of nose line until it takes strain.
f.
Train articulated stern crane outboard with stern crane head inboard. Detach inhaul pendant
from APC. Attach inhaul pendant to crane whip.
g.
Heave in on articulated stern crane whip and inhaul wire connection keeping slack out of nose
line.
h.
Heave in on inhaul pendant until weight of Acoustic Device TB-26 is suspended by crane and
float is properly cradled.
Ensure float is properly seated in its cradle before hoisting device from
water.
Ensure enough APC is streamed to allow acoustic device and float to be
recovered on deck.
i.
Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 simultaneously, and train gear inboard and
forward, clearing acoustic cable and nose line from stern obstructions. Slack nose line as
necessary.
j.
Stow acoustic device and float on deck.
k.
Notify bridge all gear is clear.
4C-2-3.5
Securing Gear.
a.
Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS.
b.
Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.
4C-2M
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4C-3
TB-27 ACOUSTIC SWEEP
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of
this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and
injury or death to personnel.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Cable, acoustic power (APC), 1,650-foot (per Job
Sheet 4A-5) (1075-00-782-9881)
Device, acoustic, TB-27, NM (1075-01-368-2483)
Float, type O, size 1, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-3)
(1075-01-371-0568)
Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x
3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638)
Line, nose, float (acoustic), 2-1/2-inch x 60-foot,
single leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1
Line, tail, float, 2-1/2-inch x 30-foot, single leg, nylon
(hardeye splice one end, other end whipped) 1
Pendant, device, towing/stopper (acoustic), 1/2-inch
x 3-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye
each end) (2) 1
Pendant, float (acoustic) 1/2-inch x length as required,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each
end) 1
Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot,
NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one
end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1
Ring, 3-inch, NM (5365-01-346-8057)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 5/8-inch
(4030-00-270-5483) (18)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949)
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385)
Electrician Mate Tool Kit
Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251)
Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252)
1
Megohmmeter, 500 Vdc
Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range)
Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572)
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Wrench, T-handle (5120-00-972-0490)
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4C-3-1
RIGGING.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
4C-3A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4C-3-1.1
OPERATION
Preparation.
a.
Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
personnel for minesweeping operations.
b.
Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational
order.
4C-3-1.2
a.
4C-3-1.3
a.
4C-3-1.4
Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential
Size 1 Float Preparation.
Prepare size 1 float (acoustic) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3.
APC Preparation.
Prepare APC in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Preparation.
a.
Prepare towing stocking in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.
b.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect 3-inch ID ring to second and fourth after holes on acoustic
device towing and hoisting plate. Use Table 4C-3A for depth and float pendant correlation.
Connect float pendant to ring (Figure 4C-3A).
c.
Lead outboard end of APC aft through cable roller chock assembly; then, pull cable outboard,
clear of all obstructions, and forward to acoustic device. Connect cable to Acoustic Device
TB-27. If required, apply a light coat of silicone grease.
d.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect 3-foot towing pendant to hardeye of towing stocking at 6-foot
mark in APC. Connect pendant’s free end to device towing/hoisting plate. Wrap 3-foot towing
pendant and shackles with chafing gear (Figure 4C-3A).
Ensure inhaul pendant is connected aft of float pendant. Failure to do so
could cause damage to float pendant and inhaul pendant.
e.
Pass hardeye of inhaul pendant down through float fairlead tube to 3-inch ID ring and attach with
a 5/8-inch shackle with screw pin end on 3-inch ID ring behind float pendant connection (Figure
4C-3A).
f.
Shackle softeye of inhaul pendant to crane whip, using a 1/2-inch shackle. Figure 4C-3B shows
acoustic device in a cradled position.
g.
Take in on crane whip until inhaul pendant is wound on cable drum.
h.
Using 5/8-inch shackle, attach tail line to tail of size 1 float.
i.
Deck test acoustic device per Planned Maintenance System.
4C-3-2
4C-3-2.1
LAUNCHING/STREAMING.
Streaming Preparations.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
4C-3B
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Table 4C-3A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation
DEPTH TO CENTER OF DIAPHRAGM
(FEET)
FLOAT PENDANT LENGTH
(FEET)
20
13
22
15
24
17
25
18
26
19
27
20
28
21
29
22
30
23
Figure 4C-3A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing
4C-3C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4C-3B. Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
d.
Request permission to stream gear.
4C-3-2.2
Launching/Streaming Float and Acoustic Device TB-27.
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify
that the photo cell is working.
a.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to float flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.
b.
Pass nose line through chock and tend around mooring bitts. Heave in to remove slack from
nose line.
c.
Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 simultaneously, training gear outboard to position
gear for launch. Ensure nose line and APC are clear of all deck obstructions (Figure 4C-3C,
View A).
4C-3D
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4C-3C. Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-27
4C-3E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
d.
Lower cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 into water. Slack nose line enough to permit
float to ride astern.
e.
Continue to lower Acoustic Device TB-27 until it is supported by the float. Move crane head until
inboard and continue to pay out inhaul pendant until it can be disconnected from crane whip.
Disconnect the inhaul pendant.
f.
Bring inhaul pendant aboard through roller chock assembly. Attach inhaul pendant to towing
stocking at 50-foot mark on APC, using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through one eye of towing
stocking.
g.
Slack off on nose line until gear is being towed by APC (Figure 4C-3C, View B).
h.
Bring nose line through roller chock assembly. Attach nose line to towing stocking at the 50-foot
mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through free eye of towing stocking.
i.
Return and restow articulated stern crane.
4C-3-2.3
Stopping Off the Sweep.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
a.
Pay out the APC so that the inboard towing stocking on the APC is just forward of roller chock
assembly.
b.
Remove canvas chafing gear from towing stocking.
c.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach towing pendant to the starboard instrumented sheave padeye.
Attach pelican hook to the free end of towing pendant with a 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4C-3D).
d.
Secure both eyes of towing stocking into the bail of pelican hook. Install a cotter pin with a
tripping lanyard.
e.
Pay out the APC until the towing pendant takes the strain.
4C-3F
Figure 4C-3D. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (Acoustic Sweep, TB-27 Astern)
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4C-3G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4C-3-2.4
OPERATION
Entering Drum Area.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
When the APC is connected, drum area crew shall enter or exit the drum
area only through QAWTD 1-86-1.
Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before
entering drum area.
a.
Minesweep electrician request permission to enter the drum area with drum area crew.
b.
Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.
c.
Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.
d.
Sweep configuration is shown in Figure 4C-3E.
4C-3-2.5
Connecting the Acoustic Power Cable.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
Measure insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable prior to making
connections to power outlet in accordance with PMS.
The PCU operator shall exit drum area through QAWTD 1-86-1.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
NOTE
Measure insulation resistance of APC prior to making connection to power
outlet while the device is riding on towing pendant, in accordance with PMS.
a.
Verify measurement of insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable with an approved 500
Vdc megohmmeter.
b.
Verify power is secured prior to connecting the APC. This is accomplished by checking the plug
receptacle with a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) that has been checked against a known DC
source to ensure proper operation. The source should be the same type and voltage range as
the circuit to be tested.
4C-3H
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4C-3E. Acoustic Sweep Configuration TB-27 Astern
4C-3J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
c.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range),
checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor in the acoustic power receptacle.
d.
Recheck the multimeter to the known DC source to ensure the multimeter is still working
properly.
e.
Remove inboard end of APC cable from interior of APC cable reel.
f.
Remove protective boot from inboard end of APC cable.
g.
After the magnetic and APC connections have been made, secure the drum area on the port and
starboard sides with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, creating any entry barrier. Ensure no
gear adrift is left in drum are.
h.
Remove cover from acoustic cable receptacle.
i.
In a straight line, connect APC cable to receptacle and tighten gland nut using T-handle wrench.
4C-3-2.6
Departing the Drum Area.
a.
Clear danger tags from PCU
b.
Energize PCU, start acoustic device and transfer control to ACU.
c.
Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer that DRUM AREA IS SECURE, PCU IS
ENERGIZED AND CONTROL TRANSFERRED TO THE ACU, then departs drum area.
4C-3-2.7
Towing the Sweep.
a.
Increase headway to sweep speed.
b.
Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4C-3E).
c.
Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck.
4C-3-2.8
a.
4C-3-3
Maneuvering Instructions.
There are no inherent problems in maneuvering with straight acoustic sweeps (Figure 4C-3E).
RECOVERY.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
4C-3-3.1
Preparation.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable to reduce rolling.
4C-3K
OPERATION
4C-3-3.2
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Reentering the Drum Area.
Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before
entering drum area.
a.
Ensure HPU has been secured.
b.
Transfer control from ACU to PCU, ensure that the ACU is secured and the PCU tagged out.
c.
Minesweep electrician reports to Safety Observer PCU IS SECURED.
d.
Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-86-1.
e.
Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-86-1.
f.
Reman fantail.
4C-3-3.3
Disconnecting the Acoustic Power Cable.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
a.
Using the T-Handle wrench, electrician loosens the APC gland nut at the APC receptacle, and
slides it back off from the bitter end of the cable.
b.
In a straight line pull, remove cable from the receptacle.
c.
Reinstall the APC receptacle non-conducting plug.
d.
Reinstall the APC inboard end protective boot and secure inboard cable end to the interior of the
APC cable reel.
e.
Minesweep electrician reports to Safety Observer APC IS DISCONNECTED, CABLE IS
SECURED, DRUM AREA CLEAR and departs the drum area.
4C-3-3.4
Recovery of TB-27 and Float.
a.
Request permission to recover gear.
b.
Energize the hydraulic power unit.
4C-3L
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
c.
Heave in on APC to remove strain from towing pendant. Trip pelican hook. Chafe towing
stocking.
d.
Heave in on APC until towing stocking at 50-foot mark is just aft of cable roller chock assembly.
Ensure nose line is clear of APC and inhaul pendant.
e.
Detach nose line from APC and pass through stern chock. Tend around mooring bitts. Take
slack out of nose line until it takes strain.
f.
Train articulated stern crane outboard with stern crane head inboard. Detach inhaul pendant
from APC. Attach inhaul pendant to crane whip.
g.
Heave in on articulated stern crane whip and inhaul wire connection, keeping slack out of nose
line.
h.
Heave in on inhaul pendant until weight of Acoustic Device TB-27 is suspended by crane and
float is properly cradled.
Ensure float is properly seated in its cradle before hoisting device from
water.
Ensure enough APC is streamed to allow acoustic device and float to be
recovered on deck.
i.
Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 simultaneously, and train gear inboard and
forward, clearing acoustic cable and nose line from stern obstructions. Slack nose line as
necessary.
j.
Stow acoustic device and float on deck.
k.
Notify bridge all gear is clear.
4C-3-3.5
Securing Gear.
a.
Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS.
b.
Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.
4C-3M
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4D-1
M MK 5(A) MAGNETIC SWEEP (STRAIGHT TAIL)
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of
this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and
injury or death to personnel.
The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure
all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is
followed.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded
component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Block, snatch, 6-inch, (type D), NM
(3940-00-368-7551) (4)
Block, snatch, 8-inch, (type E), NM
(3940-00-368-7552)
Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342)
Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356)
Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342)
(4)
Buoy, position, NM, with flagstaff (2050-00-272-2423)
Cable Assembly, electrode, K-4 (per Job Sheet 4A-6)
(1075-00-262-1980) (2)
Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping,
coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337)
Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, S
(per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) (2)
Clamp, hose, 1-9/16- to 2-1/2-inch
(4730-00-204-3491) (2)
Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460)
Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132)
(2)
Clip, wire rope, 5/16-inch, NM (4030-00-269-9761) (2)
Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-332-5834)
Flag, position buoy, red and black, 18- x 18-inch
(8345-00-233-4111)
Float, cellular rubber (1075-00-372-6128) (12)
Light, marker, distress (6230-00-067-5209) (2)
Line, securing (electrode float-center), 21-thread x
5-foot, single leg, manila (each end whipped) 1
Line, towing, position buoy, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot,
single leg, nylon (hardeye splice one end, other
end whipped) 1
Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) (4)
Pendant, position buoy, chafing, 5/16-inch x 5-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye one
end, other end whipped) 1
Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as
required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL)
(hardeye each end) 1
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch
(5305-00-226-9204) (4)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM,
1/2-inch (4030-00-270-5482) (2)
5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (15)
Sleeve (CK/P) (5970-01-519-3184)
Swivel, link-to-link, 3/8-inch (4030-00-269-9767)
Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505)
(8)
See footnotes at end of table.
4D-1A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
MATERIALS
SUPPORT ITEMS
Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949)
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652)
Electrician Mate Tool Kit
Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) *
Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251)
Hook, boat, 12-foot (2400-00-268-9252)
Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread)
(whipped each end) 1
*
1
Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range)
Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176)
Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021)
Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572)
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb
Hazardous Material.
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4D-1-1
RIGGING.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
4D-1-1.1
Preparation.
a.
Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
personnel for minesweeping operations.
b.
Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational
order.
4D-1-1.2
Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation.
a.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented
sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block
padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4D-1A).
b.
Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure
block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using
5/8-inch shackles.
4D-1-1.3
Position Buoy Preparation.
a.
Insert flagstaff with a red and black horizontally striped flag attached into socket on position buoy
attached to long leg. Attach distress marker light (Figure 4D-1B).
b.
Pass wire chafing pendant through tow hole in buoy. Secure pendant to position buoy with a
5/16-inch wire rope clip.
c.
Attach 3/8-inch link-to-link swivel to free end of pendant, using a 1/2-inch shackle.
d.
Connect hardeye of towing line to free end of 3/8-inch link-to-link swivel, using a 1/2-inch
shackle.
e.
Lead towing line outboard over taffrail and back aboard through cable roller chock assembly.
4D-1B
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4D-1A. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly
4D-1-1.4
a.
4D-1-1.5
Electrode Floats.
Splice 5-foot (21-thread) pendant to both ends of each float.
K-4 Electrode Preparation.
To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewed in a canvas
chafing sleeve.
a.
Prepare K-4 electrode in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-6.
4D-1C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4D-1B. Rigging Position Buoy
4D-1-1.6
Long Leg Preparation.
a.
Lead a K-4 electrode to the outboard end of the S-Cable.
b.
Insulate S/K-4 connection and fitting as follows:
4D-1D
(1)
Place inboard end of long leg K-4 electrode in vicinity of the S-Cable connection.
(2)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(3)
Connect the long leg K-4 electrode to the outboard S-Cable using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x
1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers.
Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(4)
Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Apply two
layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape, continuing tape several inches past the
connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
c.
Heave in on magnetic reel, stacking K-4 electrode until outboard end is clear to work on, and
position for streaming.
d.
Tape outboard electrode terminal lug with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black plastic tape and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
4D-1-2
STREAMING.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
4D-1-2.1
Streaming Preparation.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to streaming speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
d.
Request permission to stream gear.
4D-1-2.2
Streaming of Outboard (Long Leg) Electrode.
a.
Lead long leg electrode from magnetic cable drum and out through the level wind assembly,
then out cable roller chock assembly.
b.
Ensure K-4 electrode terminal lug is properly taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection. Ensure all exposed
metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
c.
Pay out to 50 feet.
4D-1-2.3
Attachment of Buoy and Floats.
a.
Attach first electrode float (Figure 4D-1C), then attach towing line of position buoy inboard of first
float.
b.
Turn distress marker lights on.
c.
Pay out electrode and launch position buoy.
d.
Continue paying out and attach four more floats seven feet apart (Figure 4D-1D).
e.
Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float.
4D-1E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4D-1C. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode
4D-1-2.4
S/K-4 Connector Inspection.
a.
Continue paying out long leg electrode until S/K-4 connection is forward of cable roller chock
assembly.
b.
Ensure S/K-4 connection and fitting is wrapped with two layers rubber self-vulcanizing insulating
tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of half-lapped friction tape.
Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal
is covered to reduce corrosion.
4D-1-2.5
Installation of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode.
a.
Continue streaming S-Cable, inspect for insulation breaks. Inspect sleeves for watertight
integrity and condition of tape. Repair as required.
b.
Continue streaming S-Cable until outboard short leg breakout and K-4 blank pigtail is forward of
cable roller chock assembly.
c.
Remove boot from K-4 blank pigtail.
d.
Lead a K-4 electrode end to the K-4 blank pigtail.
e.
Attach K-4 electrode to K-4 blank pigtail (Figure 4D-1E). Insulate and waterproof the connection
by installing a CK/P insulating sleeve as follows:
4D-1F
(1)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(2)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the CK/P
insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity.
(3)
Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over large end of sleeve and two 3-1/16- to 4-inch
hose clamps over small end of sleeve.
(4)
Slip CK/P insulating sleeve over K-4 electrode and slide back out of way.
Figure 4D-1D. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4D-1G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4D-1E. K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection
(5)
Connect terminals of K-4 electrode and K-4 blank pigtail using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x
1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers.
Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline
of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(6)
Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of insulating sleeve.
(7)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(8)
Slide CK/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
(9)
Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with
outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing
screws on each end are 180 degrees apart
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
4D-1H
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
f.
Place ten turns of 21-thread line lashing around K-4 electrode and S-Cable to relieve towing
strain on K-4 blank pigtail.
g.
Heave in on magnetic cable until outboard end of short leg electrode is clear to work on and
positioned for streaming.
h.
Tape the outboard end of K-4 electrode with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all
exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
4D-1-2.6
Streaming of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode.
a.
Ensure K-4 electrode outboard terminal lug is taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side.
Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
b.
Pay out 50 feet of the short leg electrode.
4D-1-2.7
Attachment of Short Leg Electrode Floats.
a.
Attach first electrode float (Figure 4D-1C).
b.
Continue paying out and attach four additional floats seven feet apart.
c.
Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float (Figure 4D-1D).
4D-1-2.8
K-4 Blank Pigtail/K-4 Connector Inspection.
a.
Continue paying out short leg electrode until K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection is forward of cable
roller chock assembly.
b.
Ensure K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection and fitting is wrapped with two layers rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side.
Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
c.
Ensure ten turns of 21-thread line lashing is around the K-4 blank pigtail and S-Cable to relieve
towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail.
4D-1-2.9
Streaming Coax Cable to Full Scope.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
a.
Continue paying out coax cable.
b.
Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock
assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with
SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4D-1-2.10
a.
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection.
Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable.
4D-1J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
b.
Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable
with 5/8-inch shackles.
c.
Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until
just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant
(Figure 4D-1A). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.
To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed
awash at all times.
d.
Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.
4D-1-2.11
a.
Stopping Off the Sweep.
Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
NOTE
Connecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be
accomplished simultaneously.
b.
Attach Cutters Mk 15 to towing pendant of equalizing towing bridle midway between 8-inch,
Type E snatch block and roller chock assembly.
c.
Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.
After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel
will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.
To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do
not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station
on the 01 level.
d.
Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to
cutters.
e.
Arm Cutters Mk 15.
f.
Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS
MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.
4D-1K
OPERATION
4D-1-2.12
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.
Minesweeping DC contactor or solid state pulse generator circuit breakers
shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or while cable is being pulsed.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic
minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep
electrician.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
a.
Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area.
b.
Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area.
c.
Minesweep electrician enters the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN
switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer.
d.
Drum area crew enters the drum area.
e.
Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtails
on electrical rubber matting.
f.
Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends.
g.
Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for
insulating cracks and breaks and makes repairs as required.
h.
Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box.
i.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
j.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to
terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive to negative) in the terminal box.
k.
Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.
l.
Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and
magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT
VOLTAGE.
m.
Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal
box.
4D-1L
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
n.
Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush
and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
o.
Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2
inch.
p.
Lower the terminal box cover.
q.
After connections have been made on the magnetic minesweep cable, ensure the port and
starboard sides of the drum area are secured with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs creating an
entrance barrier. Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.
4D-1-2.13
Departing the Drum Area.
a.
Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety
Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then
departs drum area.
b.
Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker.
4D-1-2.14
Towing the Sweep.
a.
Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck.
b.
Increase headway to sweep speed.
c.
Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4D-1F).
4D-1-2.15
a.
4D-1-3
4D-1-3.1
Maneuvering Instructions.
There are no inherent problems in maneuvering with straight tail sweeps.
RECOVERY.
Preparation.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
4D-1-3.2
Reentering the Drum Area.
Minesweeping DC contactor or solid state pulse generator circuit breakers
shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
a.
4D-1M
Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4D-1F. M Mk 5(a) Sweep Configuration
4D-1N
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
b.
Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN.
c.
Ensure HPU is secured.
d.
Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
e.
Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch
to the SAFE position.
f.
Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE
POSITION.
4D-1-3.3
Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
a.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
b.
Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position.
c.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg).
d.
Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
e.
Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box
while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to
the safety officer.
f.
Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when
handling cable to prevent burns.
The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of
cable.
NOTE
Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be
accomplished simultaneously.
g.
4D-1P
Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
h.
Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove inboard pigtail cable ends from terminal box
and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting.
i.
Close and secure, terminal box.
j.
Reinstall protective boots on inboard pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several
wraps of plastic electrical tape.
k.
Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum.
l.
Drum area crew departs drum area.
m.
If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE
signs. Check area for gear adrift.
n.
Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs
drum area.
4D-1-3.4
Cutter Removal.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
a.
Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can
be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable.
b.
Reman fantail.
c.
Request permission to recovery gear.
4D-1-3.5
Coax Cable Recovery.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When
possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the
drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered.
a.
Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit.
b.
Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as
they come within reach.
4D-1Q
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
c.
Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from
hardeyes. Install canvas chafing.
d.
Continue heaving in on coax section.
4D-1-3.6
Short Leg Electrode Recovery/Removal.
a.
Heave in on short leg electrode and remove electrode floats.
b.
Pay out coax cable, faking K-4 electrode on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a clear
work area.
c.
Remove CK/P insulating sleeve.
d.
Disconnect and remove K-4 electrode from K-4 blank pigtail.
e.
Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail:
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank pigtail at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide P/B insulating boot over K-4 blank pigtail.
(4)
Slide two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end of boot
about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate
clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4D-1G).
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
f.
4D-1-3.7
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers
of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side.
Continue heaving in on S section.
Long Leg Electrode Recovery.
NOTE
Floats may be left on the long leg electrode if desired.
a.
Heave in on long leg electrode and remove position buoy.
b.
Secure hold-back line to outboard end of long leg electrode and keep a strain on it while reeling
all of K-4 electrode onto magnetic cable drum. Secure long leg to drum with this line.
c.
Notify bridge all gear is clear.
4D-1-3.8
Securing Gear.
a.
Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS.
b.
Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.
4D-1R
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4D-1G. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted
c.
Ground isolate S-Cable, if cable is being stowed, with no further sweep exercises:
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around S terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug.
(4)
Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about
1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so
securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4D-1H).
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
d.
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers
of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side.
Using hold-back line, secure outboard end of S-Cable to drum.
4D-1S
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4D-1H. S-Cable Booted
4D-1T
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4D-2
M MK 5(A) MAGNETIC SWEEP (CONFIGURATION C)
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of
this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and
injury or death to personnel.
The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure
all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is
followed.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded
component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM
(3940-00-368-7551) (4)
Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM
(3940-00-368-7552)
Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342)
Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356) (3)
Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342)
(4)
Buoy, position, NM, with flagstaff (2050-00-272-2423)
Cable Assembly, electrode, K-4 (per Job Sheet 4A-6)
(1075-00-262-1980) (2)
Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping,
coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337)
Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, S
(per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) (2)
Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping,
CL (per Job Sheet 4A-4) (6150-01-517-9327)
Cable Assembly, outboard pigtail (6150-01-519-0147)
Clamp, hose, 1-9/16- to 2-1/2-inch
(4730-00-204-3491) (2)
Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460)
(2)
Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132)
(8)
Clip, wire rope, 5/16-inch, NM (4030-00-269-9761) (2)
Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-332-5834)
Flag, position buoy, red and black, 18- x 18-inch
(8345-00-233-4111)
Float, cellular rubber (1075-00-372-6128) (12)
Light, marker, distress (6230-00-067-5209) (2)
Line, securing (electrode float-center), 21-thread x
5-foot, single leg, manila (each end whipped) 1
Line, towing, position buoy, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot,
single leg, nylon (hardeye splice one end, other
end whipped) 1
Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) (8)
Pendant, position buoy, chafing, 5/16-inch x 5-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye one
end, other end whipped) 1
Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as
required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL)
(hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, preventer (CL), 1/2-inch x 5-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, preventer (CL), 2-1/2-inch x 86-foot, single
leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant Stopper (CL), 1/2-inch x 3- to 5-foot single
leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch
(5305-00-226-9204) (2)
See footnotes at end of table.
4D-2A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS (Continued)
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch
(5305-00-226-9206) (6)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM,
1/2-inch (4030-00-270-5482) (2)
5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (15)
Sleeve (CK/P) (5970-01-519-3184)
Sleeve (S/P) (5970-01-519-3176)
Swivel, link-to-link, 3/8-inch (4030-00-269-9767)
Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505)
(16)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949)
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652)
Electrician Mate Tool Kit
Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) *
Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251)
Hook, boat, 12-foot (2400-00-268-9252)
*
1
Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread)
(whipped each end)
Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range)
Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176)
Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572)
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb
Hazardous Material.
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4D-2-1
RIGGING.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
NOTE
The CL section is added to the S section for this sweep configuration.
4D-2-1.1
Preparation.
a.
Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
personnel for minesweeping operations.
b.
Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational
order.
4D-2-1.2
Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation.
a.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented
sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block
padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4D-2A).
b.
Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure
block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using
5/8-inch shackles.
4D-2-1.3
a.
4D-2B
Position Buoy Preparation.
Insert flagstaff with a red and black horizontally striped flag attached into socket on position buoy
attached to long leg. Attach distress marker light (Figure 4D-2B).
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4D-2A. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly
b.
Pass wire chafing pendant through tow hole in buoy. Secure pendant to position buoy with a
5/16-inch wire rope clip.
c.
Attach 3/8-inch link-to-link swivel to free end of pendant, using a 1/2-inch shackle.
d.
Connect hardeye of towing line to free end of 3/8-inch link-to-link swivel, using a 1/2-inch
shackle.
e.
Lead towing line outboard over taffrail and back aboard through cable roller chock assembly.
4D-2-1.4
a.
Electrode Floats.
Splice 5-foot (21-thread) pendant to both ends of each float.
4D-2C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4D-2B. Rigging Position Buoy
4D-2-1.5
K-4 Electrode Preparation.
To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewed in a canvas
chafing sleeve.
a.
Prepare K-4 electrode in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-6.
4D-2-1.6
CL-Cable Preparation for M Mk 5(a) (C Configuration).
a.
Lead a K-4 Electrode to the outboard end of the CL-Cable.
b.
Insulate CL/K-4 connection and fitting as follows:
4D-2D
(1)
Place inboard end of long leg K-4 electrode in vicinity of the CL-Cable connection.
(2)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
(3)
Connect the long leg K-4 electrode to the outboard CL-Cable using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x
1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers.
Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(4)
Wrap CL/K-4 connection and fittings with rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Apply
two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape, continuing tape several inches past the
connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
c.
Heave in on magnetic reel, stacking K-4 electrode until outboard end is clear to work on, and
position for streaming.
d.
Tape outboard electrode terminal lug with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black plastic tape and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
4D-2-1.7
Magnetic Cable Preparation for C Configuration - Attachment of Outboard Pigtail to
S-Cable.
a.
Lead S-Cable end aft on fantail and position by depressor instrumented sheave.
b.
Attach outboard pigtail to S-Cable. Insulate and waterproof the connection by installing S/P
insulating sleeve as follows (Figure 4D-2C):
(1)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(2)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P
insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity.
(3)
Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of outboard pigtail cable and two 2-1/2- to
5-1/2-inch hose clamps over S-Cable; slide clamps out of way.
(4)
Slip S/P insulating sleeve (small end first) over outboard pigtail and slide back out of way.
Figure 4D-2C. Outboard Pigtail to CA-1454
4D-2E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
(5)
Connect terminals of S and outboard pigtail cables using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch
cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure
terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each
cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(6)
Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/P insulating sleeve.
(7)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(8)
Slide S/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
(9)
Slide hose clamps over ends of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart
with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing
screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing several inches past the clamps on each side.
4D-2-2
STREAMING.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
4D-2-2.1
Streaming Preparation.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to streaming speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
d.
Request permission to stream gear.
4D-2-2.2
Streaming of Outboard (Long Leg) Electrode.
a.
Lead long leg electrode from magnetic cable drum CL side and out through the stationary cable
fairlead assembly, then out cable roller chock assembly.
b.
Ensure K-4 electrode outboard terminal lug is properly taped with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape, and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection. Ensure all
exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
c.
Pay out to 50 feet.
4D-2F
OPERATION
4D-2-2.3
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Attachment of Buoy and Floats.
a.
Attach first electrode float (Figure 4D-2D), then attach towing line of position buoy inboard of first
float.
b.
Turn distress marker lights on.
c.
Pay out electrode and launch position buoy.
d.
Continue paying out and attach four more floats seven feet apart (Figure 4D-2E).
e.
Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float.
Figure 4D-2D. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode
4D-2-2.4
Stopping Off CL-Cable.
a.
Pay out CL-Cable until CL preventer pendant is on deck.
b.
Stop paying out CL-Cable. Attach a 3- to 5-foot wire rope stopper pendant to preventer stocking
hardeye on CL-Cable (Figure 4D-2F) with a 5/8-inch shackle. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, secure
other end to port instrumented sheave padeye.
c.
Pay out CL-Cable until wire rope stopper pendant takes strain.
d.
Disconnect CL drum preventer pendant from CL-Cable (Figure 4D-2G).
4D-2-2.5
Attachment of S-Cable to CL-Cable.
a.
Pay out on magnetic cable, leading S-Cable and outboard pigtail to the free end of the
CL-Cable.
b.
Attach CL-Cable to S section outboard pigtail. Insulate and waterproof the connection by
installing an S/P insulating sleeve as follows (Figure 4D-2C):
(1)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(2)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P
insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity.
4D-2G
Figure 4D-2E. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4D-2H
OPERATION
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4D-2F. Preventer Stocking Attachment on CL-Cable
Figure 4D-2G. CL-Cable Drum Preventer Pendant
4D-2J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
(3)
Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over free end of outboard pigtail cable and two
2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over CL-Cable; slide clamps out of way.
(4)
Slip S/P insulating sleeve (small end first) over outboard pigtail and slide back out of way.
(5)
Connect terminals of CL and outboard pigtail using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap
screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure terminals
are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each cable;
then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(6)
Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/P insulating sleeve.
(7)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(8)
Slide S/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
(9)
Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with
outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing
screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
c.
Heave in on magnetic cable and disconnect wire rope stopper pendant from 6-foot preventer
stocking hardeye on CL-Cable (Figure 4D-2F). Secure hardeye to CL with tape.
d.
Continue streaming magnetic minesweeping cable until outboard short leg breakout and K-4
blank is on deck.
4D-2-2.6
Installation of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode.
To avoid damage to equipment, pay close attention when passing cable
through level wind.
a.
Continue streaming S-Cable, inspect for insulation breaks, inspect sleeves for watertight
integrity and condition of tape. Repair as required.
b.
Continued streaming S-Cable until outboard short leg breakout and K-4 blank pigtail is forward
of cable roller chock assembly.
c.
Remove boot from K-4 blank pigtail.
d.
Lead a K-4 electrode end to the K-4 blank pigtail.
4D-2K
OPERATION
e.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Attach K-4 electrode to K-4 blank pigtail (Figure 4D-2H). Insulate and waterproof the connection
by installing a CK/P insulating sleeve as follows:
(1)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(2)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the CK/P
insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity.
(3)
Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over large end of sleeve and two 3-1/16- to 4-inch
hose clamps over small end of sleeve.
(4)
Slip CK/P insulating sleeve over K-4 electrode and slide back out of way.
(5)
Connect terminals of K-4 electrode and K-4 blank pigtail using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x
1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers.
Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline
of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(6)
Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of CK/P insulating sleeve.
(7)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(8)
Slide CK/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
(9)
Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with
outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing
screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.
Figure 4D-2H. K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection
4D-2L
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
f.
Place ten turns of 21-thread line lashing around K-4 electrode and S-Cable to relieve towing
strain on K-4 blank pigtail.
g.
Heave in on magnetic cable until outboard end of short leg electrode is clear to work on, and
positioned for streaming.
h.
Tape the outboard end of K-4 electrode with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all
exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
4D-2-2.7
Streaming of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode.
a.
Ensure K-4 electrode outboard terminal lug is taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side.
Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
b.
Pay out 50 feet of the short leg electrode.
4D-2-2.8
Attachment of Short Leg Electrode Floats.
a.
Attach first electrode float (Figure 4D-2D).
b.
Continue paying out and attach four additional floats seven feet apart.
c.
Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float (Figure 4D-2E).
4D-2-2.9
K-4 Blank Pigtail/K-4 Connector Inspection.
a.
Continue paying out short leg electrode until K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection is forward of cable
roller chock assembly.
b.
Ensure K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection and fitting are wrapped with two layers rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side.
Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
c.
Ensure ten turns of 21-thread are secured around K-4 blank pigtail and S-Cable to relieve towing
strain on K-4 blank pigtail.
4D-2M
OPERATION
4D-2-2.10
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Streaming Coax Cable to Full Scope.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
To avoid damage to equipment, pay close attention when passing cable
through level wind.
a.
Continue paying out coax cable.
b.
Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock
assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with
SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4D-2-2.11
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection.
a.
Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable.
b.
Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable
with 5/8-inch shackles.
c.
Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until
just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant
(Figure 4D-2A). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.
To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed
awash at all times.
d.
Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.
4D-2-2.12
a.
Stopping Off the Sweep.
Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.
4D-2N
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
NOTE
Connecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be
accomplished simultaneously.
b.
Attach Cutters Mk 15 to towing pendant of equalizing towing bridle midway between 8-inch,
Type E snatch block and roller chock assembly.
c.
Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.
After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel
will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.
To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do
not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station
on the 01 level.
d.
Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to
cutters.
e.
Arm Cutters Mk 15.
f.
Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS
MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.
4D-2P
OPERATION
4D-2-2.13
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.
Minesweeping DC contactor or solid state pulse generator circuit breakers
shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or while cable is being pulsed.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic
minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep
electrician.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
a.
Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area.
b.
Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area.
c.
Minesweep electrician enters the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN
switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer.
d.
Drum area crew enters the drum area.
e.
Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtails
on electrical rubber matting.
f.
Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends.
g.
Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for
insulating cracks and breaks and make repairs as required.
h.
Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box.
i.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
j.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to
terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive to negative) in the terminal box.
k.
Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.
l.
Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and
magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT
VOLTAGE.
m.
Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal
box.
4D-2Q
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
n.
Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush
and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
o.
Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2
inch.
p.
Lower the terminal box cover.
q.
After connections have been made on the magnetic minesweep cable, ensure the port and
starboard sides of the drum area are secured with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs creating an
entrance barrier. Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.
4D-2-2.14
Departing the Drum Area.
a.
Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety
Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then
departs drum area.
b.
Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker.
4D-2-2.15
Towing the Sweep.
a.
Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck.
b.
Increase headway to sweep speed.
c.
Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4D-2J).
4D-2-2.16
a.
4D-2-3
4D-2-3.1
Maneuvering Instructions.
There are no inherent problems in maneuvering with straight tail sweeps.
RECOVERY.
Preparation.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
4D-2-3.2
Reentering the Drum Area.
Minesweeping DC contactor or solid state pulse generator circuit breakers
shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
a.
4D-2R
Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4D-2J. M Mk 5(a) Sweep (Configuration C)
4D-2S
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
b.
Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN.
c.
Ensure HPU is secured.
d.
Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
e.
Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch
to the SAFE position.
f.
Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE
POSITION.
4D-2-3.3
Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
a.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
b.
Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position.
c.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg).
d.
Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
e.
Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box
while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to
the safety officer.
f.
Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when
handling cable to prevent burns.
The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of
cable.
NOTE
Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be
accomplished simultaneously.
g.
4D-2T
Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
h.
Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove inboard pigtail cable ends from terminal box
and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting.
i.
Close and secure, terminal box.
j.
Reinstall protective boots on inboard pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several
wraps of plastic electrical tape.
k.
Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum.
l.
Drum area crew departs drum area.
m.
If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE
signs. Check area for gear adrift.
n.
Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs
drum area.
4D-2-3.4
Cutter Removal.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
a.
Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can
be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable.
b.
Reman fantail.
c.
Request permission to recovery gear.
4D-2-3.5
Coax Cable Recovery.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When
possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the
drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered.
a.
Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit.
b.
Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as
they come within reach.
c.
Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from
hardeyes. Install canvas chafing.
d.
Continue heaving in on coax section.
4D-2U
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4D-2-3.6
OPERATION
Short Leg Electrode Recovery/Removal.
To avoid damage to equipment, pay close attention when passing cable
through level wind.
a.
Heave in on short leg electrode and remove electrode floats.
b.
Pay out coax cable, faking K-4 electrode on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a clear
work area.
c.
Remove CK/P insulating sleeve.
d.
Disconnect and remove K-4 electrode from K-4 blank pigtail.
e.
Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail:
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank pigtail area making certain that thickness around
wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot (Figure 4D-2K).
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide P/B insulating boot over terminal lug.
Figure 4D-2K. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted
4D-2V
OPERATION
(4)
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Slide two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end of boot
about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate
clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
f.
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers
of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side.
Continue heaving in on S section.
NOTE
If another M Mk 5(a) configuration C sweep streaming is anticipated,
proceed with paragraph 4D-2-3.7 and then paragraph 4D-2-3.9; if not,
proceed with paragraphs 4D-2-3.8 through 4D-2-3.9.
4D-2-3.7
Long Leg Electrode Recovery.
NOTE
Floats may be left on the long leg electrode if desired.
a.
Heave in on long leg electrode and remove position buoy.
b.
Secure a hold-back line to outboard end of long leg electrode.
c.
Keep a strain on hold-back line as long leg electrode is being reeled onto drum.
d.
Secure long leg electrode to drum with hold-back line.
e.
Notify bridge all gear is clear.
4D-2-3.8
Disconnecting CL-Cable from S-Cable.
a.
Heave in on magnetic cable until CL to S-Cable pigtail connection is just aft of magnetic cable
drum.
b.
Stop off CL-Cable by attaching 1/2-inch x 5-foot stopper pendant to 6-foot preventer stocking
hardeye on CL-Cable with a 5/8-inch shackle. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, secure other end to
port instrumented sheave padeye.
c.
Pay out magnetic cable until the stopper pendant takes a strain.
d.
Remove inboard pigtail from CL-Cable and S-Cable.
e.
Ground isolate S-Cable, if cable is being stowed, with no further sweep exercise:
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around S-Cable terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug.
4D-2W
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
(4)
OPERATION
Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about
1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so
securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4D-2L).
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
f.
Using hold-back line, secure outboard end of S-Cable to drum.
g.
Ground isolate inboard end of CL-Cable:
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around CL terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug.
Figure 4D-2L. S- or CL-Cable Booted
4D-2X
OPERATION
(4)
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about
1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so
securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4D-2L).
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
h.
Secure drum preventer pendant to CL-Cable (Figure 4D-2G). Heave in and remove 1/2-inch x
5-foot wire rope stopper pendant.
i.
Secure a hold-back line to the outboard end of the S-Cable.
j.
Heave in on magnetic cable recovering the CL and S-Cable.
k.
Secure S-Cable to drum with hold-back line.
l.
Continue recovering CL-Cable and K-4 cable.
m.
Remove floats and position buoy.
n.
When all gear is clear of water, notify bridge all gear is clear.
o.
Detach K-4 electrode from CL-Cable.
p.
Ground isolate outboard end of CL-Cable:
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around CL terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug.
(4)
Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about
1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so
securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4D-2L).
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
q.
Secure a hold-back line to the outboard end of the CL-Cable.
r.
Heave in on CL-Cable and secure CL-Cable to drum with hold-back line.
s.
Notify bridge all gear is clear.
4D-2Y
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4D-2-3.9
OPERATION
Securing Gear.
a.
Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS.
b.
Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.
4D-2Z
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4D-3
M MK 6(A) MAGNETIC SWEEP (DIVERTED LOOP)
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of
this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and
injury or death to personnel.
The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure
all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is
followed.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded
component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Block, roller, quarter (type A), NM, with swivel eye
(3940-00-722-8995)
Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM
(3940-00-368-7551) (4)
Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM
(3940-00-368-7552)
Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342)
Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356)
Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342)
(4)
Cable Assembly, electrode, K-4 (per Job Sheet 4A-6)
(1075-00-262-1980) (2)
Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping,
coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337)
Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping,
S (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327)
Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM
(with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906)
Clamp, hose, 1-9/16- to 2-1/2-inch
(4730-00-204-3491) (2)
Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460)
(2)
Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132)
(4)
Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-265-0677)
Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-332-5834) (2)
Float, type O, size 1, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-3)
(1075-01-371-0568)
Float, cellular rubber (1075-00-372-6128) (12)
Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986)
Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye
(4030-00-290-6420)
Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet
4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280)
Line, securing (electrode float-center), 21-thread x
5-foot, single leg, manila (each end whipped) 1
Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon,
hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1
Lug, lamitex (1075-00-372-6221)
Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) (6)
Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as
required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL)
(hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM,
wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, wire
rope (LHL) (hardeye each end) 1
See footnotes at end of table.
4D-3A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS (Continued)
Pendant, roller block, 2-1/2-inch x 3-foot, single leg,
nylon (hardeye each end) 1
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch
(5305-00-226-9204) (4)
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch
(5305-00-226-9208) (2)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM,
5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (20)
3/4-inch (4030-00-270-5484)
7/8-inch (4030-00-270-5485)
1-inch (4030-00-270-5486)
Sleeve (CK/P) (5970-01-519-3184)
Stop, T-bar, NM (1075-01-233-4952)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye
outboard end, inboard end whipped)
(4010-01-291-1611)
Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505)
(12)
Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as
required)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949)
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit,
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652)
Chain, safety (2) (4010-00-599-6737)
Electrician Mate Tool Kit
Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) *
Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251)
Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252)
Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643)
Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread)
(whipped each end) 1
*
1
Marline (4020-00-240-2185)
Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range)
Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) *
Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176)
Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021)
Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572)
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-614-6185)
Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb
Hazardous Material.
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4D-3-1
RIGGING.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
4D-3-1.1
Preparation.
a.
Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
personnel for minesweeping operations.
b.
Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational
order.
4D-3-1.2
Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential
Float, Kite and Sweep Wire Preparation.
For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on
water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required.
Total length cannot exceed 20 feet.
a.
4D-3B
Prepare size 1 float in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3 (moored configuration) utilizing 10-foot
float pendants.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
b.
Prepare size 1 kite as an otter (port configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1.
c.
Prepare port sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.
4D-3-1.3
a.
b.
4D-3-1.4
O-Type Components Preparation.
Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 to Otter.
(1)
Engage port sweep wire drum.
(2)
Attach 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain, with long link in the middle, between sweep wire and 60-foot
(LHL) otter pendant, using 5/8-inch shackles. Five interlocking 5/8-inch shackles may be
used in lieu of chain. Reel in on port sweep wire drum.
(3)
Lead (LHL) otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave; then through sweep wire
roller chock assembly.
(4)
Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between the otter bridle and 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant
(Figure 4D-3A).
(5)
Connect 10-foot float pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle.
Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position.
(1)
Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter.
(2)
Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle
is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4D-3B).
(3)
Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and
secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion.
(4)
Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane
whip.
(5)
Rotate crane forward.
(6)
Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation.
a.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented
sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block
padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4D-3C).
b.
Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure
block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using
5/8-inch shackles.
4D-3-1.5
a.
Electrode Floats.
Splice a 5-foot (21-thread) pendant to both ends of each float.
4D-3C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4D-3A. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration)
4D-3-1.6
K-4 Electrode Preparation.
To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewed in a canvas
chafing sleeve.
a.
Prepare K-4 electrode in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-6.
4D-3-1.7
Long Leg Preparation.
a.
Lead a K-4 electrode to the outboard end of the S-Cable.
b.
Insulate S/K-4 connection and fitting as follows:
4D-3D
(1)
Place inboard end of long leg K-4 electrode in vicinity of the S-Cable connection.
(2)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(3)
Connect the long leg K-4 electrode to the outboard S-Cable using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x
1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers.
Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(4)
Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Apply two
layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape, continuing tape several inches past the
connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4D-3B. Otter in Ready Release Position
c.
Heave in on magnetic reel, stacking K-4 electrode until outboard end is clear to work on, and
position for streaming.
d.
Install a lamitex lug to the long leg electrode using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch cap screws,
two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
e.
Tape outboard electrode terminal lug with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black plastic tape and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion (Figure
4D-3D).
f.
Attach a 1-inch shackle, pin inboard, at one end of roller block pendant. Connect roller block
pendant to quarter roller block using a 5/8-inch shackle.
g.
Connect quarter roller block and pendant to lamitex lug using a 7/8-inch shackle.
4D-3E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4D-3C. Equalizing Towing Bridle
4D-3-2
LAUNCHING/STREAMING.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
NOTE
Sweep gear for this configuration is streamed to port.
4D-3F
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4D-3D. Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Diversion Chain
4D-3-2.1
Streaming Preparations.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
4D-3-2.2
Launching/Streaming O-Type gear.
a.
Ensure ship’s speed is 4 knots.
b.
Request permission to put gear to the rail.
c.
Ensure that nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4D-3E).
d.
Lead float nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock.
e.
Tend line to bitt.
f.
Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, and train outboard to position
float at rail.
4D-3G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4D-3E. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)
4D-3H
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, install batteries and verify that
the photo cell is working.
g.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.
h.
Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and float pendant and nose line are clear of
ship and obstructions.
i.
Connect float pendant(s), if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the
outboard corner of otter.
j.
Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE.
k.
Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook
securing otter (Figure 4D-3B). Launch float, slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.
4D-3-2.3
Tripping the Otter.
a.
Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes strain.
b.
Pay out sweep wire under power until long link of 6-foot chain is just outboard of sweep wire
roller chock assembly.
c.
Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until
the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope) and check for proper diversion.
d.
Return and restow articulated stern crane.
4D-3-2.4
Streaming of Outboard (Long Leg) Electrode.
a.
Lead long leg electrode from magnetic cable drum and out through the level wind assembly,
then out cable roller chock assembly.
b.
Mount quarter roller block on sweep wire and mouse quarter roller block pin.
c.
Ensure K-4 electrode terminal lug is properly taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection. Ensure all exposed
metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
d.
Pay out to 50 feet.
4D-3-2.5
Attachment of Electrode Floats.
a.
Attach first electrode float (Figure 4D-3F).
b.
Pay out electrode.
c.
Continue paying out and attach four more floats seven feet apart (Figure 4D-3G).
d.
Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float.
4D-3-2.6
S/K-4 Connector Inspection.
a.
Continue paying out long leg electrode until S/K-4 connector is forward of cable roller chock
assembly.
b.
Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction
tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed
metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
4D-3J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4D-3F. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode
c.
Increase ship speed as required to enhance magnetic cable streaming.
d.
Pay out S-Cable to form catenary before veering sweep wire.
e.
Disengage sweep wire drum. Veer sweep wire using hydraulic brake.
f.
Simultaneously, veer sweep wire and pay out magnetic cable while maintaining catenary.
g.
Keep otter working by veering sweep wire slowly. The magnetic tail should pay out to a longer
length than the sweep wire so quarter roller block rides at the diversion point on the sweep wire.
4D-3-2.7
Installation of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode.
a.
Continue streaming S-Cable. Inspect for insulation breaks, inspect sleeves for watertight
integrity and condition of tape. Repair as required.
b.
Continue streaming S-Cable until outboard short leg breakout and K-4 blank pigtail is forward of
cable roller chock assembly.
c.
Remove boot from K-4 blank pigtail.
d.
Lead a K-4 electrode end to the K-4 blank pigtail.
e.
Attach K-4 electrode to K-4 blank pigtail (Figure 4D-3H). Insulate and waterproof the connection
by installing a CK/P insulating sleeve as follows:
4D-3K
(1)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(2)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the CK/P
insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity.
(3)
Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over large end of sleeve and two 3-1/16- to 4-inch
hose clamps over small end of sleeve.
(4)
Slip CK/P insulating sleeve over K-4 electrode and slide back out of way.
Figure 4D-3G. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4D-3L
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4D-3H. K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection
(5)
Connect terminals of K-4 electrode and K-4 blank pigtail using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x
1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers.
Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline
of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(6)
Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of CK/P insulating sleeve.
(7)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(8)
Slide CK/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
(9)
Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with
outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing
screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
4D-3M
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
f.
Place ten turns of 21-thread line lashing around K-4 electrode and S-Cable to relieve towing
strain on K-4 blank pigtail.
g.
Heave in on magnetic cable until outboard end of short leg electrode is clear to work on and
positioned for streaming.
h.
Tape the outboard end of K-4 electrode with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all
exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
4D-3-2.8
Streaming of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode.
a.
Ensure K-4 electrode outboard terminal lug is taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side.
Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
b.
Pay out 50 feet of the short leg electrode.
4D-3-2.9
Attachment of Short Leg Electrode Floats.
a.
Attach first electrode float (Figure 4D-3F).
b.
Continue paying out and attach four additional floats seven feet apart.
c.
Attach sixth (inboard float end-to-end with fifth float (Figure 4D-3G).
4D-3-2.10
K-4 Blank Pigtail/K-4 Connector Inspection.
a.
Continue paying out short leg electrode until K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection is forward of cable
roller chock assembly.
b.
Ensure K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection and fitting is wrapped with two layers rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layer of half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Continued tape several inches past the connection on each side.
Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
c.
Ensure ten turns of 21-thread line lashing is around the K-4 blank pigtail and S-Cable to relieve
towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail.
4D-3-2.11
Streaming Coax Cable to Full Scope.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
a.
Continue paying out coax cable. When K-4 electrode to K-4 blank connection is awash, cast
free the 21-thread securing line.
b.
Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock
assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with
SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4D-3N
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4D-3-2.12
a.
OPERATION
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection.
Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable.
To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed
awash at all times.
b.
Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable
with 5/8-inch shackles.
c.
Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until
just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant
(Figure 4D-3C). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.
d.
Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.
4D-3-2.13
Stopping Off the Sweep.
Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged.
a.
Stop veering sweep wire when the four red bands (1,200 feet) are at sweep wire roller chock.
Engage pawl and secure sweep wire drum.
b.
Minesweep electrician request permission to enter the drum area with drum area crew.
c.
Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
NOTE
Connecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be
accomplished simultaneously.
d.
Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4D-3J) back-to-back to sweep wire aft of instrumented fairlead
sheave. Attach Cutters Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing bridle midway
between 8-inch Type E snatch block and roller chock assembly.
e.
Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.
4D-3P
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4D-3J. Wedge Stop Placement
4D-3Q
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel
will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.
To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do
not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station
on the 01 level.
f.
Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to
cutters.
g.
Arm Cutters Mk 15.
h.
Safety Observer reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS MK 15 ARE
ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.
4D-3-2.14
Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.
Minesweeping DC contactor or solid state pulse generator circuit breakers
shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic
minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep
electrician.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
a.
Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area.
b.
Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area.
c.
Minesweep electrician enter the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN
switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer.
d.
Drum area crew enters the drum area.
4D-3R
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
e.
Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtails
on electrical rubber matting.
f.
Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends.
g.
Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for
insulating cracks and breaks and makes repairs as required.
h.
Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box.
i.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
j.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to
terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive to negative) in the terminal box.
k.
Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.
l.
Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and
magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT
VOLTAGE.
m.
Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal
box.
n.
Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush
and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
o.
Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2
inch.
p.
Lower the terminal box cover.
q.
After connections have been made on the magnetic minesweep cable, ensure the port and
starboard sides of the drum area are secured with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs creating an
entrance barrier. Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.
4D-3-2.15
Departing the Drum Area.
a.
Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety
Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then
departs drum area.
b.
Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker.
4D-3-2.16
Towing the Sweep.
a.
Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck.
b.
Increase headway to sweep speed.
c.
Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves.
d.
Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4D-3K).
4D-3S
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4D-3K. M Mk 6(a) Sweep Configuration
4D-3T
OPERATION
4D-3-2.17
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Maneuvering Instructions.
a.
Turns should normally be made toward gear, port or starboard, and may be up to 180 degrees.
The sweep wire may sag after ship has turned about 60 degrees, with the possibility that it may
foul or suffer damage. To avoid this danger, sweep wire should be shortened in to about 75
fathoms during the turn, and veered again to full scope upon completion of turn. If chafing is
imminent, rudder should be eased.
b.
Speeds in excess of 6 knots are not recommended due to the danger of damage to magnetic
cable (Table 4D-3A).
Table 4D-3A. Sweep Wire Tensions
4D-3-3
4D-3-3.1
SPEED (KNOTS)
CABLE TENSION (LB)
6
4,450
8
11,600
RECOVERY.
Preparation.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
4D-3-3.2
Reentering the Drum Area.
Minesweeping DC contactor or solid state pulse generator circuit breakers
shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
a.
Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured.
b.
Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN.
c.
Ensure HPU is secured.
d.
Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
e.
Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch
to the SAFE position.
f.
Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE
POSITION.
4D-3U
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4D-3-3.3
OPERATION
Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
a.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
b.
Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position.
c.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg).
d.
Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
e.
Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box
while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to
the safety officer.
f.
Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when
handling cable to prevent burns.
The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of
cable.
NOTE
Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be
accomplished simultaneously.
g.
Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box.
h.
Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove inboard pigtail cable ends from terminal box
and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting.
i.
Close and secure, terminal box.
j.
Reinstall protective boots on inboard pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several
wraps of plastic electrical tape.
k.
Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum.
l.
Drum area crew departs drum area.
4D-3V
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
m.
If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE
signs. Check area for gear adrift.
n.
Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs
drum area.
4D-3-3.4
Cutter Removal.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
a.
Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can
be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable.
b.
Reman fantail.
c.
Request permission to recovery gear.
4D-3-3.5
Coax Cable Recovery.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When
possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the
drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered.
a.
Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit.
b.
Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as
they come within reach.
c.
Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from
hardeyes. Install canvas chafing.
d.
Continue heaving in on coax section.
4D-3-3.6
Short Leg Electrode Recovery/Removal.
a.
Heave in on short leg electrode and remove electrode floats.
b.
Pay out coax cable faking K-4 electrode on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a clear
work area.
c.
Remove CK/P insulating sleeve.
d.
Disconnect and remove K-4 electrode from K-4 blank pigtail.
4D-3W
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
e.
OPERATION
Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail:
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank pigtail nut area making certain that thickness around
wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot (Figure 4D-3L).
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide P/B insulating boot over terminal lug.
(4)
Slide two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end of boot
about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate
clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
f.
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers
of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side.
Continue heaving in on S section.
Figure 4D-3L. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted
4D-3X
OPERATION
4D-3-3.7
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Long Leg Electrode Recovery.
NOTE
Floats may be left on the long leg electrode if desired.
a.
Heave in on long leg electrode and sweep wire.
b.
When the quarter roller block and T-bar stop are outboard of the cable roller chock assembly,
stop the sweep wire drum.
c.
Remove quarter roller block from diversion chain on sweep wire. Remove T-bar stop.
d.
Ease in magnetic cable until quarter roller block is just forward of cable roller chock assembly.
Remove quarter roller block and pendant from outboard end of K-4 electrode.
e.
Secure hold-back line to outboard end of long leg electrode and keep a strain on it while reeling
all of K-4 electrode onto the magnetic cable drum. Secure long leg to the drum with this line.
4D-3-3.8
O-Type Gear Recovery.
a.
Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane.
b.
Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle.
c.
Heave in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock.
d.
Disengage sweep wire drum.
4D-3-3.9
Float Recovery.
a.
Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard.
b.
Recover float pendant with a boat hook.
c.
Heave in on float pendant until float nose line is within reach.
d.
Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane and heave in until float is in lifting position
under crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail
on float.
e.
Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook.
f.
Remove emergency recovery pendant.
g.
Stow Float.
4D-3-3.10
Otter Recovery.
a.
Train appropriate articulated stern crane outboard.
b.
Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter.
c.
Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4D-3B) or stowage rack on fantail.
d.
Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead.
e.
Return and restow articulated stern crane.
f.
Notify bridge all gear is clear.
4D-3-3.11
Securing Gear.
a.
Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS.
b.
Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.
4D-3Y
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
c.
OPERATION
Ground isolate S-Cable if cable is being stowed with no further sweep exercises:
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around S terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug.
(4)
Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about
1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so
securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4D-3M).
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
d.
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers
of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side.
Using hold-back line, secure outboard end of S-Cable to drum.
Figure 4D-3M. S-Cable Booted
4D-3Z
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4D-4
M MK 6(H) MAGNETIC SWEEP (DIVERTED LOOP)
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of
this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and
injury or death to personnel.
The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure
all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is
followed.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded
component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Block, roller, quarter (type A), NM, with swivel eye
(3940-00-722-8995)
Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM
(3940-00-368-7551) (4)
Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM
(3940-00-368-7552)
Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342)
Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356) (3)
Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342)
(4)
Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping,
coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337)
Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping,
CL (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327)
Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, S
(per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327)
Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM
(with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906)
Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460)
(6)
Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132)
(6)
Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-265-0677)
Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-332-5834) (2)
Float, type O, size 1, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-3)
(1075-01-371-0568)
Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye
(4030-00-290-6420)
Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986)
Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet
4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280)
Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon,
hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1
Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313)
(12)
Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as
required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL)
(hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM,
wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, wire
rope (LHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, preventer (CL), 1/2-inch x 5-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, preventer (CL), 2-1/2-inch x 86-foot, single
leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, stopper (CL), 1-1/2-inch x 3- to 5-foot, single
leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1
See footnotes at end of table.
4D-4A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS (Continued)
Pendant, towing (TJ), 2-1/2-inch x 3-foot, single leg,
nylon (hardeye each end) 1
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch
(5305-00-226-9206) (6)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM,
5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (27)
3/4-inch (4030-00-270-5484)
Sleeve (S/P) (5970-01-519-3176) (3)
Stop, T-bar, NM (1075-01-233-4952)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard
end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611)
Towing Jumper TJ (1075-00-732-1791)
Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505)
(20)
Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as
required)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949)
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652)
Chain, safety (4010-00-599-6737)
Electrician Mate Tool Kit
Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) *
Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251)
Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252)
Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643)
Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread)
(whipped each end) (2) 1
*
1
Megohmmeter, 500 Vdc
Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range)
Paint, enamel, blue (TT-E-516) *
Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176)
Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021)
Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572)
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb
Hazardous Material.
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4D-4-1
RIGGING.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
4D-4-1.1
Preparation.
a.
Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
personnel for minesweeping operations.
b.
Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational
order.
4D-4-1.2
Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential
Float, Kite, and Sweep Wire Preparation.
For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on
water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required.
Total length cannot exceed 20 feet.
a.
4D-4B
Prepare size 1 float in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3 (moored configuration) utilizing 10-foot
float pendants.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
b.
Prepare size 1 kite as an otter (port configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1.
c.
Prepare port sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.
4D-4-1.3
a.
b.
O-Type Component Preparation.
Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 to Otter.
(1)
Engage port sweep wire drum.
(2)
Attach 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain, with long link in the middle, between sweep wire and 60-foot
(LHL) otter pendant, using 5/8-inch shackles. Five interlocking 5/8-inch shackles may be
used in lieu of chain. Reel in on port sweep wire drum.
(3)
Lead (LHL) otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave; then through sweep wire
roller chock assembly.
(4)
Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between the otter bridle and 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant
(Figure 4D-4A).
(5)
Connect float pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle.
Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position.
(1)
Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter.
(2)
Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle
is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4D-4B).
Figure 4D-4A. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration)
4D-4C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4D-4B. Otter in Ready Release Position
4D-4D
(3)
Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and
secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion.
(4)
Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane
whip.
(5)
Rotate crane forward.
(6)
Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.
OPERATION
4D-4-1.4
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation.
a.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented
sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block
padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4D-4C).
b.
Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure
block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using
5/8-inch shackles.
4D-4-1.5
Towing Jumper Assembly TJ.
a.
Remove long leg electrode from S-Cable (if attached).
b.
Bring end of S-Cable and end of CL-Cable off drum, pass them through cable roller chock
assembly, and prepare the TJ towing jumper for connection in accordance with Figure 4D-4D.
Figure 4D-4C. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly
4D-4E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4D-4D. TJ Jumper Assembly - Diversion Rigging for M Mk 6(h) Sweep Configuration
4D-4F
OPERATION
c.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Make the S/TJ and CL/TJ connections as follows:
(1)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(2)
Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of TJ cable and two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch
hose clamps over the ends of the S- and CL-Cable and slide out of the way.
(3)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P
insulating sleeves to aid in installing the sleeves and to increase watertight integrity.
(4)
Slip S/P insulating sleeve small end first, over the pigtails and slide back out of the way.
(5)
Connect each end terminal and secure with two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws,
two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers (Figure 4D-4E). Torque
nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. Make certain end terminals are properly oriented so the contact area of
each terminal is at a longitudinal centerline of both cables.
(6)
Wrap a couple of layers of dry rags over the cap screw and nuts after connecting the end
terminals together and secure with electrical tape. Do not exceed the inside diameter of
the S/P sleeve.
(7)
Slide the S/P sleeves over the connections and position evenly on terminal barrels.
Figure 4D-4E. Rubber Insulating Sleeve
4D-4G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Excessive tightening of sleeve or boot clamps will press a permanent
groove around the lug barrels or damage the insulating sleeve and should
be avoided.
(8)
Slide clamps over ends of S/P sleeves and position clamps (Figure 4D-4E) and tighten
clamps evenly and firmly.
(9)
Apply two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing rubber insulating tape starting
approximately 2 inches before and ending 2 inches after the insulated sleeve.
(10) Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape; then apply two layers of
half-lapped friction tape.
d.
4D-4-2
Attach one end of 3-foot TJ towing pendant to towing tab on towing jumper with a 5/8-inch
shackle, and other end to quarter roller block with a 5/8-inch shackle.
LAUNCHING/STREAMING.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
NOTE
Sweep gear for this configuration is streamed to port.
4D-4-2.1
Streaming Preparations.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
4D-4-2.2
Launching/Streaming O Type Gear.
a.
Ensure ship's speed is 4 knots.
b.
Request permission to put gear to the rail.
c.
Ensure that nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4D-4F).
d.
Lead float nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock.
e.
Tend line to bitt.
f.
Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, and train outboard to position
float at rail.
4D-4H
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4D-4F. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)
4D-4J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, install batteries and verify that
the photo cell is working.
g.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.
h.
Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and float pendant and nose line are clear of
ship and obstructions.
i.
Connect float pendant(s), if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the
outboard corner of otter.
j.
Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE.
k.
Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook
securing otter (Figure 4D-4B). Launch float, slack aft, and cast nose line clear of ship.
4D-4-2.3
Tripping the Otter.
a.
Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes a strain.
b.
Pay out sweep wire under power until the long link of 6-foot chain is just outboard of sweep wire
roller chock assembly.
c.
Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until
the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope) and check for proper diversion.
d.
Mount quarter roller block (attached to 3-foot and TJ towing tab) on sweep wire (Figure 4D-4D).
Mouse roller block pin.
e.
Return and restow articulated stern crane.
4D-4-2.4
Paying Out CL-Cable and S-Cable.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
a.
Increase ship’s speed as required to enhance magnetic cable streaming.
b.
Pay out S-Cable and CL-Cable together until catenary is formed before veering sweep wire.
c.
Pay out all cables (S and CL) until CL preventer pendant is on deck.
Any maneuvering of the ship during this critical period of streaming
operation may foul the gear.
d.
4D-4K
Stop paying out magnetic cables and sweep wire, then attach a 3- to 5-foot wire rope stopper
pendant to preventer stocking hardeye on CL-Cable (Figure 4D-4G) with a 5/8-inch shackle.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, secure other end to port instrumented sheave padeye.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4D-4G. Preventer Stocking Attachment on CL-Cable
e.
Pay out CL-Cable until wire rope stopper pendant takes strain.
f.
Disconnect CL drum preventer pendant from CL-Cable. Using PPE per MSDS, mark S-Cable
for CL-Cable reattachment point (Figure 4D-4H).
Figure 4D-4H. CL-Cable Drum Preventer Pendant
4D-4L
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4D-4-2.5
OPERATION
Short Leg Electrode Removal (If Necessary).
a.
Adjust rate of pay out of magnetic cable to maintain catenary.
b.
Remove lashings from short leg electrode and S-Cable (if attached).
c.
Rotate drum, faking K-4 electrode (if attached) on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a
clear work area.
d.
Disconnect inboard end of K-4 electrode from K-4 blank pigtail. Replace cap screws and nuts in
K-4 electrode end fitting (if attached).
e.
Remove K-4 blank pigtail boot (if attached in place of the K-4 electrode).
4D-4-2.6
Attachment of CL-Cable to K-4 Blank Pigtail.
a.
Remove K-4 blank pigtail boot (if attached in place of K-4 electrode).
b.
Attach CL-Cable to free end of K-4 blank pigtail section of coax cable. Insulate and waterproof
the connection by installing an insulating sleeve as follows (Figure 4D-4E):
(1)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(2)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P
insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity.
(3)
Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over free end of K-4 blank pigtail and two 2-1/2- to
5-1/2-inch hose clamps over CL-Cable; slide clamps out of way.
(4)
Connect terminals of CL and K-4 blank pigtail cables using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch
cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure
terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each
cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(5)
Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/P insulating sleeve.
(6)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(7)
Slide S/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
(8)
Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with
outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing
screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(9)
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
c.
Heave in on magnetic cable and disconnect wire rope stopper pendant from 6-foot preventer
stocking hardeye on CL-Cable. Secure hardeye to CL with tape.
d.
Place ten turns of 21-thread line lashing around K-4 blank pigtail and coax cable to relieve
towing strain on K-4 blank.
4D-4M
OPERATION
4D-4-2.7
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Streaming Coax Cable to Full Scope.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
a.
Continue paying out coax cable until coax/S and K-4 blank/pigtail connections are forward of
cable roller chock assembly.
b.
Ensure all connections are adequately insulated to be moisture-free. Wrap connections and
fitting with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of
half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape
several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to
reduce corrosion.
c.
Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock
assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with
SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4D-4-2.8
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection.
a.
Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable.
b.
Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable
with 5/8-inch shackles.
c.
Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until
just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant
(Figure 4D-4C). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.
To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed
awash at all times.
d.
4D-4-2.9
Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.
Stopping Off the Sweep.
Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged.
a.
Stop veering sweep wire when the four blue bands (1,056 feet) are at the sweep wire roller
chock. Engage pawl and secure sweep wire drum.
b.
Minesweep electrician request permission to enter the drum area with drum area crew.
c.
Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.
4D-4N
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
NOTE
Connecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be
accomplished simultaneously.
d.
Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4D-4J) back-to-back to sweep wire aft of instrumented fairlead
sheave. Attach Cutters Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing bridle midway
between 8 inch, Type E snatch block and roller chock assembly.
e.
Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.
After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel
will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.
To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do
not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station
on the 01 level.
f.
Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to
cutters.
g.
Arm Cutters Mk 15.
h.
Safety Observer reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS MK 15 ARE
ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.
4D-4P
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4D-4J. Wedge Stop Placement
4D-4Q
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4D-4-2.10
OPERATION
Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.
Minesweep cable must satisfactorily pass meggering test before pulsing.
Minesweeping DC contactor or solid state pulse generator circuit breakers
shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic
minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep
electrician.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
a.
Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area.
b.
Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area.
c.
Minesweep electrician enters the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN
switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer.
d.
Drum area crew enters the drum area.
e.
Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends or inboard pigtails
on electrical rubber matting.
f.
Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for
insulating cracks and breaks and makes repairs as required.
g.
Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends.
h.
Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box.
i.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
j.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to
terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive to negative) in the terminal box.
k.
Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.
l.
Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and
magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT
VOLTAGE.
m.
Conduct meggering test. Refer to PMS.
4D-4R
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
n.
Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal
box.
o.
Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush
and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft lb.
p.
Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2
inch.
q.
Lower the terminal box cover.
r.
After connections have been made on the magnetic minesweep cable, ensure the port and
starboard sides of the drum area are secured with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs creating an
entrance barrier. Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.
4D-4-2.11
Departing the Drum Area.
a.
Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety
Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then
departs drum area.
b.
Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker.
4D-4-2.12
Towing the Sweep.
a.
Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck.
b.
Increase headway to sweep speed.
c.
Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves.
d.
Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4D-4K).
4D-4-2.13
Maneuvering Instructions.
a.
Turns should normally be made toward gear and may be up to 180 degrees. The sweep wire
may sag after ship has turned about 60 degrees, with the possibility that it may foul or suffer
damage. To avoid this danger, sweep wire should be shortened in to about 75 fathoms during
the turn, and veered again to full scope upon completion of turn. If chafing is imminent, rudder
should be eased.
b.
Speeds in excess of 6 knots are not recommended due to the danger of damage to magnetic
cable (Table 4D-4A).
Table 4D-4A. Sweep Wire Tensions
SPEED (KNOTS)
CABLE TENSION (LB)
6
4,450
8
11,600
4D-4S
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4D-4K. M Mk 6(h) Sweep Configuration
4D-4T
OPERATION
4D-4-3
4D-4-3.1
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
RECOVERY.
Preparation.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
4D-4-3.2
Reentering the Drum Area.
Minesweeping DC contactor or solid state pulse generator circuit breakers
shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
a.
Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured.
b.
Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN.
c.
Ensure HPU is secured.
d.
Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
e.
Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch
to the SAFE position.
f.
Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE
POSITION.
4D-4-3.3
Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
a.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
b.
Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position.
c.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg).
4D-4U
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
d.
Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
e.
Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box
while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to
the safety officer.
f.
Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when
handling cable to prevent burns.
NOTE
The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of
cable.
Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be
accomplished simultaneously.
g.
Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box.
h.
Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove inboard pigtail cable ends from terminal box
and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting.
i.
Close and secure, terminal box.
j.
Reinstall protective boots on inboard pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several
wraps of plastic electrical tape.
k.
Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum.
l.
Drum area crew departs drum area.
m.
If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE
signs. Check area for gear adrift.
n.
Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs
drum area.
4D-4-3.4
Cutter Removal.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
a.
Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can
be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable.
b.
Reman fantail.
c.
Request permission to recovery gear.
4D-4V
OPERATION
4D-4-3.5
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Coax Cable Recovery.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When
possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the
drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered.
a.
Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit.
b.
Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as
they come within reach.
c.
Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from
hardeyes. Install canvas chafing.
d.
Continue heaving in on coax section.
4D-4-3.6
Disconnecting CL-Cable From K-4 Blank Pigtail Cable.
a.
Reel in simultaneously the sweep wire and magnetic cable until CL to K-4 blank pigtail
connection is just aft of magnetic cable drum. Hold sweep wire.
b.
Stop off CL-Cable by attaching 1/2-inch x 5-foot stopper pendant to 6-foot preventer stocking
hardeye on CL-Cable with a 5/8-inch shackle. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, secure other end to
port instrumented sheave padeye.
c.
Pay out coax cable until the stopper pendant takes a strain.
d.
Remove insulating sleeve.
e.
Detach CL-Cable from K-4 blank pigtail cable.
f.
Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail:
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank pigtail terminal lug making certain that thickness around
wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide P/B insulating boot over K-4 blank.
(4)
Slide two hose clamps over end of boot. Position two 3-1/16- to 4-inch clamps at the end
about 1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate
clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4D-4L).
4D-4W
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4D-4L. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
g.
Reel in S-Cable and sweep wire until mark on S-Cable, which indicates point for attaching
CL-Cable to drum preventer pendant is at hand.
h.
Ground isolate inboard end of CL connector:
4D-4X
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around CL terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug.
(4)
Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of S/B boot. Position clamps about 1
inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of S/B boot. Rotate clamps so
securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4D-4M).
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4D-4M. S- or CL-Cable Booted (Typical)
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
i.
4D-4-3.7
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover S/B boot end with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
Secure drum preventer pendant to CL-Cable. Heave in and remove 1/2-inch x 5-foot wire rope
stopper pendant.
Magnetic Cable Recovery.
a.
Heave in simultaneously on sweep wire, CL, and S-Cables until the TJ towing jumper assembly
is just outboard of the roller chock assembly, and diversion point is accessible to the rigger.
b.
Remove quarter roller block from diversion chain on sweep wire.
c.
Remove T-bar stop.
d.
Reel in remainder of CL and S-Cables.
4D-4Y
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4D-4-3.8
OPERATION
O-Type Gear Recovery.
a.
Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane.
b.
Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle.
c.
Heave in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock.
d.
Disengage sweep wire drum.
4D-4-3.9
Float Recovery.
a.
Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard.
b.
Recover float pendant with a boat hook.
c.
Heave in on float pendant until float nose line is within reach.
d.
Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane and heave in until float is in lifting position
under crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail
on float.
e.
Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook.
f.
Remove emergency recovery pendant.
g.
Stow float.
4D-4-3.10
Otter Recovery.
a.
Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard.
b.
Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter.
c.
Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4D-4B) or stowage rack on fantail.
d.
Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead.
e.
Return and restow articulated crane.
f.
Notify bridge all gear is clear.
4D-4-3.11
Securing Gear.
a.
Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS.
b.
Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.
c.
Ground isolate outboard ends of CL-Cable and S-Cable as follows:
4D-4Z
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug.
(4)
Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of S/B boot. Position clamps about 1
inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of S/B insulating boot. Rotate clamps
so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4D-4M).
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
d.
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover S/B boot end with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
Using hold-back lines, secure outboard ends of CL-Cable and S-Cable to drums.
4D-4AA/(4D-4AB blank)
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4D-5
M MK 7(B) MAGNETIC SWEEP (DOUBLE DIVERTED LOOP)
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of
this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and
injury or death to personnel.
The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure
all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is
followed.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded
component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Block, roller (type A), NM, with swivel eye
(3940-00-722-8995) (2)
Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM
(3940-00-368-7551) (4)
Block, snatch 8-inch (type E), NM
(3940-00-368-7552)
Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342) (4)
Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356)
Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342)
(4)
Cable Assembly, electrode, K-4 (1075-00-262-1980)
(3)
Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping,
coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337)
Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping,
450-foot (6150-01-517-9327) (2)
Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping,
CL (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327)
Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping,
S (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327)
Cable Assembly, outboard pigtail
(6150-01-519-0147)
Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM
(with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906) (2)
Clamp, hose, 1-9/16- to 2-1/2-inch
(4730-00-204-3491) (14)
Clamp, hose, 2-5/16- to 3-/14-inch
(4730-01-273-3672) (16)
Clamp, hose, 5-5/8- to 8-1/2-inch
(4730-01-444-7836) (4)
Connector, Special Y (5935-01-286-4849)
Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet
4A-4) (1075-00-265-0677) (2)
Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-332-5834) (3)
Float, cellular rubber (1075-00-372-6128) (18)
Float, type O, size 1, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-3)
(1075-01-371-0568) (2)
Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye
(4030-00-290-6420)
Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986) (2)
Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1, otter (per Job Sheet
4A-2) (1075-00-391-9280) (2)
Line, nose, float, 2-1/2-inch x 30-foot, single leg, nylon
(hardeye splice one end, other end whipped) (2) 1
Line, securing (electrode float-center), 21-thread x
5-foot, single leg, manila (each end whipped) (18) 1
Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon,
hardeye splice one end, other end whipped (2) 1
Lug, lamitex (1075-00-372-6221) (2)
Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313)
(28)
See footnotes at end of table.
4D-5A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS (Continued)
Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as
required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL)
(hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM,
wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (4) 1
Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, wire
rope (LHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, NM,
wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, preventer (CL), 1/2-inch x 5-foot, single
leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, preventer (CL), 2-1/2-inch x 86-foot, single
leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, roller block, 2-1/2-inch x 3-foot, single leg,
nylon (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, stopper (CL), 1-1/2-inch x 3- to 5-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each
end) 1
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch
(5305-00-226-9206) (28)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM,
5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (27)
7/8-inch (4030-00-270-5485) (12)
1-inch (4030-00-270-5486) (2)
Sleeve (CK/P) (5970-01-519-3184)
Sleeve (CS/P) (5970-01-519-3170)
Sleeve (S/P) (5970-01-519-3176) (6)
Stop, T-bar, NM (1075-01-233-4952) (2)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, single
leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard end,
inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, single
leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye outboard end,
inboard end whipped) (4010-01-302-9008)
Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505)
(56)
Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as
required)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949)
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Electrician Mate Tool Kit
Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) *
Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251)
Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252)
Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643) (2)
Line, handling, 2-1/2-inch x 60-foot nylon, (whipped
each end) 1
Line, hold-back, 2-1/2-inch x 30-foot nylon, (whipped
each end) 1
Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range)
*
1
Paint, enamel, blue (TT-E-516) *
Paint, enamel, green (TT-E-516) *
Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) *
Paint, enamel, white (TT-E-516) *
Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176)
Rags (7920-00-205-1711))
Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572)
Spray, plastic preservative *
Tape, measuring, 100-foot, steel, flexible
(4210-00-554-7092)
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb
Hazardous Material.
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4D-5-1
RIGGING.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
4D-5-1.1
Preparation.
a.
Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
personnel for minesweeping operations.
b.
Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational
order.
4D-5B
Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential
OPERATION
4D-5-1.2
a.
b.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Initial Installation of Cable (If Required).
Off-load the S-Cable, if attached, as follows:
(1)
Attach a 2-1/2-inch x 60-foot line to outboard end of S-Cable.
(2)
If alongside pier, lead line to pier through cable roller chock assembly.
(3)
Pay out on magnetic cable drum, either laying out S-Cable on pier or reeling the cable onto
a reel located on pier.
(4)
Continue paying out magnetic cable until pigtail connecting outboard long leg breakout to
the S-Cable is in clear area to work on.
(5)
Secure the S-Cable to the ship using a stopper line.
(6)
Disconnect the outboard pigtail from the S-Cable. Leave the pigtail secured to the long leg
breakout. Slide sleeve and hose clamps clear of connection, but leave on pigtail.
(7)
Lead one of the two 450-foot CA-1454 S-Cables from the peer to the vicinity of the K-4
blank.
Connect a Special Y-Connector to the short leg breakout K-4 blank as follows:
(1)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(2)
Slip two hose clamps over the Special Y Connector and two large hose clamps over the
K-4 blank and slide out of the way.
(3)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the
insulating sleeves to aid in installing the sleeves and to increase watertight integrity.
(4)
Slip insulating sleeve over the outboard pigtail cable and slide back out of the way.
(5)
Connect end terminals and secure with two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two
5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
Make certain end terminals are properly oriented so the contact area of each terminal is at
a longitudinal centerline of both cables.
(6)
Wrap a couple of layers of dry rags over the cap screw and nuts after connecting the end
terminals together and secure with electrical tape. Do not exceed the inside diameter of
the sleeve.
(7)
Slide the sleeve over the connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
Excessive tightening of sleeve or boot clamps will press a permanent
groove around the lug barrels or damage the insulating sleeve and should
be avoided.
(8)
Slide clamps over ends of sleeves and position clamps as shown in (Figure 4D-5A).
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly.
(9)
Apply two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing rubber insulating tape starting
approximately 2 inches before and ending 2 inches after the insulated sleeve.
(10) Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape; then apply two layers of
half-lapped friction tape.
4D-5C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4D-5A. Special Y Connector
4D-5-1.3
a.
Connect Cables to Special Y-Connector.
Connect the S-Cable to the special connector as follows:
(1)
Slip two hose clamps over the Special Y Connector and two large hose clamps over the
K-4 blank and slide out of the way.
(2)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the
insulating sleeves to aid in installing the sleeves and to increase watertight integrity.
(3)
Slip insulating sleeve over the outboard pigtail cable and slide back out of the way.
(4)
Connect end terminals and secure with two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two
5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
Make certain end terminals are properly oriented so the contact area of each terminal is at
a longitudinal centerline of both cables.
(5)
Wrap a couple of layers of dry rags over the cap screw and nuts after connecting the end
terminals together and secure with electrical tape. Do not exceed the inside diameter of
the sleeve.
(6)
Slide the sleeve over the connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
Excessive tightening of sleeve or boot clamps will press a permanent
groove around the lug barrels or damage the insulating sleeve and should
be avoided.
4D-5D
(7)
Slide clamps over ends of sleeves and position clamps as shown in (Figure 4D-5A).
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly.
(8)
Apply two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing rubber insulating tape starting
approximately 2 inches before and ending 2 inches after the insulated sleeve.
OPERATION
(9)
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape; then apply two layers of
half-lapped friction tape.
(10) Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion and stray fields.
(11) Using PPE per MSDS, coat all taped coverings with plastic preservative spray.
(12) Place ten turns of 21-thread lashing around K-4 blank pigtail and coax cable to relieve
towing strain on K-4 blank.
(13) Stack cables on magnetic cable drum in the following manner:
(a)
Reel cables side-by-side onto the magnetic drum, stacking carefully to prevent
fouling.
(b)
When the outboard end of the 450-foot S-Cable is free, attach an outboard pigtail.
NOTE
This procedure can be accomplished on the pier or onboard the ship.
b.
Connect the two 450-foot S-Cables using an outboard pigtail. Insulate and waterproof the
connections by installing insulating sleeves as follows:
(1)
Place an outboard pigtail between the free ends of the 450-foot S-Cables.
(2)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(3)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P
insulating sleeves to aid in installing the sleeves and to increase watertight integrity.
(4)
Slip two small hose clamps over each end of outboard pigtail cable and two large hose
clamps over each CA-1454, slide clamps out of way.
(5)
Slip S/P insulating sleeves (small end first) over pigtail cable and slide back out of way.
(6)
Connect terminals of pigtail and CA-1454 cables using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap
screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure terminals
are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each cable;
then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(7)
Wrap dry rag(s) around each terminal lug at cap screw and nut areas making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/P insulating sleeve.
(8)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(9)
Slide S/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
(10) Slide hose clamps over ends of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart
with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing
screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4D-5B).
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(11) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
4D-5E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4D-5B. CA-1454 to Pigtail Connection
c.
Install K-4 electrodes as follows:
(1)
Continue reeling cables onto the drum until the outboard ends of both CA-1454 S-Cables
are on deck.
To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewn in a canvas chafing
sleeve.
4D-5F
(2)
Prepare K-4 electrode(s) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-6.
(3)
Connect a K-4 electrode to each S-Cable lug, torque to 35 ± 2 ft-lb, and fully waterproof
each connection.
(4)
Tape connection with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape,
apply two layers half-lapped electrical black plastic tape and two layers of half-lapped
friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
(5)
Using PPE per MSDS, coat all taped coverings with plastic preservative spray.
(6)
Mark electrode ends. Mark port with a 1-foot wide red-painted band and starboard with a
1-foot wide green-painted band.
(7)
Continue reeling until inboard end of K-4 electrodes are on the drum.
(8)
Connect a lamitex lug to each electrode (Figure 4D-5C) and waterproof each connection
following procedures in steps 4 and 5 above.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4D-5C. Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Chafing Chain
(9)
Shackle the two lamitex lugs together before reeling onto drum so electrodes will come off
the drum together, preventing fouling during streaming.
(10) Marry the electrodes together with 21-thread to prevent separation while stacking on the
drum.
(11) Reel electrodes onto drum until outboard ends are reached.
(12) Secure electrodes to drum.
4D-5-1.4
CL-Cable Preparation for M Mk 7(b) Configuration.
To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewn in a canvas chafing
sleeve.
a.
Prepare K-4 electrode in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-6.
b.
Lead a K-4 electrode to the outboard end of the CL-Cable.
4D-5G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
c.
Insulate CL/K-4 connection and fitting as follows:
(1)
Place inboard end of long leg K-4 electrode in vicinity of the CL-Cable connection.
(2)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(3)
Connect the long leg K-4 electrode to the outboard CL-Cable using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x
2-1/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers.
Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(4)
Wrap CL/K-4 connection and fitting with rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Apply two
layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape, continuing tape several inches past the
connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
d.
Reel K-4 electrode onto CL drum.
e.
Insulate outboard end of K-4 connection as follows:
(1)
f.
OPERATION
Tape outboard electrode terminal lug with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black plastic tape and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
Measure O-type sweep wire as follows:
(1)
Prepare sweep wires in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.
(2)
Sweep length is critical and must be previously measured using a steel tape in at least
100-foot increments to reduce cumulative error.
(3)
After attachment of a 5/8-inch x 6-foot chafing chain with long link in the middle of each
chain to each wire, measure from midpoint (3 foot or long link) of chain up sweep wire.
(4)
Both sweep wires must have a distinguishable red-white-blue mark at the 1,110-foot
location.
4D-5-1.5
Floats, Kites, and Sweep Wire Preparation.
For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on
water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required.
Total length cannot exceed 20 feet.
a.
Prepare size 1, O-type floats in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3 (moored configuration),
utilizing 10-foot float pendant.
b.
Prepare size 1 kites as otters in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1 (one port, one starboard).
c.
Prepare sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.
4D-5-1.6
a.
4D-5H
O-Type Component Preparation.
Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 to Otter.
(1)
Engage port sweep wire drum.
(2)
Attach a 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain with long link in middle to each sweep wire with a 5/8-inch
shackle.
OPERATION
b.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
(3)
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, shackle a 1/2-inch x 60-foot (LHL) wire rope otter pendant to
5/8-inch x 6-foot chain. Reel chain and about half the otter pendant back onto port sweep
wire winch.
(4)
Lead outboard otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave, then through the
sweep wire roller chock assembly.
(5)
Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between otter bridle and 60-foot otter pendant (Figure
4D-5D).
(6)
Connect pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle on otter.
(7)
Using a 1/2-inch x 60-foot (RHL) wire rope pendant, repeat steps 1 through 6, attaching
pendant to starboard otter.
Transfer Otter to Ready Release Position.
(1)
Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter.
(2)
Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle
is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4D-5E).
(3)
Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and
secure by mousing with the tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion.
(4)
Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane
whip.
Figure 4D-5D. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Starboard Configuration)
4D-5J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4D-5E. Otter in Ready Release Position
4D-5-1.7
(5)
Rotate crane forward.
(6)
Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.
(7)
Using starboard articulated stern crane, repeat steps 1 through 6, securing starboard otter
and starboard float pendant.
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation.
a.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented
sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block
padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4D-5F).
b.
Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure
block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using
5/8-inch shackles.
4D-5K
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4D-5F. Equalizing Towing Bridle
4D-5-1.8
a.
Electrode Floats.
Splice 5-foot (21-thread) pendant to both ends of each float.
4D-5L
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4D-5-2
OPERATION
LAUNCHING/STREAMING.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
NOTE
When streaming both the port and starboard sides, the windward side
should be streamed first.
4D-5-2.1
Streaming Preparations.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
4D-5-2.2
Launching/Streaming O Type Gear.
a.
Ensure ship's speed is 4 knots.
b.
Request permission to put gear to the rail.
c.
Ensure nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4D-5G).
d.
Lead float nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock.
e.
Tend line to bitt.
f.
Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, and train outboard to position
float at rail.
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, install batteries and verify that
the photo cell is working.
g.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.
h.
Ensure float pendant(s) and nose line(s) are being tended and are clear of ship and
obstructions.
i.
Connect float pendants, if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant(s) are over
the outboard corner of otter.
NOTE
Launch windward side first.
j.
Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE.
k.
Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook
securing otter (Figure 4D-5E). Launch float and slack aft. Cast nose line clear of ship.
4D-5M
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4D-5G. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)
4D-5N
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4D-5-2.3
OPERATION
Tripping the Otter.
a.
Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes a strain.
b.
Pay out sweep wire under power until the long link of chain is just outboard of sweep wire roller
chock.
c.
Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until
the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope) and check for proper diversion.
d.
Launch the leeward side O-type gear as in steps a through c above.
e.
Return and restow articulated stern cranes.
4D-5-2.4
Streaming Port and Starboard Long Leg Electrodes.
To reduce corrosion, ensure a lamitex lug is installed on the end of each
electrode and the connection is taped.
NOTE
Adjust ship's speed as required to keep gear working.
a.
Pay out on magnetic drum, and lead port and starboard long leg electrodes (with 3-foot
pendants and quarter roller blocks attached) out through stern roller chock assembly.
b.
Mount quarter roller blocks on port and starboard sweep wires, and mouse quarter roller block
pins (Figure 4D-5C).
c.
Ensure electrode is properly taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction
tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal
is covered to reduce corrosion.
d.
Pay out both electrode legs to 30 feet.
e.
Attach electrode floats as follows:
(1)
Attach first electrode float to each leg (Figure 4D-5H).
(2)
Pay out electrodes.
(3)
Continue paying out, and attach five more floats 8-foot apart (20-foot from float center to
float center) to each electrode leg (Figure 4D-5J).
(4)
Attach sixth (inboard) float, end-to-end with fifth float.
NOTE
Keep otters working by veering sweep wires more slowly than cable. The
magnetic tail should veer to a longer length than sweep wire, so quarter
roller blocks ride at diversion point on sweep wires.
f.
Veer sweep wires to 50 fathom scope, paying out port and starboard long leg electrodes.
g.
Continue paying out cables and wire. Ensure sweep wires carry the load to keep the sweep in
balance.
4D-5P
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4D-5H. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode
4D-5-2.5
Center Electrode (Short Leg) Streaming.
To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewed in a canvas
chafing sleeve.
a.
Hold sweep wires at 50-fathom scope.
b.
Remove lashing securing electrode to CL drum. Ensure the outboard end of K-4 electrode is
taped to reduce corrosion. Wrap two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating
tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape,
continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is
covered to reduce corrosion.
c.
Lead end of electrode out through stern roller chock. Pay out until 30 feet is astern.
d.
Attach one electrode float (Figure 4D-5H).
e.
Pay out electrodes and attach four more floats 8 feet apart; i.e., 20 feet from float center to float
center, to the electrode leg (Figure 4D-5J).
f.
Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float.
4D-5Q
Figure 4D-5J. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4D-5R
OPERATION
OPERATION
4D-5-2.6
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
CL Leg to Outboard Short Leg Attachment.
As the cable is payed out, there is danger of the center leg crossing and
fouling one of the diverted legs. If gear fouls, a speed change may clear it;
otherwise, partial recovery will be necessary.
a.
Hold both sweep wires at 50-fathom scope and simultaneously pay out CL-Cable and both
S-Cables.
b.
Stop paying out CL-Cable, then attach a 3- to 5-foot wire rope stopper pendant to preventer
stocking hardeye on CL-Cable (Figure 4D-5K) with a 5/8-inch shackle. Using a 5/8-inch
shackle, secure other end to port instrumented sheave padeye.
c.
Pay out CL-Cable until wire rope stopper pendant takes strain.
d.
Disconnect the CL drum preventer pendant from CL-Cable (Figure 4D-5L).
4D-5-2.7
a.
Attachment of CL-Cable to Outboard Short Leg Pigtail.
Attach CL-Cable to free end of outboard short leg pigtail. Insulate and waterproof connection by
installing an insulating sleeve as follows (Figure 4D-5M):
(1)
Clean contact surface of terminal with fine sandpaper.
(2)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P
insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity.
(3)
Slip two small hose clamps over free end of pigtail and two large hose clamps over CL
section; slide clamps out of way.
(4)
Slip S/P insulating sleeve (small end first) over pigtail and slide back out of way.
(5)
Connect terminals of CL and pigtail cables using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap
screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure terminal
lugs are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each
cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(6)
Wrap dry rag(s) terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness
around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of insulating sleeve.
(7)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(8)
Slide S/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
(9)
Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with
outer clamps 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing screws on
each end are 180 degrees apart.
4D-5S
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4D-5K. Preventer Stocking Attachment on CL-Cable
Figure 4D-5L. CL-Cable Drum Preventer Pendant
4D-5T
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4D-5M. Outboard Long Leg Breakout to Outboard Pigtail Connection
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing the tape several inches past the clamps on
each side.
(11) Using PPE per MSDS, coat all taped coverings with plastic preservative spray.
b.
Heave in on magnetic cable and disconnect the stopper pendant from the preventer stocking
hardeye on the CL-Cable. Secure hardeyes to CL-Cable with tape.
4D-5U
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4D-5-2.8
OPERATION
Streaming Coax Cable to Full Scope.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
a.
Continue paying out coax cable.
b.
Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings are forward of cable roller chock assembly,
simultaneously checking for cable breaks.
Repair cable in accordance with
SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4D-5-2.9
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection.
a.
Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable.
b.
Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable
with 5/8-inch shackles.
c.
Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until
just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant
(Figure 4D-5F). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.
To avoid damaging cables, ensure the coax heavy to buoyant splice is
streamed awash at all times.
d.
Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.
4D-5-2.10
Stopping Off the Sweep.
Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged.
a.
Stop veering sweep wire when the red, white, and blue bands (1,110 feet) are at the sweep wire
roller chock. Engage pawls and secure sweep wire drum.
b.
Minesweep electrician request permission to enter the drum area with drum area crew.
c.
Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.
4D-5V
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
d.
Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4D-5N) back-to-back to sweep wire aft of instrumented fairlead
sheave. Attach Cutters Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing bridle midway
between 8-inch, Type E snatch block and roller chock assembly.
e.
Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.
After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel
will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.
To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do
not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station
on the 01 level.
f.
Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to
cutters.
g.
Arm Cutters Mk 15.
h.
Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS
MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.
4D-5W
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4D-5N. Wedge Stop Placement
4D-5X
OPERATION
4D-5-2.11
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.
Minesweeping DC contactor or solid state pulse generator circuit breakers
shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic
minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep
electrician.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
a.
Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area.
b.
Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area.
c.
Minesweep electrician enters the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN
switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer.
d.
Drum area crew enters the drum area.
e.
Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtails
on electrical rubber matting.
f.
Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends.
g.
Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for
insulating cracks and breaks and make repairs as required.
h.
Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box.
i.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
j.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to
terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive to negative) in the terminal box.
k.
Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.
l.
Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and
magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT
VOLTAGE.
m.
Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal
box.
4D-5Y
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
n.
Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush
and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft lb.
o.
Using cable clamps or 21-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air
gaps greater than 1/2 inch.
p.
Lower the terminal box cover.
q.
After connections have been made on the magnetic minesweep cable, ensure the port and
starboard sides of the drum area are secured with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs creating an
entrance barrier. Ensure to gear adrift is left in drum area.
4D-5-2.12
Departing the Drum Area.
a.
Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety
Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then
departs drum area.
b.
Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker.
4D-5-2.13
Towing the Sweep.
a.
Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck.
b.
Increase headway to sweep speed.
c.
Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves.
d.
Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4D-5P).
4D-5-2.14
a.
Measuring Float Angles.
Measure angles between the ship’s track and the port and starboard float with the pelorus on the
signal bridge. These angles should be measured with sweep wires streamed to full scope, and
with the sweep under tow at near maximum speed with two-engine propulsion. The otter should
be adjusted for greater diversion if the two float angles are less than 32 degrees.
4D-5-2.15
Maneuvering Instructions.
a.
The M Mk 7(b) may be turned in either direction using a maximum constant rudder angle of 10
degrees. Should the gear on the inside of turn begin to lose diversion, it may be necessary to
shorten in on the side. The turning diameter with the sweep streamed varies from 1,000 to 1,800
yards, depending on sea and weather conditions.
b.
Speeds in excess of 6 knots are not recommended due to the danger of damage to magnetic
cable (Table 4D-5A).
Table 4D-5A. Sweep Wire Tensions
4D-5Z
SPEED (KNOTS)
CABLE TENSION (LB)
6
4,450
8
11,600
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4D-5P. M Mk 7(b) Sweep (Double Diverted Loop)
4D-5AA
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4D-5-3
4D-5-3.1
RECOVERY.
Preparation.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
4D-5-3.2
OPERATION
Reentering the Drum Area.
Minesweeping DC contactor or solid state pulse generator circuit breakers
shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
a.
Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured.
b.
Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN.
c.
Ensure HPU is secured.
d.
Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
e.
Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch
to the SAFE position.
f.
Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE
POSITION.
4D-5-3.3
Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
a.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
b.
Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position.
c.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg).
4D-5AB
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
d.
Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
e.
Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box
while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to
the safety officer.
f.
Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when
handling cable to prevent burns.
The clamps or 21-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier
handling of cable.
NOTE
Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be
accomplished simultaneously.
g.
Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box.
h.
Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove inboard pigtail cable ends from terminal box
and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting.
i.
Close and secure, terminal box.
j.
Reinstall protective boots on inboard pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several
wraps of plastic electrical tape (Figure 4D-5Q).
k.
Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum.
l.
Drum area crew departs drum area.
m.
If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE
signs. Check area for gear adrift.
n.
Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs
drum area.
4D-5-3.4
Cutter Removal.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
a.
Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can
be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable.
b.
Reman fantail.
c.
Request permission to recovery gear.
4D-5AC
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4D-5Q. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted
4D-5-3.5
Coax Cable Recovery.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When
possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the
drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered.
a.
Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit.
b.
Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as
they come within reach.
c.
Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from
hardeyes. Install canvas chafing.
d.
Continue heaving in on coax section.
4D-5AD
OPERATION
4D-5-3.6
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Disconnecting CL-Cable from Outboard Long Leg Breakout.
a.
Stop off CL-Cable by attaching 1/2-inch x 3- to 5-foot wire rope stopper pendant to 6-foot
preventer towing stocking hardeye on CL-Cable with a 5/8-inch shackle. Using a 5/8-inch
shackle, secure other end to port instrumented sheave padeye.
b.
Payout the coax cable until the stopper pendant takes a strain.
c.
Remove sleeves and detach CL-Cable and outboard pigtail from outboard long leg breakout.
d.
Ground isolate terminal lugs:
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide P/B insulating boot over terminal lug (Figure 4D-5Q).
(4)
Slide hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with
outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws
on each end are 180 degrees apart.
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
e.
4D-5-3.7
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers
of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side.
Secure drum preventer pendant to CL-Cable 6-foot preventer towing stocking. Heave in and
remove wire rope stopper pendant.
Center Leg (CL) Electrode Recovery.
a.
Continue recovery of CL-Cable and center leg electrode.
b.
Heave in on magnetic cable winch drum, removing electrode floats. Ensure port and starboard
long leg cable loops remain astern of size 1 floats at all times. Adjust sweep wires as required.
c.
Lash center leg electrode securely to CL-Cable side of magnetic cable drum.
4D-5-3.8
Port and Starboard Long Leg Electrode Recovery.
a.
Continue heaving in on magnetic drum and sweep wires, stopping sweep wire winch when
quarter roller blocks and T-bar stops are at taffrail.
b.
Remove quarter roller blocks and heave in remainder of K-4 electrode.
c.
Remove T-bar stops.
NOTE
The electrode floats may be left on cable electrodes if another M Mk 7(b) is
anticipated.
d.
Secure hold-back line to outboard ends of S-Cable K-4 electrodes and keep a strain on them
while reeling onto drum. Secure electrodes to drum with this line.
4D-5AE
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4D-5-3.9
OPERATION
O-Type Gear Recovery.
a.
Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane.
b.
Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle.
c.
Heave in on sweep wires until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock.
d.
Disengage sweep wire drum.
4D-5-3.10
Float Recovery.
a.
Train leeward side articulated stern crane head outboard.
b.
Recover float pendant with a boat hook.
c.
Heave in on float pendant until nose line is within reach.
d.
Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane. Heave in until float is in lifting position
under crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail
on float.
e.
Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook.
f.
Remove emergency recovery pendant.
g.
Stow float.
4D-5-3.11
Otter Recovery.
a.
Train leeward side articulated stern crane outboard.
b.
Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter.
c.
Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4D-5E) or stowage rack on fantail.
d.
Attach safety chain. Leeward sweep wire is now dead.
e.
Return and restow articulated crane.
4D-5-3.12
Recovery of Gear from Windward Side.
a.
Repeat procedures in paragraphs 4D-5-3.6 through 4D-5-3.11 using windward side articulated
stern crane.
b.
When all gear is clear of water, notify bridge all gear is clear.
4D-5-3.13
Securing Gear.
a.
Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage.
b.
Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.
c.
If no other M Mk 7(b) sweeps are anticipated, return magnetic cable to M Mk 5(a) configuration,
minus K-4 electrodes. Ground isolate K-4 blank and outboard end of S-Cable.
4D-5AF
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4E-1
M MK 5(A) TB-26 (DIVERTED) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of
this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and
injury or death to personnel.
The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure
all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is
followed.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded
component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Block, quarter, roller (type A), NM with swivel eye
(3940-00-722-8995)
Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM
(3940-00-368-7551) (2)
Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM
(3940-00-368-7552) (4)
Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342)
Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356)
Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342)
(4)
Buoy, position, NM, with flagstaff (2050-00-272-2423)
Cable, acoustic power (APC), 1,650-foot (per Job
Sheet 4A-5) (1075-00-782-9881)
Cable Assembly, electrode, K-4 (per Job Sheet 4A-6)
(1075-00-262-1980) (2)
Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping,
coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337)
Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, S
(per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327)
Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM
(with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906)
Clamp, hose, 1-9/16- to 2-1/2-inch
(4730-00-204-3491) (2)
Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460)
(2)
Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132)
(4)
Clip, wire rope, 5/16-inch, NM (4030-00-269-9761)
Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-265-0677)
Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-332-5834) (2)
Device, acoustic, TB-26, NM (1075-01-368-2483)
Flag, position buoy, red/black, 18- x 18-inch
(8345-00-233-4111)
Float, cellular rubber (1075-00-372-6128) (12)
Float, type O, size 0, NM (acoustic) (per Job Sheet
4A-3) (1075-01-357-9948)
Float, type O, size 1, NM (moored) (per Job Sheet
4A-3) (1075-01-371-0568)
Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye
(4030-00-290-6420)
Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x
3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638)
Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986)
Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet
4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280)
Light, marker, distress (6230-00-067-5209) (2)
Line, securing (electrode float-center), 21-thread x
5-foot, single leg, manila (each end whipped) 1
Line, towing, position buoy, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot,
single leg, nylon (hardeye splice one end, other
end whipped) 1
See footnotes at end of table.
4E-1A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS (Continued)
Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon
(hardeye one end, other end whipped) 1
Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) (4)
Pendant, device, towing/stopper (acoustic), 1/2-inch
x 3-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye
each end) (2) 1
Pendant, diversion, inboard (acoustic), 2-1/2-inch x
18-inch, single leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, diversion, outboard (acoustic), 2-1/2-inch x
24-inch, single leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, diversion, special (acoustic), 2-1/2-inch x
6-foot, single leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as
required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL)
(hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM,
wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, float (acoustic), 1/2-inch x length as
required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye
each end) 1
Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot,
NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one
end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1
Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, NM, wire
rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, position buoy, chafing, 5/16-inch x 5-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye one
end, other end whipped) 1
Ring, 3-inch ID (5365-01-346-8057)
Ring, 4-inch ID (5365-00-281-2187)
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch
(5305-00-226-9204) (4)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM,
1/2-inch (4030-00-270-5482) (3)
5/8-inch (4030-270-5483) (37)
3/4-inch (4030-270-5484) (5)
Sleeve (CK/P) (5970-01-519-3184)
Stop, T-bar (1075-01-233-4952)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye outboard
end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-302-9008)
Swivel, link-to-link, NM, 3/8-inch (4030-00-269-9767)
Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505)
(24)
Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as
required)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949)
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385)
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652)
Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737)
Electrician Mate Tool Kit
Gauge, pressure (0 to 30 psi)
Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) *
Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251)
Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252)
Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643)
*
1
Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread)
(whipped each end)
Megohmmeter, 500 Vdc
Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range)
Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176)
Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021)
Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572)
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Wrench, T-handle (5120-00-972-0490)
Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb
Hazardous Material.
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4E-1-1
RIGGING.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
4E-1-1.1
Preparation.
a.
Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
personnel for minesweeping operations.
b.
Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational
order.
4E-1B
Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential
OPERATION
4E-1-1.2
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Float, Kite, and Sweep Wire Preparation.
For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on
water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required.
Total length cannot exceed 20 feet.
a.
Prepare size 1 and size 0 floats in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3. The size 0 float used with
Acoustic Device TB-26. The size 1 float for O gear (moored configuration) may utilize two
10-foot float pendants.
b.
Prepare size 1 kite as an otter (starboard configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1.
c.
Prepare starboard sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.
4E-1-1.3
a.
4E-1-1.4
APC Preparation.
Prepare APC in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Preparation.
a.
Deck test acoustic device 24 hours prior to streaming in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.
Upon completion of test, pressurize device to 10 psi for 24 hours to ensure device is air tight. If
more than a 1 psi loss of pressure is observed (indicated by soapy-water bubbles), release all air
pressure and take corrective action. A 20 °F drop in temperature will have a 1 psi drop in
pressure. If no loss of pressure is observed and device is to be launched soon thereafter, retain
air pressure in housing until final pressurizing is accomplished; otherwise, release all pressure.
b.
Prepare towing stocking in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.
c.
Using a 3/4-inch shackle, shackle 3-inch ID ring to aft hole in acoustic device towing and hoisting
plate using Table 4E-1A for depth and float pendant correlation. Connect float pendant to ring
(Figure 4E-1A).
d.
Lead outboard end of APC aft through cable roller chock assembly; then, pull cable outboard,
clear of all obstructions, and forward to acoustic device. Connect cable to Acoustic Device
TB-26. If required, apply a light coat of silicone grease.
e.
Using 3/4-inch shackle, connect one end of device towing pendant to hardeye of towing stocking
at 6-foot mark on APC. Connect pendant’s free end to device towing pad (Figure 4E-1A). Wrap
3-foot towing pendant and shackles with chafing gear.
Ensure inhaul pendant is connected aft of float pendant. Failure to do so
could cause damage to float pendant and inhaul pendant.
f.
Pass hardeye of inhaul pendant down through float fairlead tube to 3-inch ID ring and attach with
a 3/4-inch shackle with screw pin end on 3-inch ID ring behind float pendant connection (Figure
4E-1A).
g.
Shackle softeye of inhaul pendant to crane whip, using a 1/2-inch shackle. Figure 4E-1B shows
acoustic device in a cradled position.
4E-1C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Table 4E-1A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure
1
DEPTH TO CENTER OF
DIAPHRAGM (FEET)
PENDANT LENGTH SIZE 0
FLOAT (FEET)
AIR
PRESSURES (PSI)1
20
13
8.0
22
15
8.5
24
17
9.3
25
18
10.1
26
19
10.5
27
20
10.8
28
21
11.2
29
22
11.5
30
23
11.8
These air pressures for the TB-26 rising when streamed through the water.
Figure 4E-1A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing
4E-1D
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-1B. Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled
h.
Take in on crane whip until inhaul pendant is wound on cable drum.
i.
Using 5/8-inch shackle, attach tail line to tail of size 0 float.
j.
Upon successful completion of air leak test, pressurize device to operating depth (Table 4E-1A).
4E-1-1.5
a.
O-Type Components Preparation.
Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly to Otter.
(1)
Engage starboard sweep wire drum.
(2)
Attach 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain, with long link in the middle, between sweep wire and a
60-foot (RHL) otter pendant, using 5/8-inch shackles. Five interlocking 5/8-inch shackles
may be used in lieu of chain. Reel in on starboard sweep wire drum.
(3)
Lead 60-foot (RHL) otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave; then through
sweep wire roller chock assembly.
4E-1E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
b.
OPERATION
(4)
Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between the otter bridle and 60-foot RHL otter pendant
(Figure 4E-1C).
(5)
Connect 10-foot float pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle.
Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position.
(1)
Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter.
(2)
Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle
is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4E-1D).
(3)
Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on clevis shackle; set hook in secured position
and secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion.
(4)
Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane
whip.
(5)
Rotate crane forward.
(6)
Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.
Figure 4E-1C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Starboard Configuration)
4E-1F
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-1D. Otter in Ready Release Position
4E-1-1.6
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation.
a.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented
sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block
padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4E-1E).
b.
Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure
block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using
5/8-inch shackles.
4E-1-1.7
a.
Position Buoy Preparation.
Insert a flagstaff with a red and black horizontally striped flag attached into socket on position
buoy attached to long leg electrode. Attach distress marker light(s) (Figure 4E-1F).
4E-1G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-1E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly
b.
Pass wire chafing pendant through tow hole in buoy. Secure pendant to position buoy with a
5/16-inch wire rope clip.
c.
Attach a 3/8-inch link-to-link swivel to free end of pendant, using a 1/2-inch shackle.
d.
Connect hardeye of towing line to free end of 3/8-inch link-to-link swivel using a 1/2-inch
shackle.
e.
Lead towing line outboard over taffrail and back aboard through cable roller chock assembly.
4E-1-1.8
a.
4E-1H
Electrode Floats.
Splice 5-foot (21-thread) pendant to both ends of each float.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-1F. Rigging Position Buoy
4E-1-1.9
K-4 Electrode Preparation.
To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewed in a canvas
chafing sleeve.
a.
Prepare K-4 electrode in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-6.
4E-1-1.10
Long Leg Preparation.
a.
Lead a K-4 electrode to the outboard end of the S-Cable.
b.
Insulate S/K-4 connection and fitting as follows:
(1)
Place inboard end of long leg K-4 electrode in vicinity of the S-Cable connection.
(2)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
4E-1J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
(3)
Connect the long leg K-4 electrode to the outboard S-Cable using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x
1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers.
Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(4)
Wrap S/K-4 connection and fitting with rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Apply two
layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape, continuing tape several inches past the
connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
c.
Heave in on magnetic reel, stacking K-4 electrode until outboard end is clear to work on, and
position for streaming.
d.
Tape outboard electrode terminal lug with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black plastic tape and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
4E-1-1.11
Special Pendant Assembly Preparation.
a.
Using 5/8-inch shackles (Figure 4E-1G), attach 18-inch and 24-inch pendants to 4-inch ID ring.
Attach a 5/8-inch shackle to free end of each pendant.
b.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach one 2-1/2-inch x 6-foot nylon pendant to 4-inch ID ring, and free
end of pendant to a quarter roller block.
4E-1-2
4E-1-2.1
LAUNCHING/STREAMING.
Streaming Preparations.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Check air pressure in device for appropriate depth (Table 4E-1A).
c.
Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
d.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
e.
Request permission to stream gear.
4E-1-2.2
Launching/Streaming Float and Acoustic Device TB-26.
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify
that the photo cell is working.
a.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.
b.
Pass nose line through chock and tend around mooring bitts. Heave in to remove slack from
nose line.
c.
Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 (Figure 4E-1H, View A) simultaneously training
gear outboard to position gear for launch. Ensure float nose line and APC are clear of all deck
obstructions (Figure 4E-1H, View A).
d.
Lower cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 into water. Slack nose line enough to permit
float to ride astern.
e.
Continue to lower Acoustic Device TB-26 until it is supported by float. Move crane head until
inboard and continue to pay out inhaul pendant until it can be disconnected from crane whip.
Disconnect inhaul pendant.
4E-1K
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-1G. Special Pendant Assembly and Chain for Diversion Rigging
4E-1L
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-1H. Streaming Procedure for Acoustic Device TB-26
4E-1M
OPERATION
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
f.
Bring inhaul pendant aboard through roller chock assembly. Attach inhaul pendant to towing
stocking at 50-foot mark on APC, using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through one eye of towing
stocking.
g.
Slack off on float nose line until gear is being towed by APC (Figure 4E-1H, View B).
h.
Bring nose line through the roller chock assembly. Attach nose line to towing stocking at 50-foot
mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through free eye of towing stocking.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
i.
Pay out APC until first hardeye of diversion towing stocking is forward of cable roller chock
assembly.
j.
Return and restow articulated stern, if not needed.
4E-1-2.3
Launching/Streaming O-Type Gear.
a.
Ensure ship’s speed is 4 knots.
b.
Request permission to put gear to the rail.
c.
Ensure that nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-1J).
d.
Lead nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock.
e.
Tend line to bitt.
f.
Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, and train outboard to position
float at rail.
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, install batteries and verify that
the photo cell is working.
g.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility (Figure 4E-1B).
h.
Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and float pendant and nose line are clear of
ship and obstructions.
i.
Connect float pendant(s), if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the
outboard corner of otter.
j.
Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE.
k.
Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook
securing otter (Figure 4E-1D). Launch float and slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.
4E-1-2.4
Tripping the Otter.
a.
Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes strain.
b.
Pay out sweep wire under power until long link of chain is just outboard of sweep roller chock
assembly.
4E-1N
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-1J. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)
4E-1P
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
c.
Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until
the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope) and check for proper diversion.
d.
Connect free ends of 18-inch and 24-inch pendants of special pendant assembly to forward and
after diversion stocking hardeyes, respectively, on APC (Figure 4E-1G).
e.
Pass quarter roller block of special pendant assembly aft of cable roller chock assembly, and
mount on sweep wire. Mouse quarter roller block pin.
f.
Return and restow articulated stern crane.
4E-1-2.5
a.
Streaming to Full Scope.
Simultaneously pay out sweep wire to 50 fathoms (1 red mark) and APC to the inboard 125-foot
stocking.
Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged.
b.
4E-1-2.6
Engage pawl and secure sweep wire drum.
Streaming of Outboard (Long Leg) Electrode.
a.
Lead long leg electrode from magnetic cable drum and out through the level wind assembly,
then out cable roller chock assembly.
b.
Ensure K-4 electrode terminal lug is properly taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection. Ensure all exposed
metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
c.
Pay out to 50 feet.
4E-1-2.7
Attachment of Buoy and Floats.
a.
Attach first electrode float (Figure 4E-1K), then attach towing line of position buoy inboard of first
float.
b.
Turn distress marker lights on.
c.
Pay out electrode and launch position buoy.
d.
Continue paying out and attach four more floats seven feet apart.
e.
Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float (Figure 4E-1L).
4E-1-2.8
S/K-4 Connector Inspection.
a.
Continue paying out long leg electrode until S to K-4 connection is forward of cable roller chock
assembly.
b.
Ensure S/K-4 connection and fitting is wrapped with two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing
insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of half-lapped friction
tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal
is covered to reduce corrosion.
4E-1Q
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-1K. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode
4E-1-2.9
Installation of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode.
a.
Continue streaming S-Cable. Inspect for insulation breaks, inspect sleeves for watertight
integrity and condition of tape. Repair as required.
b.
Continue streaming S-Cable until outboard short leg breakout and K-4 blank pigtail is forward of
cable roller chock assembly.
c.
Remove boot from K-4 blank pigtail.
d.
Lead a K-4 electrode end to the K-4 blank pigtail.
e.
Attach K-4 electrode to K-4 blank pigtail (Figure 4E-1M).
connection by installing a CK/P insulating sleeve as follows:
4E-1R
Insulate and waterproof the
(1)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(2)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the CK/P
insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity.
(3)
Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over large end of sleeve and two 3-1/16- to 4-inch
hose clamps over small end of sleeve.
(4)
Slip CK/P insulating sleeve over K-4 electrode and slide back out of way.
(5)
Connect terminals of K-4 electrode and K-4 blank pigtail using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x
1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers.
Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline
of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(6)
Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of CK/P insulating sleeve.
(7)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(8)
Slide CK/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
Figure 4E-1L. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-1S
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-1M. K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection
(9)
Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with
outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing
screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
f.
Place ten turns of 21-thread line lashing around K-4 electrode and S-Cable to relieve towing
strain on K-4 blank pigtail.
g.
Heave in on magnetic cable until outboard end of short leg electrode is clear to work on and
positioned for streaming.
h.
Tape the outboard end of K-4 electrode with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all
exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
4E-1T
OPERATION
4E-1-2.10
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Streaming of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode.
a.
Ensure K-4 electrode outboard terminal lug is taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side.
Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
b.
Pay out 50 feet of the short leg electrode.
4E-1-2.11
Attachment of Short Leg Electrode Floats.
a.
Attach first electrode float (Figure 4E-1K).
b.
Continue paying out and attach four additional floats seven feet apart.
c.
Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float (Figure 4E-1L).
4E-1-2.12
K-4 Blank Pigtail/K-4 Connector Inspection.
a.
Continue paying out short leg electrode until K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection is forward of cable
roller chock assembly.
b.
Ensure K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection and fitting is wrapped with two layers rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side.
Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
c.
Ensure ten turns of 21-thread line lashing is around the K-4 blank pigtail and S-Cable to relieve
towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail.
4E-1-2.13
Streaming Coax Cable to Full Scope.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
a.
Continue paying out coax cable.
b.
Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock
assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with
SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4E-1-2.14
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection.
a.
Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable.
b.
Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable
with 5/8-inch shackles.
c.
Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until
just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant
(Figure 4E-1E). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.
4E-1U
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed
awash at all times.
d.
Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.
4E-1-2.15
Stopping Off the Sweep.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
a.
Pay out the APC so that the inboard 125-foot stocking of the APC is just forward of roller chock
assembly.
b.
Remove canvas chafing from APC towing stocking.
c.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach towing pendant to the starboard instrumented sheave padeye.
Attach pelican hook to the free end of towing pendant with a 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-1N).
d.
Secure both eyes of towing stocking into the bail of pelican hook. Install a cotter pin with a
tripping lanyard.
e.
Pay out the APC until the towing pendant takes the strain.
4E-1-2.16
Securing Sweep Wire.
Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged.
a.
Stop veering sweep wire when the red band (50 fathoms) are at sweep wire roller chock.
Engage pawl and secure sweep wire drum.
b.
Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.
4E-1V
Figure 4E-1N. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 5 (a) with TB-26)
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-1W
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
NOTE
Connecting magnetic cable, APC, and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished
simultaneously.
c.
Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4E-1P) back-to-back to sweep wire aft of instrumented sheave.
Attach Cutters Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing towing bridle, midway
between 8-inch (type E) snatch block and roller chock assembly.
d.
Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.
After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel
will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.
To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do
not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station
on the 01 level.
e.
Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to
cutters.
f.
Arm Cutters Mk 15.
g.
Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS
MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.
4E-1X
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-1P. Wedge Stop Placement
4E-1Y
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-1-2.17
OPERATION
Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.
Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power
Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the
drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic
minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep
electrician.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
NOTE
Connecting magnetic cable and acoustic cable may be accomplished
simultaneously.
a.
Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area.
b.
Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area.
c.
Minesweep electrician enters the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN
switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer.
d.
Drum area crew enters the drum area.
e.
Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtails
on electrical rubber matting.
f.
Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends.
g.
Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for
insulating cracks and breaks and make repairs as required.
h.
Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box.
i.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
j.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to
terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive too negative) in the terminal box.
k.
Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.
4E-1Z
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
l.
Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and
magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT
VOLTAGE.
m.
Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal
box.
n.
Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush
and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
o.
Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2
inch.
p.
Lower the terminal box cover.
4E-1-2.18
Connecting the Acoustic Power Cable.
Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before
entering drum area.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Measure insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable prior to making
connections to power outlet in accordance with PMS.
The PCU operator shall exit drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
a.
Verify measurement of insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable, with an approved 500
Vdc megohmmeter.
b.
Verify power is secured prior to connecting the APC. This is accomplished by checking the plug
receptacle with a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) that has been checked against a known DC
source to ensure proper operation. The source should be the same type and voltage range as
the circuit to be tested.
c.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range),
checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor in the acoustic power receptacle.
d.
Recheck the multimeter to the known DC source to ensure the multimeter is still working
properly.
e.
Remove inboard end of APC cable from interior of APC cable reel.
4E-1AA
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
f.
Remove protective boot from inboard end of APC cable.
g.
In a straight line, connect APC cable to receptacle and tighten gland nut using T-handle wrench.
h.
Remove cover from acoustic cable receptacle.
i.
After the magnetic and APC cable connections have been made, secure the drum area on the
port and starboard sides with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, creating any entry barrier.
Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.
4E-1-2.19
Departing the Drum Area.
a.
Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety
Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then
departs drum area.
b.
Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker.
c.
Energize PCU, start acoustic device and transfer control to ACU.
4E-1-2.20
Towing the Sweep.
a.
Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck.
b.
Increase headway to sweep speed.
c.
Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves.
d.
Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4E-1Q).
4E-1-2.21
Maneuvering Instructions.
a.
Turns should normally be made towards gear and may be up to 180 degrees. Sweep wire may
sag after ship has turned about 60 degrees. To avoid excessive sagging and consequential risk
of fouling or damaging sweep gear, sweep wire should be shortened in to 425-foot diversion
point during turn and veered again to full scope upon completion of turn. If chafing is evident,
rudder should be eased.
b.
Sweep gear for this configuration is normally streamed to starboard.
4E-1-3
4E-1-3.1
RECOVERY.
Preparation.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
4E-1AB
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-1Q. Sweep Configuration M Mk 5 (a) with Acoustic Device TB-26
Diverted to Starboard
4E-1AC
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-1-3.2
OPERATION
Reentering the Drum Area.
Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power
Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the
drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
a.
Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured.
b.
Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN.
c.
Ensure HPU is secured.
d.
Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
e.
Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch
to the SAFE position.
f.
Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE
POSITION.
4E-1-3.3
Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
a.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
b.
Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position.
c.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg).
d.
Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
e.
Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box
while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to
the safety officer.
f.
Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
4E-1AD
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when
handling cable to prevent burns.
NOTE
Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable, APC, and Cutter Mk 15 may be
accomplished simultaneously.
The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of
cable.
g.
Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box.
h.
Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove inboard pigtail cable ends from terminal box
and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting.
i.
Close and secure, terminal box.
j.
Reinstall protective boots on inboard pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several
wraps of plastic electrical tape.
k.
Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum.
l.
Drum area crew departs drum area.
m.
If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE
signs. Check area for gear adrift.
n.
Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs
drum area.
4E-1AE
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-1-3.4
OPERATION
Disconnecting the Acoustic Power Cable.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
NOTE
Disconnecting acoustic power cable and magnetic minesweep cable may
be accomplished simultaneously.
a.
Using the T-Handle wrench, electrician loosens the APC gland nut at the APC receptacle, and
slides it back off from the bitter end of the cable.
b.
In a straight line pull, remove cable from the receptacle.
c.
Reinstall the APC receptacle non-conducting plug.
d.
Reinstall the APC inboard end protective boot and secure inboard cable end to the interior of the
APC cable reel.
e.
Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, APC IS DISCONNECTED AND
CABLE IS SECURED, DRUM AREA CLEAR and departs the drum area.
f.
If procedure is being performed in conjunction with Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep
Cable, no further action is required.
NOTE
APC handlers may assist other personnel still working in the drum area.
g.
4E-1AF
If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE
signs, check area for gear adrift.
OPERATION
4E-1-3.5
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Cutter Removal.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
a.
Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can
be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable.
b.
Reman fantail.
c.
Request permission to recovery gear.
4E-1-3.6
Coax Cable Recovery.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When
possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the
drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered.
a.
Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit.
b.
Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as
they come within reach.
c.
Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from
hardeyes. Install canvas chafing.
d.
Continue heaving in on coax section.
4E-1-3.7
Sweep Gear Recovery.
a.
Heave in on APC, remove pelican hook, chafe towing stocking.
b.
Heave in on APC, magnetic cable, and sweep wire.
c.
When quarter roller block and T-bar stop are at sweep wire roller chock, stop sweep wire, APC
cable, and magnetic cable.
d.
Remove quarter roller block from diversion chain on sweep wire. Remove T-bar stop.
e.
Ease APC in until 18-inch and 24-inch pendants are just forward of cable roller chock assembly,
remove pendant and chafe stockings.
4E-1AG
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
f.
Continue heaving in on APC and magnetic cables until approximately 50 feet of buoyant section
is outboard of cable roller chock assembly.
g.
Inspect cables for cuts, abrasions, and cracks as cables come onboard, making minor repairs to
the cables per NAVSEA SW570-F0-MMO-040 job sheet.
4E-1-3.8
Short Leg Electrode Recovery/Removal.
a.
Heave in on short leg electrode and remove electrode floats.
b.
Pay out coax cable, faking K-4 electrode on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a clear
work area.
c.
Remove CK/P insulating sleeve.
d.
Disconnect and remove K-4 electrode from K-4 blank pigtail.
e.
Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail:
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank pigtail at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide P/B insulating boot over K-4 blank.
(4)
Slide two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end of boot
about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate
clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-1R).
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
f.
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers
of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side.
Continue heaving in on S section.
4E-1-3.9
Long Leg Electrode Recovery.
NOTE
Floats may be left on long leg electrode if desired.
a.
Heave in on long leg electrode and remove position buoy.
b.
Secure hold-back line to outboard end of long leg electrode and keep a strain on it while reeling
all of K-4 electrode onto magnetic cable drum. Secure long leg to drum with this line.
4E-1-3.10
O-Type Gear Recovery.
a.
Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane.
b.
Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle.
4E-1AH
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-1R. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted
c.
Heave in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock.
d.
Disengage sweep wire drum.
4E-1-3.11
Size 1 Float Recovery.
a.
Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard.
b.
Recover float pendant with a boat hook.
c.
Heave in on float pendant until float nose line is within reach.
d.
Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane, and heave in until float is in lifting position
under stern crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting
bail of float.
e.
Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook.
f.
Remove emergency recovery pendant.
g.
Stow float
4E-1-3.12
Otter Recovery.
a.
Train appropriate articulated stern crane outboard over otter.
b.
Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter.
c.
Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4E-1D) or storage rack on fantail.
4E-1AJ
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
d.
Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead.
e.
Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.
4E-1-3.13
a.
Recovery of TB-26 and Float.
Continue recovering APC until 50-foot towing stocking is just aft of cable roller chock.
Ensure nose line is clear of APC and inhaul pendant.
b.
Detach nose line from APC and pass through stern chock. Tend around mooring bitts. Take
slack out of nose line until it takes strain.
c.
Train articulated stern crane outboard and, with stern crane head inboard, detach inhaul
pendant from APC. Attach inhaul pendant to crane whip.
d.
Heave in on APC and articulated stern crane whip and inhaul wire connection keeping slack out
of float nose line.
e.
Heave in on inhaul pendant until weight of Acoustic Device TB-26 is suspended by crane and
float is properly cradled.
Ensure float is properly seated in its cradle before hoisting device from
water.
Ensure enough APC is streamed to allow acoustic device and float to be
recovered on deck.
f.
Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 simultaneously and train gear inboard and
forward, clearing acoustic cable and nose line from stern obstructions. Slack nose line as
necessary.
g.
Stow acoustic device and float on deck.
h.
Notify bridge all gear is clear.
4E-1-3.14
Securing Gear.
a.
Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS.
b.
Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.
c.
Ground isolate S-Cable, if cable is being stowed, with no further sweep exercises:
4E-1AK
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around S terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug.
(4)
Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about
1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so
securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-1S).
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-1S. S-Cable Booted
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
d.
4E-1-4
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
Using hold-back line, secure outboard end of S-Cable to drum.
RECOVERY OF DAMAGED (CUT OR PARTED) GEAR.
A mine could be fouled in the gear; proceed with caution.
4E-1-4.1
Preparation.
a.
Lead a recovery wire from a free winch drum or the gypsy head on sweep wire winch, through
sweep wire roller chock, and outboard of taffrail to recovery position on fantail.
b.
Approach float upwind or up current, whichever has greatest effect.
4E-1AL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
NOTE
Wind will generally have more effect than current.
c.
Stop the screw on recovery side.
d.
Hook float with a grapnel or boat hook and haul float alongside.
e.
Hook softeye quick recovery pendant and pull pendant free from flagstaff socket. Shackle
recovery pendant to recovery wire.
f.
Hook crane whip into float lifting pad and take a strain on recovery wire with winch.
g.
Heave in on recovery wire and crane whip simultaneously, keeping strain on recovery wire so
weight of sweep gear is not taken by crane.
h.
Hoist float and trip pelican hook to release float pendant. Stow float.
i.
Continue heaving in on recovery wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is up close to sweep wire
roller chock.
j.
Utilizing articulated stern crane, stow otter in the quick recovery hook in ready release position
or on stowage rack on fantail. Attach safety chain.
k.
If severed end of the sweep wire is in sight, recover by hand.
l.
If severed end of the sweep wire is not in sight, secure a cable grip on severed sweep wire.
m.
Remove End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly and recover sweep wire.
4E-1-5
RECOVERY OF PARTED GEAR USING RIGID HULL INFLATABLE BOAT (RHIB).
a.
Approach float from downwind.
b.
Retrieve the float nose line and attach messenger line (if required). If possible, recovery should
be done without RHIB.
c.
Haul in messenger line (if used) with the winch/gypsy head until the float is in lifting position. In
either method of recovery, when float is in a lifting position, haul it aboard and stow.
4E-1AM
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4E-2
M MK 5(A) TB-27 (DIVERTED) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of
this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and
injury or death to personnel.
The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure
all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is
followed.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded
component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Block, quarter roller (type A), NM, with swivel eye
(3940-00-722-8995)
Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM
(3940-00-368-7551) (4)
Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM
(3940-00-368-7552)
Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342)
Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356)
Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342)
(4)
Buoy, position, NM with flagstaff (2050-00-272-2423)
Cable, acoustic power (APC) (per Job Sheet 4A-5)
(1075-00-782-9881)
Cable Assembly, electrode, K-4 (per Job Sheet 4A-6)
(1075-00-262-1980) (2)
Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping,
coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337)
Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping,
S (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327)
Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM
(with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906)
Clamp, hose, 1-9/16- to 2-1/2-inch
(4730-00-204-3491) (2)
Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460)
(2)
Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132)
(4)
Clip, wire rope, 5/16-inch, NM (4030-00-269-9761)
Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-265-0677)
Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-332-5834) (2)
Device, acoustic, TB-27, NM (1075-01-368-2483)
Flag, positioning buoy, red and black, 18- x 18-inch
(8345-00-233-4111)
Float, cellular rubber (1075-00-372-6128) (12)
Float, type O, size 1, NM, moored (1), acoustic(1)
(per Job Sheet 4A-3) (1075-01-371-0568)
Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye
(4030-00-290-6420)
Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x
3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638)
Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986)
Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet
4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280)
Light, marker, distress (6230-00-067-5209) (2)
Line, securing (electrode float-center), 21-thread x
5-foot, single leg, manila (each end whipped) 1
Line, towing, position buoy, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot,
single leg, nylon (hardeye splice one end, other
end whipped) 1
Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon,
hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1
Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) (4)
See footnotes at end of table.
4E-2A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS (Continued)
Pendant, device, towing/stopper (acoustic), 1/2-inch
x 3-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye
each end) (2) 1
Pendant, diversion, inboard (acoustic), 2-1/2-inch x
18-inch, single leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, diversion, outboard (acoustic), 2-1/2-inch x
24-inch, single leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, diversion, special (acoustic), 2-1/2-inch x
6-foot, single leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as
required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL)
(hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM,
wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, float (acoustic), 1/2-inch x length as
required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL)
(hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot,
NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one
end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1
Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, NM, wire
rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, position buoy, chafing, 5/16-inch x 5-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye one
end, other end whipped) 1
Ring, 3-inch ID (5365-01-346-8057)
Ring, 4-inch ID (5365-00-281-2187)
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch
(5305-00-226-9204) (12)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM,
1/2-inch (4030-00-270-5482) (3)
5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (16)
Sleeve (CK/P) (5970-01-519-3184)
Stop, T-bar (1075-01-233-4952)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye outboard
end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-302-9008)
Swivel, link-to-link, NM, 3/8-inch (4030-00-269-9767)
Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505)
(24)
Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as
required)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949)
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385)
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652)
Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737) (1)
Electrician Mate Tool Kit
Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) *
Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251)
Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252)
Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643)
*
1
Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread)
(whipped each end)
Megohmmeter, 500 Vdc
Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range)
Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176)
Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021)
Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572)
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Wrench, T-handle (5120-01-406-6940)
Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb
Hazardous Material.
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4E-2-1
RIGGING.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
4E-2-1.1
Preparation.
a.
Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
personnel for minesweeping operations.
b.
Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational
order.
4E-2B
Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential
OPERATION
4E-2-1.2
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Float, Kite, and Sweep Wire Preparation.
For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on
water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required.
Total length cannot exceed 20 feet.
a.
Prepare two size 1 floats in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3. One float to be used with Acoustic
Device TB-27, other size 1 float is for O gear (moored configuration) and may utilize 10-foot float
pendants.
b.
Prepare size 1 kite as an otter (starboard configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1.
c.
Prepare starboard sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.
4E-2-1.3
a.
4E-2-1.4
APC Preparation.
Prepare APC in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Preparation.
a.
Prepare towing stocking in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.
b.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect 3-inch ID ring to second and fourth after holes in acoustic
device towing and hoisting plate. Use Table 4E-2A for depth and float pendant correlation.
Connect float pendant to ring (Figure 4E-2A).
c.
Lead outboard end of APC aft through cable roller chock assembly then, pull cable outboard,
clear of all obstructions, and forward to acoustic device. Connect cable to Acoustic Device
TB-27. If required, apply a light coat of silicone grease.
d.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect towing pendant to hardeye of towing stocking on APC.
Connect pendant’s free end to device towing and hoisting plate. Wrap 3-foot towing pendant
and shackles with chafing gear (Figure 4E-2A).
Ensure inhaul pendant is connected aft of float pendant. Failure to do so
could cause damage to float pendant and inhaul pendant.
e.
Pass hardeye of inhaul pendant down through float fairlead tube to 3-inch ID ring and attach with
a 5/8-inch shackle with screw pin end on 3-inch ID ring behind float pendant connection.
f.
Shackle softeye of inhaul pendant to crane whip, using a 1/2-inch shackle. Figure 4E-2B shows
acoustic device in a cradled position.
g.
Take in on crane whip until inhaul pendant is wound on cable drum.
h.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach tail line to tail of size 1 float.
i.
Deck test acoustic device per Planned Maintenance System.
4E-2C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Table 4E-2A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation
DEPTH TO CENTER OF DIAPHRAGM
(FEET)
FLOAT PENDANT LENGTH
(FEET)
20
13
22
15
24
17
25
18
26
19
27
20
28
21
29
22
30
23
Figure 4E-2A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing
4E-2D
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-2B. Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled
4E-2-1.5
a.
O-Type Components Preparation.
Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly to Otter.
(1)
Engage starboard sweep wire drum.
(2)
Attach 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain, with long link in the middle, between starboard sweep wire
and a 60-foot (RHL) otter pendant, using 5/8-inch shackles. Five interlocking 5/8-inch
shackles may be used in lieu of chain. Reel in on starboard sweep wire drum.
(3)
Lead 60-foot (RHL) otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave; then through
sweep wire roller chock assembly.
(4)
Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between otter bridle and otter pendant (Figure 4E-2C).
(5)
Connect 10-foot float pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle.
4E-2E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-2C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Starboard Configuration)
b.
4E-2-1.6
Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position.
(1)
Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter.
(2)
Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle
is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4E-2D).
(3)
Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secure position and
secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion.
(4)
Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane
whip.
(5)
Rotate crane forward.
(6)
Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation.
a.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented
sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block
padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4E-2E).
b.
Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure
block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using
5/8-inch shackles.
4E-2F
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-2D. Otter in Ready Release Position
4E-2-1.7
Position Buoy Preparation.
a.
Insert a flagstaff with a red and black horizontally striped flag attached into socket on position
buoy attached to long leg electrode. Attach distress marker light(s) (Figure 4E-2F).
b.
Pass wire chafing pendant through tow hole in buoy. Secure pendant to position buoy with a
5/16-inch wire rope clip.
c.
Attach a 3/8-inch link-to-link swivel to free end of pendant, using a 1/2-inch shackle.
d.
Connect hardeye of towing line to free end of 3/8-inch link-to-link swivel, using a 1/2-inch
shackle.
e.
Lead towing line outboard over taffrail and back aboard through cable roller chock assembly.
4E-2-1.8
a.
Electrode Floats.
Splice 5-foot (21-thread) pendant to both ends of each float.
4E-2G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-2E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly
4E-2-1.9
K-4 Electrode Preparation.
To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewed in a canvas
chafing sleeve.
a.
Prepare K-4 electrode in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-6.
4E-2-1.10
Long Leg Preparation.
a.
Lead a K-4 electrode to the outboard end of the S-Cable.
b.
Insulate S/K-4 connection and fitting as follows:
(1)
4E-2H
Place inboard end of long leg K-4 electrode in vicinity of the S-Cable connection.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-2F. Rigging Position Buoy
(2)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(3)
Connect the long leg K-4 electrode to the outboard S-Cable using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x
1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers.
Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(4)
Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Apply two
layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape, continuing tape several inches past the
connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
c.
Heave in on magnetic reel, stacking K-4 electrode until outboard end is clear to work on and
positioned for streaming.
d.
Tape outboard electrode terminal lug with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black plastic tape and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
4E-2J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-2-1.11
OPERATION
Special Pendant Assembly Preparation.
a.
Using 5/8-inch shackles (Figure 4E-2G), attach 18-inch and 24-inch pendants to 4-inch ID ring.
Attach 5/8-inch shackle to free end of each pendant.
b.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 2-1/2-inch x 6-foot nylon pendant to 4-inch ID ring, and free end
of pendant to a quarter roller block.
4E-2-2
4E-2-2.1
LAUNCHING/STREAMING.
Streaming Preparations.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
d.
Request permission to stream gear.
4E-2-2.2
Launching/Streaming Float and Acoustic Device TB-27.
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify
that the photo cell is working.
a.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.
b.
Pass nose line through chock and tend around mooring bitts. Heave in to remove slack from
nose line.
c.
Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 (Figure 4E-2H, View A) simultaneously training
gear outboard to position gear for launch. Ensure float nose line and APC are clear of all deck
obstructions.
d.
Lower cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 into water. Slack nose line enough to permit
float to ride astern.
e.
Continue to lower Acoustic Device TB-27 until it is supported by float. Move crane head until
inboard and continue to pay out inhaul pendant until it can be disconnected from crane whip.
Disconnect inhaul pendant.
f.
Bring inhaul pendant aboard through roller chock assembly. Attach inhaul pendant to towing
stocking at 50-foot mark on APC, using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through one eye of towing
stocking.
g.
Slack off on nose line until gear is being towed by APC (Figure 4E-2H, View B).
h.
Bring nose line through the roller chock assembly. Attach nose line to towing stocking at 50-foot
mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through free eye of towing stocking.
4E-2K
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-2G. Special Pendant Assembly and Chain for Diversion Rigging
4E-2L
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-2H. Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-27
4E-2M
OPERATION
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
i.
Pay out APC until first hardeye of diversion towing stocking is forward of cable roller chock
assembly.
j.
Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.
4E-2-2.3
Launching/Streaming O-Type Gear.
a.
Ensure ship’s speed is 4 knots.
b.
Request permission to put gear to the rail.
c.
Ensure nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-2J).
d.
Lead nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock.
e.
Tend line to bitt.
f.
Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, and train outboard to position
float at rail.
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, install batteries and verify that
the photo cell is working.
g.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility (Figure 4E-2B).
h.
Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and float pendant and nose line are clear of
ship and obstructions.
i.
Connect float pendant(s), if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the
outboard corner of otter.
j.
Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE.
k.
Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook
securing otter (Figure 4E-2D). Launch float and slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.
4E-2-2.4
Tripping the Otter.
a.
Trip quick release hook (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes strain.
b.
Pay out sweep wire under power until long link of chain is just outboard of sweep roller chock
assembly.
c.
Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until
the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope). Check for proper diversion.
d.
Connect free ends of 18-inch and 24-inch pendants of special pendant assembly to forward and
after diversion stocking hardeyes, respectively, on APC (Figure 4E-2G).
e.
Pass quarter roller block of special pendant assembly aft of cable roller chock assembly, and
mount on sweep wire. Mouse quarter roller block pin.
f.
Return and restow articulated stern crane.
4E-2N
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-2J. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)
4E-2P
OPERATION
4E-2-2.5
a.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Streaming to Full Scope.
Simultaneously pay out sweep wire to 50 fathoms (1 red mark) and APC to the inboard 125-foot
stocking.
Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged.
b.
4E-2-2.6
Engage pawl and secure sweep wire drum.
Streaming of Outboard (Long Leg) Electrode.
a.
Lead long leg electrode from magnetic cable drum and out through the level wind assembly,
then out cable roller chock assembly.
b.
Ensure K-4 electrode terminal lug is properly taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection. Ensure all exposed
metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
c.
Pay out to 50 feet.
4E-2-2.7
Attachment of Buoy and Floats.
a.
Attach first electrode float (Figure 4E-2K), then attach towing line of position buoy inboard of first
float.
b.
Turn distress marker lights on.
c.
Pay out electrode and launch position buoy.
Figure 4E-2K. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode
4E-2Q
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
d.
Continue paying out and attach four more floats seven feet apart (Figure 4E-2L).
e.
Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float.
4E-2-2.8
S/K-4 Connector Inspection.
a.
Continue paying out long leg electrode until S to K-4 connection is forward of cable roller chock
assembly.
b.
Ensure S/K-4 connection and fitting is wrapped with two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing
insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction
tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed
metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
4E-2-2.9
Installation of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode.
a.
Continue streaming S-Cable. Inspect for insulation breaks, inspect sleeves for watertight
integrity and condition of tape. Repair as required.
b.
Continue streaming S-Cable until outboard short leg breakout and K-4 blank pigtail is forward of
cable roller chock assembly.
c.
Remove boot from K-4 blank pigtail.
d.
Lead a K-4 electrode end to the K-4 blank pigtail.
e.
Attach K-4 electrode to K-4 blank pigtail (Figure 4E-2M).
connection by installing a CK/P insulating sleeve as follows:
4E-2R
Insulate and waterproof the
(1)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(2)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the CK/P
insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity.
(3)
Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over large end of sleeve and two 3-1/16- to 4-inch
hose clamps over small end of sleeve.
(4)
Slip CK/P insulating sleeve over K-4 electrode and slide back out of way.
(5)
Connect terminals of K-4 electrode and K-4 blank pigtail using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x
1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers.
Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline
of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(6)
Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of CK/P insulating sleeve.
(7)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(8)
Slide CK/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
(9)
Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with
outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing
screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.
Figure 4E-2L. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-2S
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-2M. K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
f.
Place ten turns of 21-thread line lashing around K-4 electrode and S-Cable to relieve towing
strain on K-4 blank pigtail.
g.
Heave in on magnetic cable until outboard end of short leg electrode is clear to work on and
positioned for streaming.
h.
Tape the outboard end of K-4 electrode with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all
exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
4E-2T
OPERATION
4E-2-2.10
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Streaming of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode.
a.
Ensure K-4 electrode outboard terminal lug is taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side.
Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
b.
Pay out 50 feet of the short leg electrode
4E-2-2.11
Attachment of Short Leg Electrode Floats.
a.
Attach first electrode float (Figure 4E-2K).
b.
Continue paying out and attach four additional floats seven feet apart.
c.
Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float (Figure 4E-2L).
4E-2-2.12
K-4 Blank Pigtail/K-4 Connector Inspection.
a.
Continue paying out short leg electrode until K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection is forward of cable
roller chock assembly.
b.
Ensure K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection and fitting is wrapped with two layers rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side.
Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
c.
Ensure ten turns of 21-thread line lashing is around the K-4 blank pigtail and S-Cable to relieve
towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail.
4E-2-2.13
Streaming Coax Cable to Full Scope.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
a.
Continue paying out coax cable.
b.
Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock
assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with
SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4E-2-2.14
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection.
a.
Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable.
b.
Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable
with 5/8-inch shackles.
c.
Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until
just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant
(Figure 4E-2E). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.
4E-2U
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed
awash at all times.
d.
Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.
4E-2-2.15
Stopping Off the Sweep.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
a.
Pay out the APC so that the inboard 125-foot stocking of the APC is just forward of roller chock
assembly.
b.
Remove canvas chafing from APC towing stocking.
c.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach towing pendant to the starboard instrumented sheave padeye.
Attach pelican hook to the free end of towing pendant with a 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-2N).
d.
Secure both eyes of towing stocking into the bail of pelican hook. Install a cotter pin with a
tripping lanyard.
e.
Pay out the APC until the towing pendant takes the strain.
4E-2-2.16
Securing Sweep Wire.
Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged.
a.
Stop veering sweep wire when the red band (50 fathoms) are at the sweep wire roller chock.
Engage pawls and secure sweep wire drum.
b.
Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.
4E-2V
Figure 4E-2N. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 6(a) with TB-27)
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-2W
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
NOTE
Connecting magnetic cable, APC, and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished
simultaneously.
c.
Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4E-2P) back-to-back to sweep wire aft of instrumented sheave.
Attach Cutters Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing towing bridle, midway
between 8-inch (type E) snatch block and roller chock assembly.
d.
Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.
After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel
will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.
To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do
not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station
on the 01 level.
e.
Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to
cutters.
f.
Arm Cutters Mk 15.
g.
Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS
MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.
4E-2X
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-2P. Wedge Stop Placement
4E-2Y
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-2-2.17
OPERATION
Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.
Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power
Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the
drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic
minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep
electrician.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
NOTE
Connecting magnetic cable and acoustic cable may be accomplished
simultaneously.
a.
Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area.
b.
Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area.
c.
Minesweep electricians enter the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN
switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer.
d.
Drum area crew enters the drum area.
e.
Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtails
on electrical rubber matting.
f.
Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends.
g.
Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for
insulating cracks and breaks and make repairs as required.
h.
Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box.
i.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
j.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to
terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive to negative) in the terminal box.
k.
Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.
4E-2Z
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
l.
Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and
magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT
VOLTAGE.
m.
Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal
box.
n.
Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush
and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
o.
Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2
inch.
p.
Lower the terminal box cover.
4E-2-2.18
Connecting the Acoustic Power Cable.
Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before
entering drum area.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Measure insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable prior to making
connections to power outlet in accordance with PMS.
The PCU operator shall exit drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
a.
Verify measurement of insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable, with an approved 500
Vdc megohmmeter.
b.
Verify power is secured prior to connecting the APC. This is accomplished by checking the plug
receptacle with a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) that has been checked against a known DC
source to ensure proper operation. The source should be the same type and voltage range as
the circuit to be tested.
c.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range),
checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor in the acoustic power receptacle.
d.
Recheck the multimeter to the known DC source to ensure the multimeter is still working
properly.
e.
Remove inboard end of APC cable from interior of APC cable reel.
4E-2AA
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
f.
Remove protective boot from inboard end of APC cable.
g.
In a straight line, connect APC cable to receptacle and tighten gland nut using T-handle wrench.
h.
Remove cover from acoustic cable receptacle.
i.
After the magnetic and APC cable connections have been made, secure the drum area on the
port and starboard sides with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, creating any entry barrier.
Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.
4E-2-2.19
Departing the Drum Area.
a.
Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety
Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then
departs drum area.
b.
Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker.
c.
Energize PCU, start acoustic device and transfer control to ACU.
4E-2-2.20
Towing the Sweep.
a.
Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck.
b.
Increase headway to sweep speed.
c.
Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves.
d.
Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4E-2Q).
4E-2-2.21
Maneuvering Instructions.
a.
Turns should normally be made toward gear and may be up to 180 degrees. Sweep wire may
sag after ship has turned about 60 degrees. To avoid excessive sagging and consequential risk
of fouling or damaging sweep gear, sweep wire should be shortened in to 425-foot diversion
point during turn and veered again to full scope upon completion of turn. If chafing is evident,
rudder should be eased.
b.
Sweep gear for this configuration is normally streamed to starboard.
4E-2-3
4E-2-3.1
RECOVERY.
Preparation.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind and sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
4E-2AB
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-2Q. Sweep Configuration M Mk 5(a) with Acoustic Device TB-27
Diverted to Starboard
4E-2AC
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-2-3.2
OPERATION
Reentering the Drum Area.
Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power
Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the
drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
a.
Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured.
b.
Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN.
c.
Ensure HPU is secured.
d.
Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
e.
Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch
to the SAFE position.
f.
Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE
POSITION.
4E-2-3.3
Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
a.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
b.
Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position.
c.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg).
d.
Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
4E-2AD
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
e.
Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box
while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to
the safety officer.
f.
Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when
handling cable to prevent burns.
NOTE
Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable, APC, and Cutter Mk 15 may be
accomplished simultaneously.
The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of
cable.
g.
Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box.
h.
Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove inboard pigtail cable ends from terminal box
and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting.
i.
Close and secure, terminal box.
j.
Reinstall protective boots on inboard pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several
wraps of plastic electrical tape.
k.
Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum.
l.
Drum area crew departs drum area.
m.
If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE
signs. Check area for gear adrift.
n.
Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs
drum area.
4E-2AE
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-2-3.4
OPERATION
Disconnecting the Acoustic Power Cable.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
NOTE
Disconnecting acoustic power cable and magnetic minesweep cable may
be accomplished simultaneously.
a.
Using the T-Handle wrench, electrician loosens the APC gland nut at the APC receptacle, and
slides it back off from the bitter end of the cable.
b.
In a straight line pull, remove cable from the receptacle.
c.
Reinstall the APC receptacle non-conducting plug.
d.
Reinstall the APC inboard end protective boot and secure inboard cable end to the interior of the
APC cable reel.
e.
Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, APC IS DISCONNECTED AND
CABLE IS SECURED, DRUM AREA CLEAR and departs drum area.
f.
If procedure is being performed in conjunction with Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep
Cable, no further action is required.
NOTE
APC handlers may assist other personnel still working in the drum area.
g.
4E-2AF
If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE
signs. Check area for gear adrift.
OPERATION
4E-2-3.5
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Cutter Removal.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
a.
Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can
be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable.
b.
Reman fantail.
c.
Request permission to recovery gear.
4E-2-3.6
Coax Cable Recovery.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When
possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the
drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered.
a.
Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit.
b.
Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as
they come within reach.
c.
Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from
hardeyes. Install canvas chafing.
d.
Continue heaving in on coax section.
4E-2-3.7
Sweep Gear Recovery.
a.
Heave in on APC, remove pelican hook, and chafe towing stocking.
b.
Heave in on APC, magnetic cable, and sweep wire.
c.
When quarter roller block and T-bar stop are at sweep wire roller chock, stop sweep wire drum,
APC, and magnetic cable.
d.
Remove quarter roller block from diversion chain on sweep wire. Remove T-bar stop.
e.
Ease APC in until 18-inch and 24-inch pendants are just forward of cable roller chock assembly
and remove pendant and chafe stockings.
4E-2AG
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
f.
Continue heaving in on APC and magnetic cable until approximately 50 feet of buoyant section
is outboard of cable roller chock assembly.
g.
Inspect cables for cuts, abrasions, and cracks as cables come onboard, making minor repairs to
the cables per NAVSEA SW570-F0-MMO-040 Job Sheet.
4E-2-3.8
Short Leg Electrode Recovery/Removal.
a.
Heave in on short leg electrode and remove electrode floats.
b.
Pay out coax cable, faking K-4 electrode on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a clear
work area.
c.
Remove CK/P insulating sleeve.
d.
Disconnect and remove K-4 electrode from K-4 blank.
e.
Ground isolate K-4 blank:
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness
around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide P/B insulating boot over K-4 blank.
(4)
Slide hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with
outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws
on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-2R).
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
f.
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
Continue heaving in on S section.
4E-2-3.9
Long Leg Electrode Recovery.
NOTE
Floats may be left on the long leg electrode if desired.
a.
Heave in on long leg electrode and remove position buoy.
b.
Secure hold-back line to outboard end of long leg electrode and keep a strain on it while reeling
all of K-4 electrode onto magnetic cable drum. Secure long leg to drum with this line.
4E-2-3.10
O-Type Gear Recovery.
a.
Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane.
b.
Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle.
4E-2AH
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-2R. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted
c.
Heave in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock.
d.
Disengage sweep wire drum.
4E-2-3.11
Size 1 Float Recovery.
a.
Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard.
b.
Recover float pendant with a boat hook.
c.
Heave in on float pendant until float nose line is within reach.
d.
Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane and heave in until float is in lifting position
under stern crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting
bail of float.
e.
Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook.
f.
Remove emergency recovery pendant.
g.
Stow float.
4E-2-3.12
Otter Recovery.
a.
Train appropriate articulated stern crane outboard over otter.
b.
Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter.
c.
Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4E-2D) or storage rack on fantail.
4E-2AJ
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
d.
Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead.
e.
Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.
4E-2-3.13
a.
Recovery of TB-27 and Float.
Continue recovering APC until 50-foot towing stocking is just aft of cable stern roller chock.
Ensure nose line is clear of APC and inhaul pendant.
b.
Detach nose line from APC and pass through stern chock. Tend around mooring bitts. Take
slack out of nose line until it takes strain.
c.
Train articulated stern crane outboard and, with stern crane head inboard, detach inhaul
pendant from APC. Attach inhaul pendant to crane whip.
d.
Heave in on APC and articulated stern crane whip and inhaul wire connection keeping slack out
of float nose line.
e.
Heave in on inhaul pendant until weight of Acoustic Device TB-27 is suspended by crane and
float is properly cradled.
Ensure float is properly seated in its cradle before hoisting device from
water.
Ensure enough APC is streamed to allow acoustic device and float to be
recovered on deck.
f.
Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 simultaneously and train gear inboard and
forward, clearing acoustic cable and nose line from stern obstructions. Slack nose line as
necessary.
g.
Stow acoustic device and float on deck.
h.
Notify bridge all gear is clear.
4E-2-3.14
Securing Gear.
a.
Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS.
b.
Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.
c.
Ground isolate S-Cable, if cable is being stowed, with no further sweep exercises.
4E-2AK
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around S terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug.
(4)
Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about
1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so
securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-2S).
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-2S. S-Cable Booted
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
d.
4E-2-4
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
Using hold-back line, secure outboard end of S-Cable to drum.
RECOVERY OF DAMAGED (CUT OR PARTED) GEAR.
A mine could be fouled in the gear; proceed with caution.
4E-2-4.1
Preparation.
a.
Lead a recovery wire from a free winch drum or the gypsy head on sweep wire winch, through
sweep wire roller chock, and outboard of taffrail to recovery position on fantail.
b.
Approach float upwind or upcurrent, whichever has greatest effect.
4E-2AL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
NOTE
Wind will generally have more effect than current.
c.
Stop the screw on recovery side.
d.
Hook float with a grapnel or boat hook and haul float alongside.
e.
Hook softeye quick recovery pendant and pull pendant free from flagstaff socket. Shackle
recovery pendant to recovery wire.
f.
Hook crane whip into float lifting pad and take a strain on recovery wire with winch.
g.
Heave in on recovery wire and crane whip simultaneously, keeping strain on recovery wire so
weight of sweep gear is not taken by crane.
h.
Hoist float and trip pelican hook to release float pendant. Stow float.
i.
Continue heaving in on recovery wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is up close to sweep wire
roller chock.
j.
Utilizing articulated stern crane, stow otter in the quick recovery hook in ready release position
or on stowage rack on fantail. Attach safety chain.
k.
If severed end of the sweep wire is in sight, recover by hand.
l.
If severed end of the sweep wire is not in sight, secure a cable grip on severed sweep wire.
m.
Remove End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly and recover sweep wire.
4E-2-5
RECOVERY OF PARTED GEAR USING RIGID HULL INFLATABLE BOAT (RHIB).
a.
Approach float from downwind.
b.
Retrieve the float nose line and attach messenger line (if required). If possible, recovery should
be done without RHIB.
c.
Haul in messenger line (if used) with the winch/gypsy head until the float is in lifting position. In
either method of recovery, when float is in a lifting position, haul it aboard and stow.
4E-2AM
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4E-3
M MK 6(A) TB-26 (ASTERN) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of
this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and
injury or death to personnel.
The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure
all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is
followed.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded
component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Block, quarter roller (type A), NM, with swivel eye
(3940-00-722-8995)
Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM
(3940-00-368-7551) (4)
Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM
(3940-00-368-7552)
Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342)
Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356)
Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342)
(4)
Cable, acoustic power (APC), 1,650-foot (per Job
Sheet 4A-5) (1075-00-782-9881)
Cable Assembly, electrode, K-4 (per Job Sheet 4A-6)
(1075-00-262-1980) (2)
Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping,
coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337)
Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping,
S (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327)
Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM
(with long leg in middle) (4010-00-171-8906)
Clamp, hose, 1-9/16- to 2-1/2-inch
(4730-00-204-3491) (2)
Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460)
(2)
Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132)
(4)
Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-265-0677)
Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) (2)
(1075-00-332-5834)
Device, acoustic, TB-26 (1075-01-368-2482)
Float, cellular rubber (1075-00-372-6128) (12)
Float, type O, size 0, NM (acoustic) (per Job Sheet
4A-3) (1075-01-357-9948)
Float, type O, size 1, NM (moored) (per Job Sheet
4A-3) (1075-01-371-0568)
Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye
(4030-00-290-6420)
Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x
3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638)
Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986)
Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet
4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280)
Line, securing, 21-thread x 40-foot (whipped each
end) 1
Line, securing (electrode float-center), 21-thread x
5-foot, single leg, manila (each end whipped) 1
Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon,
hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1
Lug, lamitex (1075-00-372-6221)
Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) (6)
See footnotes at end of table.
4E-3A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS (Continued)
Pendant, device, towing/stopper (acoustic), 1/2-inch
x 3-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye
each end) (2) 1
Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as
required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL)
(hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM,
wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, float (acoustic), 1/2-inch x length as
required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL)
(hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot,
NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one
end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1
Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, wire
rope (LHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, roller block, 2-1/2-inch x 3-foot, single leg,
nylon (hardeye each end) 1
Ring, 3-inch ID, NM (5365-01-346-8057)
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch
(5305-00-226-9204) (4)
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch
(5305-00-226-9208) (2)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM,
1/2-inch (4030-00-270-5482)
5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (29)
3/4-inch (4030-00-270-5484) (5)
7/8-inch (4030-00-270-5485)
1-inch (4030-00-270-5486)
Sleeve (CK/P) (5970-01-519-3184)
Stop, T-bar (1075-01-233-4952)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard
end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611)
Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505)
(12)
Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as
required)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949)
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385)
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652)
Chain, safety (1075-00-599-6737) (2)
Electrician Mate Tool Kit
Gauge, pressure (0 to 30 psi)
Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) *
Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251)
Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252)
Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643)
*
1
Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread)
(whipped each end)
Megohmmeter, 500 Vdc
Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range)
Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) *
Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176)
Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021)
Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572)
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Wrench, T-handle (5120-00-972-0490)
Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb
Hazardous Material.
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4E-3-1
RIGGING.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
4E-3-1.1
Preparation.
a.
Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
personnel for minesweeping operations.
b.
Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational
order.
4E-3B
Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential
OPERATION
4E-3-1.2
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Float, Kite, and Sweep Wire Preparation.
For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on
water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required.
Total length cannot exceed 20 feet.
a.
Prepare size 1 and size 0 floats in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3. Size 0 float used with
Acoustic Device TB-26. Size 1 float is for O gear (moored configuration) and may utilize 10-foot
float pendants.
b.
Prepare size 1 kite as an otter (port configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1.
c.
Prepare port sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.
4E-3-1.3
a.
4E-3-1.4
APC Preparation.
Prepare APC in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Preparation.
a.
Deck test acoustic device 24 hours prior to streaming in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.
Upon completion of test, pressurize device to 10 psi for 24 hours to ensure device is air tight. If
more than a 1 psi loss of pressure is observed (indicated by soapy-water bubbles), release all air
pressure and take corrective action. A 20 °F drop in temperature will have a 1 psi drop in
pressure. If no loss of pressure is observed and device is to be launched soon thereafter, retain
air pressure in housing until final pressurizing is accomplished; otherwise, release all pressure.
b.
Prepare towing stocking in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.
c.
Using a 3/4-inch shackle, shackle 3-inch ID ring to aft hole in acoustic device towing and hoisting
plate using Table 4E-3A for depth and float pendant correlation. Connect float pendant to ring
(Figure 4E-3A).
d.
Lead outboard end of APC aft through cable roller chock assembly; then, pull cable outboard,
clear of all obstructions, and forward to acoustic device. Connect cable to Acoustic Device
TB-26. If required, apply a light coat of silicone grease.
e.
Using 3/4-inch shackle, connect one end of device towing pendant to hardeye of towing stocking
at 6-foot mark on APC. Connect pendant’s free end to device towing pad (Figure 4E-3A). Wrap
3-foot towing pendant and shackles with chafing gear.
Ensure inhaul pendant is connected aft of float pendant. Failure to do so
could cause damage to float pendant and inhaul pendant.
f.
Pass hardeye of inhaul pendant down through float fairlead tube to 3-inch ID ring and attach with
a 3/4-inch shackle with screw pin end on 3-inch ID ring behind float pendant connection (Figure
4E-3A).
g.
Shackle softeye of inhaul pendant to crane whip, using a 1/2-inch shackle. Figure 4E-3B shows
acoustic device in a cradled position.
4E-3C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Table 4E-3A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure
1
DEPTH TO CENTER OF
DIAPHRAGM (FEET)
PENDANT LENGTH SIZE 0
FLOAT (FEET)
AIR
PRESSURES (PSI)1
20
13
8.0
22
15
8.5
24
17
9.3
25
18
10.1
26
19
10.5
27
20
10.8
28
21
11.2
29
22
11.5
30
23
11.8
These air pressures for the TB-26 rising when streamed through the water.
Figure 4E-3A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing
4E-3D
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-3B. Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled
h.
Take in on crane whip until inhaul pendant is wound on cable drum.
i.
Using 5/8-inch shackle, attach tail line to tail of size 0 float.
j.
Upon successful completion of air leak test, pressurize device to operating depth (Table 4E-3A).
4E-3-1.5
a.
O-Type Components Preparation.
Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly to Otter.
(1)
Engage port sweep wire drum.
(2)
Attach 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain, with long link in the middle, between sweep wire and 60-foot
(LHL) otter pendant, using 5/8-inch shackles. Five interlocking 5/8-inch shackles may be
used in lieu of chain. Reel in on port sweep wire drum.
(3)
Lead 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave; then through
sweep wire roller chock assembly.
4E-3E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
b.
OPERATION
(4)
Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between the otter bridle and 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant
(Figure 4E-3C).
(5)
Connect 10-foot float pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle.
Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position.
(1)
Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter.
(2)
Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle
is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4E-3D).
(3)
Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and
secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion.
(4)
Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane
whip.
(5)
Rotate crane forward.
(6)
Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.
Figure 4E-3C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration)
4E-3F
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-3D. Otter in Ready Release Position
4E-3-1.6
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation.
a.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented
sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block
padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4E-3E).
b.
Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure
block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using
5/8-inch shackles.
4E-3-1.7
a.
Electrode Floats.
Splice 5-foot (21-thread) pendant to both ends of each float.
4E-3G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-3E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly
4E-3-1.8
K-4 Electrode Preparation.
To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewed in a canvas
chafing sleeve.
a.
Prepare K-4 electrode in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-6.
4E-3-1.9
Long Leg Preparation.
a.
Lead a K-4 electrode to the outboard end of the S-Cable.
b.
Insulate S/K-4 connection and fitting as follows:
(1)
4E-3H
Place inboard end of long leg K-4 electrode in vicinity of the S-Cable connection.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
(2)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(3)
Connect the long leg K-4 electrode to the outboard S-Cable using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x
1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers.
Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(4)
Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Apply two
layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape, continuing tape several inches past the
connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
c.
Heave in on magnetic reel, stacking K-4 electrode until outboard end is clear to work on, and
positioned for streaming.
d.
Install a lamitex lug to the long leg electrode using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch cap screws,
two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
e.
Tape outboard electrode terminal lug with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black plastic tape and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion (Figure
4E-3F).
f.
Attach a 1-inch shackle pin inboard at one end of roller block pendant. Connect roller block
pendant to quarter roller block using a 5/8-inch shackle.
g.
Connect quarter roller block and pendant to lamitex lug using a 7/8-inch shackle.
4E-3-2
LAUNCHING/STREAMING.
NOTE
Sweep gear for this configuration is streamed to port.
4E-3-2.1
Streaming Preparations.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Check air pressure in device for appropriate depth (Table 4E-3A).
c.
Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
d.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
e.
Request permission to stream gear.
4E-3-2.2
Launching/Streaming Float and Acoustic Device TB-26.
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify
that the photo cell is working.
a.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.
b.
Pass nose line through chock and tend around mooring bitts. Heave in to remove slack from
nose line.
c.
Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 simultaneously, training gear outboard to position
gear for launch. Ensure float nose line and APC are clear of all deck obstructions (Figure
4E-3G, View A).
d.
Lower cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 into water. Slack nose line to permit float to ride
astern.
4E-3J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-3F. Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Diversion Chain
e.
Continue to lower Acoustic Device TB-26 until it is supported by float. Move crane head inboard
and continue to pay out inhaul pendant until it can be disconnected from crane whip. Disconnect
inhaul pendant.
f.
Bring inhaul pendant aboard through roller chock assembly. Attach inhaul pendant softeye to
towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC, using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through one eye of
towing stocking.
g.
Slack off on nose line until gear is being towed by APC (Figure 4E-3G, View B).
h.
Bring nose line through the roller chock assembly. Attach nose line to towing stocking at 50-foot
mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through free eye of towing stocking.
4E-3K
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-3G. Streaming Procedure for Acoustic Device TB-26
4E-3L
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
i.
Pay out APC so that the inboard 125-foot stocking of the APC is just forward of roller chock
assembly.
j.
Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.
4E-3-2.3
Launching/Streaming O-Type Gear.
a.
Ensure ship’s speed is 4 knots.
b.
Request permission to put gear to the rail.
c.
Ensure that nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-3H).
d.
Lead nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock.
e.
Tend line to bitt.
f.
Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, train outboard to position float
at rail.
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify
that the photo cell is working.
g.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.
h.
Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and float pendant and nose line are clear of
ship and obstructions.
i.
Connect float pendant, if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the
outboard corner of otter.
j.
Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE.
k.
Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook
securing otter (Figure 4E-3D). Launch float and slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.
4E-3-2.4
Tripping the Otter.
a.
Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes a strain.
b.
Pay out sweep wire under power until long link of 6-foot chain is just outboard of sweep wire
roller chock assembly.
c.
Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until
the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope) and check for proper diversion (Figure 4E-3F).
d.
Return and restow articulated stern crane.
4E-3-2.5
Streaming of Outboard (Long Leg) Electrode.
a.
Lead long leg electrode from magnetic cable drum and out through the level wind assembly,
then out cable roller chock assembly.
b.
Mount quarter roller block on sweep wire and mouse quarter roller block pin.
4E-3M
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-3H. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)
4E-3N
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
c.
Ensure K-4 electrode terminal lug is properly taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection. Ensure all exposed
metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
d.
Pay out to 50 feet.
4E-3-2.6
Attachment of Electrode Floats.
a.
Attach first electrode float (Figure 4E-3J).
b.
Pay out electrode.
c.
Continue paying out and attach four more floats seven feet apart (Figure 4E-3K).
d.
Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float.
4E-3-2.7
S/K-4 Connector Inspection.
a.
Continue paying out long leg electrode until S/K-4 connector (Figure 4E-3L) is forward of cable
roller chock assembly.
b.
Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction
tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed
metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
c.
Increase ship speed as required to enhance magnetic cable streaming.
d.
Pay out S-Cable to form catenary before veering sweep wire.
e.
Disengage sweep wire drum. Veer sweep wire using hydraulic brake.
f.
Simultaneously, veer sweep wire and pay out magnetic cable maintaining catenary.
g.
Keep otter working by veering sweep wire slowly. The magnetic tail should pay out to a longer
length than the sweep wire so quarter roller block rides at the diversion point on the sweep wire.
Figure 4E-3J. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode
4E-3P
Figure 4E-3K. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-3Q
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-3L. Diversion Rigging for M Mk 6(a) Sweep Configuration
4E-3R
OPERATION
OPERATION
4E-3-2.8
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Installation of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode.
a.
Continue streaming S-Cable. Inspect for insulation breaks, inspect sleeves for watertight
integrity and condition of tape. Repair as required.
b.
Continue streaming S-Cable until outboard short leg breakout and K-4 blank pigtail is forward of
cable roller chock assembly.
c.
Remove boot from K-4 blank pigtail.
d.
Lead a K-4 electrode end to the K-4 blank pigtail.
e.
Attach K-4 electrode to K-4 blank pigtail (Figure 4E-3M).
connection by installing a CK/P insulating sleeve as follows:
Insulate and waterproof the
(1)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(2)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the CK/P
insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity.
(3)
Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over large end of sleeve and two 3-1/16- to 4-inch
hose clamps over small end of sleeve.
(4)
Slip CK/P insulating sleeve over K-4 electrode and slide back out of way.
(5)
Connect terminals of K-4 electrode and K-4 blank pigtail using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x
1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers.
Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline
of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(6)
Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of CK/P insulating sleeve.
(7)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(8)
Slide CK/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
(9)
Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with
outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing
screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
f.
Place ten turns of 21-thread line lashing around K-4 electrode and S-Cable to relieve towing
strain on K-4 blank pigtail.
g.
Heave in on magnetic cable until outboard end of short leg electrode is clear to work on and
positioned for streaming.
h.
Tape the outboard end of K-4 electrode with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all
exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
4E-3S
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-3M. K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection
4E-3-2.9
Streaming of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode.
a.
Ensure K-4 electrode outboard terminal lug is taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side.
Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
b.
Pay out 50 feet of the short leg electrode.
4E-3-2.10
Attachment of Short Leg Electrode Floats.
a.
Attach first electrode float (Figure 4E-3J).
b.
Continue paying out and attach four additional floats seven feet apart (Figure 4E-3K).
c.
Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float.
4E-3-2.11
K-4 Blank Pigtail/K-4 Connector Inspection.
a.
Continue paying out short leg electrode until K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection is forward of cable
roller chock assembly.
b.
Ensure K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection and fitting is wrapped with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape, and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each
side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
c.
Ensure ten turns of 21-thread line lashing is around the K-4 blank pigtail and S-Cable to relieve
towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail.
4E-3T
OPERATION
4E-3-2.12
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Streaming Coax Cable to Full Scope.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
a.
Continue paying out coax cable. When K-4 electrode to K-4 blank pigtail connection is awash,
cast free the 21-thread securing line.
b.
Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock
assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with
SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4E-3-2.13
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection.
a.
Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable.
b.
Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable
with 5/8-inch shackles.
c.
Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until
just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant
(Figure 4E-3E). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.
To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed
awash at all times.
d.
Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.
4E-3-2.14
Stopping Off the Sweep.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
a.
Pay out the APC so that the inboard 125-foot stocking of the APC is just forward of roller chock
assembly.
b.
Remove canvas chafing from APC towing stocking.
4E-3U
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
c.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach towing pendant to the starboard instrumented sheave padeye.
Attach pelican hook to the free end of towing pendant with a 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-3N).
d.
Secure both eyes of towing stocking into the bail of pelican hook. Install a cotter pin with a
tripping lanyard.
e.
Pay out the APC until the towing pendant takes the strain.
4E-3-2.15
Securing Sweep Wire.
Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged.
a.
Stop veering sweep wire when the four red bands (1,200 feet) are at sweep wire roller chock.
Engage pawl and secure sweep wire drum.
b.
Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
NOTE
Connecting magnetic cable, APC and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished
simultaneously.
c.
Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4E-3P) back-to-back to sweep wire aft of instrumented sheave.
Attach Cutters Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing bridle, midway between
8-inch (type E) snatch block and roller chock assembly.
d.
Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.
After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel
will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.
To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do
not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station
on the 01 level.
e.
Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to
cutters.
f.
Arm Cutters Mk 15.
g.
Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS
MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.
4E-3V
Figure 4E-3N. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 6(a) with TB-26)
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-3W
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-3P. Wedge Stop Placement
4E-3X
OPERATION
4E-3-2.16
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.
Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power
Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the
drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic
minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep
electrician.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
NOTE
Connecting magnetic cable and acoustic cable may be accomplished
simultaneously.
a.
Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area.
b.
Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area.
c.
Minesweep electrician enters the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN
switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer.
d.
Drum area crew enters the drum area.
e.
Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtail on
electrical rubber matting.
f.
Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends.
g.
Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for
insulating cracks and breaks and make repairs as required.
h.
Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box.
i.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
j.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range) checking, conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to
terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive too negative) in the terminal box.
k.
Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.
4E-3Y
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
l.
Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and
magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT
VOLTAGE.
m.
Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal
box.
n.
Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush
and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
o.
Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2
inch.
p.
Lower the terminal box cover.
4E-3-2.17
Connecting the Acoustic Power Cable.
Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before
entering drum area.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Measure insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable prior to making
connections to power outlet in accordance with PMS.
The PCU operator shall exit drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
a.
Verify measurement of insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable, with an approved 500
Vdc megohmmeter.
b.
Verify power is secured prior to connecting the APC. This is accomplished by checking the plug
receptacle with a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) that has been checked against a known DC
source to ensure proper operation. The source should be the same type and voltage range as
the circuit to be tested.
c.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range),
checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor in the acoustic power receptacle.
d.
Recheck the multimeter to the known DC source to ensure the multimeter is still working
properly.
e.
Remove inboard end of APC cable from interior of APC cable reel.
4E-3Z
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
f.
Remove protective boot from inboard end of APC cable.
g.
In a straight line, connect APC cable to receptacle and tighten gland nut using T-handle wrench.
h.
Remove cover from acoustic cable receptacle.
i.
After the magnetic and APC cable connections have been made, secure the drum area on the
port and starboard sides with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, creating any entry barrier.
Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.
4E-3-2.18
Departing the Drum Area.
a.
Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety
Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then
departs drum area.
b.
Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker.
c.
Energize PCU, start acoustic device and transfer control to ACU.
4E-3-2.19
Towing the Sweep.
a.
Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck.
b.
Increase headway to sweep speed.
c.
Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves.
d.
Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4E-3Q).
4E-3-2.20
Maneuvering Instructions.
a.
Turns should normally be made towards gear and may be up to 180 degrees. Sweep wire may
sag after ship has turned about 60 degrees. To avoid excessive sagging and consequential risk
of fouling or damaging sweep gear, sweep wire should be shortened to about 75 fathoms during
turn and veered again to full scope upon completion of turn. If chafing is evident, rudder should
be eased.
b.
Speeds in excess of 6 knots are not recommended due to the danger of damage to magnetic
cable. Table 4E-3B presents the increase in tension between 6 and 8 knots.
Table 4E-3B. Sweep Wire Tensions
4E-3-3
4E-3-3.1
SPEED (KNOTS)
CABLE TENSION (LB)
6
4,450
8
11,600
RECOVERY.
Preparation.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
4E-3AA
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-3Q. Sweep Configuration M Mk 6(a) with Acoustic Device TB-26 Astern
4E-3AB
OPERATION
4E-3-3.2
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Reentering the Drum Area.
Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power
Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the
drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
a.
Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured.
b.
Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN.
c.
Ensure HPU is secured.
d.
Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
e.
Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch
to the SAFE position.
f.
Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE
POSITION.
4E-3-3.3
Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
a.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
b.
Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position.
c.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg).
4E-3AC
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
d.
Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
e.
Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box
while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to
the safety officer.
f.
Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when
handling cable to prevent burns.
NOTE
The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of
cable.
Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be
accomplished simultaneously.
g.
Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box.
h.
Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove inboard pigtail cable ends from terminal box
and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting.
i.
Close and secure, terminal box.
j.
Reinstall protective boots on pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several wraps of
plastic electrical tape.
k.
Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum.
l.
Drum area crew departs drum area.
m.
If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE
signs. Check area for gear adrift.
n.
Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs
drum area.
4E-3AD
OPERATION
4E-3-3.4
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Disconnecting the Acoustic Power Cable.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
NOTE
Disconnecting of acoustic power cable and magnetic minesweep cable
may be accomplished simultaneously.
a.
Using the T-Handle wrench, electrician loosens the APC gland nut at the APC receptacle, and
slides it back off from the bitter end of the cable.
b.
In a straight line pull, remove cable from the receptacle.
c.
Reinstall the APC receptacle non-conducting plug.
d.
Reinstall the APC inboard end protective boot and secure inboard cable end to the interior of the
APC cable reel.
e.
Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, APC IS DISCONNECTED AND
CABLE IS SECURED, DRUM AREA CLEAR and departs the drum area.
f.
If procedure is being performed in conjunction with Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep
Cable, no further action is required.
NOTE
APC handlers may assist other personnel still working in the drum area.
g.
If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE
signs, check area for gear adrift.
4E-3AE
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-3-3.5
OPERATION
Cutter Removal.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
a.
Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can
be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable.
b.
Reman fantail.
c.
Request permission to recovery gear.
4E-3-3.6
Coax Cable Recovery.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When
possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the
drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered.
a.
Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit.
b.
Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as
they come within reach.
c.
Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from
hardeyes. Install canvas chafing.
d.
Continue heaving in on coax section.
4E-3-3.7
Sweep Gear Recovery.
a.
Engage sweep wire drum.
b.
Heave in on APC, remove pelican hook, chafe towing stocking.
c.
Heave in on acoustic power and magnetic cables and sweep wire, keeping the acoustic device
aft of the magnetic tail, until approximately 50 feet of buoyant section remains outboard, and
hold until all other gear is recovered.
d.
Inspect cables for cuts, abrasions, and cracks as cables come onboard, making minor repairs to
the cables per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4E-3AF
OPERATION
4E-3-3.8
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Short Leg Electrode Recovery/Removal.
a.
Heave in on short leg electrode and remove electrode floats.
b.
Pay out coax cable, faking K-4 electrode on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a clear
work area.
c.
Remove CK/P insulating sleeve.
d.
Disconnect and remove K-4 electrode from K-4 blank pigtail.
e.
Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail:
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot (Figure
4E-3R).
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide P/B insulating boot over terminal lug.
(4)
Slide two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end of boot
about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate
clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
f.
Continue heaving in on S section.
4E-3-3.9
a.
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers
of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side.
Long Leg Electrode Recovery.
Heave in on long leg electrode and sweep wire.
NOTE
Floats may be left on the long leg electrode if desired.
b.
When the quarter roller block and T-bar stop are outboard of the cable roller chock assembly,
stop the sweep wire.
c.
Remove quarter roller block from diversion chain on sweep wire. Remove T-bar stop.
d.
Ease in on magnetic cable until the quarter roller block is just forward of cable roller chock
assembly. Remove quarter roller block and pendant from outboard end of K-4 electrode.
e.
Secure hold-back line to the outboard end of the long leg electrode and keep a strain on it while
reeling all of the K-4 electrode onto the magnetic cable drum. Secure long leg electrode to drum
with this line.
4E-3-3.10
O-Type Gear Recovery.
a.
Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane.
b.
Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle.
4E-3AG
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-3R. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted
c.
Heave in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock.
d.
Disengage sweep wire drum.
4E-3-3.11
Size 1 Float Recovery.
a.
Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard.
b.
Recover float pendant with a boat hook.
c.
Heave in on float pendant until float nose line is within reach.
d.
Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane, and heave in until float is in lifting position
under crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail of
float.
e.
Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook.
f.
Remove emergency recovery pendant.
g.
Stow Float.
4E-3-3.12
Otter Recovery.
a.
Train port articulated stern crane outboard over otter.
b.
Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter.
c.
Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4E-3D) or storage rack on fantail.
d.
Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead.
e.
Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.
4E-3AH
OPERATION
4E-3-3.13
a.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Recovery of TB-26 and Float.
Continue recovering of APC until 50-foot towing stocking is just aft of cable roller chock
assembly.
Ensure nose line is clear of APC and inhaul pendant.
b.
Detach nose line from APC and pass through stern chock. Tend around mooring bitts. Take
slack out of nose line until it takes strain.
c.
Train articulated stern crane outboard and, with stern crane head inboard, detach inhaul
pendant from APC, attach inhaul pendant to crane whip.
d.
Heave in on APC and articulated stern crane whip and inhaul wire connection keeping slack out
of nose line.
e.
Heave in on inhaul pendant until weight of Acoustic Device TB-26 is suspended by crane and
float is properly cradled.
Ensure float is properly seated in its cradle before hoisting device from
water.
Ensure enough APC is streamed to allow acoustic device and float to be
recovered on deck.
f.
Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 simultaneously and train gear inboard and
forward, clearing acoustic cable and nose line from stern obstructions. Slack nose line as
necessary.
g.
Stow device and float on deck.
h.
Notify bridge all gear is clear.
4E-3-3.14
Securing Gear.
a.
Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS.
b.
Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.
c.
Ground isolate S-Cable, if cable is being stowed, with no further sweep exercises:
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around S terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug.
(4)
Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about
1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so
securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-3S).
4E-3AJ
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-3S. S-Cable Booted
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
d.
4E-3-4
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers
of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side.
Using hold-back line, secure outboard end of S-Cable to drum.
RECOVERY OF DAMAGED (CUT OR PARTED) GEAR.
A mine could be fouled in the gear; proceed with caution.
4E-3-4.1
Preparation.
a.
Lead a recovery wire from a free winch drum or the gypsy head on sweep wire winch, through
sweep wire roller chock, and outboard of taffrail to recovery position on fantail.
b.
Approach float upwind or upcurrent, whichever has greatest effect.
4E-3AK
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
NOTE
Wind will generally have more effect than current.
c.
Stop the screw on recovery side.
d.
Hook float with a grapnel or boat hook and haul float alongside.
e.
Hook softeye quick recovery pendant and pull pendant free from flagstaff socket. Shackle
recovery pendant to recovery wire.
f.
Hook crane whip into float lifting pad and take a strain on recovery wire with winch.
g.
Heave in on recovery wire and crane whip simultaneously, keeping strain on recovery wire so
weight of sweep gear is not taken by crane.
h.
Hoist float and trip pelican hook to release float pendant. Stow float.
i.
Continue heaving in on recovery wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is up close to sweep wire
roller chock.
j.
Utilizing articulated stern crane, stow otter in the quick recovery hook in ready release position
or on stowage rack on fantail. Attach safety chain.
k.
If severed end of the sweep wire is in sight, recover by hand.
l.
If severed end of the sweep wire is not in sight, secure a chain stopper grip on severed sweep
wire.
m.
Remove End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly and recover sweep wire.
4E-3-5
RECOVERY OF PARTED GEAR USING RIGID HULL INFLATABLE BOAT (RHIB).
a.
Approach float from downwind.
b.
Retrieve the float nose line and attach messenger line (if required). If possible, recovery should
be done without RHIB.
c.
Haul in messenger line (if used) with the winch/gypsy head until the float is in lifting position. In
either method of recovery, when float is in a lifting position, haul it aboard and stow.
4E-3AL/(4E-3AM blank)
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4E-4
M MK 6(A) TB-27 (ASTERN) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of
this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and
injury or death to personnel.
The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure
all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is
followed.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded
component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Block, quarter roller (type A), NM, with swivel eye
(3940-00-722-8995)
Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM
(3940-00-368-7551) (4)
Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM
(3940-00-368-7552)
Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342)
Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356)
Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342)
Cable, acoustic power (APC), 1,650-foot (per Job
Sheet 4A-5) (1075-00-782-9881)
Cable Assembly, electrode, K-4 (per Job Sheet 4A-6)
(1075-00-262-1980) (2)
Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping,
coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337)
Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping,
S (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327)
Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM
(with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906)
Clamp, hose, 1-9/16- to 2-1/2-inch
(4730-00-204-3491) (2)
Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460)
(2)
Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132)
(4)
Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-265-0677)
Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-332-5834) (2)
Device, acoustic, TB-27, NM (1075-01-368-2483)
Float, cellular rubber (1075-00-372-6128) (12)
Float, type O, size 1, NM, moored (1), acoustic(1)
(per Job Sheet 4A-3) (1075-01-371-0568)
Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye
(4030-00-290-6420)
Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x
3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638)
Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986)
Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet
4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280)
Line, securing, 21-thread x 40-foot (whipped each
end) 1
Line, securing (electrode float-center), 21-thread x
5-foot, single leg, manila (each end whipped) 1
Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon,
hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1
Lug, lamitex (1075-00-372-6221)
Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) (6)
Pendant, device, towing/stopper (acoustic), 1/2-inch
x 3-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye
each end) (2) 1
Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
See footnotes at end of table.
4E-4A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS (Continued)
Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as
required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL)
(hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM,
wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, float (acoustic), 1/2-inch x length as
required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL)
(hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot,
NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one
end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1
Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, wire
rope (LHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, roller block, 2-1/2-inch x 3-foot, single leg,
nylon (hardeye each end) 1
Ring, 3-inch ID (5365-01-346-8057)
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch
(5305-00-226-9204) (4)
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch
(5305-00-226-9208) (2)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM,
1/2-inch (4020-00-270-5482)
5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (41)
3/4-inch (4030-00-270-5484) (8)
7/8-inch (4030-00-270-5485)
1-inch (4030-00-270-5486)
Sleeve (CK/P) (5970-01-519-3184)
Stop, T-bar (1075-01-233-4952)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard
end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611)
Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505)
(12)
Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as
required)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949)
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385)
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652)
Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737)
Electrician Tool Kit
Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) *
Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251)
Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252)
Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643)
Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread)
(whipped each end) 1
*
1
Megohmmeter, 500 Vdc
Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range)
Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) *
Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176)
Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021)
Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572)
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Wrench, T-handle (5120-00-972-0490)
Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb
Hazardous Material.
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4E-4-1
RIGGING.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
This sweep utilizes red sweep wire and APC markings.
4E-4-1.1
Preparation.
a.
Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
personnel for minesweeping operations.
b.
Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational
order.
4E-4B
Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential
OPERATION
4E-4-1.2
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Float, Kite, and Sweep Wire Preparation.
For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on
water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required.
Total length cannot exceed 20 feet.
a.
Prepare two size 1 floats in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3. One float to be used with Acoustic
Device TB-27. The other size 1 float is for O gear (moored configuration) and may utilize 10-foot
float pendants.
b.
Prepare size 1 kite as an otter (port configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1.
c.
Prepare port sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.
4E-4-1.3
a.
4E-4-1.4
APC Preparation.
Prepare APC in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Preparation.
a.
Prepare towing stocking in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.
b.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect 3-inch ID ring to second and fourth holes on acoustic device
towing and hoisting plate. Use Table 4E-4A for depth and float pendant correlation. Connect
float pendant to ring (Figure 4E-4A).
c.
Lead outboard end of APC aft through cable roller chock assembly; then, pull cable outboard,
clear of all obstructions, and forward to acoustic device. Connect cable to Acoustic Device
TB-27. If required, apply a light coat of silicone grease.
d.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect 3-foot towing pendant to hardeye of towing stocking at 6-foot
mark on APC. Connect pendant’s free end to device towing/hoisting plate. Wrap 3-foot towing
pendant and shackles with chafing gear.
Ensure inhaul pendant is connected aft of float pendant. Failure to do so
could cause damage to float pendant and inhaul pendant.
e.
Pass hardeye of inhaul pendant down through float fairlead tube to 3-inch ID ring and attach with
a 5/8-inch shackle with screw pin end on 3-inch ID ring behind float pendant connection (Figure
4E-4A).
f.
Shackle softeye of inhaul pendant to crane whip, using a 1/2-inch shackle. Figure 4E-4B shows
acoustic device in a cradled position.
g.
Take in on crane whip until inhaul pendant is wound on cable drum.
h.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach tail line to tail of size 1 float.
i.
Deck test acoustic device in accordance with Planned Maintenance System.
4E-4C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Table 4E-4A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation
DEPTH TO CENTER OF DIAPHRAGM
(FEET)
FLOAT PENDANT LENGTH
(FEET)
20
13
22
15
24
17
25
18
26
19
27
20
28
21
29
22
30
23
Figure 4E-4A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing
4E-4D
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-4B. Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled
4E-4-1.5
a.
O-Type Components Preparation.
Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly to Otter.
(1)
Engage port sweep wire drum.
(2)
Attach a 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain, with long link in the middle, between sweep wire and a
60-foot (LHL) otter pendant, using 5/8-inch shackles. Five interlocking 5/8-inch shackles
may be used in lieu of chain. Reel in on port sweep wire drum.
(3)
Lead 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave; then through
sweep wire roller chock assembly.
(4)
Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between the otter bridle and 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant
(Figure 4E-4C).
(5)
Connect 10-foot float pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle.
4E-4E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-4C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration)
b.
4E-4-1.6
Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position.
(1)
Use appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter.
(2)
Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle
is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4E-4D).
(3)
Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and
secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion.
(4)
Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane
whip.
(5)
Rotate crane forward.
(6)
Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation.
a.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented
sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block
padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4E-4E).
b.
Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure
block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using
5/8-inch shackles.
4E-4F
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-4D. Otter in Ready Release Position
4E-4-1.7
a.
4E-4-1.8
Electrode Floats.
Splice 5-foot (21-thread) pendant to both ends of each float.
K-4 Electrode Preparation.
To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewed in a canvas
chafing sleeve.
a.
Prepare K-4 electrode in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-6.
4E-4G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-4E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly
4E-4-1.9
Long Leg Preparation.
a.
Lead a K-4 electrode to the outboard end of the S-Cable.
b.
Insulate S/K-4 connection and fitting as follows:
4E-4H
(1)
Place inboard end of long leg K-4 electrode in vicinity of the S-Cable connection.
(2)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(3)
Connect the long leg K-4 electrode to the outboard S-Cable using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x
1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers.
Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(4)
Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Apply two
layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape, continuing tape several inches past the
connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
c.
Heave in on magnetic reel, stacking K-4 electrode until outboard end is clear to work on and
positioned for streaming.
d.
Install a lamitex lug to the long leg electrode using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch cap screws,
two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
e.
Tape outboard electrode terminal lug with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black plastic tape and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion (Figure
4E-4F).
f.
Attach a 1-inch shackle pin inboard at one end of roller block pendant. Connect roller block
pendant to quarter roller block using a 5/8-inch shackle.
g.
Connect quarter roller block and pendant to lamitex lug using a 7/8-inch shackle.
4E-4-2
LAUNCHING/STREAMING.
NOTE
Sweep gear for this configuration is streamed to port.
4E-4-2.1
Streaming Preparations.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
d.
Request permission to stream gear.
4E-4-2.2
Launching/Streaming Float and Acoustic Device TB-27.
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify
that the photo cell is working.
a.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.
b.
Pass nose line through chock and tend around mooring bitts. Heave in to remove slack from
nose line.
c.
Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 simultaneously, training gear outboard to position
gear for launch. Ensure float nose line and APC are clear of all deck obstructions (Figure
4E-4G, View A).
d.
Lower cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 into water. Slack nose line to permit float to ride
astern.
e.
Continue to lower Acoustic Device TB-27 until it is supported by float. Move crane head inboard
and continue to pay out inhaul pendant until it can be disconnected from crane whip. Disconnect
inhaul pendant.
f.
Bring inhaul pendant aboard through roller chock assembly. Attach inhaul pendant softeye to
towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC, using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through free eye of
towing stocking.
g.
Slack off on nose line until gear is being towed by APC (Figure 4E-4G, View B).
4E-4J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-4F. Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Diversion Chain
h.
Bring nose line through the roller chock assembly. Attach nose line to towing stocking at 50-foot
mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through eye of towing stocking.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
i.
Pay out APC so that the inboard 125-foot stocking of the APC is just forward of cable roller chock
assembly.
j.
Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.
4E-4-2.3
Launching/Streaming O-Type Gear.
a.
Ensure ship’s speed is 4 knots.
b.
Request permission to put gear to the rail.
c.
Ensure nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-4H).
d.
Lead nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock.
e.
Tend line to bitt.
4E-4K
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-4G. Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-27
4E-4L
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-4H. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)
4E-4M
OPERATION
f.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, train outboard to position float
at rail.
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify
that the photo cell is working.
g.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.
h.
Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and float pendant and nose line are clear of
ship and obstructions.
i.
Connect float pendant, if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the
outboard corner of otter.
j.
Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE.
k.
Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook
securing otter (Figure 4E-4D). Launch float and slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.
4E-4-2.4
Tripping the Otter.
a.
Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes a strain.
b.
Pay out sweep wire under power until long link of chain is just outboard of sweep wire roller
chock.
c.
Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until
the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope). Check for proper diversion (Figure 4E-4F).
d.
Return and restow articulated stern crane.
4E-4-2.5
Streaming of Outboard (Long Leg) Electrode.
a.
Lead long leg electrode from magnetic cable drum and out through the level wind assembly,
then out cable roller chock assembly.
b.
Mount quarter roller block on sweep wire and mouse quarter roller block pin.
c.
Ensure K-4 electrode terminal lug is properly taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection. Ensure all exposed
metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
d.
Pay out to 50 feet.
4E-4-2.6
Attachment of Electrode Floats.
a.
Attache first electrode float (Figure 4E-4J).
b.
Pay out electrode.
c.
Continue paying out and attach four more floats seven feet apart (Figure 4E-4K).
d.
Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float.
4E-4-2.7
a.
S/K-4 Connector Inspection.
Continue paying out long leg electrode until S/K-4 connector (Figure 4E-4L) is forward of cable
roller chock assembly.
4E-4N
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-4J. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode
b.
Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction
tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed
metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
c.
Increase ship speed as required to enhance magnetic cable streaming.
d.
Pay out S-Cable to form catenary before veering sweep wire.
e.
Disengage sweep wire drum. Veer sweep wire using hydraulic brake.
f.
Simultaneously, veer sweep wire and pay out magnetic cable maintaining catenary.
g.
Keep otter working by veering sweep wire slowly. The magnetic tail should pay out to a longer
length than the sweep wire so quarter roller block rides at the diversion point on the sweep wire.
4E-4-2.8
Installation of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode.
a.
Continue streaming S-Cable. Inspect for insulation breaks, inspect sleeves for watertight
integrity and condition of tape. Repair as required.
b.
Continue streaming S-Cable until outboard short leg breakout and K-4 blank pigtail is forward of
cable roller chock assembly.
c.
Remove boot from K-4 blank pigtail.
d.
Lead a K-4 electrode end to the K-4 blank pigtail.
e.
Attach K-4 electrode to K-4 blank pigtail (Figure 4E-4M).
connection by installing a CK/P insulating sleeve as follows:
4E-4P
Insulate and waterproof the
(1)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(2)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the CK/P
insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity.
(3)
Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over large end of sleeve and two 3-1/16- to 4-inch
hose clamps over small end of sleeve.
Figure 4E-4K. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-4Q
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-4L. Diversion Rigging for M Mk 6(a) Sweep Configuration
4E-4R
OPERATION
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-4M. K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection
(4)
Slip CK/P insulating sleeve over K-4 electrode and slide back out of way.
(5)
Connect terminals of K-4 electrode and K-4 blank using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch
cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure
terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each
cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(6)
Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of CK/P insulating sleeve.
(7)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(8)
Slide CK/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
(9)
Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with
outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing
screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
4E-4S
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
f.
Place ten turns of 21-thread line lashing around K-4 blank pigtail and S-Cable to relieve towing
strain on K-4 blank.
g.
Heave in on magnetic cable until outboard end of short leg electrode is clear to work on and
positioned for streaming.
h.
Tape the outboard end of K-4 electrode with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all
exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
4E-4-2.9
Streaming of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode.
a.
Ensure K-4 electrode outboard terminal lug is taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side.
Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
b.
Pay out 50 feet of the short leg electrode.
4E-4-2.10
Attachment of Short Leg Electrode Floats.
a.
Attach first electrode float (Figure 4E-4J).
b.
Continue paying out and attach four additional floats seven feet apart (Figure 4E-4K).
c.
Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float.
4E-4-2.11
K-4 Blank Pigtail/K-4 Connector Inspection.
a.
Continue paying out short leg electrode until K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection is forward of cable
roller chock assembly.
b.
Ensure K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection and fitting is wrapped with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape, and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each
side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
c.
Ensure ten turns of 21-thread line lashing is around the K-4 blank pigtail and S-Cable to relieve
towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail.
4E-4-2.12
Streaming Coax Cable to Full Scope.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
a.
Continue paying out coax cable. When K-4 connection to K-4 blank pigtail is awash, cast free
the 21-thread securing line.
b.
Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock
assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with
SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4E-4T
OPERATION
4E-4-2.13
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection.
a.
Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable.
b.
Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable
with 5/8-inch shackles.
c.
Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until
just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant
(Figure 4E-4E). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.
To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed
awash at all times.
d.
Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.
4E-4-2.14
Stopping Off the Sweep.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
a.
Pay out the APC so that the inboard 125-foot stocking of the APC is just forward of roller chock
assembly.
b.
Remove canvas chafing from APC towing stocking.
c.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach towing pendant to the starboard instrumented sheave padeye.
Attach pelican hook to the free end of towing pendant with a 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-4N).
d.
Secure both eyes of towing stocking into the bail of pelican hook. Install a cotter pin with a
tripping lanyard.
e.
Pay out the APC until the towing pendant takes the strain.
4E-4-2.15
Securing Sweep Wire.
Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged.
a.
Stop veering sweep wire when the four red bands (1,200 feet) are at sweep wire roller chock.
Engage pawl and secure sweep wire drum.
b.
Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.
4E-4U
Figure 4E-4N. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 6(a) with TB-27)
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-4V
OPERATION
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
NOTE
Connecting magnetic cable, APC, and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished
simultaneously.
c.
Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4E-4P) back-to-back to sweep wire aft of instrumented sheave.
Attach Cutters Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing bridle, midway between
8-inch (type E) snatch block and roller chock assembly.
d.
Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.
After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel
will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.
To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do
not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station
on the 01 level.
e.
Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to
cutters.
f.
Arm Cutters Mk 15.
g.
Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS
MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.
4E-4W
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-4P. Wedge Stop Placement
4E-4X
OPERATION
4E-4-2.16
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.
Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power
Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the
drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic
minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep
electrician.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
NOTE
Connecting magnetic cable and acoustic cable may be accomplished
simultaneously.
a.
Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area.
b.
Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area.
c.
Minesweep electricians enter the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN
switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer.
d.
Drum area crew enters the drum area.
e.
Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtail on
electrical rubber matting.
f.
Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends.
g.
Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for
insulating cracks and breaks and make repairs as required.
h.
Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box.
i.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
j.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range) checking, conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to
terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive too negative) in the terminal box.
k.
Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.
4E-4Y
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
l.
Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and
magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT
VOLTAGE.
m.
Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal
box.
n.
Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush
and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
It is permissible to add more canvas and 21-thread to close air gaps, but
caution must be used to prevent overheating of the PQ section due to
restricting air flow caused by overchafing and wrapping.
o.
Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2
inch.
p.
Lower the terminal box cover.
4E-4-2.17
Connecting the Acoustic Power Cable.
Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before
entering drum area.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Measure insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable prior to making
connections to power outlet in accordance with PMS.
The PCU operator shall exit drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
a.
Verify measurement of insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable, with an approved 500
Vdc megohmmeter.
b.
Verify power is secured prior to connecting the APC. This is accomplished by checking the plug
receptacle with a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) that has been checked against a known DC
source to ensure proper operation. The source should be the same type and voltage range as
the circuit to be tested.
4E-4Z
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
c.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range),
checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor in the acoustic power receptacle.
d.
Recheck the multimeter to the known DC source to ensure the multimeter is still working
properly.
e.
Remove inboard end of APC cable from interior of APC cable reel.
f.
Remove protective boot from inboard end of APC cable.
g.
In a straight line, connect APC cable to receptacle and tighten gland nut using T-handle wrench.
h.
Remove cover from acoustic cable receptacle.
i.
After the magnetic and APC cable connections have been made, secure the drum area on the
port and starboard sides with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, creating any entry barrier.
Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.
4E-4-2.18
Departing the Drum Area.
a.
Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety
Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then
departs drum area.
b.
Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker.
c.
Energize PCU, start acoustic device and transfer control to ACU.
4E-4-2.19
Towing the Sweep.
a.
Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck.
b.
Increase headway to sweep speed.
c.
Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves.
d.
Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4E-4Q).
4E-4-2.20
Maneuvering Instructions.
a.
Turns should normally be made towards gear and may be up to 180 degrees. Sweep wire may
sag after ship has turned about 60 degrees. To avoid excessive sagging and consequential risk
of fouling or damaging sweep gear, sweep wire should be shortened in to about 75 fathoms
during turn and veered again to full scope upon completion of turn. If chafing is evident, rudder
should be eased.
b.
Speeds in excess of 6 knots are not recommended due to the danger of damage to magnetic
cable. Table 4E-4B presents increase in tension between 6 and 8 knots.
Table 4E-4B. Sweep Wire Tensions
SPEED (KNOTS)
CABLE TENSION (LB)
6
4,450
8
11,600
4E-4AA
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-4Q. Sweep Configuration M Mk 6(a) with Acoustic Device TB-27 Astern
4E-4AB
OPERATION
4E-4-3
4E-4-3.1
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
RECOVERY.
Preparation.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
4E-4-3.2
Reentering the Drum Area.
Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power
Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the
drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
a.
Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured.
b.
Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN.
c.
Ensure HPU is secured.
d.
Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
e.
Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch
to the SAFE position.
f.
Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE
POSITION.
4E-4-3.3
Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
a.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
4E-4AC
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
b.
Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position.
c.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg).
d.
Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
e.
Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box
while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to
the safety officer.
f.
Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when
handling cable to prevent burns.
The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of
cable.
NOTE
Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be
accomplished simultaneously.
g.
Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box.
h.
Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove inboard pigtail cable ends from terminal box
and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting.
i.
Close and secure, terminal box.
j.
Reinstall protective boots on pigtail connectors and secure them with several wraps of plastic
electrical tape.
k.
Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum.
l.
Drum area crew departs drum area.
m.
If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE
signs. Check area for gear adrift.
n.
Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs
drum area.
4E-4AD
OPERATION
4E-4-3.4
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Disconnecting the Acoustic Power Cable.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
NOTE
Disconnecting of acoustic power cable and magnetic minesweep cable
may be accomplished simultaneously.
a.
Using the T-Handle wrench, electrician loosens the APC gland nut at the APC receptacle, and
slides it back off from the bitter end of the cable.
b.
In a straight line pull, remove cable from the receptacle.
c.
Reinstall the APC receptacle non-conducting plug.
d.
Reinstall the APC inboard end protective boot and secure inboard cable end to the interior of the
APC cable reel.
e.
Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, APC IS DISCONNECTED AND
CABLE IS SECURED, DRUM AREA CLEAR and departs the drum area.
f.
If procedure is being performed in conjunction with Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep
Cable, no further action is required.
NOTE
APC handlers may assist other personnel still working in the drum area.
g.
If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE
signs, check area for gear adrift.
4E-4AE
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-4-3.5
OPERATION
Cutter Removal.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
a.
Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can
be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable.
b.
Reman fantail.
c.
Request permission to recovery gear.
4E-4-3.6
Coax Cable Recovery.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When
possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the
drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered.
a.
Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit.
b.
Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as
they come within reach.
c.
Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from
hardeyes. Install canvas chafing.
d.
Continue heaving in on coax section.
4E-4-3.7
Sweep Gear Recovery.
a.
Engage sweep wire drum.
b.
Heave in on APC, remove pelican hook, chafe towing stocking.
c.
Heave in on acoustic power and magnetic cables and sweep wire, keeping the acoustic device
aft of the magnetic tail until approximately 50 feet of buoyant section remains outboard, and hold
until all other gear is recovered.
d.
Inspect cables for cuts, abrasions, and cracks as cables come onboard, making minor repairs to
the cables per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4E-4AF
OPERATION
4E-4-3.8
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Short Leg Electrode Recovery/Removal.
a.
Heave in on short leg electrode and remove electrode floats.
b.
Pay out coax cable, faking K-4 electrode on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a clear
work area.
c.
Remove CK/P insulating sleeve.
d.
Disconnect and remove K-4 electrode from K-4 blank connection.
e.
Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail :
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain
that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot
(Figure 4E-4R).
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide P/B insulating boot over terminal lug.
(4)
Slide two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about 1
inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so
securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
f.
Continue heaving in on S section.
4E-4-3.9
a.
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers
of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side.
Long Leg Electrode Recovery.
Heave in on long leg electrode and sweep wire.
NOTE
Floats may be left on the long end electrode if desired.
b.
When the quarter roller block and T-bar stop are outboard of the cable roller chock assembly,
stop the sweep wire.
c.
Remove quarter roller block from diversion chain on sweep wire. Remove T-bar stop.
d.
Ease in magnetic cable until quarter roller block is just forward of cable roller chock assembly.
Remove quarter roller block and nylon pendant from outboard end of K-4 electrode.
e.
Secure hold-back line to the outboard end of the long leg electrode and keep a strain on it while
reeling all of the K-4 electrode onto the magnetic cable drum. Secure long leg electrode to drum
with this line.
4E-4-3.10
O-Type Gear Recovery.
a.
Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane.
b.
Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle.
4E-4AG
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-4R. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted
c.
Heave in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock.
d.
Disengage sweep wire drum.
4E-4-3.11
Size 1 Float Recovery.
a.
Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard.
b.
Recover float pendant with a boat hook.
c.
Heave in on float pendant until float nose line is within reach.
d.
Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane, and heave in until float is in lifting position
under crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail of
float.
e.
Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook.
f.
Remove emergency recovery pendant.
g.
Stow float.
4E-4-3.12
Otter Recovery.
a.
Train port articulated stern crane outboard over otter.
b.
Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter.
c.
Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4E-4D) or storage rack on fantail.
d.
Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead.
e.
Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.
4E-4AH
OPERATION
4E-4-3.13
a.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Recovery of TB-27 and Float.
Continue recovery of APC until 50-foot towing stocking is just aft of cable roller chock assembly.
Ensure nose line is clear of APC and inhaul pendant.
b.
Detach nose line from APC and pass through stern chock. Tend around mooring bitts. Take
slack out of nose line until it takes strain.
c.
Train articulated stern crane outboard and, with stern crane head inboard, detach inhaul
pendant from APC. Attach inhaul pendant to crane whip.
d.
Heave in on APC and articulated stern crane whip and inhaul wire connection, keeping slack out
of nose line.
e.
Heave in on inhaul pendant until weight of Acoustic Device TB-27 is suspended by crane and
float is properly cradled.
Ensure float is properly seated in its cradle before hoisting device from
water.
Ensure enough APC is streamed to allow acoustic device and float to be
recovered on deck.
f.
Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 simultaneously, and train gear inboard and
forward, clearing acoustic cable and nose line from stern obstructions. Slack nose line as
necessary.
g.
Stow acoustic device and float on deck.
h.
Notify bridge all gear is clear.
4E-4-3.14
Securing Gear.
a.
Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS.
b.
Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.
c.
Ground isolate S-Cable, if cable is being stowed, with no further sweep exercises:
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around S terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug.
(4)
Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about
1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so
securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-4S).
4E-4AJ
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-4S. S-Cable Booted
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
d.
4E-4-4
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers
of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side.
Using hold-back line, secure outboard end of S-Cable to drum.
RECOVERY OF DAMAGED (CUT OR PARTED) GEAR.
A mine could be fouled in the gear; proceed with caution.
4E-4-4.1
Preparation.
a.
Lead a recovery wire from a free winch drum or the gypsy head on sweep wire winch, through
sweep wire roller chock, and outboard of taffrail to recovery position on fantail.
b.
Approach float upwind or upcurrent, whichever has greatest effect.
4E-4AK
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
NOTE
Wind will generally have more effect than current.
c.
Stop the screw on recovery side.
d.
Hook float with a grapnel or boat hook and haul float alongside.
e.
Hook softeye quick recovery pendant and pull pendant free from flagstaff socket. Shackle
recovery pendant to recovery wire.
f.
Hook crane whip into float lifting pad and take a strain on recovery wire with winch.
g.
Heave in on recovery wire and crane whip simultaneously, keeping strain on recovery wire so
weight of sweep gear is not taken by crane.
h.
Hoist float and trip pelican hook to release float pendant. Stow float.
i.
Continue heaving in on recovery wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is up close to sweep wire
roller chock.
j.
Utilizing articulated stern crane, stow otter in the quick recovery hook in ready release position
or on stowage rack on fantail. Attach safety chain.
k.
If severed end of the sweep wire is in sight, recover by hand.
l.
If severed end of the sweep wire is not in sight, secure a chain stopper grip on severed sweep
wire.
m.
Remove End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly and recover sweep wire.
4E-4-5
RECOVERY OF PARTED GEAR USING RIGID HULL INFLATABLE BOAT (RHIB).
a.
Approach float from downwind.
b.
Retrieve the float nose line and attach messenger line (if required). If possible, recovery should
be done without RHIB.
c.
Haul in messenger line (if used) with the winch/gypsy head until the float is in lifting position. In
either method of recovery, when float is in a lifting position, haul it aboard and stow.
4E-4AL/(4E-4AM blank)
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4E-5
M MK 6(H) TB-26 (ASTERN) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of
this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and
injury or death to personnel.
The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure
all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is
followed.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded
component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Block, quarter roller (type A), NM, with swivel eye
(3940-00-722-8995)
Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM
(3940-00-368-7551) (2)
Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM
(3940-00-368-7552) (4)
Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342)
Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356) (3)
Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342)
(4)
Cable, acoustic power (APC), 1,650-foot (per Job
Sheet 4A-5) (1075-00-782-9881)
Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping,
coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337)
Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping,
CL (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327)
Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping,
S (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327)
Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM
(with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906)
Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460)
(6)
Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132)
(6)
Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-265-0677)
Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-332-5834) (2)
Device, acoustic, TB-26, NM (1075-01-368-2482)
Float, type O, size 0, NM (acoustic) (per Job Sheet
4A-3) (1075-01-357-9948)
Float, type O, size 1, NM (moored) (per Job Sheet
4A-3) (1075-01-371-0568)
Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye
(4030-00-290-6420)
Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x
3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638)
Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986)
Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet
4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280)
Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon,
hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1
Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313)
(12)
Pendant, device, towing/stopper (acoustic), 1/2-inch
x 3-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye
each end) (2) 1
Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as
required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL)
(hardeye each end) 1
See footnotes at end of table.
4E-5A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS (Continued)
Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM,
wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, float (acoustic), 1/2-inch x length as
required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL)
(hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot,
NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one
end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1
Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, wire
rope (LHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, preventer (CL), 1/2-inch x 5-foot, single
leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, preventer (CL), 2-1/2-inch x 86-foot, single
leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, stopper (CL), 1-1/2-inch x 3- to 5-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each
end) 1
Pendant, towing (TJ), 2-1/2-inch x 3-foot, single
leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1
Ring, 3-inch ID, NM (5365-01-346-8057)
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch
(5305-00-226-9206) (6)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM,
1/2-inch (4030-00-270-5482)
5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (36)
3/4-inch (4030-00-270-5484) (5)
Sleeve (S/P) (5970-01-519-3176) (3)
Stop, T-bar, NM (1075-01-233-4952)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard
end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611)
Towing Jumper TJ (1075-00-732-1791)
Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505)
(20)
Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as
required)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949)
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385)
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652)
Chain, safety (4010-00-599-6737) (2)
Electrician Mate Tool Kit
Gauge, pressure (0 to 30 psi)
Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) *
Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251)
Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252)
Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643)
Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread)
(whipped each end) (2)
*
1
Megohmmeter, 500 Vdc
Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range)
Paint, enamel, blue (TT-E-516) *
Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) *
Paint, enamel, white (TT-E-516) *
Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176)
Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021)
Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572)
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Wrench, T-handle (5120-00-972-0490)
Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb
Hazardous Material.
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4E-5-1
RIGGING.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
4E-5-1.1
Preparation.
a.
Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
personnel for minesweeping operations.
b.
Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational
order.
4E-5B
Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential
OPERATION
4E-5-1.2
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Float, Kite, and Sweep Wire Preparation.
For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on
water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required.
Total length cannot exceed 20 feet.
a.
Prepare size 1 and size 0 floats in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3. Size 0 float used with
Acoustic Device TB-26. Size 1 float is for O gear (moored configuration) and may utilize 10-foot
float pendants.
b.
Prepare size 1 kite as an otter (port configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1.
c.
Prepare port sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.
4E-5-1.3
a.
4E-5-1.4
APC Preparation.
Prepare APC in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Preparation.
a.
Deck test acoustic device 24 hours prior to streaming in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.
Upon completion of test, pressurize device to 10 psi for 24 hours to ensure device is air tight. If
more than a 1 psi loss of pressure is observed (indicated by soapy-water bubbles), release all air
pressure and take corrective action. A 20 °F drop in temperature will have a 1 psi drop in
pressure. If no loss of pressure is observed and device is to be launched soon thereafter, retain
air pressure in housing until final pressurizing is accomplished; otherwise, release all pressure.
b.
Prepare towing stocking in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.
c.
Using a 3/4-inch shackle, shackle 3-inch ID ring to aft hole in acoustic device towing and hoisting
plate using Table 4E-5A for depth and float pendant correlation. Connect float pendant to ring
(Figure 4E-5A).
d.
Lead outboard end of APC aft through cable roller chock assembly; then, pull cable outboard,
clear of all obstructions, and forward to acoustic device. Connect cable to Acoustic Device
TB-26. If required, apply a light coat of silicone grease.
e.
Using 3/4-inch shackle, connect one end of device towing pendant to hardeye of towing stocking
at 6-foot mark on APC. Connect pendant’s free end to device towing pad (Figure 4E-5A). Wrap
3-foot towing pendant and shackles with chafing gear.
Ensure inhaul pendant is connected aft of float pendant. Failure to do so
could cause damage to float pendant and inhaul pendant.
f.
Pass hardeye of inhaul pendant down through float fairlead tube to 3-inch ID ring and attach with
a 3/4-inch shackle with screw pin end on 3-inch ID ring behind float pendant connection (Figure
4E-5A).
g.
Shackle softeye of inhaul pendant to crane whip, using a 1/2-inch shackle. Figure 4E-5B shows
acoustic device in a cradled position.
4E-5C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Table 4E-5A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure
1
DEPTH TO CENTER OF
DIAPHRAGM (FEET)
PENDANT LENGTH SIZE 0
FLOAT (FEET)
AIR
PRESSURES (PSI)1
20
13
8.0
22
15
8.5
24
17
9.3
25
18
10.1
26
19
10.5
27
20
10.8
28
21
11.2
29
22
11.5
30
23
11.8
These air pressures for the TB-26 rising when streamed through the water.
Figure 4E-5A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing
4E-5D
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-5B. Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled
h.
Take in on crane whip until inhaul pendant is wound on cable drum.
i.
Using 5/8-inch shackle, attach tail line to tail of size 0 float.
j.
Upon successful completion of air leak test, pressurize device to operating depth (Table 4E-5A).
4E-5-1.5
a.
O-Type Components Preparation.
Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly to Otter.
(1)
Engage port sweep wire drum.
(2)
Attach 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain, with long link in the middle, between sweep wire and 60-foot
(LHL) otter pendant, using 5/8-inch shackles. Five interlocking 5/8-inch shackles may be
used in lieu of chain. Reel in on port sweep wire drum.
(3)
Lead 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave; then through
sweep wire roller chock assembly.
(4)
Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between the otter bridle and 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant
(Figure 4E-5C).
(5)
Connect 10-foot float pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle.
4E-5E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-5C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration)
b.
4E-5-1.6
Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position.
(1)
Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter.
(2)
Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle
is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4E-5D).
(3)
Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and
secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion.
(4)
Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane
whip.
(5)
Rotate crane forward.
(6)
Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation.
a.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented
sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block
padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4E-5E).
b.
Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure
block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using
5/8-inch shackles.
4E-5F
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-5D. Otter in Ready Release Position
4E-5-1.7
Towing Jumper Assembly TJ.
a.
Remove long leg electrode from S-Cable (if attached).
b.
Bring end of S-Cable and end of CL-Cable off drum, pass them through cable roller chock
assemblies, and prepare the TJ towing jumper for connection in accordance with Figure 4E-5F.
c.
Make the S/TJ and CL/TJ connections as follows:
(1)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(2)
Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of TJ cable and two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch
hose clamps over the end of the S- and CL-Cable and slide out of the way.
(3)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P
insulating sleeves to aid in installing the sleeves and to increase watertight integrity.
4E-5G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-5E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly
4E-5H
(4)
Slip S/P insulating sleeve small end first, over the pigtail and slide back out of the way.
(5)
Connect each end terminal and secure with two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws,
two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers (Figure 4E-5G). Torque
nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. Make certain end terminals are properly oriented so the contact area of
each terminal is at a longitudinal centerline of both cables.
(6)
Wrap a couple of layers of dry rags over the cap screw and nuts after connecting the end
terminals together and secure with electrical tape. Do not exceed the inside diameter of
the S/P sleeve.
(7)
Slide the S/P sleeve over the connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-5F. TJ Jumper Assembly - Diversion Rigging for M Mk 6(h) Sweep Configuration
4E-5J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-5G. Rubber Insulating Sleeve
Excessive tightening of sleeve or boot clamps will press a permanent
groove around the lug barrels or damage the insulating sleeve and should
be avoided.
(8)
Slide clamps over ends of sleeves and position clamps (Figure 4E-5G) and tighten clamps
evenly and firmly.
(9)
Apply two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing rubber insulating tape starting
approximately 2 inches before and ending 2 inches after the insulated sleeve.
(10) Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape; then apply two layers of
half-lapped friction tape.
d.
4E-5-2
Attach one end of 3-foot TJ towing pendant to towing tab on towing jumper with a 5/8-inch
shackle, and other end to quarter roller block with a 5/8-inch shackle.
LAUNCHING/STREAMING.
NOTE
Sweep gear for this configuration is streamed to port.
4E-5-2.1
a.
4E-5K
Streaming Preparations.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
b.
Check air pressure in device for appropriate depth (Table 4E-5A).
c.
Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
d.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
e.
Request permission to stream gear.
4E-5-2.2
Launching/Streaming Float and Acoustic Device TB-26.
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify
that the photo cell is working.
a.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.
b.
Pass nose line through starboard chock and tend around mooring bitts. Heave in to remove
slack from nose line.
c.
Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 simultaneously, training gear outboard to position
gear for launch. Ensure nose line and APC are clear of all deck obstructions (Figure 4E-5H,
View A).
d.
Lower cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 into water. Slack nose line to permit float to ride
astern.
e.
Continue to lower Acoustic Device TB-26 until it is supported by float. Move crane head until
inboard and continue to pay out inhaul pendant until it can be disconnected from crane whip.
Disconnect inhaul pendant.
f.
Bring inhaul pendant aboard through roller chock assembly. Attach inhaul pendant to towing
stocking at 50-foot mark on APC, using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through one eye of towing
stocking.
g.
Slack off on nose line until gear is being towed by APC (Figure 4E-5H, View B).
h.
Bring nose line through roller chock assembly. Attach nose line to towing stocking at 50-foot
mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through free eye of towing stocking.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
i.
Pay out APC until approximately 50 feet of buoyant section is outboard of cable roller chock
assembly before launching O gear.
j.
Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.
4E-5-2.3
Launching/Streaming O-Type Gear.
a.
Ensure ship’s speed is 4 knots.
b.
Request permission to put gear to the rail.
c.
Ensure nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-5J).
d.
Lead nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock.
4E-5L
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-5H. Streaming Procedure for Acoustic Device TB-26
4E-5M
OPERATION
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-5J. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)
4E-5N
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
e.
Tend line to bitt.
f.
Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, train outboard to position float
at rail.
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify
that the photo cell is working.
g.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.
h.
Ensure float pendant(s) and nose line are being tended and float pendant(s) and line are clear of
ship and obstructions.
i.
Connect float pendant(s), if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the
outboard corner of otter.
j.
Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE.
k.
Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook
securing otter (Figure 4E-5D). Launch float and slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.
4E-5-2.4
Tripping the Otter.
a.
Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes a strain.
b.
Pay out sweep wire under power until long link of 6-foot chain is just outboard of sweep wire
roller chock assembly.
c.
Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until
the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope) and check for proper diversion.
d.
Mount quarter roller block (attached to 3-foot pendant and TJ towing tab) on sweep wire. Mouse
roller block pin (Figure 4E-5F).
e.
Increase speed as required to assist in streaming gear.
f.
Return and restow articulated stern crane.
4E-5-2.5
Paying Out of CL-Cable and S-Cable.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
a.
Increase ship’s speed as required to enhance magnetic cable streaming.
b.
Pay out S-Cable, and CL-Cable together until catenary is formed before veering sweep wire.
c.
Pay out all three cables (APC, S, and CL) until CL preventer pendant is on deck.
4E-5P
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
During streaming, ensure the sweep wire carries the main tow load and the
acoustic device remains astern of the magnetic loop.
Any maneuvering of the ship during this critical period of streaming
operation may foul the gear.
d.
Stop paying out magnetic cables and sweep wire, then attach a 1/2-inch x 5-foot wire rope
stopper pendant to preventer stocking hardeye on CL-Cable (Figure 4E-5K) with a 5/8-inch
shackle. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, secure other end to port instrumented sheave padeye.
e.
Pay out CL-Cable until wire rope stopper pendant takes strain.
f.
Disconnect CL drum preventer pendant from CL-Cable. Using PPE per MSDS, mark S-Cable
for CL-Cable reattachment point (Figure 4E-5L).
4E-5-2.6
Short Leg Electrode Removal (If Necessary).
a.
Adjust rate of pay out of magnetic cable to maintain catenary.
b.
Remove lashings from short leg electrode and S-Cable (if attached).
c.
Rotate drum, faking K-4 electrode (if attached) on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a
clear work area.
d.
Disconnect inboard end of K-4 electrode from K-4 blank pigtail. Replace cap screws and nuts in
K-4 electrode end fitting (if attached).
e.
Remove K-4 blank pigtail boot (if attached in place of the K-4 electrode).
Figure 4E-5K. Preventer Stocking on CL-Cable
4E-5Q
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-5L. CL-Cable Drum Preventer Pendant
4E-5-2.7
Attachment of CL-Cable to K-4 Blank and Pigtail.
a.
Remove K-4 blank pigtail boot (if attached in place of K-4 electrode).
b.
Attach CL-Cable to free end of K-4 blank and pigtail. Insulate and waterproof the connection by
installing an S/P insulating sleeve as follows (Figure 4E-5G):
4E-5R
(1)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(2)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P
insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity.
(3)
Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over free end of K-4 blank pigtail and two 2-1/2- to
5-1/2-inch hose clamps over CL-Cable; slide clamps out of way.
(4)
Slip S/P insulating sleeve (small end first) over K-4 blank pigtail, and slide back out of way.
(5)
Connect terminals of CL and K-4 blank pigtail cables using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch
cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure
terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each
cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(6)
Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/P insulating sleeve.
(7)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(8)
Slide S/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
(9)
Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with
outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing
screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
c.
Heave in on magnetic cable and disconnect wire rope stopper pendant from 6-foot preventer
stocking hardeye on CL-Cable. Secure hardeye to CL with tape.
d.
Place ten turns of 21-thread lashing around K-4 blank pigtail and coax cable to relieve towing
strain on K-4 blank.
4E-5-2.8
Streaming Coax Cable to Full Scope.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
Maintain slack in APC at all times.
a.
Veer sweep wire and pay out magnetic cable, ensure the sweep wire carries the main load.
b.
Veer sweep wire to full scope (176 fathoms).
c.
Stop APC when 125-foot inboard towing stocking is just aft of roller chock assembly.
d.
Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock
assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with
SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4E-5-2.9
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection.
a.
Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable.
b.
Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable
with 5/8-inch shackles.
c.
Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until
just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant
(Figure 4E-5E). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.
4E-5S
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed
awash at all times.
d.
Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.
4E-5-2.10
Stopping Off the Sweep.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
a.
Pay out the APC so that the four red marks at 1,510 feet of the APC are just forward of roller
chock assembly.
b.
Remove canvas chafing from APC towing stocking.
c.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach towing pendant to the starboard instrumented sheave pad eye.
Attach pelican hook to the free end of towing pendant with a 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-5M).
d.
Secure both eyes of towing stocking into the bail of pelican hook. Install cotter pin with a tripping
lanyard.
e.
Pay out the APC until the towing pendant takes the strain.
4E-5-2.11
Securing Sweep Wire.
Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged.
a.
Stop veering sweep wire when the four blue bands (1,056 feet) are at sweep wire roller chock.
Engage pawls and secure sweep wire drum.
b.
Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.
4E-5T
Figure 4E-5M. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 6(h) with TB-26)
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-5U
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
NOTE
Connecting magnetic cable, APC, and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished
simultaneously.
c.
Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4E-5N) back-to-back to sweep wire aft of instrumented sheave.
Attach Cutters Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing bridle, midway between
8-inch (type E) snatch block and roller chock assembly.
d.
Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.
After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel
will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.
To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do
not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station
on the 01 level.
e.
Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to
cutters.
f.
Arm Cutters Mk 15.
g.
Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS
MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.
4E-5V
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-5N. Wedge Stop Placement
4E-5W
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-5-2.12
OPERATION
Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.
Minesweep cable must satisfactorily pass meggering test before pulsing.
Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power
Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the
drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic
minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep
electrician.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
NOTE
Connecting magnetic cable and acoustic cable may be accomplished
simultaneously.
a.
Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area.
b.
Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area.
c.
Minesweep electrician enter the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN
switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer.
d.
Drum area crew enters the drum area.
e.
Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtails
on electrical rubber matting.
f.
Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for
insulating cracks and breaks and make repairs as required.
g.
Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends.
h.
Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box.
i.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
j.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range) checking, conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to
terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive too negative) in the terminal box.
k.
Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.
4E-5X
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
l.
Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and
magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT
VOLTAGE.
m.
Conduct meggering test. Refer to PMS.
n.
Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal
box.
o.
Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush
and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
p.
Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2
inch.
q.
Lower the terminal box cover.
4E-5-2.13
Connecting the Acoustic Power Cable.
Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before
entering drum area.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Measure insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable prior to making
connections to power outlet in accordance with PMS.
The PCU operator shall exit drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
a.
Verify measurement of insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable, with an approved 500
Vdc megohmmeter.
b.
Verify power is secured prior to connecting the APC. This is accomplished by checking the plug
receptacle with a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) that has been checked against a known DC
source to ensure proper operation. The source should be the same type and voltage range as
the circuit to be tested.
c.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range),
checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor in the acoustic power receptacle.
d.
Recheck the multimeter to the known DC source to ensure the multimeter is still working
properly.
4E-5Y
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
e.
Remove inboard end of APC cable from interior of APC cable reel.
f.
Remove protective boot from inboard end of APC cable.
g.
In a straight line, connect APC cable to receptacle and tighten gland nut using T-handle wrench.
h.
Remove cover from acoustic cable receptacle.
i.
After the magnetic and APC cable connections have been made, secure the drum area on the
port and starboard sides with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, creating any entry barrier.
Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.
4E-5-2.14
Departing the Drum Area.
a.
Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety
Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then
departs drum area.
b.
Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker.
c.
Energize PCU, start acoustic device and transfer control to ACU.
4E-5-2.15
Towing the Sweep.
a.
Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck.
b.
Increase headway to sweep speed.
c.
Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves.
d.
Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4E-5P).
4E-5-2.16
Maneuvering Instructions.
a.
Turns should normally be made towards gear and may be up to 180 degrees. Sweep wire may
sag after ship has turned about 60 degrees. To avoid excessive sagging and consequential risk
of fouling or damaging sweep gear, sweep wire should be shortened to about 75 fathoms during
turn and veered again to full scope upon completion of turn. If chafing is evident, rudder should
be eased.
b.
Speeds in excess of 6 knots are not recommended due to the danger of damage to magnetic
cable. Table 4E-5B presents increase in tension between 6 and 8 knots.
c.
Sweep gear for this configuration is always streamed to port.
Table 4E-5B. Sweep Wire Tensions
4E-5Z
SPEED (KNOTS)
CABLE TENSION (LB)
6
5,650
8
11,800
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-5P. Sweep Configuration M Mk 6(h) with Acoustic Device TB-26 Astern
4E-5AA
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-5-3
4E-5-3.1
RECOVERY.
Preparation.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
4E-5-3.2
OPERATION
Reentering the Drum Area.
Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power
Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the
drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
a.
Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured.
b.
Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN.
c.
Ensure HPU is secured.
d.
Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
e.
Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch
to the SAFE position.
f.
Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE
POSITION.
4E-5-3.3
Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
a.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
b.
Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position.
4E-5AB
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
c.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg).
d.
Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
e.
Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box
while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to
the safety officer.
f.
Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when
handling cable to prevent burns.
NOTE
The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of
cable.
Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be
accomplished simultaneously.
g.
Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box.
h.
Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove lugged cable ends from terminal box and
carefully place them on electrical rubber matting.
i.
Close and secure, terminal box.
j.
Install meggering device leads to cable long and short leg lugs.
k.
Reinstall protective boots on inboard pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several
wraps of plastic electrical tape.
l.
Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum.
m.
Drum area crew departs drum area.
n.
If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE
signs. Check area for gear adrift.
o.
Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs
drum area.
4E-5AC
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-5-3.4
OPERATION
Disconnecting the Acoustic Power Cable.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
NOTE
Disconnecting acoustic power cable and magnetic minesweep cable may
be accomplished simultaneously.
a.
Using the T-Handle wrench, electrician loosens the APC gland nut at the APC receptacle, and
slides it back off from the bitter end of the cable.
b.
In a straight line pull, remove cable from the receptacle.
c.
Reinstall the APC receptacle non-conducting plug.
d.
Reinstall the APC inboard end protective boot and secure inboard cable end to the interior of the
APC cable reel.
e.
Minesweep electrician makes report, APC IS DISCONNECTED AND CABLE IS SECURED,
DRUM AREA IS CLEAR and departs the drum area.
f.
If procedure is being performed in conjunction with Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep
Cable, no further action is required.
NOTE
APC handlers may assist other personnel still working in the drum area.
g.
4E-5AD
If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE
signs, check area for gear adrift.
OPERATION
4E-5-3.5
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Cutter Removal.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
a.
Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can
be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable.
b.
Reman fantail.
c.
Request permission to recovery gear.
4E-5-3.6
Coax Cable Recovery.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When
possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the
drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered.
a.
Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit.
b.
Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as
they come within reach.
c.
Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from
hardeyes. Install canvas chafing.
d.
Continue heaving in on coax section.
4E-5-3.7
Sweep Gear Recovery.
a.
Engage sweep wire drum.
b.
Heave in on APC, remove pelican hook, chafe towing stocking.
c.
Heave in on acoustic power cable, magnetic cable, and sweep wire, keeping the acoustic device
aft of magnetic tail until approximately 50 feet of buoyant section remains outboard, and hold
until all other gear is recovered.
d.
Inspect cables for cuts, abrasions, and cracks as cables come onboard, making minor repairs to
the cables per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4E-5AE
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-5-3.8
OPERATION
Disconnecting CL-Cable From K-4 Blank and Pigtail Cable.
a.
Reel in simultaneously the sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable until CL to K-4 blank pigtail
connection is just aft of magnetic cable drum. Hold APC and sweep wire.
b.
Stop off CL-Cable by attaching 1/2-inch x 5-foot stopper pendant to 6-foot preventer stocking
hardeye on CL-Cable with a 5/8-inch shackle. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, secure other end to
port instrumented sheave padeye.
c.
Pay out coax cable until the stopper pendant takes a strain.
d.
Remove insulating sleeve.
e.
Detach CL-Cable from K-4 blank pigtail cable.
f.
Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail:
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank pigtail terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making
certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating
boot.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide P/B insulating boot over K-4 blank pigtail terminal lug.
(4)
Slide two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about 1
inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so
securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-5Q).
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
g.
Reel in S-Cable and sweep wire until mark on S-Cable which indicates point for attaching
CL-Cable to drum preventer pendant is at hand.
h.
Ground isolate inboard end of CL connector:
4E-5AF
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around CL terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug.
(4)
Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of S/B boot. Position clamps at end
about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate
clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-5Q. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
i.
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
Secure drum preventer pendant to CL-Cable. Heave in and remove 1/2-inch x 5-foot wire rope
stopper pendant.
4E-5-3.9
Magnetic Cable Recovery.
a.
Heave in simultaneously on sweep wire, CL, and S-Cables until the TJ towing jumper assembly
is just outboard of the roller chock assembly, and diversion point is accessible to the rigger.
b.
Remove quarter roller block from chain on sweep wire.
c.
Remove T-bar stop.
d.
Reel in remainder of S and CL-Cables simultaneously.
4E-5-3.10
a.
O-Type Gear Recovery.
Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane.
4E-5AG
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
b.
Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle.
c.
Heave in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock.
d.
Disengage sweep wire drum.
4E-5-3.11
Size 1 Float Recovery.
a.
Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard.
b.
Recover float pendant with a boat hook.
c.
Heave in on float pendant until float nose line is within reach.
d.
Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane, heave in until float is in lifting position
under articulated stern crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or
grapnel to lifting bail on float.
e.
Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook.
f.
Remove emergency recovery pendant.
g.
Stow float.
4E-5-3.12
Otter Recovery.
a.
Train appropriate articulated stern crane outboard over otter.
b.
Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter.
c.
Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4E-5D) or storage rack on fantail.
d.
Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead.
e.
Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.
4E-5-3.13
a.
Recovery of TB-26 and Float.
Continue recovery of APC until 50-foot mark is just aft of cable roller chock.
Ensure nose line is clear of APC and inhaul pendant.
b.
Detach nose line from APC. Lead nose line through stern chock. Tend around mooring bitts.
Take slack out of nose line until it takes strain.
c.
Train starboard articulated stern crane outboard and, with stern crane head inboard, detach
inhaul pendant from APC. Attach inhaul pendant to crane whip.
d.
Heave in on articulated stern crane whip and inhaul wire connection, keeping slack out of float
nose line.
e.
Heave in on inhaul pendant until weight of Acoustic Device TB-26 is suspended by crane and
float is properly cradled.
4E-5AH
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Ensure float is properly seated in its cradle before hoisting device from
water.
Ensure enough APC is streamed to allow acoustic device and float to be
recovered on deck.
f.
Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 simultaneously and train outboard and forward,
clearing acoustic cable and nose line from stern obstructions. Slack nose line as necessary.
g.
Stow acoustic device and float on deck.
h.
Notify bridge all gear is clear.
4E-5-3.14
Securing Gear.
a.
Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS.
b.
Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.
c.
Ground isolate outboard ends of CL- and S-Cables as follows:
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boots.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide S/B insulating boots over terminal lugs.
(4)
Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of S/B boots. Position clamps about 1
inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so
securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-5R).
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
d.
4E-5-4
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
Using hold-back lines, secure outboard ends of CL-Cable and S-Cable to drums.
RECOVERY OF DAMAGED (CUT OR PARTED) GEAR.
A mine could be fouled in the gear; proceed with caution.
4E-5-4.1
a.
Preparation.
Lead a recovery wire from a free winch drum or the gypsy head on sweep wire winch, through
sweep wire roller chock, and outboard of taffrail to recovery position on fantail.
4E-5AJ
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-5R. S- or CL-Cable Booted (Typical)
b.
Approach float upwind or upcurrent, whichever has greatest effect.
NOTE
Wind will generally have more effect than current.
c.
Stop the screw on recovery side.
d.
Hook float with a grapnel or boat hook and haul float alongside.
e.
Hook softeye quick recovery pendant and pull pendant free from flagstaff socket. Shackle
recovery pendant to recovery wire.
f.
Hook crane whip into float lifting pad and take a strain on recovery wire with winch.
g.
Heave in on recovery wire and crane whip simultaneously, keeping strain on recovery wire so
weight of sweep gear is not taken by crane.
h.
Hoist float and trip pelican hook to release float pendant. Stow float.
i.
Continue heaving in on recovery wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is up close to sweep wire
roller chock.
j.
Utilizing articulated stern crane, stow otter in the quick recovery hook in ready release position
or on stowage rack on fantail. Attach safety chain.
k.
If severed end of the sweep wire is in sight, recover by hand.
l.
If severed end of the sweep wire is not in sight, secure a cable grip on severed sweep wire.
m.
Remove End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly and recover sweep wire.
4E-5AK
OPERATION
4E-5-5
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
RECOVERY OF PARTED GEAR USING RIGID HULL INFLATABLE BOAT (RHIB).
a.
Approach float from downwind.
b.
Retrieve the float nose line and attach messenger line (if required). If possible, recovery should
be done without RHIB.
c.
Haul in messenger line (if used) with the winch/gypsy head until the float is in lifting position. In
either method of recovery, when float is in a lifting position, haul it aboard and stow.
4E-5AL/(4E-5AM)
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4E-6
M MK 6(H) TB-27 (ASTERN) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of
this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and
injury or death to personnel.
The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure
all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is
followed.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded
component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Block, quarter roller (type A), NM, with swivel eye
(3940-00-722-8995)
Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM
(3940-00-368-7551) (4)
Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM
(3940-00-368-7552)
Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342)
Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356) (3)
Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342)
(4)
Cable, acoustic power (APC), 1,650-foot (per Job
Sheet 4A-5) (1075-00-782-9881)
Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping,
coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337)
Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping,
CL (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327)
Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, S
(per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327)
Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM
(with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906)
Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460)
(6)
Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132)
(6)
Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-265-0677)
Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-332-5834) (2)
Device, acoustic, TB-27, NM (1075-01-368-2483)
Float, type O, size 1, NM, acoustic (1), moored (1)
(per Job Sheet 4A-3) (1075-01-371-0568)
Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye
(4030-00-290-6420)
Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x
3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638)
Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986)
Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet
4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280)
Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon,
hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1
Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313)
(12)
Pendant, device, towing/stopper (acoustic), 1/2-inch
x 3-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye
each end) (2) 1
Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as
required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL)
(hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM,
wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
See footnotes at end of table.
4E-6A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS (Continued)
Pendant, float (acoustic), 1/2-inch x length as
required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL)
(hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot,
NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one
end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1
Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, wire
rope (LHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, preventer (CL), 1/2-inch x 5-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, preventer (CL), 2-1/2-inch x 86-foot, single
leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, stopper (CL), 1-1/2-inch x 3- to 5-foot, single
leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, towing (TJ), 2-1/2-inch x 3-foot, single leg,
nylon (hardeye each end) 1
Ring, 3-inch ID, NM (5365-01-346-8057)
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch
(5305-00-226-9206) (6)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM,
1/2-inch (4030-00-270-5482)
3/4-inch (4030-00-270-5485)
5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (44)
Sleeve (S/P) (5970-01-519-3176) (3)
Stop, T-bar (1075-01-233-4952)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard
end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611)
Towing Jumper TJ (1075-00-732-1791)
Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5130-00-614-3505)
(12)
Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as
required)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949)
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385)
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652)
Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737)
Electrician Mate Tool Kit
Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) *
Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251)
Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252)
Hook, grapnel, NM (4020-00-287-9643)
Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread)
(whipped each end) (2)
*
1
Megohmmeter, 500 Vdc
Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range)
Paint, enamel, blue (TT-E-516) *
Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) *
Paint, enamel, white (TT-E-516) *
Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176)
Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021)
Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572)
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Wrench, T-Handle (5120-00-972-0490)
Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb
Hazardous Material.
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4E-6-1
RIGGING.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
4E-6-1.1
Preparation.
a.
Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
personnel for minesweeping operations.
b.
Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational
order.
4E-6B
Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential
OPERATION
4E-6-1.2
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Float, Kite, and Sweep Wire Preparation.
For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on
water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required.
Total length cannot exceed 20 feet.
a.
Prepare two size 1 floats in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3; one float to be used with Acoustic
Device TB-27, the other size 1 float is for O-gear (moored configuration) and may utilize 10-foot
float pendants.
b.
Prepare size 1 kite as an otter (port configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1.
c.
Prepare port sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.
4E-6-1.3
a.
4E-6-1.4
APC Preparation.
Prepare APC in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Preparation.
a.
Prepare towing stocking in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.
b.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect 3-inch ID ring to second and fourth after holes in acoustic
device towing and hoisting plate. Use Table 4E-6A for depth and float pendant correlation.
Connect float pendant to ring (Figure 4E-6A).
c.
Lead outboard end of APC aft through cable roller chock assembly; then, pull cable outboard,
clear of all obstructions and forward to acoustic device. Connect cable to Acoustic Device
TB-27. If required, apply a light coat of silicone grease.
d.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect 3-foot towing pendant to hardeye of towing stocking at 6-foot
mark on APC. Connect pendant’s free end to device towing/hoisting plate. Wrap 3-foot towing
pendant and shackles with chafing gear.
Ensure inhaul pendant is connected aft of float pendant. Failure to do so
could cause damage to float pendant and inhaul pendant.
e.
Pass hardeye of inhaul pendant down through float fairlead tube to 3-inch ID ring and attach with
a 5/8-inch shackle with screw pin end on 3-inch ID ring, behind float pendant connection (Figure
4E-6A).
f.
Shackle softeye of inhaul pendant to crane whip, using a 1/2-inch shackle. Figure 4E-6B shows
acoustic device in a cradled position.
g.
Take in on crane whip until inhaul pendant is wound on cable drum.
h.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach tail line to tail of size 1 float.
i.
Deck test acoustic device in accordance with Planned Maintenance System.
4E-6C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Table 4E-6A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation
DEPTH TO CENTER OF DIAPHRAGM
(FEET)
FLOAT PENDANT LENGTH
(FEET)
20
13
22
15
24
17
25
18
26
19
27
20
28
21
29
22
30
23
Figure 4E-6A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing
4E-6D
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-6B. Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled
4E-6-1.5
a.
b.
O-Type Components Preparation.
Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly to Otter.
(1)
Engage port sweep wire drum.
(2)
Attach 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain, with long link in the middle, between sweep wire and a
60-foot (LHL) otter pendant, using 5/8-inch shackles. Five interlocking 5/8-inch shackles
may be used in lieu of chain. Reel in on port sweep wire drum.
(3)
Lead 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave; then through
sweep wire roller chock assembly.
(4)
Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between the otter bridle and 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant
(Figure 4E-6C).
(5)
Connect 10-foot float pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle.
Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position.
(1)
Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter.
4E-6E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-6C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration)
4E-6-1.6
(2)
Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle
is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4E-6D).
(3)
Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and
secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion.
(4)
Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane
whip.
(5)
Rotate crane forward.
(6)
Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation.
a.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented
sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block
padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4E-6E).
b.
Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure
block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using
5/8-inch shackles.
4E-6F
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-6D. Otter in Ready Release Position
4E-6-1.7
Towing Jumper Assembly TJ.
a.
Remove long leg electrode from S-Cable (if attached).
b.
Bring end of S-Cable and end of CL-Cable off drum, pass them through cable roller chock
assembly, and prepare the TJ towing jumper for connection in accordance with Figure 4E-6F.
c.
Make the S/TJ and CL/TJ connections as follows:
(1)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(2)
Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of TJ cable and two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch
hose clamps over the ends of the S- and CL-Cable and slide out of the way.
(3)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P
insulating sleeves to aid in installing the sleeves and to increase watertight integrity.
(4)
Slip S/P insulating sleeve small end first, over the pigtail and slide back out of the way.
4E-6G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-6E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly
4E-6H
(5)
Connect each end terminal and secure with two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws,
two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers (Figure 4E-6G). Torque
nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. Make certain end terminals are properly oriented so the contact area of
each terminal is at a longitudinal centerline of both cables.
(6)
Wrap a couple of layers of dry rags over the cap screw and nuts after connecting the end
terminals together and secure with electrical tape. Do not exceed the inside diameter of
the S/P sleeve.
(7)
Slide the sleeve over the connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-6F. TJ Jumper Assembly - Diversion Rigging for M Mk 6(h) (Sweep Configuration)
4E-6J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-6G. Rubber Insulating Sleeve
Excessive tightening of sleeve or boot clamps will press a permanent
groove around the lug barrels or damage the insulating sleeve and should
be avoided.
(8)
Slide clamps over ends of S/P sleeves and position clamps (Figure 4E-6G) and tighten
clamps evenly and firmly.
(9)
Apply two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing rubber insulating tape starting
approximately 2 inches before and ending 2 inches after the insulated sleeve.
(10) Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape; then apply two layers of
half-lapped friction tape.
d.
4E-6-2
Attach one end of 3-foot TJ towing pendant to towing tab on towing jumper with a 5/8-inch
shackle, and other end to quarter roller block with a 5/8-inch shackle.
LAUNCHING/STREAMING.
NOTE
Sweep gear for this configuration is streamed to port.
4E-6-2.1
a.
4E-6K
Streaming Preparations.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
b.
Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as require.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
d.
Request permission to stream gear.
4E-6-2.2
Launching/Streaming the Float and Acoustic Device TB-27.
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify
that the photo cell is working.
a.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.
b.
Pass nose line through chock and tend around mooring bitts. Heave in to remove slack from
nose line.
c.
Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27, simultaneously training gear outboard to position
gear for launch. Ensure nose line and APC are clear of all deck obstructions (Figure 4E-6H,
View A).
d.
Lower cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 into water. Slack nose line to permit float to ride
astern.
e.
Continue to lower Acoustic Device TB-27 until it is supported by float. Move crane head until
inboard and continue to pay out inhaul pendant until it can be disconnected from crane whip.
Disconnect inhaul pendant.
f.
Bring inhaul pendant aboard through roller chock assembly. Attach inhaul pendant to towing
stocking at 50-foot mark on APC, using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through one eye of towing
stocking.
g.
Slack off nose line until gear is being towed by APC (Figure 4E-6H, View B).
h.
Bring nose line through the roller chock assembly. Attach nose line to towing stocking at 50-foot
mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through free eye of the towing stocking.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
i.
Pay out APC until approximately 50 feet of buoyant section is outboard of cable roller chock
assembly, before launching O gear.
j.
Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.
4E-6-2.3
Launching/Streaming O-Type Gear.
a.
Ensure ship's speed is 4 knots.
b.
Request permission to put gear to the rail.
c.
Ensure nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-6J).
d.
Lead nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock.
4E-6L
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-6H. Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-27
4E-6M
OPERATION
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-6J. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)
4E-6N
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
e.
Tend line to bitt.
f.
Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, train outboard to position float
at rail.
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify
that the photo cell is working.
g.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.
h.
Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and that float pendant and line are clear of
ship and obstructions.
i.
Connect float pendant(s), if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the
outboard corner of otter.
j.
Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE.
k.
Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook
securing otter (Figure 4E-6D). Launch float and slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.
4E-6-2.4
Tripping the Otter.
a.
Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes strain.
b.
Pay out sweep wire under power until long link of 6-foot chain is just outboard of sweep wire
roller chock assembly.
c.
Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until
the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope) and check for proper diversion.
d.
Mount quarter roller block (attached to 3-foot pendant and TJ towing tab) on sweep wire. Mouse
roller block pin (Figure 4E-6F).
e.
Increase speed as required to assist in streaming gear.
f.
Return and restow articulated stern crane.
4E-6-2.5
Paying Out of CL-Cable and S-Cable.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
a.
Increase ship’s speed as required to enhance magnetic cable streaming.
b.
Pay out S-Cable and CL-Cable together until catenary is formed before veering sweep wire.
c.
Pay out all three cables (APC, S, and CL) until CL preventer pendant is on deck.
4E-6P
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
During streaming, ensure the sweep wire carries the main tow load and the
acoustic device remains astern of the magnetic loop.
Any maneuvering of the ship during this critical period of streaming
operation may foul the gear.
d.
Stop paying out magnetic cables and sweep wire, then attach 1/2-inch x 3- to 5-foot wire rope
stopper pendant to preventer stocking hardeye on CL-Cable (Figure 4E-6K) with a 5/8-inch
shackle. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, secure other end to port instrumented sheave padeye.
e.
Pay out CL-Cable until wire rope stopper pendant takes strain.
f.
Disconnect CL drum preventer pendant from CL-Cable. Using PPE per MSDS, mark S-Cable
for CL-Cable reattachment point (Figure 4E-6L).
4E-6-2.6
Short Leg Electrode Removal (If Necessary).
a.
Adjust rate of pay out of magnetic cable to maintain catenary.
b.
Remove lashings from short leg electrode and S-Cable (if attached).
c.
Rotate drum, faking K-4 electrode (if attached) on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a
clear work area.
d.
Disconnect inboard end of K-4 electrode from K-4 blank pigtail. Replace cap screws and nuts in
K-4 electrode end fitting (if attached).
e.
Remove K-4 blank pigtail boot (if attached in place of the K-4 electrode).
Figure 4E-6K. Preventer Stocking on CL-Cable
4E-6Q
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-6L. CL-Cable Drum Preventer Pendant
4E-6-2.7
Attachment of CL-Cable to K-4 Blank and Pigtail.
a.
Remove K-4 blank pigtail boot (if attached in place of K-4 electrode).
b.
Attach CL-Cable to free end of K-4 blank and pigtail. Insulate and waterproof the connection by
installing a S/P insulating sleeve as follows (Figure 4E-6G):
4E-6R
(1)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(2)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P
insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity.
(3)
Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over free end of K-4 blank pigtail and two 2-1/2- to
5-1/2-inch hose clamps over CL-Cable; slide clamps out of way.
(4)
Slip S/P insulating sleeve (small end first) over K-4 blank pigtail and slide back out of way.
(5)
Connect terminals of CL and K-4 blank pigtail cables using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch
cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure
terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each
cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(6)
Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/P insulating sleeve.
(7)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(8)
Slide S/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
(9)
Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with
outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing
screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
c.
Heave in on magnetic cable and disconnect wire rope stopper pendant from 6-foot preventer
stocking hardeye on CL-Cable. Secure hardeye to CL with tape.
d.
Place ten turns of 21-thread lashing around K-4 blank pigtail and coax cable to relieve towing
strain on K-4 blank.
4E-6-2.8
Streaming Coax Cable to Full Scope.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
Maintain slack in APC at all times.
a.
Veer sweep wire and pay out magnetic cable and APC, ensure the sweep wire carries the main
tow load.
b.
Veer sweep wire to full scope (176 fathoms).
c.
Stop APC when 125-foot inboard towing stocking is at roller chock assembly.
d.
Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock
assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with
SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4E-6-2.9
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection.
a.
Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable.
b.
Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable
with 5/8-inch shackles.
c.
Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until
just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant
(Figure 4E-6E). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.
4E-6S
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed
awash at all times.
d.
Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.
4E-6-2.10
Stopping Off the Sweep.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
a.
Pay out the APC so that the four red marks at 1,510 feet of the APC are just forward of roller
chock assembly.
b.
Remove canvas chafing from APC towing stocking.
c.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach towing pendant to the starboard instrumented sheave padeye.
Attach pelican hook to the free end of towing pendant with a 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-6M).
d.
Secure both eyes of towing stocking into the bail of pelican hook. Install cotter pin with a tripping
lanyard.
e.
Pay out the APC until the towing pendant takes the strain.
4E-6-2.11
Securing Sweep Wire.
Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged.
a.
Stop veering sweep wire when the four blue bands (1,056 feet) are at sweep wire roller chock.
Engage pawls and secure sweep wire drum.
b.
Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.
4E-6T
Figure 4E-6M. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 6(h) with TB-27)
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-6U
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
NOTE
Connecting magnetic cable, APC, and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished
simultaneously.
c.
Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4E-6N) back-to-back to sweep wire aft of instrumented sheave.
Attach Cutters Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing bridle, midway between
8-inch (type E) snatch block and roller chock assembly.
d.
Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.
After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel
will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.
To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do
not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station
on the 01 level.
e.
Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to
cutters.
f.
Arm Cutters Mk 15.
g.
Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS
MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.
4E-6V
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-6N. Wedge Stop Placement
4E-6W
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-6-2.12
OPERATION
Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.
Minesweep cable must satisfactorily pass meggering test before pulsing.
Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power
Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the
drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic
minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep
electrician.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
NOTE
Connecting magnetic cable and acoustic cable may be accomplished
simultaneously.
a.
Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area.
b.
Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area.
c.
Minesweep electrician enters the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN
switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer.
d.
Drum area crew enters the drum area.
e.
Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtails
on electrical rubber matting.
f.
Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for
insulating cracks and breaks and make repairs as required.
g.
Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends.
h.
Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box.
i.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
j.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range) checking, conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to
terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive too negative) in the terminal box.
k.
Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.
4E-6X
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
l.
Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and
magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT
VOLTAGE.
m.
Conduct meggering test. Refer to PMS.
n.
Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal
box.
o.
Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush
and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
p.
Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2
inch.
q.
Lower the terminal box cover.
4E-6-2.13
Connecting the Acoustic Power Cable.
Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before
entering drum area.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Measure insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable prior to making
connections to power outlet in accordance with PMS.
The PCU operator shall exit drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
a.
Verify measurement of insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable, with an approved 500
Vdc megohmmeter.
b.
Verify power is secured prior to connecting the APC. This is accomplished by checking the plug
receptacle with a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) that has been checked against a known DC
source to ensure proper operation. The source should be the same type and voltage range as
the circuit to be tested.
c.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range),
checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor in the acoustic power receptacle.
d.
Recheck the multimeter to the known DC source to ensure the multimeter is still working
properly.
4E-6Y
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
e.
Remove inboard end of APC cable from interior of APC cable reel.
f.
Remove protective boot from inboard end of APC cable.
g.
In a straight line, connect APC cable to receptacle and tighten gland nut using T-handle wrench.
h.
Remove cover from acoustic cable receptacle.
i.
After the magnetic and APC cable connections have been made, secure the drum area on the
port and starboard sides with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, creating any entry barrier.
Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.
4E-6-2.14
Departing the Drum Area.
a.
Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety
Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then
departs drum area.
b.
Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker.
c.
Energize PCU, start acoustic device and transfer control to ACU.
4E-6-2.15
Towing the Sweep.
a.
Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck.
b.
Increase headway to sweep speed.
c.
Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves.
d.
Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4E-6P).
4E-6-2.16
Maneuvering Instructions.
a.
Turns should normally be made towards gear and may be up to 180 degrees. Sweep wire may
sag after the ship has turned about 60 degrees. To avoid excessive sagging and consequential
risk of fouling or damaging sweep gear, sweep wire should be shortened in to about 75 fathoms
during turn and veered again to full scope upon completion of turn. If chafing is evident, rudder
should be eased.
b.
Speeds in excess of 6 knots are not recommended due to the danger of damage to magnetic
cable. Table 4E-6B presents increase in tensions between 6 and 8 knots.
c.
Sweep gear for this configuration is always streamed to port.
Table 4E-6B. Sweep Wire Tensions
4E-6Z
SPEED (KNOTS)
CABLE TENSION (LB)
6
5,650
8
11,800
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-6P. Sweep Configuration M Mk 6(h) with Acoustic Device TB-27 Astern
4E-6AA
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-6-3
4E-6-3.1
RECOVERY.
Preparation.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
4E-6-3.2
OPERATION
Reentering the Drum Area.
Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power
Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the
drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
a.
Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured.
b.
Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN.
c.
Ensure HPU is secured.
d.
Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
e.
Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch
to the SAFE position.
f.
Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE
POSITION.
4E-6-3.3
Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
a.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
b.
Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position.
4E-6AB
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
c.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg).
d.
Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
e.
Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box
while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to
the safety officer.
f.
Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when
handling cable to prevent burns.
NOTE
The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of
cable.
Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be
accomplished simultaneously.
g.
Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box.
h.
Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove lugged cable ends from terminal box and
carefully place them on electrical rubber matting.
i.
Close and secure, terminal box.
j.
Install meggering device leads to cable long and short leg lugs.
k.
Reinstall protective boots on inboard pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several
wraps of plastic electrical tape.
l.
Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum.
m.
Drum area crew departs drum area.
n.
If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE
signs. Check area for gear adrift.
o.
Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs
drum area.
4E-6AC
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-6-3.4
OPERATION
Disconnecting the Acoustic Power Cable.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
NOTE
Disconnecting of acoustic power cable and magnetic minesweep cable
may be accomplished simultaneously.
a.
Using the T-Handle wrench, electrician loosens the APC gland nut at the APC receptacle, and
slides it back off from the bitter end of the cable.
b.
In a straight line pull, remove cable from the receptacle.
c.
Reinstall the APC receptacle non-conducting plug.
d.
Reinstall the APC inboard end protective boot and secure inboard cable end to the interior of the
APC cable reel.
e.
Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, APC IS DISCONNECTED AND
CABLE IS SECURED, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR and departs the drum area.
f.
If procedure is being performed in conjunction with Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep
Cable, no further action is required.
NOTE
APC handlers may assist other personnel still working in the drum area.
g.
4E-6AD
If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE
signs, check area for gear adrift.
OPERATION
4E-6-3.5
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Cutter Removal.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
a.
Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can
be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable.
b.
Reman fantail.
c.
Request permission to recovery gear.
4E-6-3.6
Coax Cable Recovery.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When
possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the
drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered.
a.
Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit.
b.
Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as
they come within reach.
c.
Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from
hardeyes. Install canvas chafing.
d.
Continue heaving in on coax section.
4E-6-3.7
Sweep Gear Recovery.
a.
Engage sweep wire drum.
b.
Heave in on APC, remove pelican hook, chafe towing stocking.
c.
Heave in on acoustic power cable, magnetic cable, and sweep wire, keeping the acoustic device
aft of the magnetic tail, until approximately 50 feet of buoyant section remains outboard, and
hold until all other gear is recovered.
d.
Inspect cables for cuts, abrasions, and cracks as cables come onboard, making minor repairs to
the cables per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4E-6AE
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-6-3.8
OPERATION
Disconnecting CL-Cable from K-4 Blank and Pigtail Cable.
a.
Reel in simultaneously the sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable until CL to K-4 blank pigtail
connection is just aft of magnetic cable drum. Hold APC and sweep wire.
b.
Stop off CL-Cable by attaching 1/2-inch x 5-foot stopper pendant to 6-foot preventer stocking
hardeye on CL-Cable with a 5/8-inch shackle. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, secure other end to
port instrumented sheave padeye.
c.
Pay out coax cable until the stopper pendant takes a strain.
d.
Remove insulating sleeve.
e.
Detach CL-Cable from K-4 blank pigtail cable.
f.
Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail:
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank pigtail terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making
certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating
boot.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide P/B insulating boot over K-4 blank pigtail terminal lug.
(4)
Slide two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps about 1 inch
apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so
securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-6Q).
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
g.
Reel in S-Cable and sweep wire until mark on S-Cable which indicates point for attaching
CL-Cable to drum preventer pendant is at hand.
h.
Ground isolate inboard end of CL connector:
4E-6AF
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around CL terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug.
(4)
Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about
1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so
securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-6Q. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
i.
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
Secure drum preventer pendant to CL-Cable. Heave in and remove 1/2-inch x 5-foot wire rope
stopper pendant.
4E-6-3.9
Magnetic Cable Recovery.
a.
Heave in simultaneously on sweep wire, CL, and S-Cables until the TJ towing jumper assembly
is just outboard of the roller chock assembly, and diversion point is accessible to the rigger.
b.
Remove quarter roller block from chain on sweep wire.
c.
Remove T-bar stop.
d.
Reel in remainder of the S and CL-Cables simultaneously.
4E-6-3.10
a.
O-Type Gear Recovery.
Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane.
4E-6AG
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
b.
Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle.
c.
Heave in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock.
d.
Disengage sweep wire drum.
4E-6-3.11
Size 1 Float Recovery.
a.
Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard.
b.
Recover float pendant with a boat hook.
c.
Heave in on float pendant until float nose line is within reach.
d.
Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane, and heave in until float is in lifting position
under articulated stern crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or
grapnel to lifting bail on float.
e.
Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook.
f.
Remove emergency recovery pendant.
g.
Stow float.
4E-6-3.12
Otter Recovery.
a.
Train appropriate articulated stern crane outboard over otter.
b.
Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter.
c.
Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4E-6D) or storage rack on fantail.
d.
Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead.
e.
Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.
4E-6-3.13
a.
Recovery of TB-27 and Float.
Continue recovery of APC until 50-foot mark is just aft of cable roller chock assembly.
Ensure nose line is clear of APC and inhaul pendant.
b.
Detach nose line from APC. Lead nose line through stern chock. Tend around mooring bitts.
Take slack out of nose line until it takes the strain.
c.
Train articulated stern crane outboard and, with stern crane head inboard, detach inhaul
pendant from APC. Attach inhaul pendant to crane whip.
d.
Heave in on articulated stern crane whip and inhaul wire connection, keeping slack out of nose
line.
e.
Heave in on inhaul pendant until weight of Acoustic Device TB-27 is suspended by crane and
float is properly cradled.
4E-6AH
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Ensure float is properly seated in its cradle before hoisting device from
water.
Ensure enough APC is streamed to allow acoustic device and float to be
recovered on deck.
f.
Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 simultaneously and train onboard and forward,
clearing acoustic cable and nose line from stern obstructions. Slack nose line as necessary.
g.
Stow acoustic device and float on deck.
h.
Notify bridge all gear is clear.
4E-6-3.14
Securing Gear.
a.
Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS.
b.
Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.
c.
Ground isolate outboard ends of CL- and S-Cables as follows:
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boots.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide S/B insulting boots over terminal lugs.
(4)
Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boots. Position clamps about 1 inch
apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so
securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-6R).
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
d.
4E-6-4
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
Using hold-back lines secure outboard ends of CL-Cable and S-Cable to drums.
RECOVERY OF DAMAGED (CUT OR PARTED) GEAR.
A mine could be fouled in the gear; proceed with caution.
4E-6-4.1
a.
Preparation.
Lead a recovery wire from a free winch drum or the gypsy head on sweep wire winch, through
sweep wire roller chock, and outboard of taffrail to recovery position on fantail.
4E-6AJ
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-6R. S- or CL-Cable Booted (Typical)
b.
Approach float upwind or upcurrent, whichever has greatest effect.
NOTE
Wind will generally have more effect than current.
c.
Stop the screw on recovery side.
d.
Hook float with a grapnel or boat hook and haul float alongside.
e.
Hook softeye quick recovery pendant and pull pendant free from flagstaff socket. Shackle
recovery pendant to recovery wire.
f.
Hook crane whip into float lifting pad and take a strain on recovery wire with winch.
g.
Heave in on recovery wire and crane whip simultaneously, keeping strain on recovery wire so
weight of sweep gear is not taken by crane.
h.
Hoist float and trip pelican hook to release float pendant. Stow float.
i.
Continue heaving in on recovery wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is up close to sweep wire
roller chock.
j.
Utilizing articulated stern crane, stow otter in the quick recovery hook in ready release position
or on stowage rack on fantail. Attach safety chain.
k.
If severed end of the sweep wire is in sight, recover by hand.
l.
If severed end of the sweep wire is not in sight, secure a cable grip on severed sweep wire.
m.
Remove End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly and recover sweep wire.
4E-6AK
OPERATION
4E-6-5
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
RECOVERY OF PARTED GEAR USING RIGID HULL INFLATABLE BOAT (RHIB).
a.
Approach float from downwind.
b.
Retrieve the float nose line and attach messenger line (if required). If possible, recovery should
be done without RHIB.
c.
Haul in messenger line (if used) with the winch/gypsy head until the float is in lifting position. In
either method of recovery, when float is in a lifting position, haul it aboard and stow.
4E-6AL/(4E-6AM blank)
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4E-7
FA2 WITH TB-26 COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of
this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and
injury or death to personnel.
The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure
all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is
followed.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded
component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Block, 11-inch (type L), NM (3940-00-809-7167)
Block, quarter roller (type A), NM, with swivel
(3940-00-722-8995)
Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM
(3940-00-368-7551) (4)
Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM
(3940-00-368-7552) (3)
Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342)
Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356)
Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342)
(4)
Cable, acoustic power (APC), 1,650-foot (per Job
Sheet 4A-5) (1075-00-782-9881)
Cable Assembly, electrode, K-4 (per Job Sheet 4A-6)
(1075-00-262-1980) (2)
Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping,
coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337)
Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping,
S (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327)
Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM
(with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906)
Clamp, hose, 1-9/16- to 2-1/2-inch
(4730-00-204-3491) (2)
Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460)
Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132)
(2)
Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-265-0677)
Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-332-5834) (2)
Device, acoustic, TB-26, NM (1075-01-368-2482)
Float, cellular rubber (1075-00-372-6128) (12)
Float, type O, size 0, NM (acoustic) (per Job
Sheet 4A-3) (1075-01-357-9948)
Float, type O, size 1, NM (moored) (per Job
Sheet 4A-3) (1075-01-371-0568)
Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye
(4030-00-290-6420)
Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x
3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638)
Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986)
Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet
4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280)
Line, securing, 21-thread x 40-foot (whipped each
end) 1
Line, securing (electrode float-center), 21-thread x
5-foot, single leg, manila (each end whipped) 1
Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon,
hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1
Lug, lamitex (1075-00-372-6221)
Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) (6)
See footnotes at end of table.
4E-7A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS (Continued)
Pendant, device, towing/stopper (acoustic), 1/2-inch
x 3-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye
each end) (2) 1
Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as
required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL)
(hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM,
wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, float (acoustic), 1/2-inch x length as
required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL)
(hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot,
NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one
end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1
Pendant, marriage, 2-1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg,
nylon (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, wire
rope (LHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, roller block, 2-1/2-inch x 3-foot, single leg,
nylon (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, towing, diversion, 2-1/2-inch x 7-foot, single
leg, nylon (hardeye splice each end) 1
Ring, 3-inch ID (5365-01-346-8057)
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch
(5305-00-226-9204) (4)
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch
(5305-00-226-9208) (2)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM,
1/2-inch (4030-00-270-5482)
5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (43)
3/4-inch (4030-00-270-5484) (5)
7/8-inch (4030-00-270-5485)
1-inch (4030-00-270-5486)
Sleeve (CK/P) (5970-01-519-3184)
Stop, T-bar (1075-01-233-4952)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard
end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611)
Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505)
(12)
Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as
required)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949)
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385)
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652)
Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737)
Electrician Mate Tool Kit
Gauge, pressure (0 to 30 psi)
Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) *
Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251)
Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252)
Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643)
*
1
Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread)
(whipped each end) 1
Megohmmeter, 500 Vdc
Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range)
Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) *
Probe, shorting, (5975-01-029-4176)
Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021)
Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572)
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Wrench, T-handle (5120-00-972-0490)
Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb
Hazardous Material.
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4E-7-1
RIGGING.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
NOTE
This sweep utilizes red sweep wire and APC markings.
4E-7-1.1
Preparation.
a.
Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
personnel for minesweeping operations.
b.
Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational
order.
4E-7B
Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential
OPERATION
4E-7-1.2
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Float, Kite, and Sweep Wire Preparation.
For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on
water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required.
Total length cannot exceed 20 feet.
a.
Prepare size 1 and size 0 floats in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3. The size 0 float is for
Acoustic Device TB-26. The size 1 float for the O gear (moored configuration) may utilize the
10-foot float pendants.
b.
Prepare size 1 kite as an otter (port configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1.
c.
Prepare port sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.
4E-7-1.3
a.
4E-7-1.4
APC Preparation.
Prepare APC in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.
Acoustic Device TB-26 Preparation.
a.
Deck test acoustic device 24 hours prior to streaming in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.
Upon completion of test, pressurize device to 10 psi for 24 hours to ensure device is air tight. If
more than a 1 psi loss of pressure is observed (indicated by soapy-water bubbles), release all air
pressure and take corrective action. A 20 °F drop in temperature will have a 1 psi drop in
pressure. If no loss of pressure is observed and device is to be launched soon thereafter, retain
air pressure in housing until final pressurizing is accomplished; otherwise, release all pressure.
b.
Prepare towing stocking in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.
c.
Using a 3/4-inch shackle, shackle 3-inch ID ring to aft hole in acoustic device towing and hoisting
plate using Table 4E-7A for depth and float pendant correlation. Connect float pendant to ring
(Figure 4E-7A).
d.
Lead outboard end of APC aft through cable roller chock assembly; then, pull cable outboard,
clear of all obstructions, and forward to acoustic device. Connect cable to Acoustic Device
TB-26. If required, apply a light coat of silicone grease.
e.
Using 3/4-inch shackle, connect one end of device towing pendant to hardeye of towing stocking
at 6-foot mark on APC. Connect pendant’s free end to device towing pad (Figure 4E-7A). Wrap
3-foot towing pendant and shackles with chafing gear.
Ensure inhaul pendant is connected aft of float pendant. Failure to do so
could cause damage to float pendant and inhaul pendant.
f.
Pass hardeye of inhaul pendant down through float fairlead tube to 3-inch ID ring and attach with
a 3/4-inch shackle with screw pin end on 3-inch ID ring behind float pendant connection (Figure
4E-7A).
g.
Shackle softeye of inhaul pendant to crane whip, using a 1/2-inch shackle. Figure 4E-7B shows
acoustic device in a cradled position.
4E-7C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Table 4E-7A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure
1
DEPTH TO CENTER OF
DIAPHRAGM (FEET)
PENDANT LENGTH SIZE 0
FLOAT (FEET)
AIR
PRESSURES (PSI)1
20
13
8.0
22
15
8.5
24
17
9.3
25
18
10.1
26
19
10.5
27
20
10.8
28
21
11.2
29
22
11.5
30
23
11.8
These air pressures for the TB-26 rising when streamed through the water.
Figure 4E-7A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing
4E-7D
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-7B. Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled
h.
Take in on crane whip until inhaul pendant is wound on cable drum.
i.
Using 5/8-inch shackle, attach tail line to tail of size 0 float.
j.
Upon successful completion of air leak test, pressurize device to operating depth (Table 4E-7A).
4E-7-1.5
a.
O-Type Components Preparation.
Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly to Otter.
(1)
Engage port sweep wire drum.
(2)
Attach 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain, with long link in the middle between sweep wire and a
60-foot (LHL) otter pendant, using 5/8-inch shackles. Five interlocking 5/8-inch shackles
may be used in lieu of chain. Reel in on port sweep wire drum.
4E-7E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
b.
OPERATION
(3)
Lead 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave; then through
sweep wire roller chock assembly.
(4)
Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between the otter bridle and 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant
(Figure 4E-7C).
(5)
Connect float pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle.
Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position.
(1)
Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter.
(2)
Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle
is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4E-7D).
(3)
Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and
secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion.
(4)
Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane
whip.
(5)
Rotate crane forward.
(6)
Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.
Figure 4E-7C. Attachment of Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly (Port Configuration)
4E-7F
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-7D. Otter in Ready Release Position
4E-7-1.6
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation.
a.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented
sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block
padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4E-7E).
b.
Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure
block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using
5/8-inch shackles.
4E-7-1.7
a.
Electrode Floats.
Splice 5-foot (21-thread) pendant to both ends of each float.
4E-7G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-7E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly
4E-7-1.8
K-4 Electrode Preparation.
To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewed in a canvas
chafing sleeve.
a.
Prepare K-4 electrode in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-6.
4E-7-1.9
Long Leg Preparation.
a.
Lead a K-4 electrode to the outboard end of the S-Cable.
b.
Insulate S/K-4 connection and fitting as follows:
(1)
4E-7H
Place inboard end of long leg K-4 electrode in vicinity of the S-Cable connection.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
(2)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(3)
Connect the long leg K-4 electrode to the outboard S-Cable using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x
1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers.
Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(4)
Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Apply two
layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape, continuing tape several inches past the
connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
c.
Heave in on magnetic reel, stacking K-4 electrode, until outboard end is clear to work on and
positioned for streaming.
d.
Install a lamitex lug to the long leg electrode using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch cap screws,
two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
e.
Tape outboard electrode terminal lug with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black plastic tape and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion (Figure
4E-7F).
f.
Attach a 1-inch shackle, pin inboard, at one end of roller block pendant. Connect roller block
pendant to quarter roller block using a 5/8-inch shackle.
g.
Connect quarter roller block and pendant to lamitex lug using a 7/8-inch shackle.
4E-7-2
LAUNCHING/STREAMING.
NOTE
Sweep gear for this configuration is streamed to port.
4E-7-2.1
Streaming Preparations.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Check air pressure in device for appropriate depth (Table 4E-7A).
c.
Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
d.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable to reduce rolling.
e.
Request permission to stream gear.
4E-7-2.2
Launching/Streaming Float and Acoustic Device TB-26.
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify
photo cell is working.
a.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.
b.
Pass nose line through chock and tend around mooring bitts. Heave in to remove slack from
nose line.
4E-7J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-7F. Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Diversion Chain
c.
Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 simultaneously, training gear outboard to position
gear for launch. Ensure nose line and APC are clear of all deck obstruction (Figure 4E-7G, View
A).
d.
Lower cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 into water. Slack nose line to permit float to ride
astern.
e.
Continue to lower Acoustic Device TB-26 until it is supported by float. Move crane head until
inboard and continue to pay out inhaul pendant until it can be disconnected from crane whip.
Disconnect inhaul pendant.
f.
Bring inhaul pendant through the roller chock assembly. Attach inhaul pendant to towing
stocking at 50-foot mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through free eye of towing
stocking.
g.
Slack off on nose line until gear is being towed by APC (Figure 4E-7G, View B).
h.
Bring nose line through roller chock assembly. Attach nose line to towing stocking at 50-foot
mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through free eye of towing stocking.
4E-7K
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-7G. Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-26
4E-7L
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
i.
Pay out APC until hardeye of diversion towing stocking at first red mark (645 feet) is forward of
cable roller chock assembly.
j.
Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.
4E-7-2.3
Launching/Streaming O-Type Gear.
a.
Ensure ship's speed is 4 knots.
b.
Request permission to put gear to the rail.
c.
Ensure that nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-7H).
d.
Lead float nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock.
e.
Tend line to bitt.
f.
Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, train outboard to position float
at rail.
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify
that the photo cell is working.
g.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.
h.
Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and float pendant and nose line are clear of
ship and obstructions.
i.
Connect float pendant(s), if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the
outboard corner of otter.
j.
Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE.
k.
Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook
securing otter (Figure 4E-7D). Launch float and slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.
4E-7-2.4
Tripping the Otter.
a.
Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes strain.
b.
Pay out sweep wire under power until long link of 6-foot chain is just outboard of sweep wire
roller chock.
c.
Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until
the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope) and check for proper diversion.
d.
Return and restow articulated stern crane.
e.
Increase speed as required to assist in streaming gear.
4E-7-2.5
Streaming of Outboard (Long Leg) Electrode.
a.
4E-7M
Lead long leg electrode (with a 3-foot pendant and quarter roller block attached) out through
level wind assembly then cable roller chock assembly.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-7H. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)
4E-7N
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
b.
Mount quarter roller block on sweep wire and mouse quarter roller block pin.
c.
Ensure K-4 electrode terminal lug is properly taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers
of half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
d.
Pay out long leg to 50 feet.
4E-7-2.6
Attachment of Electrode Floats.
a.
Attach first electrode float (Figure 4E-7J)
b.
Pay out electrode.
c.
Continue paying out and attach four more floats 7 feet apart (Figure 4E-7K).
d.
Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float.
4E-7-2.7
S/K-4 Connector Inspection.
a.
Continue paying out long leg electrode until S/K-4 connector is forward of cable roller chock
assembly.
b.
Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction
tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed
metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
c.
Increase ship speed as required to enhance magnetic cable streaming.
d.
Pay out S-Cable to form catenary before veering sweep wire.
e.
Disengage sweep wire drum. Veer sweep wire using hydraulic brake.
f.
Simultaneously, veer sweep wire and pay out magnetic cable maintaining catenary.
g.
Keep otter working by veering sweep wire slowly. The magnetic tail should pay out to a longer
length than the sweep wire so quarter roller block rides at the diversion point on the sweep wire.
Figure 4E-7J. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode
4E-7P
Figure 4E-7K. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-7Q
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
h.
Continue streaming S-Cable until outboard end of short leg electrode is forward of cable roller
chock assembly.
i.
Remove lashing securing short leg electrode to S-Cable.
4E-7-2.8
Diversion Stocking Attachment to Sweep Wire.
a.
Place two wedge stops (Figure 4E-7L) back-to-nose at the one red band (360 feet) on sweep
wire (Figure 4E-7M).
b.
Holding the magnetic gear, veer sweep wire until two red bands (390 feet) are just inboard of
sweep wire roller chock assembly.
c.
Using a 3/4-inch shackle, attach one end of a 7-foot diversion towing pendant to hardeye of
diversion towing stocking first red mark (645 feet) on APC.
d.
Simultaneously, place two wedge stops (Figure 4E-7L) back-to-nose on sweep wire at the two
red bands (390 feet).
e.
Attach 7-foot diversion towing pendant to an open 11-inch, type L block using a 3/4-inch shackle
(Figure 4E-7N).
f.
Attach 11-inch, type L block to sweep wire forward of the one red band (360 feet), ensuring the
diversion towing pendant passes under S magnetic cable (Figure 4E-7N, View A).
4E-7-2.9
APC Outboard Marriage Attachment to Sweep Wire.
a.
Veer sweep wire until wedge stops at two red bands (390 feet) are just aft of sweep wire roller
chock assembly.
b.
Pay out APC until second red mark (stocking) (680 feet) on cable is aft of cable roller chock
assembly.
c.
Using a 3/4-inch shackle, attach one end of a 10-foot outboard marriage pendant to hardeye of
first marriage stocking second red mark (680 feet) on APC (Figure 4E-7N, View B).
d.
Attach free end of 10-foot outboard marriage pendant to an 8-inch (type E) snatch block using a
3/4-inch shackle.
e.
Attach 8-inch snatch block to sweep wire, forward of wedge stops at the two red bands (390
feet), ensuring marriage pendant passes under S magnetic cable. Allow snatch block to ride
free.
4E-7-2.10
Installation of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode.
During streaming, ensure the sweep wire carries the main tow load and the
acoustic device remains astern of the magnetic loop.
To prevent damage to the acoustic cable, the APC must be slack during the
streaming operation.
a.
Veer out sweep wire while paying out the APC and magnetic cable.
b.
Adjust rate of veering of sweep wire to prevent APC from taking the tow load.
c.
Adjust rate of pay out of magnetic cable to keep cable forward of float attached to acoustic
device.
4E-7R
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-7L. Wedge Stop Placement
4E-7S
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-7M. Acoustic Power Tow Cable and Sweep Wire Markings
4E-7T
OPERATION
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-7N. Diversion Towing and Marriage Pendant Attachment
d.
Continue streaming sweep wire, APC, and S-Cable until outboard short leg breakout and K-4
blank pigtail is forward of cable roller chock assembly.
e.
Remove boot from K-4 blank pigtail.
f.
Lead a K-4 electrode end to the K-4 blank pigtail.
g.
Attach K-4 electrode to K-4 blank pigtail (Figure 4E-7M).
connection by installing a CK/P insulating sleeve as follows:
Insulate and waterproof the
(1)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(2)
Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the CK/P
insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity.
(3)
Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over large end of sleeve and two 3-1/16- to 4-inch
hose clamps over small end of sleeve.
(4)
Slip CK/P insulating sleeve over K-4 electrode and slide back out of way.
4E-7U
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
(5)
Connect terminals of K-4 electrode and K-4 blank pigtail using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x
1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers.
Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline
of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(6)
Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of CK/P insulating sleeve.
(7)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(8)
Slide CK/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.
(9)
Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with
outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing
screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped
rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two
layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each
side.
h.
Hold sweep wire and APC.
i.
Place ten turns of 21-thread lashing around K-4 electrode and S-Cable to relieve towing strain
on K-4 blank pigtail.
j.
Heave in on magnetic cable until outboard end of short leg electrode is clear to work on and
positioned for streaming.
k.
Tape the outboard end of K-4 electrode with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all
exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
l.
Attach a 21-thread line, approximately 40 feet, to outboard end of K-4 electrode.
m.
Pass 21-thread line over APC, through starboard stern chock and secure to starboard bitts.
4E-7-2.11
Streaming of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode.
a.
Ensure K-4 electrode outboard terminal lug is taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side.
Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
b.
Pay out 50 feet of the short leg electrode.
4E-7-2.12
Attachment of Short Leg Electrode Floats.
a.
Attach first electrode float (Figure 4E-7J).
b.
Continue paying out and attach four additional floats seven feet apart.
c.
Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float (Figure 4E-7K).
4E-7V
OPERATION
4E-7-2.13
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
K-4 Blank Pigtail/K-4 Connector Inspection.
a.
Continue paying out short leg electrode until K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection is forward of cable
roller chock assembly.
b.
Ensure K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection and fitting is wrapped with two layers rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side.
Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
c.
Ensure ten turns of 21-thread line lashing is around the K-4 blank pigtail and S-Cable to relieve
towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail.
4E-7-2.14
Streaming Coax Cable.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
a.
Continue paying out coax cable. When K-4 blank connection is awash, cast free the 21-thread
securing line. Pay out sweep wire, APC, and coax cable.
b.
Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock
assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with
SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4E-7-2.15
APC Inboard Marriage Attachment to Sweep Wire.
a.
Continue to veer sweep wire while paying out the APC and magnetic cable.
b.
Veer sweep wire until the three red bands (810 feet) are forward of roller chock and pay out APC
until the third red mark (1,110 feet) stocking on the APC is just aft of roller chock assembly.
c.
Secure two wedge stops back-to-nose at the three red bands (810 feet) on sweep wire.
d.
Using a 3/4-inch shackle, attach one end of inboard marriage pendant to hardeye at the third red
mark (1,110 feet) stocking on APC (Figure 4E-7N).
e.
Attach free end of inboard marriage pendant to an 8-inch (type E) snatch block using a 3/4-inch
shackle.
f.
Veer sweep wire until the wedge stops are just aft of roller chock assembly.
g.
Attach 8-inch snatch block to sweep wire, forward of wedge stops at the three red bands (810
feet), ensuring marriage pendant passes under magnetic cable. Allow snatch block to ride free.
4E-7W
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-7-2.16
OPERATION
Streaming to Full Scope.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
Maintain slack in APC at all times.
a.
Veer sweep wire while paying out the APC and magnetic cable, ensuring the sweep wire carries
the main load.
b.
Veer sweep wire to full scope (1,200 feet).
c.
Stop APC when 1,510-foot stocking is on roller chock assembly.
d.
Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock
assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with
SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4E-7-2.17
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection.
a.
Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable.
b.
Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable
with 5/8-inch shackles.
c.
Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until
just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant
(Figure 4E-7E). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.
To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed
awash at all times.
d.
4E-7X
Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.
OPERATION
4E-7-2.18
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Stopping Off the Sweep.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
a.
Remove canvas chafing from APC towing stocking.
b.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach towing pendant to the starboard instrumented sheave padeye.
Attach pelican hook to the free end of the towing pendant with a 5/8-inch shackle (Figure
4E-7P).
c.
Secure both eyes of towing stocking into the bail of pelican hook. Install a cotter pin with a
tripping lanyard.
d.
Pay out the APC until the towing pendant takes the strain.
4E-7-2.19
Securing Sweep Wire.
Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged.
a.
Stop veering sweep wire when the four red bands (1,200 feet) are at the sweep wire roller chock.
Engage pawl and secure sweep wire drum.
b.
Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
NOTE
Connecting magnetic cable, APC, and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished
simultaneously.
c.
Attach two wedge stops back-to-back to sweep wire aft of instrumented sheave. Attach Cutters
Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing bridle, midway between 8-inch (type E)
snatch block and roller chock assembly.
d.
Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.
4E-7Y
Figure 4E-7P. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (FA2 Sweep)
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-7Z
OPERATION
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel
will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.
To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do
not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station
on the 01 level.
e.
Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to
cutters.
f.
Arm Cutters Mk 15.
g.
Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS
MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.
4E-7-2.20
Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.
Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power
Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the
drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is begin pulsed.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic
minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep
electrician.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
NOTE
Connecting magnetic cable and acoustic cable may be accomplished
simultaneously.
a.
Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area.
4E-7AA
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
b.
Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area.
c.
Minesweep electrician enter the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN
switch is in the SAFE position and make report Safety Observer.
d.
Drum area crew enters the drum area.
e.
Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtail on
electrical rubber matting.
f.
Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable end.
g.
Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for
insulating cracks and breaks and make repairs as required.
h.
Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box.
i.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
j.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range) checking, conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to
terminal
k.
Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.
l.
Use an approved type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box
and magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO
APPARENT VOLTAGE.
m.
Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal
box.
n.
Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush
and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft lb.
o.
Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2
inch.
p.
Lower the terminal box cover.
4E-7AB
OPERATION
4E-7-2.21
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Connecting the Acoustic Power Cable.
Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before
entering drum area.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Measure insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable prior to making
connections to power outlet in accordance with PMS.
The PCU operator shall exit drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
a.
Verify measurement of insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable, with an approved 500
Vdc megohmmeter.
b.
Verify power is secured prior to connecting the APC. This is accomplished by checking the plug
receptacle with a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) that has been checked against a known DC
source to ensure proper operation. The source should be the same type and voltage range as
the circuit to be tested.
c.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range),
checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor in the acoustic power receptacle.
d.
Recheck the multimeter to the known DC source to ensure the multimeter is still working
properly.
e.
Remove inboard end of APC cable from interior of APC cable reel.
f.
Remove protective boot from inboard end of APC cable.
g.
In a straight line, connect APC cable to receptacle and tighten gland nut using T-handle wrench.
h.
Remove cover from acoustic cable receptacle.
i.
After the magnetic and APC cable connections have been made, secure the drum area on the
port and starboard sides with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, creating any entry barrier.
Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.
4E-7AC
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-7-2.22
OPERATION
Departing the Drum Area.
a.
Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety
Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then
departs drum area.
b.
Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker.
c.
Energize PCU, start acoustic device and transfer control to ACU.
4E-7-2.23
Towing the Sweep.
a.
Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck.
b.
Increase headway to sweep speed.
c.
Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves.
d.
Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4E-7Q).
4E-7-2.24
Maneuvering Instructions.
a.
Turns should normally be made towards gear and may be up to 180 degrees. Sweep wire may
sag after ship has turned about 60 degrees. To avoid excessive sagging and consequential risk
of fouling or damaging sweep gear, sweep wire should be shortened in the turn. If chafing is
evident, rudder should be eased. If sweep wire needs to be shortened further, inboard marriage
point needs to be broken.
b.
Speeds in excess of 6 knots are not recommended due to the danger of damage to magnetic
cable. Table 4E-7B presents the increase in tension between 6 and 8 knots.
c.
Sweep gear for this configuration is normally streamed to port.
Table 4E-7B. Sweep Wire Tensions
4E-7-3
4E-7-3.1
SPEED (KNOTS)
CABLE TENSION (LB)
6
4,450
8
11,600
RECOVERY.
Preparation.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
4E-7AD
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-7Q. FA2 with TB-26 Combination Influence Sweep Configuration
4E-7AE
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-7-3.2
OPERATION
Reentering the Drum Area.
Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power
Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the
drum area.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock
is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables.
a.
Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured.
b.
Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN.
c.
Ensure HPU is secured.
d.
Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
e.
Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch
to the SAFE position.
f.
Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE
POSITION.
4E-7-3.3
Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
a.
Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
b.
Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position.
c.
Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc
range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg).
d.
Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.
4E-7AF
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
e.
Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box
while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to
the safety officer.
f.
Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.
Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when
handling cable to prevent burns.
NOTE
The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of
cable.
Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be
accomplished simultaneously.
g.
Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box.
h.
Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove lugged cable ends from terminal box and
carefully place them on electrical rubber matting.
i.
Close and secure, terminal box.
j.
Reinstall protective boots on pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several wraps of
plastic electrical tape.
k.
Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum.
l.
Drum area crew departs drum area.
m.
If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE
signs. Check area for gear adrift.
n.
Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs
drum area.
4E-7AG
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-7-3.4
OPERATION
Disconnecting the Acoustic Power Cable.
Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on
the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.
Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable
drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall
wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet
PMS standards.
Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury
or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical
connections or when cable is being pulsed.
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
NOTE
Disconnecting acoustic power cable and magnetic minesweep cable may
be accomplished simultaneously.
a.
Using the T-Handle wrench, electrician loosens the APC gland nut at the APC receptacle, and
slides it back off from the bitter end of the cable.
b.
In a straight line pull, remove cable from the receptacle.
c.
Reinstall the APC receptacle non-conducting plug.
d.
Reinstall the APC inboard end protective boot and secure inboard cable end to the interior of the
APC cable reel.
e.
Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, APC IS DISCONNECTED AND
CABLE IS SECURED, DRUM AREA CLEAR and departs the drum area.
f.
If procedure is being performed in conjunction with Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep
Cable, no further action is required.
NOTE
APC handlers may assist other personnel still working in the drum area.
g.
4E-7AH
If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE
signs. Check area for gear adrift.
OPERATION
4E-7-3.5
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Cutter Removal.
Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always
treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins
are installed.
a.
Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can
be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable.
b.
Reman fantail.
c.
Request permission to recovery gear.
4E-7-3.6
Coax Cable Recovery.
To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the
ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in
insulation jacket or sleeves.
Report suspected cable damage to
minesweep electrician for appropriate action.
To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When
possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the
drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered.
a.
Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit.
b.
Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as
they come within reach.
c.
Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from
hardeyes. Install canvas chafing.
d.
Continue heaving in on coax section.
4E-7-3.7
Sweep Gear Recovery.
a.
Engage sweep wire drum and reel in sweep wire to provide slack in APC. Hold sweep wire at
this scope.
b.
Heave in APC, remove pelican hook, chafe towing stocking.
c.
Inspect cables for cuts, abrasions, and cracks as cables come onboard, making minor repairs to
cables per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4E-7AJ
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-7-3.8
OPERATION
Wedge Stops and Inboard Marriage Pendant Removal.
When reeling in the sweep wire, the APC, and the magnetic cable, ensure
sweep wire always carries the main load. If necessary, cease reeling in the
APC or magnetic cable.
a.
Simultaneously reel in on sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable.
b.
Adjust rate of recovery of magnetic cable to ensure that cable is always forward of acoustic
device float.
c.
Stop hauling in on sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable when inboard marriage pendant and
wedge stops located at the three red bands (810 feet) on sweep wire are just outside of roller
chock assembly.
d.
Remove snatch block and inboard 10-foot marriage pendant from sweep wire.
e.
Reel in sweep wire until wedge stops are inboard of stern roller chock and remove. Ensure
snatch block is on deck; then remove the 10-foot pendant from APC towing stocking.
f.
Wrap marriage stocking with canvas chafing to prevent damage to APC while cable is being
stowed on cable drum.
4E-7-3.9
Short Leg Electrode Recovery/Removal.
a.
Heave in on short leg electrode and remove electrode floats.
b.
Pay out coax cable, faking K-4 electrode on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a clear
work area.
c.
Remove CK/P insulating sleeve.
d.
Disconnect and remove K-4 electrode from K-4 blank pigtail.
e.
Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail:
4E-7AK
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank pigtail lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot (Figure
4E-7R).
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide P/B insulating boot over terminal lug.
(4)
Slide two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end of boot
about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate
clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-7R. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted
Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves
in the terminal barrels.
(5)
Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers
of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side.
f.
Continue heaving in on S section.
g.
Stow K-4 electrode.
4E-7-3.10
Wedge Stops and Outboard Marriage Pendant Removal.
a.
Simultaneously reel in on sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable until the 10-foot outboard
marriage pendant and wedge stops at the two red bands (390 feet) on sweep wire are just
outside roller chock assemblies.
b.
Remove snatch block and outboard 10-foot marriage pendant from sweep wire.
c.
Reel in sweep wire until wedge stops are inboard of stern roller chock and remove. Ensure
snatch block is on deck; then remove 10-foot pendant from APC towing stocking.
d.
Wrap marriage stocking with canvas chafing to prevent damage to APC while cable is being
stowed on cable drum.
4E-7AL
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-7-3.11
OPERATION
Disconnecting Diversion Towing Stocking.
When reeling in the sweep wire, the APC, and the magnetic cable, ensure
sweep wire always carries the main load. If necessary, cease reeling in the
APC or magnetic cable.
a.
Reel in simultaneously on sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable until 7-foot diversion towing
pendant type L block (forward of wedge stops located at the one red band (360 feet) on sweep
wire) is just outside roller chock assembly.
b.
Remove type L block of outboard 7-foot diversion towing pendant from sweep wire.
c.
Reel in sweep wire and APC until wedge stops are inboard of stern roller chock. Ensure type L
block is on deck, then remove 7-foot pendant and wedge stops.
d.
Wrap towing stocking with canvas chafing to prevent damage to APC while cable is being
stowed on cable drum.
e.
Continue recovery of sweep wire, magnetic cable, and APC, keeping acoustic device aft of
magnetic cable until approximately 50 feet of buoyant section remains outboard, and hold until
all other gear is recovered.
4E-7-3.12
a.
Long Leg Electrode Recovery.
Heave in on long leg electrode and sweep wire.
NOTE
Floats may be left on long leg if desired.
b.
When the quarter roller block and T-bar stop are outboard of the cable roller chock assembly,
stop the sweep wire.
c.
Remove quarter roller block from diversion chain on sweep wire. Remove T-bar stop.
d.
Ease in magnetic cable until quarter roller block is just outboard of cable roller chock assembly.
Remove quarter roller block from outboard end of K-4 electrode.
e.
Secure hold-back line to outboard end of long leg electrode and keep a strain on it while reeling
all of K-4 electrode onto magnetic cable drum. Secure long leg to drum with this line.
4E-7-3.13
O-Type Gear Recovery.
a.
Remove tripping hook from whip articulated stern crane.
b.
Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle.
c.
Heave in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock.
d.
Disengage sweep wire drum.
4E-7-3.14
Size 1 Float Recovery.
a.
Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard.
b.
Recover float pendant with a boat hook.
c.
Heave in on float pendant until float nose line is within reach.
4E-7AM
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
d.
Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane. Heave in until float is in lifting position
under crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail
on float.
e.
Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook.
f.
Remove emergency recovery pendant.
g.
Stow float.
4E-7-3.15
Otter Recovery.
a.
Train appropriate articulated stern crane outboard over otter.
b.
Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter.
c.
Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4E-7D) or storage rack on fantail.
d.
Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead.
e.
Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.
4E-7-3.16
a.
Recovery of TB-26 and Float.
Continue recovering APC until 50-foot towing stocking is just aft of cable roller chock assembly.
Ensure nose line is clear of APC and inhaul pendant.
b.
Detach nose line from APC and pass through stern chock. Tend around mooring bitts. Take
slack out of nose line.
c.
Train articulated stern crane outboard and, with stern crane head inboard, detach inhaul
pendant from APC. Attach inhaul pendant to crane whip.
d.
Heave in on articulated stern crane whip and inhaul wire connection, keeping slack out of nose
line.
e.
Heave in on the inhaul pendant until weight of Acoustic Device TB-26 is suspended by the crane
and float is properly cradled.
Ensure float is properly seated in its cradle before hoisting device from
water.
Ensure enough APC is streamed to allow acoustic device and float to be
recovered on deck.
f.
Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 simultaneously and train gear inboard and
forward, clearing APC and nose line from stern obstructions. Slack nose line as necessary.
g.
Stow acoustic device and float on deck.
h.
Notify bridge all gear is clear.
4E-7AN
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-7-3.17
OPERATION
Securing Gear.
a.
Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS.
b.
Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.
c.
Ground isolate S-Cable, if cable is being stowed, with no further sweep exercises:
4E-7-4
(1)
Wrap dry rag(s) around S terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that
thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot.
(2)
Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws.
(3)
Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug.
(4)
Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at each end
about 1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate
clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-7S).
RECOVERY OF DAMAGED (CUT OR PARTED) GEAR.
A mine could be fouled in the gear; proceed with caution.
Figure 4E-7S. S-Cable Booted
4E-7AP
OPERATION
4E-7-4.1
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Preparation.
a.
Lead a recovery wire from a free winch drum or the gypsy head on sweep wire winch, through
sweep wire roller chock, and outboard of taffrail to recovery position on fantail.
b.
Approach float upwind or upcurrent, whichever has greatest effect.
NOTE
Wind will generally have more effect than current.
c.
Stop the screw on recovery side.
d.
Hook float with a grapnel or boat hook and haul float alongside.
e.
Hook softeye quick recovery pendant and pull pendant free from flagstaff socket. Shackle
recovery pendant to recovery wire.
f.
Hook crane whip into float lifting pad and take a strain on recovery wire with winch.
g.
Heave in on recovery wire and crane whip simultaneously, keeping strain on recovery wire so
weight of sweep gear is not taken by crane.
h.
Hoist float and trip pelican hook to release float pendant. Stow float.
i.
Continue heaving in on recovery wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is up close to sweep wire
roller chock.
j.
Utilizing articulated stern crane, stow otter in the quick recovery hook in ready release position
or on stowage rack on fantail. Attach safety chain.
k.
If severed end of the sweep wire is in sight, recover by hand.
l.
If severed end of the sweep wire is not in sight, secure a cable grip on severed sweep wire.
m.
Remove End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly and recover sweep wire.
4E-7-5
RECOVERY OF PARTED GEAR USING RIGID HULL INFLATABLE BOAT (RHIB).
a.
Approach float from downwind.
b.
Retrieve the float nose line and attach messenger line (if required). If possible, recovery should
be done without RHIB.
c.
Haul in messenger line (if used) with the winch/gypsy head until the float is in lifting position. In
either method of recovery, when float is in a lifting position, haul it aboard and stow.
4E-7AQ/(4E-7AR blank)
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
JOB SHEET 4E-8
FA2 WITH TB-27 COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP
The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to
proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety
precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of
this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and
injury or death to personnel.
The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure
all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is
followed.
Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement
checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure
to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded
component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS
Block, 11-inch (type L), NM (3940-00-809-7167)
Block, quarter roller (type A), NM, with swivel
(3940-00-722-8995)
Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM
(3940-00-368-7551) (4)
Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM
(3940-00-368-7552) (3)
Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342)
Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356)
Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342)
(4)
Cable, acoustic power (APC), 1,650-foot (per Job
Sheet 4A-5) (1075-00-782-9881)
Cable Assembly, electrode, K-4 (per Job Sheet 4A-6)
(1075-00-262-1980) (2)
Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping,
coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337)
Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping,
S (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327)
Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM
(with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906)
Clamp, hose, 1-9/16- to 2-1/2-inch
(4730-00-204-3491) (2)
Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460)
Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132)
(2)
Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-265-0677)
Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4)
(1075-00-332-5834) (2)
Device, acoustic, TB-27, NM (1075-01-368-2483)
Float, cellular rubber (1075-00-372-6128) (12)
Float, type O, size 1, NM, moored (1), acoustic (1)
(per Job Sheet 4A-3) (1075-01-371-0568)
Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye
(4030-00-290-6420)
Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x
3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638)
Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986)
Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet
4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280)
Line, securing, 21-thread x 40-foot (whipped each
end) 1
Line, securing (electrode float-center), 21-thread x
5-foot, single leg, manila (each end whipped) 1
Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon,
hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1
Lug, lamitex (1075-00-372-6221)
Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) (6)
Pendant, device, towing/stopper (acoustic), 1/2-inch
x 3-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye
each end) (2) 1
See footnotes at end of table.
4E-8A
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
MATERIALS
COMPONENTS (Continued)
Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg,
NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as
required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL)
(hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM,
wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, float (acoustic), 1/2-inch x length as
required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL)
(hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot,
NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one
end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1
Pendant, marriage, 2-1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg,
nylon (hardeye each end) (2) 1
Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, wire
rope (LHL) (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, roller block, 2-1/2-inch x 3-foot, single leg,
nylon (hardeye each end) 1
Pendant, towing, diversion, 2-1/2-inch x 7-foot, single
leg, nylon (hardeye splice each end) 1
Ring, 3-inch ID (5365-01-346-8057)
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch
(5305-00-226-9204) (4)
Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch
(5305-00-226-9208) (2)
Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM,
1/2-inch (4030-00-270-5482)
5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (35)
7/8-inch (4030-00-270-5485)
1-inch (4030-00-270-5486)
Sleeve (CK/P) (5970-01-519-3189)
Stop, T-bar (1075-01-233-4952)
Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot,
single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard
end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611)
Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505)
(12)
Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as
required)
SUPPORT ITEMS
Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949)
Boatswain Mate Tool Kit
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385)
Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652)
Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737)
Electrician Mate Tool Kit
Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) *
Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251)
Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252)
Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643)
Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread)
(whipped each end) 1
*
1
Megohmmeter, 500 Vdc
Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range)
Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) *
Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176)
Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021)
Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572)
Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185)
Wrench, T-handle (5120-00-972-0490)
Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb
Hazardous Material.
Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.
4E-8-1
RIGGING.
Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at
least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.
NOTE
This sweep utilizes red sweep wire and APC markings.
4E-8-1.1
Preparation.
a.
Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
personnel for minesweeping operations.
b.
Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational
order.
4E-8B
Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential
OPERATION
4E-8-1.2
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Float, Kite, and Sweep Wire Preparation.
For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on
water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required.
Total length cannot exceed 20 feet.
a.
Prepare two size 1 floats in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3. One float is used with the Acoustic
Device TB-27, the other size 1 is for O gear (moored configuration) and may utilize the 10-foot
float pendants.
b.
Prepare size 1 kite as an otter (port configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1.
c.
Prepare port sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.
4E-8-1.3
a.
4E-8-1.4
APC Preparation.
Prepare APC in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.
Acoustic Device TB-27 Preparation.
a.
Prepare towing stocking in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.
b.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect 3-inch ID ring to second and fourth holes in acoustic device
towing and hoisting plate. Refer to Table 4E-8A for depth and float pendant correlation.
Connect float pendant to ring (Figure 4E-8A).
c.
Lead outboard end of APC aft through cable roller chock assembly then, pull cable outboard,
clear of all obstructions, and forward to acoustic device. Connect cable to Acoustic Device
TB-27. If required, apply a light coat of silicone grease.
d.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect 3-foot towing pendant to hardeye of towing stocking at 6-foot
mark on APC. Connect pendant’s free end to device towing/hoisting plate. Wrap 3-foot towing
pendant and shackles with chafing gear.
Ensure inhaul pendant is connected aft of float pendant. Failure to do so
could cause damage to float pendant and inhaul pendant.
e.
Pass hardeye of inhaul pendant down through float fairlead tube to 3-inch ID ring and attach with
a 5/8-inch shackle with screw pin end of 3-inch ID ring, behind float pendant connection (Figure
4E-8A).
f.
Shackle softeye of inhaul pendant to crane whip, using a 1/2-inch shackle. Figure 4E-8B shows
acoustic device in a cradled position.
g.
Take in on crane whip until inhaul pendant is wound on cable drum.
h.
Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach nylon line to tail of size 1 float.
i.
Deck test acoustic device in accordance with Planned Maintenance System.
4E-8C
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Table 4E-8A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation
DEPTH TO CENTER OF DIAPHRAGM
(FEET)
FLOAT PENDANT LENGTH
(FEET)
20
13
22
15
24
17
25
18
26
19
27
20
28
21
29
22
30
23
Figure 4E-8A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing
4E-8D
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-8B. Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled
4E-8-1.5
a.
O-Type Components Preparation.
Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly to Otter.
(1)
Engage port sweep wire drum.
(2)
Attach 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain, with long link in the middle between sweep wire and a
60-foot (LHL) otter pendant, using 5/8-inch shackles. Five interlocking 5/8-inch shackles
may be used in lieu of chain. Reel in on port sweep wire drum.
(3)
Lead 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave; then through
sweep wire roller chock assembly.
(4)
Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between the otter bridle and 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant
(Figure 4E-8C).
(5)
Connect float pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle.
4E-8E
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-8C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration)
b.
4E-8-1.6
Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position.
(1)
Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter.
(2)
Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle
is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4E-8D).
(3)
Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and
secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion.
(4)
Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane
whip.
(5)
Rotate crane forward.
(6)
Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.
Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation.
a.
Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented
sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block
padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4E-8E).
b.
Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure
block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using
5/8-inch shackles.
4E-8F
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-8D. Otter in Ready Release Position
4E-8-1.7
a.
4E-8-1.8
Electrode Floats.
Splice 5-foot (21-thread) pendant to both ends of each float.
K-4 Electrode Preparation.
To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewed in a canvas
chafing sleeve.
a.
4E-8-1.9
a.
Prepare K-4 electrode in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-6.
Long Leg Preparation.
Lead a K-4 electrode to the outboard end of the S-Cable.
4E-8G
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-8E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly
b.
c.
4E-8H
Insulate S/K-4 connection and fitting as follows:
(1)
Place inboard end of long leg K-4 electrode in vicinity of the S-Cable connection.
(2)
Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.
(3)
Connect the long leg K-4 electrode to the outboard S-Cable using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x
1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers.
Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
(4)
Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Apply two
layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape, continuing tape several inches past the
connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
Heave in on magnetic reel, stacking K-4 electrode until outboard end is clear to work on, and
positioned for streaming.
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
d.
Install a lamitex lug to the long leg electrode using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch cap screws,
two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.
e.
Tape outboard electrode terminal lug with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black plastic tape and two layers of
half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion (Figure
4E-8F).
f.
Attach a 1-inch shackle, pin inboard, at one end of roller block pendant. Connect roller block
pendant to quarter roller block using a 5/8-inch shackle.
g.
Connect quarter roller block and pendant to lamitex lug using a 7/8-inch shackle.
4E-8-2
LAUNCHING/STREAMING.
NOTE
Sweep gear for this configuration is streamed to port.
4E-8-2.1
Streaming Preparations.
a.
Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.
b.
Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.
c.
Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.
d.
Request permission to stream gear.
4E-8-2.2
Launching/Streaming Float and Acoustic Device TB-27.
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify
that the photo cell is working.
a.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.
b.
Pass nose line through chock and tend around mooring bitts. Heave in to remove slack from
nose line.
c.
Hoist cradled float and acoustic device TB-27 simultaneously, training gear outboard to position
gear for launch. Ensure nose line and APC are clear of all deck obstructions (Figure 4E-8G,
View A).
d.
Lower cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 into water. Slack nose line to permit float to ride
astern.
e.
Continue to lower Acoustic Device TB-27 until it is supported by float. Move the crane head until
inboard and continue to pay out the inhaul pendant until it can be disconnected from the crane
whip. Disconnect inhaul pendant.
f.
Bring inhaul pendant aboard through the roller chock assembly. Attach inhaul pendant to towing
stocking at 50-foot mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through one eye of towing
stocking.
g.
Slack off on nose line until gear is being towed by APC (Figure 4E-8G, View B).
h.
Bring nose line through the roller chock assembly. Attach nose line to towing stocking at 50-foot
mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through from eye of towing stocking.
4E-8J
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-8F. Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Diversion Chain
APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of
cable on the drum.
i.
Pay out APC until hardeye of diversion towing stocking at first red mark (645 feet) is forward of
cable roller chock assembly.
j.
Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.
4E-8-2.3
Launching/Streaming O-Type Gear.
a.
Ensure ship’s speed is 4 knots.
b.
Request permission to put gear to the rail.
c.
Ensure that nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-8H).
d.
Lead float nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock.
e.
Tend line to bitt.
4E-8K
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-8G. Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB 27
4E-8L
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-8H. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)
4E-8M
OPERATION
f.
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, train outboard to position float
at rail.
NOTE
Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify
that the photo cell is working.
g.
Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.
h.
Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and that float pendant and line are clear of
ship and obstructions.
i.
Connect float pendant(s), if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the
outboard corner of otter.
j.
Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE.
k.
Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook
securing otter (Figure 4E-8D). Launch float and slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.
4E-8-2.4
Tripping the Otter.
a.
Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes strain.
b.
Pay out sweep wire under power until long link of 6-foot chain is just outboard of sweep wire
roller chock.
c.
Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until
the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope) and check for proper diversion.
d.
Return and restow articulated stern crane.
e.
Increase speed as required to assist in streaming gear.
4E-8-2.5
Streaming of Outboard (Long Leg) Electrode.
a.
Lead long leg electrode (with a 3-foot pendant and quarter roller block attached) out through
level wind assembly then cable roller chock assembly.
b.
Mount quarter roller block on sweep wire and mouse quarter roller block pin.
c.
Ensure K-4 electrode terminal lug is properly taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber
self-vulcanizing insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers
of half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
d.
Pay out long leg to 50 feet.
4E-8-2.6
Attachment of Electrode Floats.
a.
Attach first electrode float (Figure 4E-8J)
b.
Pay out electrode.
c.
Continue paying out and attach four more floats 7 feet apart (Figure 4E-8K).
d.
Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float.
4E-8-2.7
a.
S/K-4 Connector Inspection.
Continue paying out long leg electrode until S/K-4 connector is forward of cable roller chock
assembly.
4E-8N
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-8J. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode
b.
Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing
insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction
tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed
metal is covered to reduce corrosion.
c.
Increase ship speed as required to enhance magnetic cable streaming.
d.
Pay out S-Cable to form catenary before veering sweep wire.
e.
Disengage sweep wire drum. Veer sweep wire using hydraulic brake.
f.
Simultaneously, veer sweep wire and pay out magnetic cable maintaining catenary.
g.
Keep otter working by veering sweep wire slowly. The magnetic tail should pay out to a longer
length than the sweep wire so quarter roller block rides at the diversion point on the sweep wire.
h.
Continue streaming S-Cable until outboard end of short leg electrode is forward of cable roller
chock assembly.
i.
Remove lashing securing short leg electrode to S-Cable.
4E-8-2.8
Diversion Stocking Attachment to Sweep Wire.
a.
Place two wedge stops (Figure 4E-8L) back-to-nose at the one red band (360 feet) on sweep
wire (Figure 4E-8M).
b.
Holding the magnetic gear, veer sweep wire until two red bands (390 feet) are just inboard of
sweep wire roller chock assembly.
c.
Using a 3/4-inch shackle, attach one end of a 7-foot diversion towing pendant to hardeye of
diversion towing stocking first red mark (645 feet) on APC.
d.
Simultaneously, place two wedge stops (Figure 4E-8L) back-to-nose on sweep wire at the two
red bands (390 feet).
e.
Attach 7-foot diversion towing pendant to an open 11-inch, type L block using a 3/4-inch shackle
(Figure 4E-8N, View A).
f.
Attach 11-inch, type L block to sweep wire forward of the one red band (360 feet), ensuring the
diversion towing pendant passes under the S-Cable (Figure 4E-8N, View A).
4E-8P
Figure 4E-8K. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
4E-8Q
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
OPERATION
Figure 4E-8L. Wedge Stop Placement
4E-8R
OPERATION
SW570-F0-MMO-A70
Figure 4E-8M